Version 1.

5
FATEK FvDesigner Total
Item number Date 6/15/2020
Manual number 794
of pages

FATEK FvDesigner Manual

FATEK

The manual’s contents will change when the

software updates. To find the newest
version of the manual, go to
http://www.fatek.com/en/download.php?ac
t=list&cid=13. The download is located
under the support section.

0
 Table of Contents
Table of Contents ...................................................................................................................... 1

List of Tables ............................................................................................................................ 22

List of Figures........................................................................................................................... 31

1. FATEK FvDesigner Manual ............................................................................................... 46

2. Window Configuration .................................................................................................... 52

2.1 File Tags ......................................................................................................... 52

2.1.1 File ................................................................................................................. 52

2.2 Ribbon ........................................................................................................... 54

2.2.1 Design(D) ....................................................................................................... 58

2.2.1.1 Clipboard .............................................................................. 58

2.2.1.2 Screen................................................................................... 59
2.2.1.3 Basic Setting ......................................................................... 59
2.2.1.4 Font ...................................................................................... 60
2.2.1.5 Text Alignment ..................................................................... 60
2.2.1.6 Theme .................................................................................. 60
2.2.1.7 Format .................................................................................. 61
2.2.1.8 Objects ................................................................................. 63
2.2.2 Project(P) ....................................................................................................... 63

2.2.2.1 Compile ................................................................................ 63

2.2.2.2 Decompile ............................................................................ 64
2.2.2.3 Upload & Download ............................................................. 65
2.2.2.4 Make USB Flash Drive Update File ....................................... 65
2.2.2.5 USB Dongle Setting .............................................................. 69
2.2.2.6 HMI detects USB Drive plugged in ....................................... 70
2.2.2.7 Simulation ............................................................................ 70
2.2.3 Insert(I) .......................................................................................................... 71

2.2.4 View(V) .......................................................................................................... 71

2.2.5 Tools(T) .......................................................................................................... 72

2.3 Shortcuts ....................................................................................................... 73

2.4 Interface Appearance Options ...................................................................... 73

2.5 Status Bar ...................................................................................................... 74

2.6 Quicklaunch Toolbar ..................................................................................... 76

1
 2.7 System/Project Windows .............................................................................. 78

2.7.1 Screen List ..................................................................................................... 78

2.7.2 Screen Properties .......................................................................................... 82

2.7.3 Project Explorer ............................................................................................. 85

2.7.4 Memory Address ........................................................................................... 87

2.7.5 Output Message ............................................................................................ 88

2.8 Object/Library Windows ............................................................................... 88

2.8.1 Object List ...................................................................................................... 88

2.8.2 Toolbox .......................................................................................................... 89

2.8.3 User Toolbox ................................................................................................. 90

2.9 Object/Library Windows ............................................................................... 91

2.9.1 Screen Edit Window ...................................................................................... 91

2.9.2 Function Settings Window ............................................................................ 92

3. System ............................................................................................................................. 93

3.1 Project Information ....................................................................................... 93

3.2 Unit Setting.................................................................................................... 96

3.3 Link .............................................................................................................. 109

3.3.1 PLC Device ................................................................................................... 109

3.3.1.1 PLC Address Setting............................................................ 116

3.3.2 Printer.......................................................................................................... 119

3.3.2.1 Argox PPLB tutorial ............................................................ 120

3.3.3 Video Input .................................................................................................. 123

3.3.4 USB Barcode Scanner .................................................................................. 126

4. Servers ........................................................................................................................... 128

4.1 【FTP Server】 ............................................................................................ 128

4.1.1 Deploying FTP Server using System Settings of HMI ................................... 128

4.1.2 Deploying FTP Server using Project Settings ............................................... 129

2
 4.1.3 FTP Server Example ..................................................................................... 130

4.2 【VNC Server】........................................................................................... 130

4.2.1 Deploying VNC Server using System Settings of HMI.................................. 131

4.2.2 Deploying VNC Server using Project Settings .............................................. 132

4.2.3 VNC Server Example .................................................................................... 132

4.3 【SMTP】.................................................................................................... 134

4.3.1 【SMTP】setting......................................................................................... 134

4.3.2 【SMTP】setting example .......................................................................... 137

5. Security .......................................................................................................................... 140

5.1 【Security】Settings ................................................................................... 140

5.1.1 【Security】Basic Settings .......................................................................... 140

5.1.2 【Security】Advanced Settings .................................................................. 143

5.2 Security Settings of Objects......................................................................... 149

5.3 Exporting/Importing CSV Files..................................................................... 151

5.4 Security Features of the Function Switch.................................................... 152

5.4.1 【Log In】and【Log Out】Function Switch ............................................... 152

5.4.2 【Password Manager】Function Switch .................................................... 153

5.4.3 【Import User Accounts】Function Switch ................................................ 154

5.5 Security Features in Screen Properties ....................................................... 155

5.5.1 Screen Properties Security Level ................................................................. 155

5.5.2 Change Screen Button Change User Level .................................................. 156

3
 5.6 Installment .................................................................................................. 156

5.6.1 Installment Basic Settings............................................................................ 157

5.6.2 Installment Advanced Setting ..................................................................... 159

5.6.3 Installment Related Function Switch........................................................... 163

5.6.3.1 【Installment: Enter Installment Password】Function ..... 163

5.6.3.2 【Installment: Modify Installment】................................. 164
6. System Message ............................................................................................................ 166

6.1 【System Message】Settings ..................................................................... 166

6.2 【System Message】Applications .............................................................. 170

6.2.1 Single Language Project and Using the System Messages .......................... 170

6.2.2 Single Language Project and Using Custom System Messages ................... 171

6.2.3 Single Language Project and Using Only Custom System Messages........... 171

6.2.4 Multiple Language Project and Using the Default System Messages ......... 172

7. Data Log ......................................................................................................................... 175

7.1 Data Log List ................................................................................................ 175

7.2 Data Log Group Settings .............................................................................. 175

7.2.1 【Setting】 ................................................................................................. 176

7.2.2 【Logging Address List】 ............................................................................ 179

7.2.3 【Export Data】 .......................................................................................... 180

7.2.4 【Print Data】............................................................................................. 186

7.2.4.1 【Print Data】Header and Footer【Setting】 ................. 188

7.3 Data Log Related Objects ............................................................................ 191

8. Alarm ............................................................................................................................. 193

8.1 Alarm List ..................................................................................................... 193

4
 8.2 Alarm Setting ............................................................................................... 194

8.2.1 【Setting】 ................................................................................................. 194

8.2.2 【Advanced Setting】................................................................................. 197

8.2.3 【Send Email Setting】 ............................................................................... 201

8.2.4 【Export Data】 .......................................................................................... 203

8.3 Alarm Application Example ......................................................................... 206

8.3.1 Send Email when Alarm Occurs................................................................... 206

8.4 Alarm Related Objects ................................................................................. 210

9. Recipe ............................................................................................................................ 211

9.1 Recipe Data Flow ......................................................................................... 211

9.2 Recipe Settings ............................................................................................ 212

9.2.1 【General】 ................................................................................................ 213

9.2.2 【Advanced】 ............................................................................................. 217

9.2.3 【Recipe File List】 ..................................................................................... 223

9.3 【Recipe Editor】 ....................................................................................... 224

9.4 【Recipe Table】 ........................................................................................ 225

9.5 【Recipe Selector】 .................................................................................... 228

9.6 【Function Switch】 ................................................................................... 229

9.7 Example ....................................................................................................... 231

10. Operation Log .............................................................................................. 237

5
 10.1 【Operation Log】Settings ......................................................................... 237

10.2 【Operation Log】Settings of Objects........................................................ 240

10.3 Introduction to the Operation Log CSV File ................................................ 241

11. Schedule ...................................................................................................... 243

11.1 Schedule List ................................................................................................ 243

11.2 Schedule Settings ........................................................................................ 243

11.3 Examples...................................................................................................... 251

12. Data Transfer ............................................................................................... 254

12.1 Data Transfer List (Data to Data Mode) ...................................................... 254

12.2 Data Transfer Settings (Data to Data Mode) ............................................... 254

12.3 Data Transfer List (CSV to Data Mode)........................................................ 256

12.4 Data Transfer Settings (CSV to Data Mode) ................................................ 257

13. Script............................................................................................................ 260

13.1 When to execute scripts.............................................................................. 260

13.2 Script Syntax ................................................................................................ 260

13.2.1 Registers ...................................................................................................... 260

13.2.2 Constants ..................................................................................................... 262

13.2.3 Comments ................................................................................................... 262

13.2.4 Assignment Operators................................................................................. 263

13.2.5 Unary Operators .......................................................................................... 264

13.2.6 Binary Operators ......................................................................................... 264

13.2.7 Logical Statements ...................................................................................... 265

13.2.8 Iterative Statements .................................................................................... 267

13.2.9 Built-in Functions......................................................................................... 269

13.2.10 Custom Functions ........................................................................................ 272

13.3 Using Scripts ................................................................................................ 273

6
 13.3.1 Script List ..................................................................................................... 274

13.3.2 Script Editor ................................................................................................. 275

13.4 Examples...................................................................................................... 280

13.4.1 Scrolling Lamp ............................................................................................. 280

13.4.2 Load Balance ............................................................................................... 282

14. MQTT ........................................................................................................... 286

14.1 Server Settings............................................................................................. 286

14.2 Topic Settings .............................................................................................. 289

14.2.1 【Topic Publish】 ....................................................................................... 290

14.2.2 【Topic Subscribe】.................................................................................... 293

14.3 Address Setting............................................................................................ 295

14.4 Tool .............................................................................................................. 298

14.4.1 Select server (Broker) .................................................................................. 298

14.4.2 Client-Side Application ................................................................................ 298

15. Resource ...................................................................................................... 299

15.1 【Image Library】 ....................................................................................... 299

15.1.1 Image Library Settings ................................................................................. 299

15.1.2 Image Library Usage Method ...................................................................... 300

15.1.2.1 Image Selector ........................................................... 301

15.1.2.2 Image Library Selection Window ............................... 301

15.2 【Audio Library】 ....................................................................................... 301

15.2.1 Audio Library Settings ................................................................................. 301

15.2.2 Audio Library Usage Method....................................................................... 303

15.2.2.1 Audio Selector ............................................................ 303

15.2.2.2 Audio Library Selection Window................................ 303

15.3 【Tag Library】 ........................................................................................... 304

7
 15.3.1 Tag Library Settings ..................................................................................... 304

15.3.2 Tag Library Usage ........................................................................................ 306

15.4 【Text Library】 .......................................................................................... 307

15.4.1 Text Library Settings .................................................................................... 307

15.4.2 Text Library Usage Method ......................................................................... 309

15.5 【Font Library】 ......................................................................................... 310

15.5.1 Font Library Settings.................................................................................... 310

16. Objects......................................................................................................... 313

16.1 Introduction to Draw Objects...................................................................... 318

16.2 Draw Object Properties Dialog .................................................................... 319

16.2.1 【Dot】 ....................................................................................................... 319

16.2.1.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 319

16.2.1.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 320

16.2.2 【Line】 ...................................................................................................... 321

16.2.2.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 321

16.2.2.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 323

16.2.3 【Polyline】 ................................................................................................ 324

16.2.3.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 324

16.2.3.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 326

16.2.4 【Rectangle】 ............................................................................................. 327

16.2.4.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 327

16.2.4.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 328

16.2.5 【Polygon】 ................................................................................................ 329

16.2.5.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 329

8
 16.2.5.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 330

16.2.6 【Ellipse】................................................................................................... 332

16.2.6.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 332

16.2.6.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 333

16.2.7 【Arc】 ....................................................................................................... 334

16.2.7.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 334

16.2.7.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 335

16.2.8 【Pie】 ........................................................................................................ 336

16.2.8.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 336

16.2.8.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 337

16.2.9 【Table】 .................................................................................................... 339

16.2.9.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 339

16.2.9.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 341

16.2.10 【Text】 ...................................................................................................... 342

16.2.10.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 342

16.2.10.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 344

16.2.11 【Image】 ................................................................................................... 345

16.2.11.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 345

16.2.11.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 347

16.2.12 【Scale】..................................................................................................... 348

16.2.12.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 348

16.2.12.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 351

16.2.13 【Pipeline】 ................................................................................................ 352

16.2.13.1 【General】 ............................................................... 352

16.2.13.2 【Pipe Item】 ............................................................ 355

9
 16.2.13.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 357
16.2.13.4 Pipeline Pipe Add or Delete ....................................... 358
16.3 Base Object Properties Dialog ..................................................................... 360

16.3.1 【Lamp】 .................................................................................................... 360

16.3.1.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 360

16.3.1.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 364
16.3.1.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 366
16.3.1.4 【External Lable】 ..................................................... 368

16.3.2 【Switch】 .................................................................................................. 369

16.3.2.1 【Bit Switch】............................................................ 369

16.3.2.2 【Word Switch】 ....................................................... 375
16.3.2.3 【Change Screen】.................................................... 380
16.3.2.4 【Function Switch】 .................................................. 382
16.3.2.5 【Display】 ................................................................ 392
16.3.2.6 【Operation】 ........................................................... 396
16.3.2.7 【External Lable】 ..................................................... 398

16.3.3 【Numeric Input/Display】 ........................................................................ 400

16.3.3.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 400

16.3.3.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 405
16.3.3.3 【Alarm】 .................................................................. 408
16.3.3.4 【Operation】 ........................................................... 409
16.3.3.5 【External Lable】 ..................................................... 412

16.3.4 【Text Input/Display】 ............................................................................... 414

16.3.4.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 414

16.3.4.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 418
16.3.4.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 420
16.3.4.4 【External Lable】 ..................................................... 423

16.3.5 【Date/Time Display】 ............................................................................... 425

10
 16.3.5.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 425
16.3.5.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 426
16.3.5.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 428

16.3.6 【Window Screen Display】 ....................................................................... 429

16.3.6.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 429

16.3.6.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 430

16.3.7 【Meter】 ................................................................................................... 431

16.3.7.1 【General】 ............................................................... 431

16.3.7.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 434
16.3.7.3 【Scale】 ................................................................... 436
16.3.7.4 【Range】 ................................................................. 437
16.3.7.5 【Operation】 ........................................................... 438

16.3.8 【Linear Meter】 ........................................................................................ 439

16.3.8.1 【General】 ............................................................... 439

16.3.8.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 442
16.3.8.3 【Scale】 ................................................................... 443
16.3.8.4 【Range】 ................................................................. 445
16.3.8.5 【Operation】 ........................................................... 446

16.3.9 【Data Block Graph】 ................................................................................. 447

16.3.9.1 【General】 ............................................................... 447

16.3.9.2 【Curve】 .................................................................. 449
16.3.9.3 【Advanced Curve】 ................................................. 452
16.3.9.4 【Display】 ................................................................ 453
16.3.9.5 【Axis】 ..................................................................... 455
16.3.9.6 【Advanced】............................................................ 456
16.3.9.7 【Sub Switch】 .......................................................... 459
16.3.9.8 【Operation】 ........................................................... 463

16.3.10 【Data Block XY Scatter】 .......................................................................... 464

11
 16.3.10.1 【General】 ............................................................... 465
16.3.10.2 【Curve】 .................................................................. 466
16.3.10.3 【Display】 ................................................................ 469
16.3.10.4 【Axis】 ..................................................................... 471
16.3.10.5 【Advanced】............................................................ 472
16.3.10.6 【Sub Switch】 .......................................................... 476
16.3.10.7 【Operation】 ........................................................... 479

16.3.11 【Multistate Switch】 ................................................................................ 481

16.3.11.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 481

16.3.11.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 483
16.3.11.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 485
16.3.11.4 【External Lable】 ..................................................... 488

16.3.12 【Slide Switch】.......................................................................................... 490

16.3.12.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 490

16.3.12.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 491
16.3.12.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 492
16.3.12.4 【External Lable】 ..................................................... 495

16.3.13 【Selector List】 ......................................................................................... 496

16.3.13.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 496

16.3.13.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 499
16.3.13.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 501
16.3.13.4 【External Lable】 ..................................................... 504

16.3.14 【Radio Button】........................................................................................ 505

16.3.14.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 506

16.3.14.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 507
16.3.14.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 509
16.3.14.4 【External Lable】 ..................................................... 512

16.3.15 【Input Display】 ........................................................................................ 513

12
 16.3.16 【Key】 ....................................................................................................... 515

16.3.16.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 515

16.3.16.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 517
16.3.16.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 519

16.3.17 【Limit Value Display】 .............................................................................. 520

16.3.18 【Animated Graphic】................................................................................ 522

16.3.18.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 522

16.3.18.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 526
16.3.18.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 529

16.3.19 【Rotation Indicator】 ............................................................................... 530

16.3.19.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 530

16.3.19.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 534

16.3.20 【Gif Display】............................................................................................ 535

16.3.20.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 535

16.3.20.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 537

16.3.21 【Historic Trend】 ...................................................................................... 538

16.3.21.1 【General】 ............................................................... 538

16.3.21.2 【Curve】 .................................................................. 540
16.3.21.3 【Advanced Curve】 ................................................. 543
16.3.21.4 【Display】 ................................................................ 545
16.3.21.5 【Axis】 ..................................................................... 546
16.3.21.6 【Advanced】............................................................ 548
16.3.21.7 【Sub Switch】 .......................................................... 552
16.3.21.8 【Operation】 ........................................................... 556

16.3.22 【Historic XY Scatter】 ............................................................................... 557

16.3.22.1 【General】 ............................................................... 557

13
 16.3.22.2 【Curve】 .................................................................. 558
16.3.22.3 【Display】 ................................................................ 560
16.3.22.4 【Axis】 ..................................................................... 562
16.3.22.5 【Advanced】............................................................ 563
16.3.22.6 【Sub Switch】 .......................................................... 567
16.3.22.7 【Operation】 ........................................................... 571

16.3.23 【Historic Data Table】 .............................................................................. 572

16.3.23.1 【General】 ............................................................... 572

16.3.23.2 【Data Items】 .......................................................... 575
16.3.23.3 【Sub Switch】 .......................................................... 577
16.3.23.4 【Operation】 ........................................................... 582

16.3.24 【Historic Data Selector】 .......................................................................... 583

16.3.24.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 583

16.3.24.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 585
16.3.24.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 586

16.3.25 【Alarm Display】....................................................................................... 589

16.3.25.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 589

16.3.25.2 【Header】................................................................ 592
16.3.25.3 【Display】 ................................................................ 593
16.3.25.4 【Sub Switch】 .......................................................... 595
16.3.25.5 【Operation】 ........................................................... 599

16.3.26 【Alarm Scrolling Text】............................................................................. 600

16.3.26.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 600

16.3.26.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 603
16.3.26.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 604

16.3.27 【Alarm Data Selector】............................................................................. 605

16.3.27.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 605

16.3.27.2 【Display】 ................................................................ 607

14
 16.3.27.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 608

16.3.28 【Recipe Selector】 .................................................................................... 610

16.3.28.1 【General】 ............................................................... 610

16.3.28.2 【Advanced】............................................................ 611
16.3.28.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 613

16.3.29 【Recipe Table】 ........................................................................................ 615

16.3.29.1 【General】 ............................................................... 615

16.3.29.2 【Data Item】............................................................ 619
16.3.29.3 【Sub Switch】 .......................................................... 619
16.3.29.4 【Operation】 ........................................................... 623

16.3.30 【Operation Viewer】 ................................................................................ 625

16.3.30.1 【General】 ............................................................... 625

16.3.30.2 【Content】............................................................... 627
16.3.30.3 【Sub Switch】 .......................................................... 629
16.3.30.4 【Operation】 ........................................................... 632

16.3.31 【Schedule Setting Table】 ........................................................................ 633

16.3.31.1 【General】 ............................................................... 634

16.3.31.2 【Header】................................................................ 635
16.3.31.3 【Operation】 ........................................................... 636

16.3.32 【Video Input Display】 ............................................................................. 638

16.3.32.1 【Setting】 ................................................................ 638

16.3.32.2 【Operation】 ........................................................... 639
17. User Toolbox ............................................................................................... 641

17.1 Basic Operations.......................................................................................... 641

17.1.1 Adding objects to the User Toolbox ............................................................ 642

17.1.2 Adding the objects in User Toolbox to the Work Space.............................. 643

17.1.3 Menu Introduction ...................................................................................... 644

15
 17.2 Import and Export ....................................................................................... 646

17.2.1 Import .......................................................................................................... 646

17.2.2 Export .......................................................................................................... 647

17.3 Name Conflicts ............................................................................................ 648

17.3.1 Category Name Conflict .............................................................................. 648

17.3.2 Object Name Conflict .................................................................................. 649

18. Build Running Package and Simulation ....................................................... 651

18.1 【Download Current Project】................................................................... 651

18.1.1 Downloading the running package and operating system from a PC ......... 651

18.1.2 Write System Setting ................................................................................... 656

18.1.2.1 【Basic】 ................................................................... 656

18.1.2.2 【System】 ................................................................ 657
18.1.2.3 【Ethernet】 ............................................................. 658
18.1.2.4 【Sever】................................................................... 659
18.1.2.5 【Display】 ................................................................ 661
18.1.2.6 【Time】 ................................................................... 662
18.1.2.7 【MISC】 ................................................................... 663
18.1.3 Download Security ...................................................................................... 664

18.2 【Upload】 ................................................................................................. 664

18.2.1 Uploading running package to a computer from the HMI .......................... 664

18.2.2 Upload Security ........................................................................................... 666

18.3 【Make USB Update File】 ......................................................................... 666

18.3.1 Make USB Update File from PC ................................................................... 666

18.4 【Compile】................................................................................................ 669

18.4.1 Compile Introduction .................................................................................. 669

18.4.2 Start compiling running packages ............................................................... 669

16
 18.4.3 Ending compile and error check .................................................................. 670

18.4.4 Decompile.................................................................................................... 671

18.5 【Simulation】............................................................................................ 672

18.5.1 Simulation Introduction .............................................................................. 672

18.5.2 Starting Simulation ...................................................................................... 673

18.5.3 Offline Simulation........................................................................................ 673

18.5.4 Online Simulation ........................................................................................ 674

19. Tool .............................................................................................................. 675

19.1 【File Transfer】 ......................................................................................... 675

19.2 【Pass Through】 ....................................................................................... 679

19.2.1 Setting Pass Through ................................................................................... 680

19.2.2 Pass Through Example................................................................................. 683

19.3 【PLC Resource Review】........................................................................... 686

19.3.1 Usage Methods ........................................................................................... 686

19.4 【Remote System Setting】 ....................................................................... 688

19.4.1 Usage Method ............................................................................................. 688

19.5 【FATEK PLC Transfer Encrypt Tool】 ........................................................ 689

19.6 【FBF Reader】........................................................................................... 689

19.7 【Install USB Driver】 ................................................................................. 692

19.8 【Download】 ............................................................................................ 692

19.9 【iAccess】 ................................................................................................. 693

17
20. Address Registers ........................................................................................ 695

20.1 Internal Address Register Range ................................................................. 695

20.2 Index Register .............................................................................................. 696

20.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................... 696

20.3 Special System Tags ..................................................................................... 698

20.3.1 Operations ................................................................................................... 698

20.3.2 Save File ....................................................................................................... 699

20.3.3 Time ............................................................................................................. 699

20.3.4 Touch Control Positions .............................................................................. 700

20.3.5 Network Information................................................................................... 700

20.3.6 Index Registers (16Bit) ................................................................................ 701

20.3.7 Index Registers (32Bit) ................................................................................ 702

20.3.8 Communication Parameter Settings ........................................................... 704

20.3.9 VNC Information.......................................................................................... 708

21. System Settings ........................................................................................... 710

21.1 System Setting ............................................................................................. 710

21.1.1 Run Project .................................................................................................. 710

21.1.2 【COM Port】 ............................................................................................. 711

21.1.3 【Ethernet】 ............................................................................................... 711

21.1.3.1 【General】 ............................................................... 712

21.1.3.2 【Access Control】 .................................................... 712

21.1.4 【Servers/IoT】 .......................................................................................... 713

21.1.4.1 【FTP】 ...................................................................... 714

21.1.4.2 【VNC】..................................................................... 714
21.1.4.3 【Pass Through】 ...................................................... 715
21.1.4.4 【IoT】 ...................................................................... 716

18
 21.1.5 【Link】 ...................................................................................................... 716

21.1.6 【Display】 ................................................................................................. 717

21.1.7 【Calibration】 ........................................................................................... 718

21.1.8 【Time】 ..................................................................................................... 719

21.1.9 【System Info】 .......................................................................................... 719

21.1.10 【MISC】 .................................................................................................... 721

21.1.10.1 【General】 ............................................................... 721

21.1.10.2 【Copy Project】 ....................................................... 722
21.1.10.3 【Update Project】 ................................................... 723
21.1.10.4 【Backup】 ................................................................ 723
21.1.10.5 【Reboot】 ................................................................ 724
21.2 System Booting Sequence ........................................................................... 725

22. HotKeys ....................................................................................................... 726

22.1 Project and File ............................................................................................ 726

22.2 Screen List ................................................................................................... 727

23. Modbus Gateway Server ............................................................................. 729

23.1 Modbus Gateway Server Settings ............................................................... 729

23.2 Modbus Gateway Server Applications ........................................................ 731

24. PLC Integration ............................................................................................ 734

24.1 Show Ladder Viewer.................................................................................... 734

24.1.1 【Show Ladder Viewer】Applications and Settings ................................... 735

24.1.2 HMI display the interface of PLC ladder diagram program ......................... 736

24.2 Update FATEK PLC Project From HMI or USB Flash Drive ........................... 740

19
 24.3 【FATEK PLC Transfer Encrypt Tool】 ........................................................ 742

24.3.1 【FATEK PLC Transfer Project Generator】................................................ 742

24.3.2 【Single Pass Password Generator】 ......................................................... 745

24.4 Show Ethernet Module Configuration ........................................................ 747

24.4.1 【Ethernet Module Configuration】Application and Settings ................... 747

24.4.2 General Settings of Ethernet Module ......................................................... 749

24.4.3 Password Setting Page of Ethernet Module................................................ 750

24.4.4 Access Control Setting Page of Ethernet Module ....................................... 750

24.4.5 External Severs Setting Page of Ethernet Module ...................................... 751

24.4.6 Service Port Setting Page of Ethernet Module............................................ 752

24.5 Control PLC run/stop from HMI .................................................................. 753

24.5.1 Setting the PLC run/stop function ............................................................... 753

24.5.2 PLC run/stop operation steps...................................................................... 754

25. User-defined Protocol ................................................................................. 755

25.1 【User-defined Protocol】Interface Description ....................................... 755

25.1.1 Main Operation Interface of Protocol Setting............................................. 757

25.1.2 Instruction Paging of Protocol Setting......................................................... 759

25.1.3 Send Data Paging of Protocol Setting.......................................................... 760

25.1.4 Return Paging of Protocol Setting ............................................................... 761

25.1.5 Checksum Paging of Protocol Setting.......................................................... 763

25.2 【User-defined Protocol】Application examples....................................... 767

25.3 【User-defined Protocol】use Script Application Example ....................... 775

25.3.1 Communication Instructions in Script ......................................................... 775

20
 25.3.2 Communication Instruction in Script Application Example......................... 776

26. Multi-Link .................................................................................................... 778

26.1 【Multi-Link】 Setting ............................................................................... 779

26.1.1 Serial ............................................................................................................ 779

26.1.1.1 Multi-Link Master(Serial) setting ............................... 779

26.1.1.2 Multi-Link Slave(Serial) Setting .................................. 780
26.1.2 Ethernet....................................................................................................... 781

26.1.2.1 Multi-Link Master(Ethernet) setting .......................... 782

26.1.2.2 Multi-Link Slave(Ethernet) setting ............................. 783
26.2 Operation Lock ............................................................................................ 784

26.2.1 Operation Lock Description ......................................................................... 784

26.3 Multi-Link Eaxmple ...................................................................................... 785

27. Search/Replace............................................................................................ 788

27.1 The Use of Search/Replace.......................................................................... 788

27.2 The Result of Search/Replace...................................................................... 790

28. Communication Error Codes ....................................................................... 792

29. Elimination of HMI Abnormal Conditions ................................................... 794

29.1 System Consistency Protection is Enabled .................................................. 794

21
 List of Tables
Table 1 Startup Screen Functions................................................................................. 48
Table 2 Create New Project Steps ................................................................................ 48
Table 3 File Options ...................................................................................................... 52
Table 4 Introduction to Ribbon User Interface Functions ............................................ 54
Table 5 Design–Clipboard............................................................................................. 58
Table 6 Design–Screen ................................................................................................. 59
Table 7 Design–Basic Setting ........................................................................................ 60
Table 8 Design–Theme ................................................................................................. 60
Table 9 Design–Format................................................................................................. 62
Table 10 Compilation Output Window Related Information ....................................... 64
Table 11 Make USB Flash Drive Update File................................................................. 66
Table 12 properties of making USB drive upgrade file ................................................ 66
Table 13 Interface Appearance Options....................................................................... 73
Table 14 Status bar ....................................................................................................... 74
Table 15 Quicklaunch Toolbar ...................................................................................... 76
Table 16 Screen List Management Settings ................................................................. 78
Table 17 Screen Properties Items ................................................................................ 83
Table 18 Project Explorer Items ................................................................................... 85
Table 19 Object List Functions ..................................................................................... 89
Table 20 Project Information ....................................................................................... 93
Table 21 Unit Setting .................................................................................................... 96
Table 22 Device Connection ....................................................................................... 109
Table 23 Link Property Settings .................................................................................. 110
Table 24 Access Address Settings............................................................................... 117
Table 25【Printer】Settings ...................................................................................... 119
Table 26【Video Input】property settings ............................................................... 123
Table 27【USB Barcode Scanner】property settings................................................ 127
Table 28 FTP Server Settings ...................................................................................... 129
Table 29 VNC Server Settings ..................................................................................... 131
Table 30【Sever】【SMTP】setting property ............................................................ 134
Table 31 Basic Setting Properties of【Security】...................................................... 140
Table 32 Advanced Setting Properties of【Security】 .............................................. 144
Table 33 The relevant control address required in the【Level】mode .................... 148
Table 34 The relevant control address required in the【User】mode ..................... 148
Table 35 Security Setting Properties of Objects ......................................................... 150
Table 36 Installment Attributes .................................................................................. 157
Table 37 【Installment】properties setting ............................................................. 160
Table 38【Operation Address】relevant control address required in【Static】mode
.................................................................................................................................... 163
Table 39【Modify Installment】 ............................................................................... 165

22
Table 40【System Message】Settings ...................................................................... 166
Table 41【Setting】Properties of【Data Log Group】 ............................................ 176
Table 42【Logging Address List】Setting Properties of【Data Log Group】 ........... 179
Table 43【Export Data】Setting Properties of【Data Log Group】 ........................ 181
Table 44【Data Log】【Export Data】【Settings】Property Settings ........................ 184
Table 45【Print Data】Setting Properties of【Data Log Group】 ........................... 186
Table 46【Export Data】Setting Properties of【Data Log Group】 ........................ 189
Table 47【Setting】Properties of【Alarm】 ............................................................ 194
Table 48【Advanced Setting】Properties of【Alarm】 ........................................... 198
Table 49【Advanced Setting】【Send Email】Properties of【Alarm】 ................... 201
Table 50【Export Data】Setting Properties of【Alarm】 ........................................ 203
Table 51【General】Properties of【Recipe】 ......................................................... 213
Table 52【Advanced】General Settings ................................................................... 217
Table 53【General】Properties of【Recipe】 ......................................................... 223
Table 54【Recipe Editor】Functions ......................................................................... 224
Table 55【Recipe Table】Functions .......................................................................... 226
Table 56【Recipe Selector】Functions ..................................................................... 228
Table 57【Function Switch】Recipe Functions ......................................................... 229
Table 58 Setting Properties of【Operation Log】 ..................................................... 237
Table 59 Object Setting Properties of【Operation Log】 ......................................... 241
Table 60【Schedule】Setting Properties .................................................................. 244
Table 61 Setting Properties of【Data Transfer】 ...................................................... 255
Table 62【CSV to Data Transfer Mode】Setting Properties ..................................... 257
Table 63 Script–Registers ........................................................................................... 260
Table 64 Script–Tag Library settings used in examples .............................................. 262
Table 65 Script–Constants .......................................................................................... 262
Table 66 Script–Comments ........................................................................................ 263
Table 67 Script–Assignment Operators ...................................................................... 263
Table 68 Script–Unary Operators ............................................................................... 264
Table 69 Script–Arithmetic Operators........................................................................ 264
Table 70 Script–Logical Operators.............................................................................. 265
Table 71 Script–Operator precedence ....................................................................... 265
Table 72 Logical Statement Syntaxes ......................................................................... 266
Table 73 Iterative Statement Syntax .......................................................................... 267
Table 74 Script Built–in Functions .............................................................................. 269
Table 75 Script–Custom function-related statements ............................................... 272
Table 76【Script List】- Descriptions ........................................................................ 274
23
Table 77 Script List–Descriptions of the buttons on the right side ............................ 274
Table 78 Script Editor–Function Block Description .................................................... 275
Table 79 Script Editor–Script Properties Descriptions ............................................... 279
Table 80【MQTT】【Broker】setting properties....................................................... 287
Table 81【MQTT】【Topic Publish】properties setting ............................................ 290
Table 82【MQTT】【Topic Subscribe】properties setting ........................................ 293
Table 83【MQTT】【Address】properties setting .................................................... 296
Table 84 Edit Window Setting Properties of the Image Library ................................. 299
Table 85 Edit Window Setting Properties of Audio Library ........................................ 302
Table 86 Edit Window Setting Properties of Tag Library ............................................ 305
Table 87 Edit Window Setting Properties of Text Library........................................... 308
Table 88【Font Library】Edit Properties ................................................................... 311
Table 89 Image Objects and Basic Object Library Categories .................................... 313
Table 90 Draw Object objects .................................................................................... 318
Table 91 Property settings for【Dot】 ...................................................................... 320
Table 92【Dot】【Operation】Settings ..................................................................... 321
Table 93 Property settings for【Line】 ..................................................................... 322
Table 94【Line】【Operation】Settings .................................................................... 323
Table 95 Property setting for【Polyline】 ................................................................. 324
Table 96【Polyline】【Operation】Settings .............................................................. 326
Table 97 Property setting for【Rectangular】 .......................................................... 327
Table 98【Rectangle】【Operation】Settings ........................................................... 328
Table 99 Property settings for【Polygon】 ............................................................... 330
Table 100【Polygon】【Operation】Settings ............................................................ 331
Table 101 Property settings for【Ellipse】................................................................ 332
Table 102【Ellipse】【Operation】Settings .............................................................. 333
Table 103 Property settings for【Arc】..................................................................... 334
Table 104【Arc】【Operation】Settings ................................................................... 335
Table 105 Property settings for【Pie】 ..................................................................... 337
Table 106【Pie】【Operation】Settings .................................................................... 338
Table 107 Property settings for【Table】 ................................................................. 339
Table 108【Table】【Operation】Settings ................................................................ 341
Table 109 Property settings for【Text】 ................................................................... 342
Table 110【Text】【Operation】Settings .................................................................. 344
Table 111 Property settings for【Image】 ................................................................ 345
Table 112【Image】【Operation】Settings ............................................................... 347
24
Table 113 Property Settings for【Scale】 ................................................................. 348
Table 114【Scale】【Operation】Settings ................................................................ 351
Table 115【General】Properties of【Pipeline】 ..................................................... 353
Table 116【Pipe Item】Properties of【Pipeline】 .................................................. 355
Table 117【Operation】Properties of【Pipeline】.................................................. 358
Table 118【Setting】Properties of【Lamp】 ........................................................... 360
Table 119【Display】Setting Properties of【Lamp】 .............................................. 364
Table 120【Operation】Setting Properties of【Lamp】 ......................................... 367
Table 121【Lamp】【External Lable】setting properties ......................................... 368
Table 122【Setting】Properties of【Bit Switch】.................................................... 370
Table 123【Setting】Properties of【Word Switch】 ............................................... 375
Table 124【Setting】Properties of【Change Screen】............................................ 381
Table 125【Setting】Properties of【Function Switch】 .......................................... 383
Table 126【Display】Setting Properties of【Switch】 ............................................ 393
Table 127【Operation】Setting Properties of【Switch】 ........................................ 396
Table 128【Switch】【External Lable】setting properties ........................................ 399
Table 129【Setting】Properties of【Numeric Input/Display】 ............................... 401
Table 130【Display】Setting Properties of【Numeric Input/Display】 .................. 405
Table 131【Alarm】Setting Properties of【Numeric Input/Display】 .................... 408
Table 132【Operation】Setting Properties of【Numeric Input/Display】 .............. 410
Table 133【Text Input/Display】【External Lable】setting properties ..................... 412
Table 134【Setting】Properties of【Text Input/Display】 ...................................... 414
Table 135【Display】Setting Properties of【Text Input/Display】 .......................... 419
Table 136【Operation】Setting Properties of【Text Input/Display】 ..................... 421
Table 137【Text Input/Display】【External Lable】setting properties ..................... 423
Table 138【Setting】Properties of【Date/Time Display】 ...................................... 425
Table 139【Display】Setting Properties of【Date/Time Display】 ......................... 426
Table 140【Operation】Setting Properties of【Date/Time Display】..................... 428
Table 141【Setting】Properties of【Window Screen Display】.............................. 429
Table 142【Operation】Setting Properties of【Window Screen Display】 ............ 431
Table 143【General】Setting Properties of【Meter】 ............................................ 432
Table 144【Display】Setting Properties of【Meter】 ............................................. 434
Table 145【Scale】Setting Properties of【Meter】 ................................................ 436

25
Table 146【Range】Setting Properties of【Meter】............................................... 437
Table 147【Operation】Setting Properties of【Meter】 ........................................ 438
Table 148【General】Setting Properties of【Linear Meter】 ................................. 440
Table 149【Display】Setting Properties of【Linear Meter】 .................................. 443
Table 150【Scale】Setting Screen of【Linear Meter】 ........................................... 444
Table 151【Range】Setting Properties of【Linear Meter】 .................................... 445
Table 152【Operation】Setting Properties of【Linear Meter】 ............................. 446
Table 153【General】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】 .......................... 447
Table 154【Curve】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】 ............................. 449
Table 155【Advanced Curve】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】 ............ 452
Table 156【Display】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】 ........................... 453
Table 157【Axis】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】 ................................ 455
Table 158【Advanced】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】 ....................... 457
Table 159【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】 ..................... 460
Table 160【Operation】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】 ...................... 464
Table 161【General】 Setting Properties of【Data Block XY Scatter】.................. 465
Table 162【Curve】Setting Properties of 【Data Block XY Scatter】 ..................... 467
Table 163【Display】Setting Properties of【Data Block XY Scatter】 ..................... 469
Table 164【Axis】Setting Properties of【Data Block XY Scatter】 .......................... 471
Table 165【Advanced】Setting Properties of【Data Block XY Scatter】 ................ 472
Table 166【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Data Block XY Scatter】 ............... 476
Table 167【Operation】Setting Properties of【Data Block XY Scatter】 ................ 480
Table 168【Setting】Properties of【Multistate Switch】 ....................................... 481
Table 169【Display】Setting Properties of【Multistate Switch】 ........................... 483
Table 170【Operation】Setting Properties of【Multistate Switch】 ...................... 486
Table 171【Multistate Switch】【External Lable】setting properties ...................... 488
Table 172【Setting】Properties of【Slide Switch】 ................................................ 490
Table 173【Display】Setting Properties of【Slide Switch】 .................................... 491
Table 174【Operation】Setting Properties of【Slide Switch】 ............................... 493
【External Lable】setting properties ............................... 495
Table 175【Slide Switch】
Table 176【Setting】Properties of【Selector List】 ................................................ 497
Table 177【Display】Setting Properties of【Selector List】.................................... 499
Table 178【Operation】Setting Properties of【Selector List】 ............................... 502

26
Table 179【Selector List】【External Lable】setting properties ............................... 504
Table 180【Radio Button】【Setting】setting properties......................................... 506
Table 181【Radio Button】【Display】setting properties ........................................ 508
Table 182【Radio Button】【Operation】setting properties.................................... 510
Table 183【Radio Button】【External Lable】setting properties ............................. 512
Table 184 Setting Properties of【Input Display】..................................................... 514
Table 185【Setting】Properties of【Key】 .............................................................. 516
Table 186【Display】Setting Properties of【Key】 ................................................. 517
Table 187【Operation】Setting Properties of【Key】............................................. 519
Table 188 Setting Properties of【Limit Value Display】 ........................................... 521
Table 189【Setting】Properties of【Animated Graphic】 ...................................... 523
Table 190【Display】Setting Properties of【Animated Graphic】 .......................... 527
Table 191【Operation】Setting Properties of【Animated Graphic】 ..................... 529
Table 192【Setting】Properties of【Rotation Indicator】 ...................................... 531
Table 193【Operation】Properties of【Rotation Indicator】 ................................. 535
Table 194【Setting】Properties of【GIF Display】 .................................................. 536
Table 195【Operation】Properties of【GIF Display】 ............................................. 537
Table 196【General】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】 ............................... 539
Table 197【Curve】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】 ................................... 541
Table 198【Advanced Curve】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】 .................. 544
Table 199【Display】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】................................. 545
Table 200【Axis】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】 ...................................... 547
Table 201【Advanced】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】 ............................ 549
Table 202【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】........................... 552
Table 203【Operation】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】 ............................ 556
Table 204【General】Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】 ........................ 557
Table 205【Curve】 Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】 .......................... 558
Table 206【Display】Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】.......................... 561
Table 207【Axis】Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】 ............................... 562
Table 208【Advanced】Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】 ..................... 564
Table 209【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】.................... 567
Table 210【Operation】Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】 ..................... 571
Table 211【General】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Table】........................ 573

27
Table 212【Data Items】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Table】 ................... 576
Table 213【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Table】 ................... 578
Table 214【Operation】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Table】 .................... 582
Table 215【General】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Selector】 ................... 584
Table 216【Display】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Selector】 .................... 586
Table 217【Operation】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Selector】 ............... 587
Table 218【Setting】Properties of【Alarm Display】 ............................................. 589
Table 219【Header】Setting Properties of【Alarm Display】................................. 593
Table 220【Display】Setting Properties of【Alarm Display】 ................................. 594
Table 221【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Alarm Display】 ........................... 595
Table 222【Operation】Setting Properties of【Alarm Display】 ............................ 599
Table 223【Setting】Properties of【Alarm Scrolling Text】 .................................... 601
Table 224【Display】Setting Properties of【Alarm Scrolling Text】 ....................... 603
Table 225【Operation】Setting Properties of【Alarm Scrolling Text】 .................. 604
Table 226【General】Setting Properties of【Alarm Data Table】 .......................... 605
Table 227【Display】Setting Properties of【Alarm Data Table】 ........................... 607
Table 228【Operation】Setting Properties of【Alarm Data Table】....................... 608
Table 229【General】Setting Properties of【Recipe Selector】 ............................. 611
Table 230【General】Setting Properties of【Recipe Selector】 ............................. 612
Table 231【Operation】Setting Properties of【Recipe Selector】 ......................... 613
Table 232【General】Setting Properties of【Recipe Table】 .................................. 615
Table 233【Data Item】Setting Properties of【Recipe Table】 .............................. 619
Table 234【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Recipe Table】 ............................. 620
Table 235【Operation】Setting Properties of【Recipe Table】 .............................. 623
Table 236【General】Setting Properties of【Operation Viewer】 ......................... 625
Table 237【Content】Setting Properties of【Operation Viewer】 ......................... 627
Table 238【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Operation Viewer】 .................... 629
Table 239【Operation】Setting Properties of【Operation Viewer】...................... 633
Table 240【Schedule Setting Table】【General】property setting ........................... 634
Table 241【Schedule Setting Table】【Header】property setting............................ 636
Table 242 【Schedule Setting Table】【Operation】property setting ..................... 637
Table 243【Video Input Display】【Setting】setting property ................................. 639
Table 244【Video Input Display】【Operation】property setting ............................ 639

28
Table 245 Options within the menu........................................................................... 645
Table 246 Category Name Conflict options................................................................ 649
Table 247 Object Name Conflict options ................................................................... 650
Table 248 Download Manager–related parameters .................................................. 652
Table 249 【System Setting Configure】【Basic】properties setting ...................... 656
Table 250 【System Setting Configure】【System】properties setting ................... 657
Table 251 【System Setting Configure】【Ethernet】properties setting................. 659
Table 252 【System Setting Configure】【Sever】properties setting ...................... 660
Table 253 【System Setting Configure】【Display】properties setting ................... 662
Table 254 【System Setting Configure】【Time】properties setting....................... 663
Table 255 【System Setting Configure】【MISC】properties setting ...................... 663
Table 256 Upload Manager-related parameters ........................................................ 665
Table 257 Make USB Update File function setting ..................................................... 667
Table 258 Decompile dialog window settings ............................................................ 672
Tabel 259【File Transfer】Button descriptions ........................................................ 675
Table 260【File Transfer】After Connecting ............................................................. 676
Table 261 Pass Through related parameters .............................................................. 681
Table 262 Introduction to internal single point and register information ................. 688
Tabel 263【FBF Reader】menu descriptions............................................................ 690
Tabel 264【FBF Reader】tool bar descriptions ........................................................ 691
Table 265 Internal Registers Address Range .............................................................. 696
Table 266【Ethernet】【General】paging options ................................................... 712
Table 267【Ethernet】【Access Control】paging options ........................................ 713
Table 268 Options of【Servers/IoT Setting】【FTP】to Enable FTP Server in the
Server page ................................................................................................................ 714
Table 269 Options of【Servers/IoT Setting】【VNC】to Enable VNC Server in the
Server page ................................................................................................................ 715
Table 270【Servers/IoT Setting】【Pass Through】paging ....................................... 716
Table 271【Servers/IoT Setting】【IoT】paging ....................................................... 716
Table 272【Link】setting page options..................................................................... 717
Table 273【Display】setting page options ............................................................... 718
Table 274【Time】setting page options ................................................................... 719
Table 275【System Info】setting page options ........................................................ 720
Table 276【MISC】【General】settings page options .............................................. 721
Table 277【MISC】【Copy Project】settings page options....................................... 722
Table 278【MISC】【Copy Project】settings page options....................................... 723
Table 279【MISC】【Backup】settings page options ............................................... 724
29
Table 280【HotKeys】related to Project and File ..................................................... 726
Table 281【HotKeys】related to【Screen List】...................................................... 727
Table 282【Address Mapping Table】Settings and Related Files and Shortcuts...... 730
Table 283 shows the attributes of the PLC ladder diagram interface on the HMI .... 736
Table 284【FATEK PLC Transfer Project Generator】properties setting ................... 743
Table 285【Single Pass Password Generator】properties setting ............................ 745
Table 286 properties of FATEK PLC ethernet configuration dialog ............................ 749
Table 287 properties of ethernet module settings .................................................... 749
Table 288 properties of password setting page of ethernet module ........................ 750
Table 289 properties of Access Setting Control page of ethernet module ................ 751
Table 290 properties of External Severs setting page of ethernet module ............... 752
Table 291 properties of service port setting page of ethernet module .................... 753
Table 292 properties of【User-defined Protocol】instruction list settings .............. 757
Table 293 properties of【User-defined Protocol】main operation interface settings
.................................................................................................................................... 758
Table 294 properties of【User-defined Protocol Setting】instruction paging setting
.................................................................................................................................... 759
Table 295 properties of【User-defined Protocol Setting】send data paging setting
.................................................................................................................................... 760
Table 296 properties of【User-defined Protocol Setting】return data paging setting
.................................................................................................................................... 762
Table 297 properties of【User-defined Protocol Setting】checksum paging setting
.................................................................................................................................... 764
Table 298 properties of communication instruction in script settings ...................... 775
Table 299 multi-link support number od slaves......................................................... 778
Table 300 properties of【Multi-Link Master(Serial)】 .............................................. 779
Table 301 properties of【Multi-Link Slave(Serial)】 ................................................. 781
Table 302 properties of【Multi-Link Master(Ethernet)】setting ............................. 782
Table 303 properties of【Multi-Link Slave(Ethernet)】setting ................................. 783
Table 304 properties of【Operation Lock】setting .................................................. 785
Table 305【Search/Replace】function properties setting........................................ 788
Table 306【Search/Replace】function properties setting........................................ 790
Table 307 description of the communication error code .......................................... 792

30
 List of Figures
Figure 1 Installation Welcoming Screen ....................................................................... 46
Figure 2 User Information ............................................................................................ 47
Figure 3 Select Software Installation Path ................................................................... 47
Figure 4 Confirmation Before Installation .................................................................... 47
Figure 5 Installation Complete ..................................................................................... 47
Figure 6 Startup Screen ................................................................................................ 48
Figure 7 Create New Project: Choose Product Type .................................................... 49
Figure 8 Create New Project: Choose Controller ......................................................... 50
Figure 9 Create New Project: Controller Connection Configuration ........................... 50
Figure 10 Create New Project: Select Location ............................................................ 51
Figure 11 FATEK FvDesigner Window Configuration .................................................... 52
Figure 12 Toolbar–File .................................................................................................. 52
Figure 13 Ribbon Illustration ........................................................................................ 54
Figure 14 Design ........................................................................................................... 58
Figure 15 Design–Clipboard ......................................................................................... 58
Figure 16 the right click pop-up menu ......................................................................... 58
Figure 17 Multi-Copy window ...................................................................................... 59
Figure 18 Design–Screen .............................................................................................. 59
Figure 19 Design–Basic Setting .................................................................................... 59
Figure 20 Design-Font .................................................................................................. 60
Figure 21 Design-Text Alignment ................................................................................. 60
Figure 22 Design–Theme ............................................................................................. 60
Figure 23 Design–Format ............................................................................................. 62
Figure 24 Design–Object .............................................................................................. 63
Figure 25 Project .......................................................................................................... 63
Figure 26 Creating Running Package ............................................................................ 63
Figure 27 Compilation Result Dialog ............................................................................ 64
Figure 28 Decompile .................................................................................................... 64
Figure 29 make USB drive update file .......................................................................... 66
Figure 30 Project Update Question Dialog .................................................................. 69
Figure 31 USB Update List ............................................................................................ 69
Figure 32 IGU Setting List ............................................................................................. 70
Figure 33 HMI detects USB Drive is plugged in ............................................................ 70
Figure 34 HMI detects USB Drive is removed .............................................................. 70
Figure 35 Offline Simulation ........................................................................................ 70
Figure 36 Online Simulation ......................................................................................... 71
Figure 37 Insert ............................................................................................................ 71
Figure 38 Window ........................................................................................................ 71
Figure 39 Configure Operating Window Position ........................................................ 72
Figure 40 Tools ............................................................................................................. 73
Figure 41 Shortcuts ...................................................................................................... 73
Figure 42 Interface Appearance Options ..................................................................... 73
Figure 43 Status Bar ..................................................................................................... 74
Figure 44 Quicklaunch Toolbar .................................................................................... 76
Figure 45 Screen List Interface ..................................................................................... 78

31
Figure 46 Management Menu ..................................................................................... 78
Figure 47 Base Screen Properties ................................................................................ 83
Figure 48 Window Screen Properties .......................................................................... 83
Figure 49 Keypad Screen Properties ............................................................................ 83
Figure 50 Memory Address Operation Interface ......................................................... 88
Figure 51 Output window ............................................................................................ 88
Figure 52 Object List .................................................................................................... 89
Figure 53 Toolbox Illustration ....................................................................................... 90
Figure 54 User Toolbox Illustration .............................................................................. 91
Figure 55 Work Space–Screen Edit .............................................................................. 92
Figure 56 Work Space–Function Settings .................................................................... 92
Figure 57 System .......................................................................................................... 93
Figure 58 Device Connection Setting–PLC Device ..................................................... 110
Figure 59 Link Properties ........................................................................................... 110
Figure 60 PLC address setting field ............................................................................ 117
Figure 61 PLC Input Address Setting Dialog ............................................................... 117
Figure 62【Printer】Settings Screen......................................................................... 119
Figure 63【Video Input】Setting Window ................................................................ 123
Figure 64【USB Barcode Scanner】Setting Window ................................................ 127
Figure 65 FTP Application Diagram ............................................................................ 128
Figure 66 FTP Servers Setting–HMI ............................................................................ 128
Figure 67 FTP Server Setting–Project ......................................................................... 129
Figure 68 Using FTP to view files stored in internal memory, SD, or USB ................. 130
Figure 69 VNC application illustration ....................................................................... 131
Figure 70 VNC Server Setting-HMI ............................................................................. 131
Figure 71 VNC Server Setting-Project ........................................................................ 132
Figure 72 VNC Viewer Connection Screen ................................................................. 133
Figure 73 VNC Viewer Password Confirmation Screen .............................................. 133
Figure 74 VNC Viewer remote monitor screen .......................................................... 133
Figure 75【Sever】【SMTP】setting paging ............................................................. 134
Figure 76 SMTP setting window................................................................................. 138
Figure 77 SMTP sever setting window ....................................................................... 138
Figure 78 SMTP sender information setting window ................................................ 138
Figure 79 SMTP contacts setting window .................................................................. 139
Figure 80 SMTP group setting window ...................................................................... 139
Figure 81 SMTP test successfully window ................................................................. 139
Figure 82 SMTP test letter send by FvDesigner ......................................................... 139
Figure 83 Basic Setting Screen for【Security】......................................................... 140
Figure 84 Advanced Setting Screen for【Security】【Level】................................... 144
Figure 85 Security Settings for Objects ...................................................................... 150
Figure 86 CSV File for【Level】 ................................................................................. 152
Figure 87 CSV File for【User】 .................................................................................. 152
Figure 88【User】Mode Login Window ................................................................... 153

32
Figure 89【User】Mode Login Window ................................................................... 153
Figure 90【Level】Mode Password Manager Window ............................................ 154
Figure 91【User】Mode Password Manager Window ............................................. 154
Figure 92 Import User Account Window ................................................................... 154
Figure 93 Import User Confirmation Window ........................................................... 155
Figure 94 Security Settings in Screen Properties ....................................................... 155
Figure 95 Security Settings in Change Screen Button ................................................ 156
Figure 96 Installment application illustration ............................................................ 156
Figure 97 Installment Settings.................................................................................... 157
Figure 98【Static】setting window of【Installment】【Advanced】 ...................... 160
Figure 99【Dynamic】setting window of【Installment】【Advanced】 ................. 160
Figure 100 Static【Installment】password input window........................................ 164
Figure 101 Dynamic【Installment】mode password input window ........................ 164
Figure 102【Modify Installment】Window .............................................................. 164
Figure 103【System Message】Settings Screen ....................................................... 166
Figure 104 System Messages for Project Using a Single Language ............................ 170
Figure 105 Confirmation Window.............................................................................. 170
Figure 106 Customizing the System Message ............................................................ 171
Figure 107 Modified Confirmation Window .............................................................. 171
Figure 108 The【Default Message Language】is set to English ............................... 172
Figure 109 Modified Confirmation Window .............................................................. 172
Figure 110 Exporting into Language0 ........................................................................ 173
Figure 111 Exporting into Language1 ........................................................................ 173
Figure 112 Export Confirmation Window .................................................................. 173
Figure 113 Exporting into Language2 ........................................................................ 174
Figure 114 Confirmation Windows for Each Language .............................................. 174
Figure 115【Data Log List】Screen ........................................................................... 175
Figure 116【Setting】of【Data Log Group】........................................................... 176
Figure 117【Logging Address List】Setting Screen of【Data Log Group】 ............. 179
Figure 118【Export Data】Setting Screen of【Data Log Group】 ........................... 181
【Export Data】【Settings】Properties Window ................. 184
Figure 119【Data Log】
Figure 120【Print Data】Setting Screen of【Data Log Group】.............................. 186
Figure 121【Print Data】 【Header/Footer】Setting Screen of【Data Log Group】
(Static mode) .............................................................................................................. 189
Figure 122【Print Data】 【Header/Footer】Setting Screen of【Data Log Group】
(Dynamic mode) ......................................................................................................... 189
Figure 123【Alarm List】Screen ............................................................................... 193
Figure 124【Setting】Screen of【Alarm】 .............................................................. 194

33
Figure 125【Advanced Setting】Property Setting Dialog of【Alarm】 ................... 198
Figure 126【Advanced Setting】【Send Email】Property Setting Dialog of【Alarm】
.................................................................................................................................... 201
Figure 127【Export Data】Setting Screen of【Alarm】 .......................................... 203
Figure 128【SMTP】Setting window ........................................................................ 206
Figure 129 Server Setting Window in SMTP Setting .................................................. 207
Figure 130 Sender Information setting in SMTP Setting ............................................ 207
Figure 131 SMTP contacts setting window ................................................................ 207
Figure 132 SMTP group setting window .................................................................... 207
Figure 133【Video Input】setting window............................................................... 208
Figure 134【Alarm】message editing ...................................................................... 208
Figure 135 Alarm【Advanced Setting】setting window ........................................... 209
Figure 136【Email Setting】window ........................................................................ 209
Figure 137【System Setting】window ...................................................................... 209
Figure 138【Ethernet】setting window ................................................................... 210
Figure 139 Recipient received mail when the alert occurred .................................... 210
Figure 140 Recipe Data Flow ...................................................................................... 212
Figure 141 Recipe Settings Screen ............................................................................. 212
Figure 142 Insert Recipe Screen................................................................................. 213
Figure 143【General】Screen of【Recipe】 ............................................................ 213
【Recipe】Settings ............................................................. 217
Figure 144【Advanced】
Figure 145【Recipe File List】Screen of【Recipe】 ................................................. 223
Figure 146 Open【Recipe Editor】from software .................................................... 224
Figure 147 Open【Recipe Editor】from folder ......................................................... 224
Figure 148【Recipe Table】Property Setting Screen ................................................ 226
Figure 149【Recipe Selector】Property Setting Screen ........................................... 228
Figure 150【Function Switch】Property Setting Screen .......................................... 229
Figure 151 Recipe Settings Example .......................................................................... 231
Figure 152【Recipe Editor】Example ....................................................................... 232
Figure 153 Example Screen ........................................................................................ 233
Figure 154 Simulation Screen 1 ................................................................................. 233
Figure 155 Simulation Screen 2 ................................................................................. 234
Figure 156 Simulation Screen 3 ................................................................................. 234
Figure 157 Simulation Screen 4 ................................................................................. 235
Figure 158 Simulation Screen 5 ................................................................................. 235
Figure 159 Simulation Screen 6 ................................................................................. 236
Figure 160 Simulation Screen 7 ................................................................................. 236
Figure 161 Setting Screen of【Operation Log】 ....................................................... 237
Figure 162 Setting Screen of Objects with Operation Behaviors ............................... 241
34
Figure 163【Schedule】List Screen .......................................................................... 243
Figure 164【Schedule】Setting Screen..................................................................... 244
Figure 165【Data Transfer】List Screen.................................................................... 254
Figure 166 Setting Dialog of【Data Transfer】 ......................................................... 255
Figure 167 CSV Data Transfer List Screen ................................................................... 256
Figure 168【CSV to Data Transfer Mode】Settings Screen ...................................... 257
Figure 169【Script List】 ........................................................................................... 274
Figure 170 Script Editor Screen .................................................................................. 275
Figure 171 Scrolling Lamp Example ........................................................................... 280
Figure 172 Scrolling Lamp Example Screen Setting ................................................... 281
Figure 173 Using Script Setting for the Screen .......................................................... 282
Figure 174 Script Setting Result ................................................................................. 282
Figure 175 Example–Load Balance ............................................................................ 283
Figure 176 Tag Library Setting–Load Balance Example .............................................. 283
Figure 177 Script Setting–Load Balance Example ...................................................... 284
Figure 178 Simulation Result–Load Balance Example ............................................... 285
Figure 179 MQTT application schematic diagram ..................................................... 286
Figure 180 【MQTT】【Broker】setting page .......................................................... 287
Figure 181 【MQTT】【Topic】setting page ............................................................ 290
Figure 182 【MQTT】【Topic Publish】setting page................................................ 290
Figure 183 【MQTT】【Topic Subscribe】setting page ............................................ 293
Figure 184 【MQTT】【Address】setting page ........................................................ 296
Figure 185 Image Library Editing Window ................................................................. 299
Figure 186 Image Selection Window of Image Library .............................................. 301
Figure 187 Audio Library Edit Window ...................................................................... 302
Figure 188 Audio File Selection Window of Audio Library ........................................ 304
Figure 189 Tag Library Edit Window .......................................................................... 304
Figure 190 Inputting Address Tag in【Address Selector】Edit Field......................... 307
Figure 191 Selecting Address Tag in【Address Selector】Dialog ............................. 307
Figure 192 Text Library Edit Window ......................................................................... 308
Figure 193 Text Selector ............................................................................................. 309
Figure 194 Add/Edit Text Window ............................................................................. 310
Figure 195 Text Library Font Window ........................................................................ 310
Figure 196【Font Library】 ....................................................................................... 311
Figure 197 Ribbon workspace for Style ..................................................................... 313
Figure 198 Draw Object in the Ribbon workspace .................................................... 318
Figure 199 Draw Object toolbox ................................................................................ 318
Figure 200 Ribbon workspace for Style ..................................................................... 319
Figure 201 Click the right mouse button for setting functions .................................. 319
Figure 202 Setting page for【Dot】 .......................................................................... 320

35
Figure 203【Dot】【Operation】Tab Settings ........................................................... 320
Figure 204 Setting page for【Line】 ......................................................................... 322
Figure 205【Line】【Operation】Tab Settings .......................................................... 323
Figure 206 Setting page for【Polyline】 ................................................................... 324
Figure 207 Illustration diagram when users double-click on a【Polyline】 ............. 325
Figure 208 Illustration diagram of adding a dot on a【Polyline】 ............................ 325
Figure 209 Illustration diagram of deleting a dot on a【Polyline】.......................... 325
Figure 210【Polyline】【Operation】Tab Settings .................................................... 326
Figure 211 Setting page for【Rectangular】............................................................. 327
【Operation】Tab Settings ................................................. 328
Figure 212【Rectangle】
Figure 213 Setting page for【Polygon】 ................................................................... 330
Figure 214【Polygon】【Operation】Tab Settings .................................................... 331
Figure 215 Setting page for【Ellipse】...................................................................... 332
Figure 216【Ellipse】【Operation】Tab Settings ...................................................... 333
Figure 217 Setting page for【Arc】........................................................................... 334
Figure 218【Arc】【Operation】Tab Settings ........................................................... 335
Figure 219 Setting page for【Pie】 ........................................................................... 337
Figure 220【Pie】【Operation】Tab Settings............................................................ 338
Figure 221 Setting page for【Table】 ....................................................................... 339
Figure 222【Table】【Operation】Tab Settings ........................................................ 341
Figure 223 Settings page for【Text】 ........................................................................ 342
Figure 224【Text】【Operation】Tab Settings .......................................................... 344
Figure 225 Settings page for【Image】 .................................................................... 345
Figure 226【Image】【Operation】Tab Settings....................................................... 347
Figure 227 Settings Page for【Scale】 ...................................................................... 348
Figure 228【Scale】【Operation】Tab Settings ........................................................ 351
Figure 229【Pipeline】in【Toolbox】 ...................................................................... 352
Figure 230【Pipeline】in【Ribbon】 ....................................................................... 352
Figure 231 Settings Page for【Pipeline】【General】 ............................................... 353
Figure 232 Settings Page for【Pipeline】【Pipe Item】 ............................................ 355
Figure 233 Settings Page for【Pipeline】【Operation】 ........................................... 357
Figure 234【Pipeline】click the right mouse button to modify joint ....................... 359
Figure 235【Pipeline】click the right mouse button to insert pipe ......................... 359

36
Figure 236【Pipeline】click the right mouse button to remove pipe or joint.......... 360
Figure 237【Setting】Screen of【Lamp】 ............................................................... 360
Figure 238【Display】Setting Screen of【Lamp】................................................... 364
Figure 239【Operation】Setting Screen of【Lamp】 .............................................. 367
Figure 240【External Lable】Setting Screen of【Lamp】 ....................................... 368
Figure 241【Setting】Screen of【Bit Switch】 ........................................................ 370
Figure 242【Setting】Screen of【Word Switch】 ................................................... 375
Figure 243【Setting】Screen of【Change Screen】 ................................................ 381
Figure 244【Setting】Screen of【Function Switch】 .............................................. 383
Figure 245【Display】Setting Screen of【Switch】 ................................................. 393
Figure 246【Operation】Setting Screen of【Switch】 ............................................ 396
Figure 247【External Lable】Setting Screen of【Switch】...................................... 399
Figure 248【Setting】Screen of【Numeric Input/Display】 ................................... 400
Figure 249【Display】Setting Screen of【Numeric Input/Display】 ....................... 405
Figure 250【Alarm】Setting Screen of【Numeric Input/Display】 ......................... 408
Figure 251【Operation】Setting Screen of【Numeric Input/Display】 .................. 410
Figure 252【External Lable】Screen of【Numeric Input/Display】 ........................ 412
Figure 253【Setting】Screen of【Text Input/Display】 ........................................... 414
Figure 254【Display】Setting Screen of【Text Input/Display】 .............................. 419
Figure 255【Operation】Setting Screen of【Text Input/Display】 ......................... 421
Figure 256【External Lable】Setting Screen of【Text Input/Display】 ................... 423
Figure 257【Setting】Screen of【Date/Time Display】 .......................................... 425
Figure 258【Display】Setting Screen of【Date/Time Display】 .............................. 426
Figure 259【Operation】Setting Screen of【Date/Time Display】 ......................... 428
Figure 260【Setting】Screen of【Window Screen Display】 .................................. 429
Figure 261【Operation】Setting Screen of【Window Screen Display】................. 431
Figure 262【General】Setting Screen of【Meter】 ................................................ 432
Figure 263【Display】Setting Screen of【Meter】 ................................................. 434
Figure 264【Scale】Setting Screen of【Meter】 ..................................................... 436
Figure 265【Range】Setting Screen of【Meter】 ................................................... 437
Figure 266【Operation】Setting Screen of【Meter】............................................. 438
Figure 267【General】Setting Screen of【Linear Meter】 ..................................... 440
Figure 268【Display】Setting Screen of【Linear Meter】 ...................................... 442

37
Figure 269【Scale】Setting Screen of【Linear Meter】 .......................................... 444
Figure 270【Range】Setting Screen of【Linear Meter】 ........................................ 445
Figure 271【Operation】Setting Screen of【Linear Meter】 .................................. 446
Figure 272【General】Setting Screen on【Data Block Graph】 ............................. 447
Figure 273【Curve】Setting Screen on【Data Block Graph】 ................................. 449
Figure 274【Advanced Curve】Setting Screen of【Data Block Graph】 ................. 452
Figure 275【Display】Setting Screen of【Data Block Graph】 ............................... 453
Figure 276【Axis】Setting Screen of【Data Block Graph】 .................................... 455
Figure 277【Advanced】Setting Screen of【Data Block Graph】 ........................... 457
Figure 278【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Data Block Graph】 ......................... 460
Figure 279【Operation】Setting Screen of【Data Block Graph】........................... 464
Figure 280【General】 Setting Screen of 【Data Block XY Scatter】 .................... 465
Figure 281【Curve】Setting Screen of 【Data Block XY Scatter】 ......................... 466
Figure 282【Display】Setting Screen of【Data Block XY Scatter】 ......................... 469
Figure 283【Axis】Setting Screen of【Data Block XY Scatter】 .............................. 471
Figure 284【Advanced】Setting Screen of【Data Block XY Scatter】 ..................... 472
Figure 285【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Data Block XY Scatter】 ................... 476
Figure 286【Operation】Setting Screen of【Data Block XY Scatter】 .................... 480
Figure 287【Setting】Screen of【Multistate Switch】 ............................................ 481
Figure 288【Display】Setting Screen of【Multistate Switch】 ............................... 483
Figure 289【Operation】Setting Screen of【Multistate Switch】 .......................... 486
Figure 290【External Lable】Setting Screen of【Multistate Switch】 .................... 488
Figure 291【Setting】Screen of【Slide Switch】..................................................... 490
Figure 292【Display】Setting Screen of【Slide Switch】 ........................................ 491
Figure 293【Operation】Setting Screen of【Slide Switch】 ................................... 493
Figure 294【External Lable】Setting Screen of【Slide Switch】 ............................. 495
Figure 295【Setting】Screen of【Selector List】 .................................................... 497
Figure 296【Display】Setting Screen of【Selector List】 ........................................ 499
Figure 297【Operation】Setting Screen of【Selector List】 ................................... 502
Figure 298【External Lable】Setting Screen of【Selector List】............................. 504
Figure 299【Radio Button】【Setting】setting paging ............................................. 506
Figure 300【Radio Button】【Display】setting paging ............................................. 508
Figure 301【Radio Button】【Operation】setting paging ........................................ 510

38
Figure 302【Radio Button】【External Lable】setting paging.................................. 512
Figure 303 Setting Dialog of【Input Display】 .......................................................... 514
Figure 304【Setting】Screen of【Key】 .................................................................. 516
Figure 305【Display】Setting Screen of【Key】 ...................................................... 517
Figure 306【Operation】Setting Screen of【Key】 ................................................. 519
Figure 307 Setting Dialog of【Limit Value Display】 ................................................ 520
Figure 308【Setting】Screen of【Animated Graphic】 ........................................... 523
Figure 309【Display】Setting Screen of【Animated Graphic】 .............................. 527
Figure 310【Operation】Setting Screen of【Animated Graphic】 ......................... 529
Figure 311【Setting】Screen of【Rotation Indicator】 ........................................... 530
Figure 312【Operation】Screen of【Rotation Indicator】...................................... 534
Figure 313 【Setting】Screen of【GIF Display】 .................................................... 536
Figure 314【Operations】Screen of【GIF Display】 ............................................... 537
Figure 315【General】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】 .................................... 539
Figure 316【Curve】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】 ....................................... 541
Figure 317【Advanced Curve】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】 ...................... 544
Figure 318【Display】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】 ..................................... 545
Figure 319【Axis】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】 .......................................... 547
Figure 320【Advanced】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】................................. 549
Figure 321【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】 ............................... 552
Figure 322【Operation】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】 ................................ 556
Figure 323【General】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】 ............................. 557
Figure 324【Curve】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】 ................................ 558
Figure 325【Display】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】 .............................. 561
Figure 326【Axis】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】 ................................... 562
Figure 327【Advanced】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】.......................... 564
Figure 328【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】 ........................ 567
Figure 329【Operation】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】 ......................... 571
Figure 330【General】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Table】 ............................ 573
Figure 331【Data Items】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Table】 ....................... 576
Figure 332【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Table】 ....................... 578
Figure 333【Operation】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Table】 ........................ 582
Figure 334【General】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Selector】 ....................... 584

39
Figure 335【Display】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Selector】 ........................ 586
Figure 336【Operation】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Selector】 .................... 587
Figure 337【Setting】Screen of【Alarm Display】 .................................................. 589
Figure 338【Display】Setting Screen of【Alarm Display】 ..................................... 593
Figure 339【Display】Setting Screen of【Alarm Display】 ..................................... 594
Figure 340【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Alarm Display】 ............................... 595
Figure 341【Operation】Setting Screen of【Alarm Display】 ................................ 599
Figure 342【Setting】Screen of【Alarm Scrolling Text】 ........................................ 600
Figure 343【Display】Setting Screen of【Alarm Scrolling Text】............................ 603
Figure 344【Operation】Setting Screen of【Alarm Scrolling Text】 ....................... 604
Figure 345【General】Setting Screen of【Alarm Data Selector】 .......................... 605
Figure 346【Display】Setting Screen of【Alarm Data Selector】 ........................... 607
Figure 347【Operation】Settings Screen of【Alarm Data Selector】 ..................... 608
Figure 348【General】Setting Page of【Recipe Selector】..................................... 610
Figure 349【Advanced】Setting Page of【Recipe Selector】 ................................. 612
Figure 350【Operation】Setting Page of【Recipe Selector】 ................................. 613
Figure 351【General】Setting Page of【Recipe Table】 ......................................... 615
Figure 352【Data Item】Setting Page of【Recipe Table】 ...................................... 619
Figure 353【Sub Switch】Setting Page of【Recipe Table】 .................................... 620
Figure 354【Operation】Setting Page of【Recipe Table】...................................... 623
Figure 355【General】Setting Screen of【Operation Viewer】.............................. 625
Figure 356【Content】Setting Screen of【Operation Viewer】 ............................. 627
Figure 357【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Operation Viewer】 ......................... 629
Figure 358【Operation】Setting Screen of【Operation Viewer】 .......................... 633
Figure 359【Schedule Setting Table】【General】setting paging ............................ 634
Figure 360【Schedule Setting Table】【Header】setting paging ............................. 636
Figure 361【Schedule Setting Table】【Operation】setting paging ......................... 637
【Setting】setting paging ................................... 639
Figure 362【Video Input Display】
Figure 363【Video Input Display】 【Operation】setting paging .............................. 639
Figure 364 View page of the Ribbon .......................................................................... 641
Figure 365 User Toolbox............................................................................................. 642
Figure 366 add object to【User Toolbox】 ............................................................... 643
Figure 367 User Toolbox–Default name..................................................................... 643
Figure 368 drag object from【User Toolbox】to【Work Space】 ........................... 644
40
Figure 369 Menu–Mouse over category (Left); Mouse over object (Middle); Mouse
not over category or object (Right) ............................................................................ 645
Figure 370 Menu–Import ........................................................................................... 646
Figure 371 Select file to import.................................................................................. 647
Figure 372 Menu–Export ........................................................................................... 647
Figure 373 Select category to export ......................................................................... 647
Figure 374 Select the name and location for the file export ..................................... 648
Figure 375 Repeated category name warning ........................................................... 648
Figure 376 Category Name Conflict selection window .............................................. 649
Figure 377 Repeated object name warning ............................................................... 649
Figure 378 Object Name Conflict selection window.................................................. 650
Figure 379 Open download function ......................................................................... 651
Figure 380 Download Manager function interface .................................................... 652
Figure 381【System Setting Configure】【Basic】setting page ................................ 656
Figure 382【System Setting Configure】【System】setting page............................. 657
Figure 383【System Setting Configure】【Ethernet】setting page .......................... 659
Figure 384【System Setting Configure】【Sever】setting page ............................... 660
Figure 385【System Setting Configure】【Display】setting page............................. 662
Figure 386【System Setting Configure】【Time】setting page ................................ 662
Figure 387【System Setting Configure】【MISC】setting page ................................ 663
Figure 388 Open the upload function ........................................................................ 664
Figure 389 Upload Manager function interface......................................................... 665
Figure 390 Make USB Update File .............................................................................. 667
Figure 391 Make USB Update File setting page ......................................................... 667
Figure 392 Perform compile from the toolbar above ................................................ 670
Figure 393 Compilation process illustration .............................................................. 670
Figure 394 Compilation results illustration ................................................................ 670
Figure 395 Single click on the compile failure message window to jump to the
component ................................................................................................................. 671
Figure 396 Double click on the compile failure message to open the screen setting
.................................................................................................................................... 671
Figure 397 Decompile Function ................................................................................. 672
Figure 398 Decompile dialog window........................................................................ 672
Figure 399 Simulation setting window ...................................................................... 673
Figure 400 Starting simulation ................................................................................... 673
Figure 401 Offline Simulation .................................................................................... 673
Figure 402 Online simulation connection setting ...................................................... 674
Figure 403 Online simulation illustration ................................................................... 674
Figure 404【File Transfer】 ....................................................................................... 675
Figure 405【File Transfer】Window ......................................................................... 675
Figure 406【File Transfer】Password Prompt Window ............................................ 676
Figure 407【File Transfer】Successful Connection Window .................................... 676

41
Figure 408【File Transfer】Download File Complete ............................................... 679
Figure 409 Pass Through architecture ....................................................................... 680
Figure 410 【Pass Through】 ................................................................................... 680
Figure 411 Pass Through parameter setting page ..................................................... 681
Figure 412 Pass Through parameter setting interface ............................................... 684
Figure 413 Successfully switched HMI to Pass Through mode .................................. 685
Figure 414 Open WinProLadder connection settings ................................................ 685
Figure 415 Selecting the communication protocol .................................................... 685
Figure 416 Setting the WinProLadder Ethernet communication parameters ........... 686
Figure 417 【PLC Resource Review】 ...................................................................... 686
Figure 418 PLC Resource Review ............................................................................... 687
Figure 419 PLC Resource Review–Select PLC manufacturer and series model ......... 687
Figure 420 Information of supported PLC driver versions ......................................... 687
Figure 421 Information on internal PLC single point and registers available for access
.................................................................................................................................... 687
Figure 422【Remote System Setting】 ..................................................................... 688
Figure 423【Remote System Setting】setting page ................................................. 688
Figure 424【Remote System Setting】successfully connect to HMI ........................ 689
Figure 425【FATEK PLC Transfer Encrypt Tool】 ....................................................... 689
Figure 426【FBF Reader】 ........................................................................................ 689
Figure 427【FBF Reader】function dialog ................................................................ 690
Figure 428【Install USB Driver】 .............................................................................. 692
Figure 429【Download】 .......................................................................................... 692
Figure 430【Download】setting page ...................................................................... 693
Figure 431【iAccess】 ............................................................................................... 693
Figure 432【iAccess】login page .............................................................................. 693
Figure 433【iAccess】operation page ...................................................................... 694
Figure 434 Input Address Dialog-Device Register ...................................................... 696
Figure 435 Input Address Dialog-Use Index Register 0 .............................................. 697
Figure 436 Input Address Dialog-System Tags-Index Register ................................... 697
Figure 437 Index Register Example ............................................................................ 697
Figure 438 Index Register Example $S:I0 = 0 ............................................................. 698
Figure 439 Index Register Example $S:I0 = 1 ............................................................. 698
Figure 440 Index Register Example $S:I0 = 2 ............................................................. 698
Figure 441 System Setting home page for HMI ......................................................... 710
Figure 442 COM Port data page ................................................................................. 711
Figure 443 【Ethernet】【General】paging ............................................................. 712
Figure 444【Ethernet】【Access Control】paging .................................................... 713
【FTP】paging ..................................................... 714
Figure 445【Servers/IoT Setting】

42
 【VNC】paging .................................................... 715
Figure 446【Servers/IoT Setting】
【Pass Through】paging ..................................... 715
Figure 447【Servers/IoT Setting】
【IoT】paging ...................................................... 716
Figure 448【Servers/IoT Setting】
Figure 449【Link】setting page ................................................................................ 717
Figure 450【Display】setting page ........................................................................... 718
Figure 451【Calibration】page ................................................................................. 718
Figure 452【Time】setting page............................................................................... 719
Figure 453【System Info】setting page .................................................................... 720
Figure 454【MISC】【General】setting page ........................................................... 721
Figure 455【MISC】【Copy Project】setting page .................................................... 722
Figure 456【MISC】【Update Project】setting page ................................................ 723
Figure 457【MISC】【Backup】setting page ............................................................ 724
Figure 458【MISC】【Reboot】setting page ............................................................ 725
Figure 459 project error detection ............................................................................ 725
Figure 460 Gateway Server Application Diagram ...................................................... 729
Figure 461【Address Mapping Table】Settings Screen ............................................ 730
Figure 462【Address Mapping Table】Settings Screen ............................................ 730
Figure 463 HMI Connection Page............................................................................... 731
Figure 464 New Modbus Slave (TCP) Driver .............................................................. 732
Figure 465【Address Mapping Table】Configuration............................................... 733
Figure 466 Results of the Gateway Server ................................................................. 733
Figure 467 HMI show PLC Ladder Diagram Program illustration ............................... 734
Figure 468 drag a【Function Switch】to window..................................................... 735
Figure 469 select【PLC: Show ladder viewer】dialog .............................................. 735
Figure 470 The menu dialog of the linked device ...................................................... 735
Figure 471 show PLC ladder diagram program .......................................................... 736
Figure 472 The interface of the PLC ladder diagram is displayed on the HMI ........... 736
Figure 473 drag a【Function Switch】to window..................................................... 740
Figure 474 select【PLC: Update FATEK PLC Project From HMI or USB Flash Drive】
dialog .......................................................................................................................... 741
Figure 475 Select the dialog window to update the project ..................................... 741
Figure 476 The menu dialog of the linked device ...................................................... 741
Figure 477 ask whether to stop PLC running ............................................................. 741
Figure 478 download success than ask whether start the PLC dialog window ......... 742
Figure 479【FATEK PLC Transfer Project Generator】option.................................... 743
Figure 480【FATEK PLC Transfer Project Generator】setting ................................... 743
Figure 481 select to update the PLC project .............................................................. 744
Figure 482 select the transfer password .................................................................... 744
43
Figure 483 select device ............................................................................................. 744
Figure 484 ask whether to stop the running PLC ....................................................... 744
Figure 485 download success and ask whether to start PLC immediately ................ 745
Figure 486【Single Pass Password Generator】option ............................................ 745
Figure 487【Single Pass Password Generator】setting window .............................. 745
Figure 488 select to update the PLC project .............................................................. 746
Figure 489 select single pass password ..................................................................... 746
Figure 490【Single Pass Password Generator】window .......................................... 746
Figure 491 enter single pass password window ........................................................ 747
Figure 492 select device ............................................................................................. 747
Figure 493 ask whether to stop the running PLC ....................................................... 747
Figure 494 download success and ask whether to start PLC immediately ................ 747
Figure 495 drag a【Function Switch】to window..................................................... 748
Figure 496 select【PLC: Show Ethernet Module Configuration】dialog .................. 748
Figure 497 dialog of FATEK PLC on ethernet .............................................................. 748
Figure 498 General properties of ethernet module .................................................. 749
Figure 499 password setting page of ethernet module ............................................. 750
Figure 500 Access Control setting page of ethernet module .................................... 751
Figure 501 External Severs setting page of ethernet module ................................... 751
Figure 502 service port setting page of ethernet module ......................................... 753
Figure 503 drag a【Function Switch】to the screen ................................................ 753
Figure 504 select run/stop PLC function .................................................................... 754
Figure 505 select the PLC device ................................................................................ 754
Figure 506 select the target PLC ................................................................................ 754
Figure 507 user-defined protocol illustration ............................................................ 755
Figure 508 choose【User-defined protocol】 .......................................................... 756
Figure 509 choose【Protocol Setting】 .................................................................... 756
Figure 510【User-defined Protocol】instruction list ................................................ 757
Figure 511【User-defined Protocol】main operation interface ............................... 758
Figure 512【User-defined Protocol Setting】instruction paging ............................. 759
Figure 513【User-defined Protocol Setting】send data paging ............................... 760
Figure 514【User-defined Protocol Setting】returndata paging.............................. 762
Figure 515【User-defined Protocol Setting】checksum paging ............................... 764
Figure 516 HMI COM1 and COM4 connection page .................................................. 768
Figure 517 set User-define protocol communication format .................................... 768
Figure 518【Instruction List】dialog......................................................................... 769
Figure 519【User-defined Protocol Setting】dialog ................................................. 769
Figure 520【Checksum】paging dialog .................................................................... 770
Figure 521【Checksum Calculation】dialog ............................................................. 770
Figure 522 composite result dialog ............................................................................ 771
44
Figure 523 return data dialog .................................................................................... 772
Figure 524 planning Numeric Input/Display object ................................................... 772
Figure 525【User-defined Protocol Setting】dialog ................................................. 773
Figure 526 switch to【Data】paging dialog .............................................................. 773
Figure 527 switch to【Checksum】paging dialog ..................................................... 774
Figure 528 planning Numeric Input/Display object ................................................... 774
Figure 529 HMI COM1 and COM4 connection page .................................................. 775
Figure 530 communication instruction in script ........................................................ 775
Figure 531 communication instruction in script ........................................................ 776
Figure 532 Read the 40001 address data script for the Modbus device ................... 777
Figure 533 Planning a new【Numeric Input/Display】object .................................. 777
Figure 534 multi-link application diagram ................................................................. 778
Figure 535 Multi-Link(Serial) connection diagram..................................................... 779
Figure 536【Multi-Link Master(Serial)】setting page .............................................. 779
Figure 537【Multi-Link Slave(Serial)】setting page.................................................. 780
Figure 538【Multi-Link Master(Ethernet)】setting page ......................................... 782
Figure 539【Multi-Link Slave(Ethernet)】setting page ............................................ 783
Figure 540 setting page【Operation Lock】 ............................................................. 785
Figure 541 setting page of multi-link master ............................................................. 786
Figure 542 setting page of multi-link slave ................................................................ 786
Figure 543 status bar.................................................................................................. 788
Figure 544【Search/Replace】function window ...................................................... 788
Figure 545【Search/Replace】result function window ............................................ 790
Figure 546【Search/Replace】option in【View】 ................................................... 791
Figure 547 System Protection .................................................................................... 794

45
 1. FATEK FvDesigner Manual
Introduction to FATEK FvDesigner

Foreword
The FATEK FvDesigner is a software tool used to design and develop FATEK FV HMI
series product projects. The FvDesigner includes an easy to operate Windows
interface, similar to the frequently used Microsoft Office Ribbon interface. It
supports rich figure objects to design various Windows interfaces and applications,
as well as multiple types of user defined databases, making the project easy to
organize, manage and share. It includes recipe functions, data log, alarm processing
and user operation logs, making HMI function planning more complete.

System Requirements
Supported Operating Systems: Windows XP
Windows 7 (32&64 bit)
Windows 8 (32&64 bit)
Windows 10 (32&64 bit)

System Installation
The installation instructions will appear once the installing package is executed;
please follow and confirm the installation steps.

Figure 1 Installation Welcoming Screen

46
 Figure 2 User Information

Figure 3 Select Software Installation Path

Figure 4 Confirmation Before Installation

Figure 5 Installation Complete

47
Startup Screen
Every time FATEK FvDesigner is opened, it will first enter the startup screen. The
functions provided are as follows:

Table 1 Startup Screen Functions

Function Description

【Create New Uses a Project Wizard to guide the users to create a new
project.
Project】
【Open Opens an existing project. A recently used project list will be
displayed on the right of the startup screen; the user can select
Project】 a project on the list and then click the Open button at the
bottom of the list to open this project. If the existing project is
protected with a password, the password must be entered
before it can be opened.
【Exit】 Closes the FATEK FvDesigner.
Switch the software interface to other languages including
English, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, and Türkçe.

Figure 6 Startup Screen

When Create New Project is selected, initial configurations for the project can be
completed by following the preset steps of the Project Wizard.

Table 2 Create New Project Steps

Function Description

【Choose HMI Choose the FATEK FV HMI model. Images of each product
model are displayed in the list below for the developer to
Model】 choose from.

【Product Series】
On the lower right of the Product Sereis option, provide
designers can quickly search for the desired size and model
48
 of the HMI through the drop-down menu.

【Search】
On the lower right of the Search option, provide designers
can quickly search for the desired size and model of the
HMI through enter words.

Note: P5070VS and P5102VS supports VGA connection

【Choose Chose the controller to connect and the communication
interface settings.
Controller】
【Select Location】 Sets the project name and storage path.
First select the HMI product model to develop from the product image list below; the
information field will display information on the hardware specifications and
supported communication interfaces of the product.

Figure 7 Create New Project: Choose Product Type

Step two, select the interface type, PLC manufacturer, and product series. If the
selected PLC device and communication interface uses serial transmission, the
interface setting below will display related parameters for serial transmission. If the
communication interface is Ethernet, network parameter settings interface including
IP and port will be displayed; please refer to Chapter 3.3–Link for related parameters
and settings.

Note: The Choose Controller tab is optional. The user can select only the HMI
model and proceed to editing the project.

49
 Figure 8 Create New Project: Choose Controller

Figure 9 Create New Project: Controller Connection Configuration

Finally, select the project name and storage path. Press【Finish】to complete the
Create New Project steps and start developing.

50
 Figure 10 Create New Project: Select Location

51
 2. Window Configuration
The default Window Configuration of FATEK FvDesigner is as shown below:

Figure 11 FATEK FvDesigner Window Configuration

2.1 File Tags

2.1.1 File
The File Window will appear after pressing the icon, as shown below.

Figure 12 Toolbar–File

Table 3 File Options

Function Description
【New(N)】 Close the current project and open the Project Wizard. A
reminder window will appear to ask the developer to save the
project if the current project was not yet saved.
【Open(O)】 Select the path and open a project. A reminder window will
appear to ask the developer to save the project if the current
project was not yet saved.
If opening an existing project, a dialog will appear asking the
user if a backup should be created. If “Yes” is selected, a
backup file will be created. For example, if the file name is
52
 Project1.fpj, the backup will be created under a folder named
“backup” created in the same path. The backup file will be
named Project1.fpj.bak. If “No” is selected, no backup will be
created.

【Save(S)】 Save the currently editing project.

【Save as(A)】 Select a path and save the current project as a new file.

【Export to RTF】 Creates a document detailing project information in an RTF

file that can be opened in text editors such as Microsoft
Word. Information in the RTF file includes the HMI model
used, memory usage, and screen information.
【Recent Open recently used project. These project names will be
displayed on the right of the window; if the cursor is moved
Documents】 on top of a file name, the file path will be displayed.
【Option(I)】 Open【Option】, to set software environment related
settings.
Function Description
【General】 Allows switching between different
languages. Include English,
Traditional Chinese, Simplified
Chinese, Türkçe, etc.
【Icon Color】 Allows switching icon between
different colors.
【Backup】 【Auto backup project from old
version of FvDesigner】
It will automatically backup the old
version project when open it.

【Show original project backup

confirm message when startup】
It will show up a backup project
dialog when open an old project.
【License】 This is for the use of advanced
function, for the detail you can
contact with the dealer you
purchased.
【Exit(X)】 Close the current project and the program. A reminder
window will appear to ask the developer to save the current
project if the current project was not yet saved.
53
 2.2 Ribbon
The Ribbon is a user interface that uses panels and tab pages as the architecture;
functions will be displayed with icons in the Window below according to different
options selected. There are five tabs in this section:【Design(D)】,【Project(P)】,
【Insert(I)】,【View(V)】, and【Tools(T)】.

Figure 13 Ribbon Illustration

Table 4 Introduction to Ribbon User Interface Functions

Function Description
【Design(D)】 Basic functions related to designing objects.
Block Description
【Clipboard】 Paste, Cut and Copy the selected object.
Multi-copy function.
【Screen】 Three screen type options will be
displayed when the New Screen button
is pressed:
1. Base Screen
2. Window Screen
3. Keypad Screen
The screen type will be added once
clicked.
The previous screen and the next screen
can quickly switch the currently
displayed screen in the screen list.
【Basic Settings for basic object information,
including object comments, locations
Settings】 and sizes.
【Font】 Settings for text, including font, size, and
color.
【Text Allow quick setting of text alignment in
the object, select the object then the
Alignment】 function can be used.
【Theme】 Select appearance related settings. It can
change the appearance and color of the
selected object or group.
【Format】 Select the figure level, location, size,
alignment and group relations between
objects.

54
 【Draw】 Select a draw object to be placed on the
work space.
【Object】 Select an object to be placed on the
work space.
【Project(P)】 Information and settings related to the project.
1.【Execute】: Functions related to project execution.
Function Description
【Compile】 Generate Running Package (*.cfrp).

【Decompile】 Decompile Running Package (*.cfrp).

2.【Transfer】: Functions related to project transfer.

Function Description
【Download Download the current running project
to the HMI.
Current
Project】
【Upload】 Upload running project from the HMI.

【Make USB Produce a file to put on USB that can

be used to update a project present on
Update File】 the HMI.
【IGU setting】 When FvDesigner model choose PC,
will appear this option, mainly to set
the customer ID of IGU-FvRT(USB
Dongle).
3.【Run】: Executes the current project.
Function Description
【Simulation】 Open the simulation window; there are
two modes to choose from: online
simulation and offline simulation.
【Insert(I)】 Allows adding of new screens or functions.
Function Description
【Screen】 Three screen type options will be
displayed when this button is pressed:
1. Base Screen
2. Window Screen
3. Keypad Screen
The screen type can be added once
clicked.
【Device】 A【New Link Property】window will
appear when this button is pressed; A
new connection device can be added
after editing related settings.
【Data Log】 A【Data Log Group Properties】window
will appear when this button is pressed;
55
 A new data log group can be added after
editing related settings.
【Alarm】 An【Alarm Group Properties】window
will appear when this button is pressed;
A new alarm group can be added after
editing related settings.
【Recipe】 A【Recipe Group Properties】window
will appear when this button is pressed;
A new recipe group can be added after
editing related settings.
【Schedule】 A【Schedule Group Properties】window
will appear when this button is pressed;
A new schedule group can be added
after editing related settings.
【Data A【Data Transfer Group Properties】
Transfer】 window will appear when this button is
pressed; A new data transfer group can
be added after editing related settings.
【Script】 A【Script Editor】window will appear
when this button is pressed; a new script
function can be added
【View(V)】 Settings related to windows within FvDesigner.

1.【System/Project Windows】
Function Description
【Screen List】 Display/Close Screen List window.

【Project Explorer】 Display/Close Project Explorer

window.
【Memory Display/Close Memory Address
window.
Address】
【Output Message】 Displays/Close Output Message
window.
【Search/Replace】 Displays/Close Search/Replace
window

2.【Object/Library Windows】
Function Description
【Object List】 Display/Close Object List window.

【Toolbox】 Display/Close Toolbox window.

【User Toolbox】 Display/Close User Toolbox

window.

56
 3.【Window】
Function Description
【Arrange Icons】 Arrange the active function
windows in the work space.
【Cascade】 Use the cascade window format in
the work space.
【Switch Windows】 Switch between opened windows
in the work space.
【Close All】 Close all windows in the work
space.
【Tools(T)】 Tools application program; please refer to the Application
Tool chapter for details.
Function Description
【File Transfer】 Through the HMI
upload/download USB port
connect with computer, you can
transfer the file from HMI internal
storage to computer or from
computer to HMI.
【Pass Through】 Edit settings related to the pass
through function.
【PLC Resource Information on the various PLC
devices supported by FvDesigner.
Review】
【Remote System Allow setting the system setting
on the remote HMI.
Setting】
【FATEK PLC Transfer When download FATEK PLC
project through HMI, can
Encrypt Tool】 generate FATEK PLC Transfer
Project or Singal Pass Password.
For the detailed please refer
chapter 24.3.1-【FATEK PLC
Transfer Project Generator】
【FBF Reader】 FBF file reader

【Install USB Can automatically detect the

system information and install the
Driver】 appropriate USB drivers.
【Download】 Can download the other running
packages.
【iAccess】 Do upload, download,
passthrough, and other services
through cloud service.

57
 2.2.1 Design(D)
【Design(D)】allows developers to edit the object configurations within the work
space. It provides general clipboard functions, object format settings and provides
frequently used objects to insert into the work space. Theme is used to apply settings
to specifically selected objects in the window and change their appearance. Detailed
descriptions of each function are as follows:

Figure 14 Design

2.2.1.1 Clipboard

Figure 15 Design–Clipboard

Table 5 Design–Clipboard
Function Description
【Cut】 Cut the object onto the clipboard.

【Paste】 Paste the cut or copied object.

【Copy】 Copy the object onto the clipboard.

【Multi-Copy】 Multi-Copy the object.

Multi-Copy function is available in the Design page of Ribbon (Figure 15) or in the
pop-up menu which is showed after clicked the right button of the mouse (Figure
16).

Figure 16 the right click pop-up menu

In the Multi-Copy window (Figure 17), you can set the number of copied objects in
the x and y direction, the sequence of adding the copied objects, whether or not to
copy the comment of the object, and register settings.

58
 Multi-Copy function also supports incrementing the register address of the duplicate
objects. The step size of the increment can be adjusted.

Figure 17 Multi-Copy window

2.2.1.2 Screen
A design screen can be quickly added and change screen here.

Figure 18 Design–Screen

Table 6 Design–Screen
Function Description
【Base Screen】 General screen; its size is the same as the HMI resolution
and cannot be changed.
【Window Screen】 This type of window screen is selected for both direct and
indirect windows; the window screen size can be changed.
【Keypad Screen】 The required keypad screen can be customized here for
use.
【Previous Screen】 Change to the pervious screen of the screen list.

【Next Screen】 Change to the next screen of the screen list.

2.2.1.3 Basic Setting

Provides basic object settings for users to edit comments, location and size of the
object.

Figure 19 Design–Basic Setting

59
 Table 7 Design–Basic Setting
Function Description
【Comment】 The user can enter the comment associated with an object
here.
【Top】 The coordinates for the top-left corner of the object:
Top: The y-coordinate for the top-most point of the object.
【Left】 Left: The x-coordinate for the left-most point of the object.
【Width】 The width and height of the object; uses pixel as units.

【Height】

2.2.1.4 Font
Provides basic settings for users to edit the font, size and color of text.

Figure 20 Design-Font

2.2.1.5 Text Alignment

Provides basic settings for users to edit the position of text in an object.

Figure 21 Design-Text Alignment

2.2.1.6 Theme
Users can use this function to apply settings to the specifically selected objects in the
work space to change their appearances.

Figure 22 Design–Theme

Table 8 Design–Theme
Function Description
【Color Themes】 Select a color theme and apply it to an object; allows
designers to change the color style of the object.

60
 【Quick Styles】 Select Quick Styles to apply preset color configurations to
each object; allows designers to quickly develop their own
object color appearances.

【Shape Fill/Shape Adjust the appearance and color effects of an object.

Note: Only the theme colors will change with the【Color
Outline】
Themes】; standard colors will not change with the
【Color Themes】.

2.2.1.7 Format
Provides object format functions to allow users to select multiple objects and
organize the typesetting of the screen objects, including alignment, spacing, size
adjustment functions etc.

61
 Figure 23 Design–Format

Table 9 Design–Format
Function Description
【Bring to Front】 Move object to front.

【Move Forward】 Move object forward a layer.

【Send to Back】 Move object to back.

【Move Forward】 Move object down a layer.

【Group】 Multiple objects can be grouped into a single object.

Movement and properties are applied to the entire group.
【Ungroup】 Restores a group into single objects.

【Make Same Size】 Resize selected objects to be the same size as the object in
the lowermost layer.
【Make Same Adjusts the width of the selected objects to be the same
width as the object in the lowermost layer.
Width】
【Make Same Adjusts the height of the selected objects to be the same
height as the object in the lowermost layer.
Height】
【Align】 Eight options will appear when this button is pressed:
Align Left
Align Center
Align Right
Align Top
Align Middle
Align Bottom
Distribute Horizontally
Distribute Vertically
【Recommended When FvDesigner model type choose PC will show up this
option, and provide the IGU-FvRT level suggestion
Model】 according to the amount of the used registers and links.

62
2.2.1.8 Objects
Objects provided by this software can be added from the object field; frequently
used objects are displayed here. After selecting the object to add, drag the object to
the work space.
Use the Toolbox in the Object/Library Window section to the right to view all
available object types.

Figure 24 Design–Object

2.2.2 Project(P)
This field provides project related function settings, and it is divided into the
following three parts:
【Execute】Compiles the project file into a running package, or decompiles the
running package into a project file.
【Transfer】is related to file transfer; It can download the compiled running package
onto the HMI for running or acquire the running package from the HMI and upload it
onto the computer. Users can also make an USB update file to replace the running
project on HMI.
【Run】opens the simulation window to run the current project, include off-line
simulation and on-line simulation.

Figure 25 Project

2.2.2.1 Compile

Figure 26 Creating Running Package

The【Compile】function can be found in the【Project】function tab of the Ribbon

task bar on top of the FvDesigner. The running package (*.cfrp - Compress FATEK
Running Package) can be generated when the project file (*.fpj - FATEK Project) has
successfully compiled. The running package can be downloaded to the FATEK HMI
device through the Internet/USB/Serial cable. After compilation is complete, the
output window will display information concerning the compile output, memory
configuration, etc. The project must be saved and compiled into a running package
before a simulation can be run or downloaded onto a HMI device.

63
 Table 10 Compilation Output Window Related Information
Information Content
【Project】 The location of the compiled project file (*.fpj).

【Date】 Compilation date and time.

【Running Package】 The location to create the running package file (*.cfrp).

【Memory Usage】 Memory size used by objects.

Memory size used by images.
Memory size used by audios.
Memory size used by the tag library.
Memory size used by the text library.
Memory size used by the scripts.
Memory size used by the recipe files.
Memory size used by fonts.
【Project Capacity】 Total size used by the running package.
Space remaining for the running package.
【Compile Output】 Number of errors
Number of warnings
Compile Output: Success/Compile Failed.

Figure 27 Compilation Result Dialog

2.2.2.2 Decompile
The decompile process can be used on the running package (.cfrp) uploaded from
the HMI to extract the project and attached recipes and fonts. The decompile
function can be found in the【Project】function tab of the Ribbon task bar on top of
the FvDesigner; click on【Decompile】to start. Please refer to the Chapter 18–Build
Running Package and Simulation for more details.

Figure 28 Decompile

64
2.2.2.3 Upload & Download
Data transfer can be performed for projects through USB or Internet/Serial cable
connection. Clicking on the Download function will automatically compile and save
the project to the HMI. Clicking the Upload function will upload the running package
running on the HMI onto the computer. If users want to view the contents of the
running package after upload is complete, the decompile function can be used to
extract contents from the running package.

The HMI network IP information must be set when using Internet transfer. The auto-
search function can be used if the user does not know the IP information; the
software will search for FATEK HMI devices on the local network and display the
device IP information found in a table. Select the target device’s IP to perform data
transfer.

The transfer function is password protected; the upload or download password must
be set before transferring and this password will be checked during connection.
Communication will only be performed if the password is correct.
Please refer to the【Upload】and【Download Current Project】sections in Chapter
18–Build Running Package and Simulation for details.

2.2.2.4 Make USB Flash Drive Update File

This function can let users generate an USB update file in the assigned
path(.uferp)(V1.3.29 or V1.4.7 later version to V1.5.3, filename extension is ufrp2).
Put this file in the directory folder of USB Drive and insert the USB Drive into the
executing HMI. A dialog will pop up to ask if the user wants to update the running
project. If the user wants to update, there is a file list the user can choose from. Click
the OK button to restart HMI and replace the running project.

Please refer to the【Upload】and【Download Current Project】sections in Chapter

18–Build Running Package and Simulation for details.

Note 1: If the USB size is larger, wait a while, and then the Project Update Question
Dialog will appear
Note 2: In order to improve the software performance, we have done some software
changes, if you are using FvDesigner V1.3.29 previous versions, please pay attention
to the use of USB drive ufrp file upgrade project, it may encounter instability,
solution please use FvDesigner V1.3.29 or V1.4.7 later to re-download the software,
and then use USB drive update project
Note 3: V1.3.29 or V1.4.7 later version, the production of USB drive update file, the
filename extension is ufrp2, if you do not use FvDesigner V1.3.29 or V1.4.7 or later
version of the software downloaded the HMI will not be able to identify V1.3.29 or
V1.4.7 or later version, make the USB drive update file, the solution please use
FvDesigner V1.3.29 or V1.4.7 later version of the software to re-download
Note 4:use【Make USB Flash Drive Update File】function, please confirm the
65
firmware version on the HMI that would like to update, table as below, or it may
cause the project damage on the HMI, in this case, update once again.

Table 11 Make USB Flash Drive Update File

File Build Version HMI-supported firmware version
UFRP ?-v1.3.28 ?~v1.3.x v1.4.0-v1.4.x v1.5.0-v1.5.x
v1.4.0-v1.4.6 *OS v1.0 only
UFRP+ v1.3.29-v1.3.x v1.3.29-v1.3.x v1.4.7-v1.4.x v1.5.0-v1.5.x
UENV *OS v1.0 only
UFRP2v1 v1.4.7-v1.4.x v1.3.29-v1.3.x v1.4.7-v1.4.x v1.5.0-v1.5.x
+UENV
UFERP v1.5.3-v1.5.x v1.4.29-v1.4.x v1.5.3-v1.5.x

Figure 29 make USB drive update file

Table 12 properties of making USB drive upgrade file

Options Description

【Data】 【Target Folder】

File storage path, you can browse to select the storage path.

【File Name】
Set the file name of the USB drive update file

【output files】
The filename of the output file is .uferp2
【Delete from This column determines whether to clear the data originally
stored in the HMI.
HMI】 In addition to produce the update file of USB drive, you can
choose to clear the original data stored in HMI, through the
operation of HMI, insert the USB drive will appear USB
project update list dialog, you can also select from delete

66
 item, once selected, it will delete the select item when the
project download complete.

【Select All】
After checked,【Backup Memory】、【Alarm】、【Recipe】、
【Data Log】、【Print】、【Link】、【Security Password】、
【Operation Log】、【Data Transfer】、【Installment】、
【Schedule】and【Others】all of them will be selected.

【Backup Memory】
After checked, it will delete the HMI internal data after USB
drive updated HMI file.

【Alarm】
After checked, it will delete the HMI origin alarm record after
USB drive updated HMI file. That is, all files under the HMI /
internal / alarm /

【Recipe】
After checked, it will delete the HMI origin recipe file after
USB drive updated HMI file. That is, all files under the HMI /
internal / recipe /

【Data Log】
After checked, it will delete the HMI original data log record
after USB drive updated HMI file. That is, all files under the
HMI / internal / datalog /

【Print】
After checked, it will delete the HMI origin print data after
USB drive updated HMI file. That is, all files under the HMI /
internal / hardcopy /

【Link】
After checked, it will delete the HMI original parameters
through the system parameters set communication after USB
drive updated HMI file. That is, the controller communication
reset the parameter accordind to the connection on the
software

【Security Password】
After checked, after USB drive updated HMI file will delete
67
 the HMI origin password table, at this point, if the project
has set the password table, the password table will be the
main in the project; if unchecked will retain the origin
password table that on the HMI.

【Operation Log】
After checked, it will delete the HMI origin operation log
after USB drive updated HMI file. That is, all files under the
HMI / internal / operationlog /

【Data Transfer】
After checked, it will delete the HMI origin transfer data after
USB drive updated HMI file. That is, all files under the HMI /
internal / datatransfer /

【Installment】
After checked, and after the USB flash drive update the HMI
file then the origin installment data will be deleted. For
example, if there are 3 periods and 2 periods have been
entered, then the record will be deleted if the intallment
option is checked.

【Schedule】
After checked, it will delete the original schedule information
on the HMI after USB flash drive updates the HMI data. Such
as the project originally set start at 8:00:00, change to start
at 9:00:00 during the HMI executing. If didn’t check this
option, it will remain startup from 9:00:00, if did check this
option, it will delete the modified record, and stratup from
8:00:00.
【Others】
After checked, except the above files on the HMI will be
deleted after update the HMI file. Indicates that all the files
under other folders on the HMI internal path /internal/ will
be deleted.
【Other 【Userdefined Startup Screen】
Settings】 Allows user to set the HMI start up screen. A start up screen
could be the company logo, a log in screen, etc. Once the
USB update is complete, the HMI boot screen will be
changed. The Fatek HMI boot screen is in the given location:
(under 64bit windows)
C:\Program Files (x86)\FATEK\FvDesigner\Ver1.5\startup
screen
(under 32bit windows)

68
 C:\Program Files\FATEK\FvDesigner\Ver1.5\startup screen

【Write System Setting】

This allows designers after update HMI via USB flah drive,
whether to modify the HMI system setting at the same time,
so that it is not necessary for each HMI to enter the system
setting adjustment when updating multiple HMIs.
For more details, please refer to chapter18.1.2-Write System
Setting.
【Start】
When finished adjusting your settings, press start to begin the
update.

【Close】
Press this button to end and close the window.

Figure 30 Project Update Question Dialog

Figure 31 USB Update List

2.2.2.5 USB Dongle Setting

When FvDesigner choose PC model, will appear USB Dongle seeting option, figure as
shown below, this option is mainly to set the customer ID of IGFU-FvRT(USB Dongle),
insert IGU-FvRT(USB Dongle) into PC USB port, then set the customer ID through this
option, the customer ID in the project and the customer ID of IGU-FvRT(USB Dongle)
need to be the same, then the FvRT can excute correctly. For more detailed
operation step please refer to FvRT manual.

69
 Figure 32 IGU Setting List

2.2.2.6 HMI detects USB Drive plugged in

When HMI detects USB Drive is plugged in, for operator to know clearly, the message
will show on the screen of HMI as figure shown below, to remid operator.

Figure 33 HMI detects USB Drive is plugged in

When HMI detects USB Drive is removed, for operator to know clearly, the message
will show on the screen of HMI as figure shown below, to remid operator.

Figure 34 HMI detects USB Drive is removed

2.2.2.7 Simulation
The project must first be compiled to generate the running package file before the
simulation is run. Simulations are divided into Offline Simulation and Online
Simulation; their descriptions are as follows:
Offline Simulation: Does not require connection of PLC and HMI equipment; the
screens of the running package can be operated directly.

Figure 35 Offline Simulation

Online Simulation: PC and PLC connected; running package is executed on the PC and
communicates with the PLC.
Port is the COM Port of PC

70
 Figure 36 Online Simulation

Please refer to the simulation chapter in Chapter 18–Build Running Package and
Simulation for details.

2.2.3 Insert(I)
This field allows users to quickly add screens or functions; they can be added by
pressing this button, in which includes:
【Screen】,【Device】,【Data Log】,【Alarm】,【Recipe】,【Schedule】,【Data
Transfer】and【Script】

Figure 37 Insert

2.2.4 View(V)
The View tab of the Ribbon contains functions related to the appearance of the
application; the【System/Project Windows】will be placed on the left except
【Search/Replace】and the【Object/Library Windows】will be placed on the right.

Figure 38 Window

Use the mouse to drag the working space and the FvDesigner will display the window
configuration reminder; move the mouse to the configuration reminder and the
workung space will be placed at the position clicked. The FvDesigner has a 【User
Habit Log】function that will record the developer’s window configuration position
on the system so that the workung space configuration will be configured to the

71
same positions as the previous development environment every time the project is
opened for development.

Figure 39 Configure Operating Window Position

2.2.5 Tools(T)
The Tools tab including built-in applications as follow:
【File Transfer】: allows users to connect with PC via USB drive upload/ download
and transfer files from HMI to PC for viewing or backup
【Pass Through】: allows users to communicate and connect to the PLC through the
HMI.
【PLC Resource Review】: helps users to find the supported PLC driver program
version information, the internal single points of the PLC allowed for access, and
register information.
【Remote System Setting】: allows users to enter the IP address of a HMI present in
the local area network and control it remotely.
【FATEK PLC Transfer Encrypt Tool】: When download FATEK PLC project through
HMI, can generate Fatek PLC Transfer Project or Singal Pass Password.
【FBF Reader】: Reader that can read FBF file.
【Install USB Driver】: automatically detects the system information and installs the
appropriate USB drivers.
【Download】: Download the other running packages.
【iAccess】: Do upload, download, passthrough, and other services through cloud
service.

72
 Figure 40 Tools

2.3 Shortcuts
Allows users to set frequently used functions to be displayed here, making it easier
for users to operate.
【New】,【Open】,【Save】,【Undo】and【Redo】

Figure 41 Shortcuts

2.4 Interface Appearance Options

【Interface Appearance Options】(Top Left) provides customized interface
appearance settings, allowing users to minimize or maximize the work space and
change the color and text of the interface. There is also a help function and the
program version information is also provided here.

Figure 42 Interface Appearance Options

Table 13 Interface Appearance Options

Display Item Description
Pressing this button will minimize the work space and
【Maximize/Minimize pressing it again will maximize the work space.

ribbon】
【Options】 Choose the style and font of the interface.
【Style】
Choose the style of the interface.

【Font】
Choose the font size of the interface.

73
 【Restore Window Position】can restore the
workung space, you can click this option, the work
window will be restored to the system default location.
【System/Project】except【Search/Replace】will on
the left, 【Objects/Resource Library】will on the
right.

【Customize】provide customize option.

If you want to inquire about the related settings for the
【Help】 use of the software, you can press this help, press it
will display the user manual for the query software
related functions
【About】 Displays software version information.

2.5 Status Bar

The【Status Bar】displays information on the work space window, the window
resolution, HMI product specifications and type, and other information.

Figure 43 Status Bar

Table 14 Status bar

Display Item Description
【Show Name and Pressing the gear brings up a window with the following
options:
Address】
【Show Name and Address】
Overlays the name and register being controlled for each
component in the project.

【Show Quicklaunch Toolbar】

Shows/hides the quicklaunch toolbar present above the
editing screen.
74
 【Search/Replace】
Whether to displays Search/Replace setting window.
Please refer chapter27-Search/Replace for more detail.

【Set Name and Address Display】

Properties for the Name and Address display. User can
hide/show the name or address displayed and change
text properties such as address color, background color,
opacity, font and size.
【Snap Alignment】 While moving objects, this function assists the user to
align nearby objects.
【Grid Alignment】 Show/hide a grid throughout the editing window. The grid
allows for precise alignment of objects in the editing
window. The grid properties can also be adjusted.
【Actual Size】 Zoom the screen window ratio to 100%; this will only be
displayed when the editing section of the screen is open.
【Fit Visible】 Adjustable to Zoom the screen window ratio to the same
size as the visible range; this will only be displayed when
the editing section of the screen is open.
【Screen Display Zoom the screen window ratio between the range of10%–
550%; this will only be displayed when the editing section
Ratio】 of the screen is open.
【Cursor Position】 Display the X and Y coordinates of the mouse in the
editing section of the window; the point of origin is the
top-left corner of the window. This will only be displayed
when the editing section of the screen is open.
【Used External Display the used of the external registers.

Registers】
【HMI Model】 Product model information: Pressing this button will
display the information of the current product model. Ex:
P5070N1

75
 2.6 Quicklaunch Toolbar
The【Quicklaunch Toolbar】provides quick access to common tools including
copy/paste, moving objects between layers, grouping objects, alignment options,
and language and state switches. Can be displayed above or below the window edit
area.

Figure 44 Quicklaunch Toolbar

Table 15 Quicklaunch Toolbar

Display Item Description
【Cut】 Copies a selected object to the clipboard and then
deletes the object from the work space.
【Copy】 Copies a selected object to the clipboard.

【Multi-Copy】 Copies a selected object and pastes a set of objects. The

number of items in the set is determined by the user.
【Paste】 Inserts the object(s) currently in the clipboard into the
work space at the selected location.
【Delete】 Removes the selected item from the work space.

【Bring to Front】 Moves the selected object to the topmost layer of the
work space.
【Move Forward】 Moves the selected object up one layer.

【Send to Back】 Moves the selected object to the bottommost layer of

the work space.
【Move Backward】 Moves the selected object down one layer.

【Group】 Select several objects and group them using this option.
76
 The group allows the objects to be moved
simultaneously and settings are applied to the entire
group.
【Ungroup】 Groups are restored to its independent objects.

【Make Same Size】 Select several objects and resize the set such that all the
objects are the same size. The size of the set is based on
the object in the lowermost layer.
【Make Same Select several objects and resize the set such that all the
objects have the same width. The width of the set is
Width】 based on the object in the lowermost layer.
【Make Same Select several objects and resize the set such that all the
objects have the same height. The height of the set is
Height】 based on the object in the lowermost layer.
【Align Left】 Select several objects and align the leftmost points of
the objects. The alignment is based on the object in the
lowermost layer.
【Align Center】 Select several objects and align the horizantal centers of
the objects. The alignment is based on the object in the
lowermost layer.
【Align Right】 Select several objects and align the rightmost points of
the objects. The alignment is based on the object in the
lowermost layer.
【Align Top】 Select several objects and align the topmost points of
the objects. The alignment is based on the object in the
lowermost layer.
【Align Middle】 Select several objects and align the vertical centers of
the objects. The alignment is based on the object in the
lowermost layer.
【Align Bottom】 Select several objects and align the bottommost points
of the objects. The alignment is based on the object in
the lowermost layer.
【Distribute Position several objects such that the horizantal distance
between the objects are equal.
Horizontally】
【Distribute Position several objects such that the vertical distance
between the objects are equal.
Vertically】
【Switch Language】 Select from the dropdown menu the displayed language
of the project.
【Switch State】 Select from the dropdown menu the displayed state of
the project.
【0, 1, 2, 3】 Switch the displayed state of the project for states 0, 1,
2, and 3.
【Show/Hide Toolbar Select the icons that are shown on the toolbar. Items
that are checked will be shown.
Icons】
77
 2.7 System/Project Windows
Descriptions of the System/Project Windows are as follows:
2.7.1 Screen List
The【Screen List】is used to manage the HMI screens created by the user. The
created HMI screens can be browsed here; selecting the screen with the left mouse
button will open the screen in the work space. Pressing the right mouse button will
open the management menu to perform further settings.
Refer to Chapter22.2-Screen List
The following figure is a screen of the Screen List:

Figure 45 Screen List Interface

Figure 46 Management Menu

Table 16 Screen List Management Settings

Function Description
【Goto】 【Goto】provides two methods to select a
screen to view. The first is through the drop-
down menus on the right, choose to jump
78
 directly to the screen which you want to view,
pictured below, after a screen is clicked, it will be
displayed on the work space.

The second is through the search ID or the title

of the screen, as shown in the following figure

【Startup screen】 Provided to find 【Startup Screen】quickly,

when the Startup Screen icon ( ) on the
Screen List is pressed, it will move the current
screen selection box to the【Startup Screen】
and will display this【Startup Screen】on the
Work Space.

When the mouse is moved on the Screen List,

the【Startup Screen】icon is displayed on the
upper left corner of screen, this helps designers
know which page is the【Startup Screen】.

79
 【Type】 Contains All, Base Screen, Window Screen,
Keypad Screen. Designers are able to choose
which type of screen is displayed in the【Screen
List】.
【Current selection box】 The current selection box is an orange box in the
list and displays the currently selected screen.
See the following picture.

【New Screen】 Opens the screen property setting dialog; press

OK to add the new screen (Base Screen/Window
Screen/Keypad Screen).
【Copy】 Copy the selected screen.

【Paste】 Paste the copied screen.

【Delete Screen】 Delete the selected screen, press the Ctrl button
on the keyboard, choode multiple screens and
delete them at one time on【Screen List】
【Show as Icon Mode】 The preview size will change according to the
width of the window.

80
 【Show as Icon Mode The preview size will not change according to the
window width; the icons line up side by side to
(Fixed)】 fill up the window size as much as possible.

【Show as List Mode】 The preview will be displayed as a list.

81
 【Set as Startup Screen】 Set the selected screen as the startup screen.
The background color of this screen will be
different from other screens once it is set as the
startup screen.
【Properties】 Open the screen properties setting dialog.

2.7.2 Screen Properties

Screen properties opens a window that includes screen settings, background color
and print screen. This window is accessible by right clicking the work space and
selecting “Properties”. It is accessible on any screen.
The following figures display Properties screens:

82
 Figure 47 Base Screen Properties

Figure 48 Window Screen Properties

Figure 49 Keypad Screen Properties

Table 17 Screen Properties Items

Display Item Description

83
 【ID】 Work space ID. For base screens, the ID will begin with
“BS” followed with a number. For window screens, the ID
will begin with “WS” followed with a number. For keypad
screens, the ID will begin with “KS” followed by a
number. The arrows next to the text box allows a user to
increment or decrement the number associated with the
screen ID.
【Title】 A screen caption for the current screen can be set.

【Screen Size】 The screen and keypad screen height and width (in
pixels) can be set.
Note: the smallest width and height of window screen
and keypad screen are 10.
【Security Level】 A security level for the current screen can be set. The
security level restricts users with a lower security level
than the one set from accessing the current screen
unless access is granted.
【Change Screen Auto Logs out the current user upon switching screens.

Logout】
【Execute Scripts】 Check the box to execute a script for the current screen.

【Open】 Executes the selected script when the screen is opened.

【Close】 Executes the selected script when the screen is closed.

【Cycle】 Continuously executes the selected script. Cycle is based

on the【Cycle Delay Time】.
【Cycle Delay Time】 The delay in milliseconds between cycles of the script set
in the【Cycle】option.
【Background Color】 Set the color of the workspace background.

【Display Mode】 Select the display mode, including strech, fixed

percentage stretch, fill, or original size.
【Background Use an image as the background. The buttons allow the
user to either select an image from the Image library or
Image】 from the computer. Acceptable image formats
are .jpg, .jpeg, .bmp, .png, .tif, .tiff etc.
【Underlay Screen】 Select the checkbox and select a screen to use as the
underlaying screen from the dropdown menu. The
underlay screen will reflect the selected screen. For
example, if BS2 is selected as the underlay screen on
BS1, all objects on BS2 will also be on BS1. However,
those objects can only be changed on BS2.
【Whole Screen】 Sets the range for printing as the entire screen. For
example, the the HMI used is the P5070N, the resolution
will be 800x480.
【Show Screen Clicking this will open a window where the current
84
 Image】 screen will be shown. Adjusting X and Y coordinates will
be reflected through the red rectangle on the screen
image.
【Left-up Corner】 Manually select the X and Y coordinates relative to the
upper left corner. The red rectangle will adjust
accordingly.
【Lower-right Manually select the X and Y coordinates relative to the
bottom right corner. The red rectangle will adjust
Corner】 accordingly.
【Show Title Bar】 Window screen or keypad screen can set whether show
title bar when pop up screen window
【Shown in Center】 Set to enable the window screen to show up in the
center of the screen.
【Automatic Position Keypad screen can set whether the pop-up position is
automatically adjusted.
Adjustment】
【Position】 Manually adjust the position of the window screen. This
is enabled when the【Shown in Center】is not checked.
【Monopoly】 If checked, objects outside the window screen or keypad
screen cannot be accessed while the window screen is
active.
【Change Base Screen When the window screen switch to the basic screen,
whether to retain the display of this window screen, if
Close】 check this option window screen will automatically shut
down.
This option is only supported on Windows screen.

2.7.3 Project Explorer

Project Explorer is the window to manage the entire project.

Table 18 Project Explorer Items

Function Description
【System】 Please refer to Chapter 3–System for detailed contents.
Related setting windows will appear on the work space
when each button is pressed.

Function Description
【Project View the project and HMI information,
set the project password security and
Information】 non-volatile memory configuration.

85
 【Unit The basic settings of the device can be
set here.
Setting】
【Link】 The configuration of the device/PLC
connected to the HMI can be set here.
【Servers】 The settings of various types of servers,
FTP , VNC and SMTP can be edited here.
【Security】 Security settings concerning the objects
related to the project and user privileges
can be set here.
【System View and edit the HMI system messages.

Message】
【Functions】 Related setting windows will be displayed on the work space
when this button is pressed.

Function Description
【Data Log】 Data log settings can be edited here;
please refer to Chapter 7-Data Log for
detailed contents.
【Alarm】 Alarm settings can be edited here;
please refer to Chapter8–Alarm for
detailed contents.
【Recipe】 Recipe settings can be edited here;
please refer to Chapter 9–Recipe for
detailed contents.
【Operation Operation log settings can be edited
here; please refer to Chapter 10–
Log】 Operation Log for detailed contents.
【Schedule】 Scheduler settings can be edited here;
please refer to Chapter 11–Schedule for
detailed contents.
【Data Data transfer settings can be edited
here; please refer to Chapter 12–Data
Transfer】 Transfer for detailed contents.
【Script】 Script settings can be edited here; please
refer to Chapter 13–Script for detailed
contents.
【MQTT】 MQTT settings can be edited here;
please refer to Chapter 14-MQTT for
detailed contents.
86
 【Resource】 Please refer to【Resource】for detailed contents. The
setting window will be displayed in the work space when
each button is pressed. Refer to ch 15-Resource for detailed
explanations.

Function Description
【Image Library】 Required images should be made in
advance and indexed into the
【Image Library】so that they can
easily be used when editing objects.
【Audio Library】 Required audio files should be
made and advance and indexed into
the【Audio Library】so that they
can easily be used when editing
projects.
【Tag Library】 Define the frequently used register
addresses before designing a
project to increase the system
readability when designing.
【Text Library】 If there is the need to switch the
text displayed in real-time in order
to achieve multi-language
functionality or other functions,
prepare the necessary text, a table
in the Text Library, and use the
【Control Address】to switch the
currently displayed text group when
the HMI interface is running.
【Font Library】 Build the font and commonly used
text in advance to avoid it can’t
show correctly in the future.

2.7.4 Memory Address

External devices, internal HMI devices or HMI system variables usually need to be
specified for the objects and functions of the HMI. It is difficult for a user to
remember which resources are used for which objects or functions when there are
many objects in a project; this is when【Memory Address】can be used to display
which resources are used. This way, the user will be able to effectively plan the

87
settings of any object or function in a project.

As shown in the figure below, red represents the device registers that are occupied,
green represents that registers that are not yet used; the user can arrange and set
resources through this function. Left-click an item in the list to use and the
corresponding screen or function list menu will open; double clicking the left mouse
button on the item will open the setting dialog of that item.

Figure 50 Memory Address Operation Interface

2.7.5 Output Message

When compiling, the output window will display the action status so that the
developer can know about warnings, errors and other information after compilation
is executed. Clicking the errors will open the related setting dialog directly for the
user to debug.

Figure 51 Output window

2.8 Object/Library Windows

2.8.1 Object List
This window lists all objects included on the screen; click the option in the window
and the object in the【Work Space】will be highlighted (surrounded by a red frame),
double clicking the mouse can display the editing window of the object directly.
There is a lock icon to the right of the【Object List】that can lock the function of the
object; a locked object’s position and properties cannot be changed. The eye icon
controls the visibility of the object; when the icon is clicked into a closed eye, the
88
object will not be displayed in the【Work Space】.

Figure 52 Object List

Table 19 Object List Functions

Function Description
【Send to Back】 Send the selected object to the bottommost layer
【Bring to Front】 Bring the selected object to the topmost layer.
【Move Backward】 Move the selected object down a layer.
【Move Forward】 Move the selected object up a layer.
【Delete Item】 will delete the selected object, press Ctrl can select
multiple objects, deleted at one time.
【Lock Item/ Unlock 【Unlock】: Allow editing of the object properties or
Item】 moving of the object.
【Lock】: Disables editing of the object properties or
moving of the object.
【Show Item/ Hide 【Visible】: Display object.
Item】 【Invisible】: Hide object.
【Object ID】 ID number of the object. Ex: LD_0001, LD is the model
code, 0001 is the code number.

2.8.2 Toolbox
The FvDesigner provides a basic【Toolbox】; The developer can expand various
types of objects provided directly from the toolbox according to the different
categories. Select an object and drag it over to the【Work Space】with the mouse to
insert the object into the work space.

89
 Figure 53 Toolbox Illustration

2.8.3 User Toolbox

Although the【Toolbox】provided by this software is able to meet the needs of most
users, the objects provided in the【Toolbox】are all preset values and does not allow
users to use custom objects. This is why this software also provides the【User Toolbox】
function. In addition to allowing users to access objects that they have modified, it also
provides【Import】and【Export】functions so that the objects in the 【User Toolbox】
can be quickly transferred between different computers, speeding up project
development.

90
 Figure 54 User Toolbox Illustration

2.9 Object/Library Windows

【Work Space】displays in two forms: The【Screen Edit Window】and【Function
Settings Window】.

2.9.1 Screen Edit Window

Opening a window or adding a screen from the Screen List will display the Screen
Edit Window in the work space. The【Status Bar】can be used to adjust the window
display ratio and when an object is clicked,【Basic Setting】and【Status Bar】will
display the position, size and other object alignment information. Use the functions
on the design page to edit the objects in this window.【Toolbox】or objects in the
【User Toolbox】can be added to the Screen Edit Window directly using drag-and-
drop with the mouse.

91
 Figure 55 Work Space–Screen Edit

2.9.2 Function Settings Window

When a function setting to the left of the Project Explorer is clicked, for example
when the operation log function option is clicked, the【Work Space】will display the
operation log setting window as shown in the figure below. To close this window
after setting is complete, click on the “x” (close) on the top of the screen.

Figure 56 Work Space–Function Settings

92
 3. System
Click on the setting option in【System】and the related setting window will be
displayed at the work space of the window.

Figure 57 System

3.1 Project Information

Project information includes the model and specifications of the product used in the
project, the IO interfaces included on the device, and project configuration
information as shown below.

Table 20 Project Information

Item Description
【Project File】 Information on the project files including the name of the
project, creator, and the last save time.

【HMI Unit】 Detailed information on the HMI can be seen here,

including the series, name, screen information and other
information.

93
 【Memory】 The information of the memory configuration, users can set
the size of the register and the type of backup memory
used in the project. (For more details , please refer to
chapter20-Address Registers)

【Security】 The project developer is able to set a project, upload, and

download password. To shorten developing time, the
upload and download password is only required once every
time the project is opened.

【Project Protect】
When the project is opened, you need to enter the set
password.

【Enable Project Password】

After enabling a project password, you will be prompted to
enter a new password. If you have already set the
password, you will be prompted to enter the existing
password in order to change or turn off the project
password. This will make it so every time the project is
opened, the set password will have to be entered to be
able to edit the project.

【Deny Decompile】
94
 Makes it so the user is not allowed to decompile the
project after uploading to the HMI. There will be no prompt
message.

【Decompile Use Project Password】

For this option to be enabled, the project password has to
be set and turned on. After turning it on, the program will
prompt the user to enter the project password if the user
chooses to decompile the project.

【Project Execution Protect】

The implementation of this function will allow the
developer to control which customer can use their project
on the HMI. The customer ID set by the developer needs to
be the same as the customer ID set on the HMI to allow the
project to run on the HMI.

If the customer ID’s do not match, the HMI will stay on the
boot screen. The touch function, Ethernet port function,
USB port function, and COM port function will all turn off
until the next time the HMI is booted successfully.

【Enable Customer ID】

After enabling this function, you can set the customer ID
required to boot up the HMI using your project.

【Upload and Download Protection】

Protect the project while uploading and downloading.

【Enable Upload Password】

When enabled, you can set the upload password. Once set,
the HMI will prompt the user to enter the password set by
the developer to be able to upload the project file.

【Deny Upload】
After enabling, the project will not be able to upload from
the HMI to the computer.

【Enable Download Password】

After enabling, you can set the download password. Once
set, when the user presses download, they will be
prompted for the password set by the developer. Once the
correct password is entered, the project will be
downloaded. The password only has to be entered once
95
 per project use to save the developer time. Next time the
project is opened, the download password must be entered
once again.

3.2 Unit Setting

Table 21 Unit Setting
Item Description
【Basic】 The basic setting includes the Startup, Idle State, and Resume
Setting. The Delay Time can be set for Startup and Screen Saver,
and the Backlight Saver can be set for the Idle State. The Screen
Saver can automatically switch to a preset window or turn off
the Backlight Saver when the system has been idle for a certain
amount of time in order to save power.

96
 The Screen Saver can switch to a base screen or default Screen
Saver screen that includes【Time】and【Custom Text】mode.
【Time】mode

【Custom Text】mode

【Font】
Set the screen saver time or customize text font.

【Size】
Set the screen saver time or customize text size.

【Text】
Set the screen saver time or customize text.

【Resume Settings】
Settings for actions the HMI takes when exiting the Idle State
are set here. The【Change to Screen】option allows the user to
control which screen the HMI is at upon exiting from the screen
saver. The【Auto Log-out】setting can be checked if the HMI
user should be logged out upon resuming from a screen saver.
The【Show Log-in Dialog】pops up upon resuming from the
screen saver.

【Backlight Saver】
Controls settings for auto-dimming the backlight after a set
amount of time. The【Waiting Time】dropdown menu allows
97
 users to choose the time the HMI is active before dimming the
backlight.

【Object】
【Overlapped switches can be activated in sequence by one
touch】If there are multiple buttons overlapped in the same
position, when this position is touched, the overlapped buttons
will be triggered at the same time. If 4 buttons (M0, M1, M2,
M3) were overlapped, then they will be triggered.

【Animation Object Position Update Rate】

Update rate for the object.

【Disabled Sign Style】

There are 4 styles to satisfy the different requirements and the
setting will be applied in the whole project.

【Disable screen image optimize(Screen image and text will be

sharpening】
Will optimize the image and words, but the use of memory will
increase.

98
 【PLC Sync】 HMI has built-in RTC clock. It can be synchronized with PLC RTC
by【PLC Sync】【Clock】setting.

【Write Time/Date to PLC】

Write RTC clock data of HMI to the Write Address of PLC.
When there has FATEK PLC in the【Link】, ‘FATEK PLC RTC’
button will appear on the right side, click it to fill in the address
automatically.

【Interval】
Set how much time to write the time of HMI to PLC

【Synchronize HMI with PLC】

Read RTC clock data from the Read Address of PLC, and write
the data to

【Interval】
Set how much time to read the clock data from the address
specified by the PLC and write to the HMI

Write Address and Read Address data format:

WORD 0 Second 0~59
WORD 1 Minute 0~59
WORD 2 Hour 0~23
WORD 3 Day 1~31
WORD 4 Month 1~12
WORD 5 Year 0~99
WORD 6 Day of Week 0~6
Note:
The value of Sunday is 0, 1-6 (Sunday, Monday~Saturday)
【Control 【Control Address】
Address】 The following control addresses are read from PLC periodically,
and set or trigger specific internal functions.

99
 【Changing Base Screen by Register Address】
HMI changes the current screen to target screen, according to
the value of register address. The value is the ID of the target
screen. The value can be reset to 0 after changing screens.

【Read Current Base Screen ID by Register Address】

The current screen displayed on the HMI will have its screen ID
written to the specified register. For example, if the HMI screen
is base screen 3, the value of the specified register will be 3.
The screen ID of the current screen can also be read by
accessing the value inside the OP_BASE_SCREEN_ID register.

【Security Level】
The security level can be modified by the value of register
address.

【Command Flags】
Command Flags control address format:
WORD 0 Command Flags triggered bits
WORD 1 Command Flags parameter

To enable the functions, the user has to configure control

addresses and click target items in【--- Command Flags Setting -
--】. However, the value (WORD 0) is set to【Status Response】
after the process if it is enabled.

When each triggered bits value (WORD 0) is changed from 0 to

1, HMI will process the specific function. HMI only handles with
one command process every scanning time.

Command Flags includes functions as follows:

100
 Sound Buzzer (WORD 0 Bit0)
WORD 1 = 0 Short Beep
WORD 1 = 1 Long Beep
WORD 1 = 2 Short-Short Beep
WORD 1 = 3 Long-Short Beep
WORD 1 = 4 Continuous Beep
Backlight On (WORD 0 Bit1)
WORD 1 Reserved
Backlight Off (WORD 0 Bit2)
WORD 1 Reserved
Screen Saver On/Off (WORD 0 Bit3)
WORD 1 Reserved

【Screen Capture】
Set the control address to trigger, also select the output space
and format.
【Custom】 【Output File Codec】
When the developer has set the export data to the HMI, micro
SD Card, or the USB storage, the data format can be selected.
The exported file’s data format (Big5, GB18030, UTF-8 encoding)
can be chosen such that it satisfies the user’s computer
environment.
For example, as the Traditional Chinese Windows environment,
open a new project by default as Big5.

【Default Keypad】
The developer can configure the preset keypad for the operating
interface so that this pre-set keypad will pop up when operating
text or numeric input objects. Available settings include Decimal
Number, Hexadecimal Number and Character.

【Save Location】
When FvDesigner model choose as PC, will appear【Save
Location】setting option, figure as shown below, this option is

101
 mainly to set the default location where FvRT is stored

【Internal】
Set when the FvRT is excuted, if setting export the file to
【Internal】in the unit setting, the file will be save to the
specified location, if this field is empty, then will save to the
default location. Is use the default location to store, the system
will create a folder the name is same as the project name under
the same path.
For example:
The project save in: C:\Files\Project11.fpj
then the system defaults to the【Internal】storage location:
C:\Files\Project11\run\storage\ internal.

【USB Storage】
Set when the FvRT is excuted, if setting export the file to【USB
Storage】in the unit setting, the file will be save to the specified
location.

【microSD Card】
Set when the FvRT is excuted, if setting export the file to
【microSD Card】in the unit setting, the file will be save to the
specified location.

【IoT Service】 【IoT Service】

It provides users to set the connection status of FATEK cloud
functions on the HMI and GPS positioning messages of the HMI.

102
 【iMonitor Status Address】
Display the connection status of iMonitor.

【iAccess Status Address】

Display the connection status of iAccess.

【iLocation (GPS Information)】

Support static and dynamic two types.
GPS format has dddDDDDDDD, dddmmMMMMM, and
dddmmssSSS three types.

In static mode, users can set the parameter of the latitude and
longitude.

103
 In dynamic mode, users can set the GPS coordinate in the
specified address.

【Status Bar】

【Show Status Bar】

Set to display the status bar. When this option is selected, the
rest of the options are available to configure.

【Show Status Bar By Control Address】

Set a signal to control the status bar visibility.

【Background Color】
Set the background color of the status bar.

【Position】
Select status bar to position. Positions include:
up/down/left/right edges.

104
 【Select all】
Select system, peripheral devices, notification, and
communication.

【System】
Item Icon Description
【System Displays the device name, station
number, firmware version, OS
Information】 Version, Ethernet, Screen Saver,
Date/Time and other information.
And you can set the HMI ethernet,
screen saver and date/time
through this dialog

【System Displays the system time

Time】
【System Displays the system date

Date】

【Peripheral devices】
Item Icon Description
【HMI Free Space】 Displays the current
available storage space and
associated percentage.
The number is white when
normal and red when less
than 10%.
【SD Card Free Space】 Displays the current SD
card available storage
space, and associated
percentage
The number is white when
normal and red when less
than 10%.
105
 If the HMI cannot detect a
SD card it will be display a
“?”.
【USB Storage Free Displays USB device’s
current available storage
Space】 space and associated
percentage.
The number is white when
normal and red when less
than 10%.
If the HMI cannot detect
an USB device it will be
display “?”.

【Notify】
Item Icon Description
【Buzzer On/Off】 Displays the status of
current buzzer on/off.
The function also can turn
on or turn off in HMI
【System setting】.
【Audio On/Off】 Displays the status of
current audio on/off.
The function also can turn
on or turn off in HMI
【System setting】.
【Alarm Number】 This icon will flash when an
Alarm occurs.
【Backlight level】 Shows the current HMI
backlight brightness

【Communication】
Item Icon Description
【COM1】 Displays the current status
of COM1 communication.
The color will display green
when communication is
normal; the color is red
when there is a
communication error.(If
the link is not set , the
color will maintain in green
not change). Detail about
communication error
106
 codes, please refer ch28-
Communication Error
Codes
【COM3】 Displays the current status
of COM3 communication.
The color will display green
when communication is
normal; the color is red
when there is a
communication error. (If
the link is not set , the
color will maintain in green
not change). Detail about
communication error
codes, please refer ch28-
Communication Error
Codes
【COM4】 Displays the current status
of COM4 communication.
The color will display green
when communication is
normal; the color is red
when there is a
communication error. (If
the link is not set , the
color will maintain in green
not change). Detail about
communication error
codes, please refer ch28-
Communication Error
Codes
【PLC Port】 Displays the current status
of PLC Port
communication.
The color will display green
when communication is
normal; the color is red
when there is a
communication error. (If
the link is not set , the
color will maintain in green
not change). Detail about
communication error
codes, please refer ch28-
Communication Error
Codes

107
 【Lan】 Displays the current status
of Lan communication.
The color will display green
when communication is
normal; the color is red
when there is a
communication error. (If
the link is not set , the
color will maintain in green
not change). Detail about
communication error
codes, please refer ch28-
Communication Error
Codes

【Index 【Enable Customize Index Register】

Register】 Enable index register to use default register or customize, you
can define the corresponding address in the address field after
enable, it can be HMI internal address or PLC register address,
for example, I0 can correspond to PLC R100 address, for
designer easy to use, please refer to ch20.2-Index Register
for more details about index register.

108
 3.3 Link
FATEK HMI can connect to the following types of devices.

Table 22 Device Connection

Device Description
PLC Device Connecting to the various brands of Device/PLC Driver.
Printer Connecting to the printer.
Video Input Connecting to USB camera.
USB Barcode Scanner Connecting to USB Barcode Scanner.

3.3.1 PLC Device

Setting up the communication device Device/PLC: The connection overview will list
the information of all the devices connected to the HMI; use the Add/Edit/Delete
functions to configure the connection device.

109
 Figure 58 Device Connection Setting–PLC Device

Double click on a device in the list to open the device property setting window
directly for editing. The interface of sub-link is as shown below.

Figure 59 Link Properties

Table 23 Link Property Settings

Item Description
【Link Setting】 Basic settings for connection.

Item Description
【Name】 The name of this connection.

【Interface Type】 Transfer method; available

selections include Direct
Link(Serial), Direct
Link(Ethernet), Mult-Link
Master(Serial), Mult-Link
110
 Master(Ethernetl), Mult-Link
Slave(Serial) or Mult-Link
Slave(Ethernet).
【Manufacturer】 The manufacturer of the
connecting device.
【Help】 Look for a detailed description
of each brand driver, for
example, select FATEK, then
show up FATEK PLC related
communication settings.
Includding communication
settings, memory resource
review, PLC setting, HMI
setting, wiring diagrams, etc.
for designers easy to view and
use.
【Product Series】 The product name of the
connecting equipment.
【Interface Setting】 Communication interface setup; the interface will change
according to the【Interface Type】in【Link Setting】.

When the【Interface Type】is【Direct Link(Serial)】

Item Description
【Port】 Select the port to connect.

【Baudrate】 Select the baud rate.

【Parity】 Select the verification

method.
【Data Bits】 Select the length of the data.

【Stop Bits】 Select the length of the stop

bit.
【Timeout (ms)】 Set the waiting time before
ending the connection and
generating an error when
there is abnormal
communication.
【Command Delay The sending and receiving
delay for controller signals.
(ms)】
111
 【Retry Count】 The number of times the HMI
will automatically re-send the
confirmation signal when
there is abnormal
communication.

When【Interface Type】is【Direct Link(Ethernet)】

Item Description
【IP Address】 Select the IP address of the
device.
【Port】 Select the port terminal.

【Timeout Time Set the waiting time before

ending the connection and
(ms)】 generating an error when
there is abnormal
communication.
【Command Delay The sending and receiving
delay for controller signals.
(ms)】
【Retry Count】 The number of times the HMI
will automatically re-send the
confirmation signal when
there is abnormal
communication.

【Comm. Error Handling】

Select an action to handle a communication error.

There are four handling modes as follows:

⚫ Process Sequentially
Process each communication data sequentially. If
the data cannot be queried this scanning time,
system will re-query it again next time.

112
 The communication error window shows up when
communication has failed. User can close the
window and continue to operate the current screen.
Show Disconnect Message:
Every time a communication error has occurred, an
error message window will pop up. Operation may
continue once the error message is closed.
⚫ Disconnect
When a communication error occurs, the links stop
communicating. It resets the condition to re-start
communication according to Disconnect Setting.
【Disconnect Setting】
Show Disconnect Message:
The communication error window shows up
when communication has failed. User can close
the window and continue to operate the current
screen.
Return by Changing Base Screen:
The disconnected link restarts communication
after changing the base screen.
Return Time:
The disconnected link re-starts communication
when return time is reached.

⚫ Continue
The communication error window shows up when
communication has failed. User can not close the
window and has to stop operating the current
screen. When communication is restored, the
window closes automatically.
⚫ Stop
The communication error window shows when
communication has failed. User can not close the
window and has to stop to operating the current
screen. Retry switch is available to attempt to
reestablish communication. When the
communication is restored, the window closes
automatically.

For more info on communication error codes, refer to

Chapter 28 – Communication Error Codes

【Advanced】

113
 Options Description
【Automatic Automatically read the station
number, but will not be able to
Station Number】 use the sub-link function. (The
connected PLC needs to be
checked without checking the
station number)
【Maximal Gap】 Set the maximal gap for each
read command. For example,
there are D0, D5, D100, D102
four numeric display object, and
the maximal gap is 10, then D0
and D5 will be composed of a
read communication command,
and D100 and D102 will be
composed of another read
communication command,
because the maximal gap is 10.
【Device Specific Configuration setting of the equipment.

Setting】
【Sub-links】
If the【Sub-links】 box is not to checked, 1-to-1
connection is used.

Item Description
【Device Name】 Set the name of the
equipment.
【Station Number】 Set the station number of the
connection equipment.
【Set in Register】 The station number
communicated with the
connection equipment can be
dynamically set by the HMI
internal register. For example,
set $U:V10, and $U:V10=1,

114
 then it will communicate with
station no.1, during the HMI
run time, when $U:V10=5,
then it will communication
with station no.5. after select
this option, except setting the
default register, there is
【Default Number】below
you can set, for example, set
3, download the project for
the first time will be station
no.3 to communicate with the
link equipment, then it will
communicate with the
【Register】value after that.
【Link Status】 Display the link status, you can
set default register after
selected, if set $U:V30:
$U:V30=0x0000 indicates that
the connection is normal.
$U:V30=0x0001 indicates that
the connection is abnormal.
$U:V30=0x8000 indicates that
the connection is disconnect.
※When Modbus Slave is selected,
the connection status stores the
number of connections of the
Modbus slave.
【Enable/Disable The connected devices can be
dynamically set by HMI
Link in Register】 internal register whether to
enable or disable, provide
maintenance personnel or
operators can decide whether
to connect with the device
during HMI execution.
Ex: set $U:V10.0, when
$U:V10.0 = ON, then it will
communicate with this device,
when $U:V10.0 = OFF, then it
will not communicate with
this device

Select【Sub-links】, supports 1-to-N connections.

115
 Set as figure, device name 0 communicate with station
no.1 link device, device name 1 , enable【Set Station
Number in Register】dynamically decision by $U:V20, for
example, $U:V20=5, then it will communicate with
station no.5 link device and enable default number as 5,
device name 2 communicate with station no.3 link device
and enable link status, enable【Link Status】when
$U:V40=0 indicates that the connection is normal, when
$U:V40=1 indicates that the connection is abnormal.
Device name 3 communicate with station no.4, then
enable【Enable/Disable Link in Register】, when
$U:V51.0 = ON will communicate with this device, when
$U:V51.0 = OFF will not communicate with this device

3.3.1.1 PLC Address Setting

The address of the registers can be set at the address setting field in the settings
window of each object. Users can enter the register address directly using the keypad
or select the address from the【Input Address】settings dialog by pressing the
button on the right. Users can also directly input a register address. The device name
for the register is not necessary. For example, if the user enters R100, the software
will automatically associate the register with a device name, i.e. @0:R100.
When typing a string in the PLC address setting field, it shows a hint list to quickly
select a specific device or tag. When mouse moves into the setting filed with Tag
string, the mapping address shows on the tip.

(Fill in the device name and address)

(Fill in the register address)

116
 (Register list)

(Use tags)

Figure 60 PLC address setting field

The【Input Address】settings dialog is as shown below; the three source modes

available for selection are Device, System and Tag.

Figure 61 PLC Input Address Setting Dialog

Table 24 Access Address Settings

Item Description
【Device】 Register address inside the HMI/PLC device. After
selecting the connection, the address will display the
register pattern for the designer to choose from and fill
in the address of the pattern. Fill addresses in
sequentially and the legal addresses will be displayed in
green and illegal ones in red. This ensures correct
addresses will always be entered.
Item Description
【Device】 Device where the register is
located.
【Type】 Device type of the register.

【Address】 Register address.

【Index Register】 Index register setting.

Selecting this option means
using the index register. The
last number(s) in the address
is the index register address.

117
 【System】 Special register address inside the HMI. The address type
displays information on the register function and the
corresponding register address of the function.

Item Description
【System Tag】 The system’s default register
tag.
【Address】 The corresponding register
address of the system tag.
【Description】 Describe the function of the
system tag.

【Tag】 Use the tags defined in the custom tag library.

【Use Index The index register is an index addressing register. The

user can change the read and write addresses of the
Address】 online objects on the HMI while the screen program is
running without changing the contents of the object
address once there is an index register. This software

118
 provides a total of 128 sets of index registers with 64 sets
of 16-bit index registers and 64 sets of 32-bit registers.
As shown in the example below, if the address content of
the $I0 index register is 10, then this address is marked as
R2010 of PLC0.

3.3.2 Printer
A printer can be connected to the HMI and can print out HMI screen captures or
other information. To print, a printer has to be configured through selecting type of
printer to connect and the port on the HMI it is connected to. Printing can also be
controlled through a control address. See Chapter 16.3.2.4 -【Function Switch】for
more details.
The【Printer】settings page is shown below. Each option is explained.

Figure 62【Printer】Settings Screen

Table 25【Printer】Settings
Property Description

【Printer】 Check to enable printer configuration.

【Interface Support USB and serial two types, when the project model is
PC , the PC Default Printer can be selected.
Type】
【Model】 【USB】- PictBridge
Use mini-USB cable connected to the printer that support
PicBridge, support model as follow:
119
 http://www.cipa.jp/pictbridge/CertifiedModels/
PictBridgeCertifiedModels_E.html#PRT_BENQ

【Serial】- Argox PPLB, EPSON ESC/POS, SPRT A Series

Argox PPLB- label printer
EPSON ESC/POS- Dox matrix/pos printer
SPRT A Series- SPRT’s A series printer

【PC Default Printer】

Print through the PC default printer.
【Settings】 【Basic】
Set the related port parameter.

【Advanced】
Set the encoding to communicate with the printer (EPSON only
needs to be aware of), and print zoom and whether to cut.

【Print Screen Setting】

Set the Print Method, Inverted Image, and Orientation.

3.3.2.1 Argox PPLB tutorial

By using Argox Company provided software ArgoBar Pro to generate .prn file then
import it to FvDesigner, allows FvDesigner and HMI to do tags editing. Currently only
support PPLB series tag.
ArgoBar Pro offical download and simple tutorial: https://reurl.cc/D15d0e
1. Build project

120
Select PPLB 200dpi, Printing Options select Printer Command, or it may show format
error after import tags.

2. Set up the tag for replacement

Currently we only support the following three functions:

Item Description
【Text】 Font: Need to select PPLB Font type so when importing
the .prn file the FvDesigner will support the label
replace function. If the font type is in TrueType, the file
will be viewed as an image but not replaceable words.

String: The 'Text String' field can only text English if text
Chinese then the file will be viewed as image and can
not be replaced after import to FvDesigner.
【Barcode】 Just follow the ArgoBar Pro software attention.

【QR Code】 Just follow the ArgoBar Pro software attention.

3. Output file
Click 'print' and check the checkbox 'print to file' to output the .prn file.

121
4. Import to FvDesigner

Click add button to import .prn file then the label properties can be set.

Item Description
【General】 【Label ID】
Set a number to the label for printing.

【Label Name】
Name the label.

【Comment】
Add comment for the label.
【Mapping Table】 【Alias】
Name the field.

122
 【Label Type】
Tags set in the ArgoBar Pro.

【Original Data】
Default value to be displayed.

【Data Type】
Text(Static Word), Dataitem(Time), and Register.

3.3.3 Video Input

When the project wants to connect to USB Camera need to set the settings here first
so that the video input display can do action, for more detail please refer to
ch16.3.32-【Video Input Display】, in addition, when the alarm occurs, photos taken
by the camera can also be sent to designated person via email, for more detail please
refer to ch8.3-Alarm Application Example, this function only support after OS v1.0.14
or PC version.
Note 1: This function only support in P5 series HMI.
Note 2: This function only sipport HMI OS version 1.0.14 or later and PC version.
Note 3: This function only support MJPEG format.
Note 4: Only support the following 2 USB cameras
- Logitech: HD Camera C270
- Microsoft: LifeCam HD-3000
The【Video Input】settings page is shown below. Each option is explained.

Figure 63【Video Input】Setting Window

Table 26【Video Input】property settings

Options Description
【Basic】 【Enable USB Camera】
Set whether to enable USB camera function.

【Size】
123
 Set the size of the video input display, whether the selected
size is available depends on the camera support.

【Speed】
Set the screen update speed, it will take up more HMI
system resources if select fast.
【Control】 【Auto Connect to Camera】
Set whether to Auto Connect to Camera function.

【Enable Control Word】

Control the video input display through control word,
whether the control is available depends on the camera
support.

【Argument Word】
When control word is enabled, argument word is the
parameter to change the control of camera.

When control word or argument word have changed, the

setting will be written.

Function Hex Parameter

Play 0x0001 N/A
Pause 0x0002 N/A
Stop 0x0003 N/A
Adjust the Image 0x0100 0-100 : The
Contrast percentage value
is between the
minimum and
the maximum;
255:Reset
Adjust the Image 0x0101 0-100 : The
Brightness percentage value
is between the
minimum and
the maximum;
255:Reset
Adjust the Image 0x0102 0-100 : The
Saturation percentage value
is between the
minimum and
the maximum;
255:Reset
Adjust the Hue 0x0103 0-100 : The
of the Image percentage value
124
 is between the
minimum and
the maximum;
255:Reset
Adjust the 0x0104 0-100 : The
Gamma Value of percentage value
the Image is between the
minimum and
the maximum;
255:Reset
Adjust the Image 0x0105 0-100 : The
Gain percentage value
is between the
minimum and
the maximum;
255:Reset
Adjust the Image 0x0107 0-100 : The
Sharpness percentage value
is between the
minimum and
the maximum;
255:Reset
Adjust the Image 0x0108 0-100 : The
Backlight percentage value
Compensation is between the
minimum and
the maximum;
255:Reset
Adjust the 0x0109 0-100 : The
Image White percentage value
Balance is between the
Temperature minimum and
the maximum;
255:Reset
Enable the 0x010A 1 : Enable;
Image White 0 : Disable;
Balance 255:Reset
Temperature
Adjust the 0x010B 0-100 : The
Image Exposure percentage value
Value is between the
minimum and
the maximum;
255:Reset
Enable the 0x010C 1 : Enable;
Image Exposure 0 : Disable;
255:Reset
125
 Enable Image 0x0110 1 : Enable;
Flip Horizontal 0 : Disable;
255:Reset
Enable Image 0x0111 1 : Enable;
Flip Vertical 0 : Disable;
255:Reset
Reset Image 0x01FF N/A
Save Image to 0x0200 N/A
Internal
Memory
Save Image to 0x0201 N/A
USB Flash
Save Image to 0x0202 N/A
SD Card

【Enable Response Word】

Display whether the video iuput display was enable
success or the result of control word setting.
Description Hex
Normal No Error 0x0000
connected 0x8001
Error HMI no support 0x0100
No device 0x0101
Device initialization failed 0x0102
Device disconnected 0x0103
Control_device is not 0x0200
initialized
Control_Unsupported 0x0201
Control _ wrong value 0x0202
Control _ Busy 0x0203
Control _ read only 0x0204
Control _ input error 0x0205
Control _ archive failed 0x0300
unknown mistake 0x0FFF

【Save Image File Limit】

Access limit when using the control word to set the video
iuput display archiving, over the limit will overwrite the old
file.

3.3.4 USB Barcode Scanner

Scan the barcode and display the information on the numerical input display.

126
 Figure 64【USB Barcode Scanner】Setting Window

Table 27【USB Barcode Scanner】property settings

Item Description
【Read Byte Limit】 Set the maximum data that can be displayed.

【Storage Start Set the storage address.

Address】
【Receive Completion The bit will be true when scanning complete.

Bit】

127
 4. Servers
This chapter will introduce the various server functions provided by the HMI; users can
use these server functions to achieve needs such as remote file access , send email
and remote screen control.

4.1 【FTP Server】

FTP Server allows users to access files on the internal storage, SD card and USB storage
device of the HMI. There are two ways to deploy the FTP server on the HMI. One is
through the system settings of the HMI and the other is through the projects settings.
Project settings will override system settings at project startup.

Figure 65 FTP Application Diagram

4.1.1 Deploying FTP Server using System Settings of

HMI
The following screen will appear when the【Server Settings】page in the system
settings of the HMI is opened:

Figure 66 FTP Servers Setting–HMI

The following are the descriptions of each field in the figure above:
128
 Table 28 FTP Server Settings
Field Description

【Enable FTP Server】 Set to enable the FTP server; other fields can
only be accessed when FTP Server is enabled.
【Port】 Specify the port to listen for FTP Server; the
default port is 21.
【Enable Read-Only Account】 Set to enable read-only accounts. A user name
and password pair can be created once this
【User Name】 option is enabled. Users who log in to FTP
【Password】 Server with this account can only read files
and cannot perform operations including
creating, modifying or deleting files.
【Enable Read-Write Account】 Set to enable read-write accounts. A user
name and password pair can be created once
【User Name】 this option is enabled. Users who log in to FTP
【Password】 Server with this account can access files as
well as perform operations including creating,
modifying or deleting files.
【Mask Passwords】 Set if the password is to be encrypted.

4.1.2 Deploying FTP Server using Project Settings

Click on【Server】in the【System】window of the【Project Explorer】to the left of
FvDesigner to enter the【Server】settings screen where the【FTP】tab page can be
used to setup FTP Server, as shown in the figure below:

Figure 67 FTP Server Setting–Project

The FTP settings of the project can be used to override HMI【System Setting】FTP
Server settings on the HMI when the project is loaded if【Overwrite FTP
Configuration on HMI】is checked. The other settings are identical to the setting
screen on the HMI; please refer to the explanations in Chapter 21.1.4-
【Servers/IoT】.

129
 Note: if HMI has enable FTP sever, but the project setting doesn’t enable FTP
server, then the FTP sever will be disable when download the project.

4.1.3 FTP Server Example

We will use the following steps to illustrate how to use FTP Server:

1. Enter the system settings of the HMI during boot up and then open
【Server Settings】; setup FTP Server as shown in Figure 445.

2. Use Windows Explorer to open the address:ftp://user:password@HMI IP

Address to see the files on the HMI, as shown in the figure below:

Figure 68 Using FTP to view files stored in internal memory, SD, or USB

4.2 【VNC Server】

VNC Server allows users to remotely view and operate the HMI functions through an
Internet connection so that users can check the data on the HMI or operate the HMI
remotely. There are two ways to deploy the VNC server on the HMI. One is through
the system settings of the HMI and the other is through the project settings. Project
settings will have a higher priority if both settings are set.

130
 Figure 69 VNC application illustration

4.2.1 Deploying VNC Server using System Settings of

HMI
The following screen will appear when the【Server Settings】page in the system
settings interface of the HMI is opened:

Figure 70 VNC Server Setting-HMI

The following are the descriptions of each field in the figure above:

Table 29 VNC Server Settings

Field Description

【Enable VNC Set to enable the VNC server; other fields can only be set when
the VNC server is enabled.
Server】
【Connections】 Set how many VNC clients can be connected to this VNC
server, the maximum number of support will vary depending
on the model.
【Mask Set if the password is to be encrypted.

Passwords】

131
 【Port】 Set the VNC port, can only set the first client port, the second
will automatically increase, for example, the first set 5900, the
second will be 5901.
【Password】 The password used to login to the VNC server.

4.2.2 Deploying VNC Server using Project Settings

Click on【Server】in the【System】window of the【Project Explorer】to the left of
FvDesigner to enter the【Server】settings, in which the【VNC】tab page can be
used to set the VNC server, as shown in the figure below:

Figure 71 VNC Server Setting-Project

The VNC settings of the project can be used to override the VNC server settings when
the project is loaded if【Overwrite VNC Configuration on HMI】is checked. The
other settings are identical to the setting screen on the HMI; please refer to the
explanations in Chapter 21.1.4 -【Servers/IoT】.

4.2.3 VNC Server Example

We will use the following steps to illustrate how to use the VNC server:

1. Install a VNC client software; VNC Viewer

6.1.7(https://www.realvnc.com/download/viewer/) by RealVNC is used in
this example.

2. The following screen can be seen once VNC Viewer is opened and add
link:

132
 Figure 72 VNC Viewer Connection Screen

Press Connect after entering the IP of the HMI, and a prompt will appear asking the
user to enter the password:

Figure 73 VNC Viewer Password Confirmation Screen

3. Press OK after entering the password and real-time screens on the HMI
can be seen.

Figure 74 VNC Viewer remote monitor screen

Note: Please adjust the settings of the VNC Viewer if the HMI screens did not appear after entering
the correct password; just set the value of FullColor in Options->Advanced->Expert to True.
133
 4.3 【SMTP】
SMTP(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol), is a widely used protocol for sending mail over
the Internet, this chapter will describe how to set to let user can send the email
through HMI. For example, when an alarm occurs, an alarm message can be
immediately sent to an operator or a designated e-mail recipient, so that the
operator can handle and maintain the major issues that occur in the device.

4.3.1 【SMTP】setting
The function is on the left side of FvDesigner, is in【Project Explorer】【System】
【Servers】setting page, figure as shown below.

Figure 75【Sever】【SMTP】setting paging

Table 30【Sever】【SMTP】setting property

Field Description

【Enable SMTP】 Decide whether to enable SMTP function, check to set the
following fields.
【SMTP Setting】 Set the server, port, user, encryption and password of
【SMTP】

【Server】
The sending email server, the following table shows common
mail servers for reference , please refer to the various mail
server announcements .

Email SMTP Server Port Encryption

GMail smtp.gmail.com 465 SSL
Hotmail smtp.live.com 587 TLS
134
 Yahoo smtp.mail.yahoo.com 465 SSL
AOL smtp.aol.com 587 TLS
QQ smtp.qq.com 465 SSL

【Port】
Each e-mail mail server has different connection ports.
Please refer to the above table or check the mail server
announcements.

【Encryption】
Each email mail server has different encryption ways. Please
refer to the above table or check the mail server
announcements.

【User】
Email address of sender.

【Password】
Email password of sender.
【Sender 【Name】
Information】 Set the name of the sender.

【Email Address】
Set the sender’s email address to send the email.
【Error】 Set whether to display the result of sending email on the
HMI or PLC register, error code show as below.

Error Code Meaning

0 Successfully send.
1 Failed to connect to sever.
2 Failed to log in
3 Failed to send email.

【Reset the Register to Zero Before Sending Mails】

Check whether to reset the register to 0 before sending
mails.
【Contact List】 Set the recipients’s email address and groups, there are two
pagings, includes【Contacts】and【Groups】.

【Contacts】paging shown as below, each meaning of the

options are as follow:

135
 Options Function Icon
Add Add new contacts.
Delete Delete the selected contacts.
Edit Edit the selected contacts.
Move up Move up the selected contacts.
Move Move down the selected contacts.
down
Import Import contacts from outside,
there are【Default Format】or
【Outlook】two ways to import
CSV file, figure as shown below.

Export Export the contact list as a FATEK

style CSV file.

The【Groups】tab page as shown below, the meaning of

each setting option is as follows:

136
 Options Function Icon
Add Add Contact Group.
Delete Delete the selected contact group.
Edit Edit the selected contact group.
Copy Copy contact group.

Note : the SMTP function of sending email will only send to

the specified group. For example, group 1 has A recipient,
group 2 has B and C recipients, when sending email to
group 2, B and C will receive the same mail.

【Check SMTP Check whether SMTP is setting correct or not, press【Check

Setting】 SMTP Setting】button, will show up the window and select
the group.

If success will show up the window below

And the group will receive a SMTP testing email from

FvDesigner.

4.3.2 【SMTP】setting example

We will use the following steps to explain how to set the【SMTP】function and test
whether SMTP is correct, here we use gmail to explain, as for how to combine with
alarms, when the alarm occurs, you can send emails to the configured recipients
through the【SMTP】function. For details, refer to Section 8.3 - Alarm Application
Example.

Step1 : Click【Servers】in the【System】window in【Project Explorer】on the left

of FvDesigner, enter the【Servers】setting page, switch to【SMTP】tab, and enable
【SMTP】, as shown below
137
 Figure 76 SMTP setting window

Step 2 : According to the Gmail server, set the【Servers】as smtp.gmail.com, set the
【Port】as 465, set the【Encryption】as SSL, fill【User】in user’s e-mail address,
and set the sender’s email password in【Password】, fill the actual user name and
password of the【User】and【Password】, as shown below

Figure 77 SMTP sever setting window

Step 3 : fill up【Name】and【Email Address】of the sender information, fill up your

actual【User】and【Password】, as shown below.

Figure 78 SMTP sender information setting window

Step 4 : fill up【Contacts】and【Groups】, please fill in your actual recipient's

email, as shown below.

138
 Figure 79 SMTP contacts setting window

Figure 80 SMTP group setting window

Step 5 : press【Check SMTP setting】, and select the group you want to test, it will
show up the following figure if successful transmit, the recipient’s email will receive a
SMTP test email from FvDesigner, as shown below.

Figure 81 SMTP test successfully window

Figure 82 SMTP test letter send by FvDesigner

139
 5. Security
Different operating levels can be set for different objects during HMI operations so
that different objects can be used or seen when different users log into the HMI. This
prevents operating errors or ensures the security of the data.

5.1 【Security】Settings

5.1.1 【Security】Basic Settings

【Security】can be clicked on the【System】window in the【Project Explorer】to the

left of the FvDesigner to enter its setting screen as shown below:

Figure 83 Basic Setting Screen for【Security】

Table 31 Basic Setting Properties of【Security】

Property Description

【Enable Select to enable【Security】; this is the main switch of

Security】 【Security】.

140
 【Mode】
The mode can be divided into the following two types:
➢ 【Level】
Only the password needs to be entered during login.
Security levels range from 1~15. The higher security
level allows more authority for the access.
➢ 【User】
The user name and password needs to be entered
during login. Allows a maximum of 100 user accounts.
Planning projects need to set【Level】and【User】
mode, the mode can not be switched during operation.

【Action on Access Denied】

When the【Lowest User Level】allowed by a certain object is
higher than the level where the user currently logged in,
【Security】will deny execution actions. This setting is used to
determine the behavior of【Security】after denying the
execution; it is divided into the following four types:
➢ 【None】
No response
➢ 【Show login dialog and do not execute after login】
Shows the password entry (or user name) login dialog,
will not execute object’s action, such as the operation
control of the button needs level 2, press the button
will show login dialog, login password even or bigger
than level 2, the current level will be changed, but the
button will not do action, needs to press the button
again to do the action.
➢ 【Show login dialog and execute after login】
Shows the password entry (or user name) login dialog,
will execute object’s action, such as the operation
control of the button needs level 2, press the button
will show login dialog, login password even or bigger
than level 2, the current level will be changed, and the
button will do action.
➢ 【Show Denied Message】
Shows the default denial message of the system

【User Name Font】

When it is in【User】mode, this option will be displayed. You
141
 can select the text format of the user name to ASCII or Unicode
format.

【Log-in Time Out】

Set to make the HMI logout to the lowest user level when the
HMI has not been operated for a certain amount of time.

【Log-in Dialog Time out】

Set the staying time for the dialog.
【Input】 Keypad mode for entering password.

【Input Mode】
The keypad can be selescted as system’s built-in keypad,
designer-defined keypad or Simplified Chinese Pinyin input
method, etc.

【Keypad Screen】
When【Input Mode】select as【Keypad Screen】will show up
this option, can choose the keypad screen when you enter
during login, it has system’s built-in keypad, designer-defined
keypad.

【Input Method】
When【Input Mode】select as【Input Method】will show up
this option, can select Simplified Chinese Pinyin input method.
【Password 【Mask Passwords】
Edit】 Set encrypt passwords in the password form.

【Import】
Import CSV files with specific formats and updates it directly
into the password from.

【Export】
Export the password form below into a CSV file with a specific
format.

【New】
Adds a new user to the bottom of the table. The Level, Name,
Password, and Comment can be set. This option is only available
when the【Mode】is set to【User】.

142
 【Delete】
Delete the currently selected user. By default, the bottommost
entry in the table is delete. This option is only available when the
【Mode】is set to【User】.

【Password Table】【Level】
Security level of a user. This option is only available when the
【Mode】is set to【User】. Levels 1 to 15 are available.

【Password Table】【Name】
Set the user name. This option is only available when the
【Mode】is set to【User】.

【Password Table】【Password】
Set the password. This option is only available when the【Mode】
is set to【User】.

【Password Table】【Comment】
Add a comment describing the level/user.

Tip: Multiple users might need to be planned when the【Mode】is

【User】.【Export】can be used to generate a default CSV file for editing,
and then【Import】is used to update the project.

5.1.2 【Security】Advanced Settings

Enter basic settings of【Security】function, and click【Advanced】paging than go to
its setting page below:

143
 Figure 84 Advanced Setting Screen for【Security】【Level】

Table 32 Advanced Setting Properties of【Security】

Property Description

【Advanced】 【Current User Name Address】

Set the display address of the current login user name, can
set as HMI internal address or PLC register and will occupy
8 consecutive registers, for example, setting R100, will
occupy R100~R107, it can be set when the mode choose as
【User】.
【Only Modify Only can modify the current level’s password.
Current Level’s
Password】
【Allow Changing This function can choose when it’s in【User】mode.
Password in Login
Dialog】

144
 【Enable Register Check whether to enable the advanced function of
【Security】.
Control】
【Basic】 【Customize Dialog】
You can select the password login dialog window that
designer defined, this option can only select 【 Window
Screen】.

【Trigger Bit】
Set the trigger signal, when【Trigger Bit】turn OFF to ON
will excute once, 【Operation Address】setting mode.

【Operation Address】
Depending on the mode, different operating types are
provided, where you can set the HMI internal address or
PLC register.

【Level】mode provides the following 5 types of

operations.
Value of Operation Type
Operation
Address
0 Log in
1 Log out
2 Passwoed modify.
The password level that can be
modified is only allowed to be lower or
equal than the password level that is
currently logged in.
3 A group of password levels is enabled.
The password level that can be
enabled is only allowed to be lower
than the password level currently
logged in.
4 A group of password levels is disabled.
The password level that can be
disabled is only allowed to be lower
than the password level currently
logged in.

Note: Need to check the【Enable Modify Accounts】 option, the

operation address in the value of 2,3,4 and other functions will take
effect.

145
 【User】mode provides the following 7 types of
operations.
Value of Operation Type
Operation
Address
0 Log in
1 Log out
2 Passwoed modify.
The password level that can be
modified is only allowed to be lower
than the password level currently
logged in.
3 Add new users.
The password level for new users is
only allowed to be lower or equal
than the password level currently
logged in.
4 Delete users.
The password level that removes the
user is only allowed to be lower than
the password level currently logged
in.
5 Modify user level.
Modifying a user's level is only
allowed to be lower than the
password level currently logged in,
and the original level needs to lower
than the current level.
6 Modify user level and password.
The level of the user who can modify
the user is allowed to be lower than
the password level that is now logged
in and the original level needs to
lower than the current level.

Note: Need to check the【Enable Modify Accounts】option, the

operation address in the value of 2,3,4,5,6 and other functions will
take effect.

【User ID】
User ID to sign in.

【Current Password】
Current level password, or password to login.

146
 【Result Address】
When【Trigger Bit】turn OFF to ON, the system will excute
depending on different mode of【Operation Address】
settings, and the result will store in this address.
The meaning of each code is as follows.
Value of Result Code Description
Result
Address
0 No error.
1 There is no corresponding password in
the password table.
2 There is no corresponding user in the
password table.
3 Password level error.
4 There is no matching confirmation
password.
5 Other levels have the same password
(Level mode).
6 Other levels have the same password
(User mode).
7 The password for the new password is
empty.
8 Level has been enabled (Level mode).
9 Advanced account is disabled.
A The value of the operation address is not
supported.
【Enable Modify 【Level】
Accounts】 Password level is enabled or disabled, the level to be set
when modifying the user level.

【New Password】
Change the password to set the new password.

【Confirm Password】
Change Password In addition to setting a new password,
also set the confirmation password，and the new
password is the same as the confirmation password。
【Enable Password Visible when the mode selects【Level】, and the password
Address】(Level can be modified from the register after enabled.
Mode)
【Result address】
The length of this address is 16 bits, and the result of

147
 whether the passwords of different levels are legal will be
stored in each bit separately. The legal is 0 and the illegal is
1. The password will only be updated when the password
for each level is legal.
note:
1. The new password and the old password of other levels
cannot be repeated
2. The new password and other levels of new passwords can
not be repeated

Under【Level】mode or【User】mode, the relevant parameters must be set before

the different operation types are triggered, as shown in the table below, for example,
to modify the password, first in the【Current Password】to enter the password to
change the level, 【New Password】and【Confirm Password】enter the password you
want to change, and let【Operation Address】equal to 3, then let【Trigger Bit】turn
OFF to ON, so that the correct implementation of advanced【Security】function of the
password modification action.

【Level】mode
Table 33 The relevant control address required in the【Level】mode
Value of Operation Basic Advanced
operation Type Current Password New Password Confirm
address Level Password
0 Log in V
1 Log out
2 Password V V V
Modify
3 A group of V V V
password
levels is
enabled
4 A group of V
password
levels is
disabled

Note: Need to check the【Enable Modify Accounts】option, the operation address in the value of
2,3,4 and other functions will take effect.

【User】mode
Table 34 The relevant control address required in the【User】mode
Value of Operation Basic Advanced
operation Type
148
 address User ID Current Password Level New Password Confirm
Password
0 Log in V V
1 Log out
2 Password V V V V
Modify
3 Add User V V V V
4 Delete V
User
5 Modify V V
User Level
6 Modify V V V V V
User Level
and
Password

Note: Need to check the【Enable Modify Accounts】option, the operation address in the value of
2,3,4,5,6 and other functions will take effect.

5.2 Security Settings of Objects

The settings of【Security】were described above. Every object (except for drawing
objects) has security settings themselves that must also be set if security management
is needed.

The image below is the setting screen of an object; the security setting of objects can
be found in the【Operation】tab page as shown in the image frame below, in which
the green frame is the security control of visibility and the blue frame is the security
control for operations. For example, the blue box in the figure below has the operation
of the object set to a user level of 4. Therefore, the minimum level of user needed to
operate the object is 4.

Note: Objects will not have security control for operations if the object itself does not have
operation functions, such as meters etc.

149
 Figure 85 Security Settings for Objects

Table 35 Security Setting Properties of Objects

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object can be controlled by a specific

Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

150
 【User Level Condition】
Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Operation control of the object, which can be controlled by a
specific bit or user level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control operation by a specific bit.

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】 or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then the
object can be controlled, when false not the object can not be
controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if operation is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

5.3 Exporting/Importing CSV Files

151
Described below, the exported/imported CSV file can be divided into【Level】and
【User】, and they are not compatible with one another.

➢ CSV file for【Level】:

As shown in the figure below where the section marked with the red frame is used
by the system and no changes can be made; the section marked with the green
frame can be edited.

Figure 86 CSV File for【Level】

➢ CSV file for【User】 :

As shown in the figure below where the section marked with the red frame is used
by the system and no changes can be made; the section marked with the green
frame can be edited where the “Level” must be an integer between 1~15. Also, the
section marked with the green frame can be appended in order to add or delete a
user.

Figure 87 CSV File for【User】

5.4 Security Features of the Function Switch

The function switch has options that include【Log In】,【Log Out】,【Password
Manager】, and【Import User Accounts】that are security features. Each function is
explained in detail below.

5.4.1 【Log In】and【Log Out】Function Switch

152
The function switch is set to【Log In】. When pressed, the function switch opens a
login screen Figure 88. The login screen opened depends on whether the security
mode was set to【Level】or【User】. If the security mode was set to【Level】, The
login screen requires only a password. Enter the password of the level the user wants
to access to change the current user to that level. If the security mode was set to
【User】, the login screen Figure 89 prompts the user to enter a username and
password.
The function switch is set to【Log Out】. When pressed, the current level is reset to
the lowest level if the security mode was set to【Level】. The username will become
blank if the security mode was set to【User】.

Figure 88【User】Mode Login Window

Figure 89【User】Mode Login Window

5.4.2 【Password Manager】Function Switch

The password management in the function button is mainly provided to the operator
during the HMI operation for the operator to view, modify, add, or delete passwords,
etc. When the password management function button is pressed, the HMI interface
will display the password table for operation If you want to view, modify, add or
delete, you need to log in to the security level before pressing this function button,
such as the password for login level 5, the password table will show the password
below level 5 (including level 5).
If the security mode is set to【Level】, as Figure 90, the【Password Manager】gives
the user access to the current level’s password as well as passwords for all lower
levels. If the security mode is set to【User】, as Figure 91, the【Password
Manager】gives the user access to all users at the current level or lower than the
current level. The user can add or delete users, change the level, name, and
153
password of other users. The level can only be changed to at most the current user’s
level.

Figure 90【Level】Mode Password Manager Window

Figure 91【User】Mode Password Manager Window

5.4.3 【Import User Accounts】Function Switch

This function allows the account information saved in a CSV file to be imported into
the current program. When the function switch is pressed, the user can choose to
import from the HMI internal memory, the microSD card, or USB. After selecting a
file to import, a confirmation dialog will appear.

Figure 92 Import User Account Window

154
 Figure 93 Import User Confirmation Window

5.5 Security Features in Screen Properties

Security features can be applied to base screens in the project. These features
include the【Security Level】of a screen,【Change Screen Auto Logout】, and
【Change User Level】for【Change Screen】buttons.

5.5.1 Screen Properties Security Level

The【Security Level】in screen properties can set the security level of the screen. As
a result, access to this screen by a user with lower level than the one set will require
a password. For example, in screen 12, the security level has been set to 2 and screen
1 contains a change screen button set to change the current screen to screen 12. If
the user’s level is less than 2, upon pressing the change screen button, a password
prompt require a password in order to change the screen.

【Change Screen Auto Logout】In the screen properties, you can check whether you
want to reduce the level to the lowest level when leaving this screen.

If screen 2 has the【Change Screen Auto Logout】option set, upon exiting from
screen 12, the user has to enter the appropriate password in order to gain access to
screen 12 if the change screen button is pressed again.

Figure 94 Security Settings in Screen Properties

Note: When cancel is pressed on the password dialogue screen, it is set such that the prompt will
not continuously pop up. Access the object again for another password prompt.
155
 5.5.2 Change Screen Button Change User Level
In the【Change Screen】button properties, there is an option to【Change User
Level】. For example, the【Change User Level】option is selected and the level is
set to 3. When the screen has switched to the selected screen, the user’s level is now
3.

Figure 95 Security Settings in Change Screen Button

5.6 Installment
This function allows the user to a authorization time period. When this period ends,
the HMI device will be locked. A window will appear on the HMI that does not let the
HMI operate before the new authorization password is entered. Once the password
is entered, the HMI device can be used. This function provides both static and
dynamic modes.

Figure 96 Installment application illustration

156
 5.6.1 Installment Basic Settings
To get to the【Installment】settings, open the Project Explorer, click on Security (In
the System section) and go to the second tab labeled Installment.

Figure 97 Installment Settings

Table 36 Installment Attributes

Field Description

【Enable Check whether to enable【Installment】, it’s able to do the

Installment】 advanced settings after enable this function.

【Types of Installment】:
【Static Installment】specifies the total number of expiration
periods during design the project, the date of each period, and
the password.

【Dynamic Installment】allows the user to adjust the expiration

period on the running HMI device

【Keypad】When the【Expiration Notification】pops up, a

keypad will also pop-up, which is used to enter the new
password.

【Expiration Notification】
Set whether to use the expiration reminder, if you check the
【Expiration Notification】, you can set how many days before
157
 you want to pop up a password input window for the operator to
enter the password.
【Static 【Total Period】
Installment】 The amount of periods to be set, maximum is 48 periods.

【Super User Password】

The password that is used to disable static installment. Can
bypass the installment password.

【Installment】【Date】
Set the expiration date of the installment period. When the
mode is set to【Static】, the date can be modified. When the
time left reaches zero, a window will pop up, prompting the user
for the new password. The device will be locked until the
password is entered.

【Installment】【Password】
The password for the installment period. When the installment
mode is【Static】, the password can be modified. The maximum
amount of charactars per installment password is 20.

【Installment】【Comment】
Edit installment period comment.
【Dynamic Click【Dynamic】and the setting window below will appear
Installment】

【Project Setting】【Key】
Key that is stored in the project. The password generator can be
used to generate the next password. Up to 8 characters can be
entered.

【Project Setting】【First Expiry Date】

First expiration date of the dynamic installment.

【Password】
You can generate a password using the next expiration date as
shown below:

158
 【Password Generator】 【Key】
Needs to be consistent with the key set for the project.

【Password Generator】 【Expiration Date】

The expected date for the next period.

【Password Generator】 【Final Installment】

Check if it the last installment period of the dynamic installment.

【Password Generator】 【Generate Password】

Press this button and the password will be generated. This
password allows the user to use the device until the next period.

5.6.2 Installment Advanced Setting

Provides advanced control options for the【Installment】function, allows designers

to achieve advanced installment payment functions through register control, click
【Security】in the【System】window in the【Project Explorer】on the left of the
FvDesigner, select【Installment】, and check【Enable Installment】to enter the
advanced settings page

As shown in the figure below, the meaning of each setting option is as follows:

159
 Figure 98【Static】setting window of【Installment】【Advanced】

Figure 99【Dynamic】setting window of【Installment】【Advanced】

Table 37 【Installment】properties setting

Properties Description

【Advanced】 【Enable Expired Bit】

Check whether to send a bit signal when the installment
expires, the bit signal can be internal address or PLC
address.

【Enable Paid Bit】

Check whether to send a bit signal when the installment
has been paid , the bit signal can be internal address or
PLC address.
【Enable Register Check【Installment】function has enable the register’s

160
 Control】 advanced control.

【Basic】 【Expired Screen】

Select the custom login screen for which you want to enter
the password.

【Trigger Bit】
Set the trigger bit for the password of the【Installment】,
the bit signal can be internal address or PLC address ,
when the signal turned from OFF to ON , then the bit will
tiggger a time.

【Current Password】
Set the address of the current password.

【Result Address】
Set after【Trigger Bit】signal has turn OFF to ON, system
will check the execution result then put the result to this
address, each code of the meaning as below.

Value of Result Result code description

Address
0x0000 Execution succeed
0x0001 Enter Super User’s password
0x0002 This function will end when all
installment payments are completed.
0x0003 Enter password wrong.
【Display】 【Current Period】
Display the current period, this function can only be used
in【Static】mode.

【Total Period】
Display the total periods, this function can only be used in
【Static】mode.

【Current Expired Date】

Display the current expired date, and the year, month, day
will display in three different setting addresses.
【Enable Modify Check whether to enable modification of【Static】mode’s
Static Data】 data, including changing passwords, adding or removing
periods, etc.

161
 【Operation Address】
Provide different kinds of operation modes, table as below,
the adderss can be internal address or PLC address.

Value of Operation mode description

Operation
Address
0x0000 Used in【Enable Register Control】
【Basic】function.
0x0001 Display the relevant information of
this period, such as password and
date, etc.
0x0002 Modify the relevant information of
this period, such as modify password
and date, etc.
0x0003 Add a new period.
0x0004 Remove the selected period.

【Selected Period】
Select the【Installment】period that would like to modify
or remove, when the value of the address is 0 will display
or modify the data of【Super User】.

【New Password】
Provide new password that midified, if the mode is
【Display the period revelant information】then the
address will display the password for this period.

【New Expired Date】

Provide new expired date that midified, if the mode is
【Display the period revelant information】then the
address will display the expiration date for this period.

If has checked【Enable Modify Static Data】then the

meaning of each code of【Result Address】are as follows
Value of Result Result code description
Address
0x0000 Execution succeed
0x0001 Enter Super User’s password
0x0002 This function will end when all
installment payments are completed

162
 0x0003 Enter password wrong
0x0004 Periods are incorrec
0x0005 This period has already entered the
password
0x0006 New Expired Date is incorrect
0x0007 New Password is incorrect
0x0008 The value of【Operation Address】is
not supported, and the value of
【Operation Address】is incorrect.

Table 38【Operation Address】relevant control address required in【Static】mode

Value of Operation type Basic Advanced
operation
Current Select New New
address
password period password expied
date
0x0000 Used in【Enable V
Register
Control】
【Basic】
function
0x0001 Display this
period’s revelant
information
0x0002 Modify this V V V
period’s revelant
information
0x0003 Add a new period V V V
0x0004 Remove the V
selected periods

5.6.3 Installment Related Function Switch

Function buttons and security-related functions, including【Installment: Enter

Installment Password】,【Installment: Modify Static Installment】. These functions
can be used through a【Function Switch】.

5.6.3.1 【Installment: Enter Installment Password】Function

163
 When using the installment function, includes【Installment: Enter Installment
Password】and【Installment: Modify Installment】buttons.

When the mode selection is【Static】, the following figure will appear, which will
allow the operator enter the next password.

Figure 100 Static【Installment】password input window

When the mode is【Dynamic】the following window will appear, which will allow
the operator to enter the next password.

Figure 101 Dynamic【Installment】mode password input window

5.6.3.2 【Installment: Modify Installment】

The【Modify Installment】function allows the supplier of the application to be able

to modify, add, delete, the installment periods. After clicking on the button,
passwords and installment dates can be changed.

Figure 102【Modify Installment】Window

164
 Table 39【Modify Installment】
Field Description

【Modify 【Total Periods】

Installment】 The amount of installment periods to be set, maximum
amount of periods is 48.

【Mask the Passwords】

This option allows the user to hide the passwords currently
on the screen. The characters turn into black dots for
safety. This can also be disabled by unchecking the box.

【Super User Password】

Password that can bypass all installment period passwords.
Can be changed by user controlling the installment
periods. It is hidden for safety but can be made visible by
unchecking the Mask the Passwords box.

【Expiry Date】
The user is able to adjust the【Expiry Date】. The
expiration date needs to be a later date than the previous
installment period.

【Password】
The password that is set to let the user be able to operate
the machine again. The maximum number of characters
per password is 20.

165
 6. System Message
【System Message】is located in【Project Explorer】under the【System】tab.
【System Messages】appear in a pop-up dialogue on the HMI whenever abnormal
behavior is encountered. The message the user is prompted with includes the
category of the message: 【GENERAL_MESSAGE_TYPE】,
【COMMUICATION_TYPE】,【SECURITY_MESSAGE_TYPE】,
【FILE_MANAGER_TYPE】,【STANDER_BUTTON_TYPE】,【DATA_LOG_TYPE】,
【ALARM_TYPE】,【RECIPE_TYPE】,【PRINTER_TYPE】,【OPERLOG_TYPE】,
【STATUS_BAR_TYPE】,【DEVICE_TYPE】,【SCHEDULE_TYPE】,【SMTP_TYPE】,
【Link Setting Type】, and【UNKNOW】. The user is allowed to customize the
【System Messages】in order to satisfy the project needs. Click【System Message】
to access the following settings:

6.1 【System Message】Settings

【System Message】is located in the project manager under the system tab. The
settings page is as follows:

Figure 103【System Message】Settings Screen

Table 40【System Message】Settings

Property Description

【Default Message The HMI has a built in set of system messages. This option
allows for the selection of the language the systems are
Language】 displayed in.
There are currently 4 languages options: English, Traditional
Chinese, Simplified Chinese, and Türkçe.

166
 Example: The【Default Message Language】is set to
Traditional Chinese. The system message dialog will appear
as follows:

Example: The【Default Message Language】is set to English.

The system message dialog will appear as follows:

【Preset Font】 You can set the font of the system message.

【Enable Custom Check this option to enable the system messages to be

edited. The designer can set the system messages in a way
System Message】 that aligns closer to the project needs.
【Current Displays current system【Message ID】and【Current
Message】 Wording】of the messages in the current【Default Message
Language】. If the【Default Message Language】is
changed, the【Current Wording】of the messages will
reflect the change.

【Category】
System messages are divided into the following categories:
【GENERAL_MESSAGE_TYPE】,【COMMUICATION_TYPE】,
【SECURITY_MESSAGE_TYPE】,【FILE_MANAGER_TYPE】,
【STANDER_BUTTON_TYPE】,【DATA_LOG_TYPE】,
【ALARM_TYPE】,【RECIPE_TYPE】,【PRINTER_TYPE】,
【OPERLOG_TYPE】,【STATUS_BAR_TYPE】,
【DEVICE_TYPE】, 【SCHEDULE_TYPE】,【SMTP_TYPE】
and【Link Setting Type】.

【Import】
Select a CSV or Excel file to import. The custom system
messages contained in the imported file will replace the
167
 current custom system messages.

【Export】
The contents of the 【Current Messages】can be exported
into a CSV or Excel file. The exported file is as shown below.
The red box is for system use only and the user cannot make
changes there. The green box contains the custom messages
and is fully editable.

The fields for the exported file are as follows.

【Message ID】
System Message ID, cannot be edited.

【Custom Text】
Contains the text that the message will show. Can be edited.

【From TextLib】
This value is 1 when the exported message’s source is the
text library. The value is 0 when the the message was
entered directly.

【TextLib Row】
This value is -1 when the exported message’s source is not
168
 from the text library. If the source was the text library, this
number corresponds to the text’s position in the text library.

The fields for the【Current Message】table are as follows:

【Message ID】
Description for each system message. Cannot be edited.

【From Textlib】
True when the current message for the【Message ID】is
from the text library. False when the current message is not
from the text library (user entered text directly).

【Current Wording】
The text to be displayed when the system message appears.
Click on the text to edit its contents.

【Copy to Text Copy messages to the system’s text library. If the project
requires multiple languages, this feature facilitates editing
Library】 the messages.

【From Default Message (English)】

Copy the default system message text to the【Text
Library】. The text is copied to positions 60000~60455 in
the【Text Library】. The user can select which【Text
Library】group to copy the message to, allowing the
messages to be copied into a language group.

After the text has been copied, the messages can be edited
from the【Text Library】and the changes will be reflected in
the 【System Messages】.

【From Current Message】

Copies the current custom system message text to the
【Text Library】. The text is copied to positions
60000~60455 in the【Text Library】. The user can select
which【Text Library】group to copy the message to,
169
 allowing the messages to be copied into a language group.

After the text has been copied, the messages can be edited
from the【Text Library】and the changes will be reflected in
the 【System Messages】.

6.2 【System Message】Applications

The following describes some applications of the【System Message】feature.

6.2.1 Single Language Project and Using the System

Messages
When building a project in a single language such as English, the system messages
should be consistent with the project language. Within the【System Message】
settings, set the【Default Message Language】to English as shown in the following
figure:

Figure 104 System Messages for Project Using a Single Language

As shown in the dialogue window below, the system message language is English.

Figure 105 Confirmation Window

170
 6.2.2 Single Language Project and Using Custom
System Messages
When building a project in a single language such as English, the system messages
should be consistent with the projet languge. In addition, the wording of messages
may have to be customized in order to meet the project needs. The following steps
can be taken customize the system messages.

1. Open the【System Message】window and select a language in the【Default

Message Language】dropdown.
2. Check the【Enable Custom System Message】box.
3. Select type as【GENERAL_MESSAGE_TYPE】
4. Click the OPERATION_CONFIRM to edit and enter the custom message.

Figure 106 Customizing the System Message

The results of the customization can be seen in the confirmation window.

Figure 107 Modified Confirmation Window

6.2.3 Single Language Project and Using Only Custom

System Messages
When building a project in a language that is currently not available in the system
messages such as German (only English, Traditional Chinese, and Simplified Chinese
is offered), the system messages should also be displayed in German. Therefore, all
system messages have to be modified. The following steps can be taken to do so.
171
 1. Open the【System Message】window and select English in the【Default
Message Language】dropdown.
2. Check the【Enable Custom System Message】box.
3. Press【Export】to export all the messages as CSV file, and change the【Custom
Text】filed’s system message to German in the CSV file.
4. Press【Import】to import the CSV file that just modified.

Figure 108 The【Default Message Language】is set to English

The results of the modification is shown in the figure below.

Figure 109 Modified Confirmation Window

6.2.4 Multiple Language Project and Using the

Default System Messages
The project being built contains multiple languages in the text library. In this example,
language 0 is Traditional Chinese , language 1 is Simplified Chinese, and language 2 is
English. For each language, the system message language should be consistent. The
following steps can be taken to do so.

1. Open the【System Message】window and select English in the【Default

Message Language】dropdown, and check the【Enable Custom System
Message】box.
2. Under【Copy to Text-Library】, click【From Default Language(繁體中文)】.

172
 Under the dropdown in the dialogue window, select【Language0】
(language 0 is Traditional Chinese).
3. Repeat the first two steps for Simplified Chinese. Select【Language1】in
step 2.
4. Repeat the first two steps for English. Select【Language2】in step 2.
5. 【Default Message Language】select as English and check the【From
Default Language(English)】box.
6. Under【Copy to Text-Library】, click【From Default Language(English)】.
Under the dropdown in the dialogue window, select【Language2】

Figure 110 Exporting into Language0

Figure 111 Exporting into Language1

Figure 112 Export Confirmation Window

173
 Figure 113 Exporting into Language2

Within the project, when using Traditional Chinese as the active language, the system
messages will also be displayed in Traditional Chinese. The result is the same for
Simplified Chinese and English. See Chapter 15.4 -【Text Library】for more details.

Figure 114 Confirmation Windows for Each Language

174
 7. Data Log
Objects such as【Lamp】or【Numeric Input/Display】can be used to read the real-
time changes of certain register values when the HMI is operating. However, in order
to track changes of the value over time, the【Data Log】function must be used. The
【Data Log】 function is used to log the values of an address according to a set interval
or when certain conditions are met to provide users with the long-term trends of
values in addresses.

This chapter will explain Data Log functions, the settings, and how to export the data
for the user to view and analyze.

7.1 Data Log List

Click on【Data Log】in the【Project Explorer】of FvDesigner, and the【Data Log List】
will pop up; the current【Data Log Groups】that were already set will be displayed
on the list according to the order of the【Group ID】.

Figure 115【Data Log List】Screen

To add a new Data Log Group, click on the【Add】button to the right and the【Data
Log Group】setting dialog will appear for the user to operate.

To edit an existing 【Data Log Group】, double-click on the【Data Log Group】entry

or first select the【Data Log Group】entry and then click on the【Edit】button to the
right. The properties setting dialog of the【Data Log Group】entry will appear for the
user to modify.

To delete an existing 【Data Log Group】, select the【Data Log Group】entry and then
click on the【Delete】button to the right to delete this【Data Log Group】entry.

7.2 Data Log Group Settings

Settings for the【Data Log Group】are divided into four parts:【Setting】,【Logging

175
Address List】,【Export Data】and【Print Data】.【Setting】is used to set the behavior
for the【Data Log Group】to log the data, the【Data Address List】is used to edit the
address list logged by the【Data Log Group】, and the【Export Data】is used to set
the export behavior of the logged data,【Print Data】is used to set the format to print
out the data log.

7.2.1 【Setting】
The【Setting】screen is as shown in the figure below. The meaning of each setting are
also listed below:

Figure 116【Setting】of【Data Log Group】

Table 41【Setting】Properties of【Data Log Group】

Property Description

【Group ID】 Set the Group ID of the【Data Log Group】.

【Comment】 Set a comment for the【Data Log Group】.
【Import】 A CSV , xlsx or xls file can be selected after clicking on this
button. All the logged addresses included in the file will be
applied to the【Data Log Group】settings.
【Export】 The settings of the current【Data Log Group】can be
saved into a CSV , xlsx or xls file after clicking on this
button.
【Data】 Set the data content logged by the【Data Log Group】.

【Address】
Set the type of the logged address to【Sequential】or
【Random】.【Sequential】means that the logged
176
 addresses will be sequential; only the start address needs
to be set and the other addresses will be filled out
automatically and cannot be changed. 【Random】
means that the addresses logged can be random
addresses; All addresses can be set individually.

【Backup Memory】
Set to enable Backup Memory.
Select to save the Data Log of the HMI into the backup
memory of the HMI when the power of the HMI is
interrupted in order to avoid loss of data.

【Number of Addresses】
Set the number of addresses for the【Data Log Group】to
log.

【Occurrence】
Set the number of times【Data Log Group】 logs data.
【Control】 Set the conditions for the【Data Log Group】to log data.

【Execution Condition】
Sets the condition to execute data logging.

【Time-based】
The【Data Log Group】will log data according to a set
interval.

【Triggered by Bit】
The address logging will be executed when the status
changes of the 【Logging Control Bit】satisfy the
conditions set in【Trigger Condition】.

Execution Condition:【Time-based】
【Start when Project Runs】
Set to start logging data when the project runs.

【Start Time】
When the【Start when Project Runs】is not selected
then the start time for the【Data Log Group】can be
set.The three time units that can be entered are hour,
minute, and second.
177
 【Time Interval】
Set the time interval for the data log function.
The time interval will be a fixed value if【Constant】is
selected. The time interval will be determined by the
value in the address set if【Address】is selected; the
data type of the address data read is fixed as【32Bit-
UINT】.

【Time Interval Unit】

Set the unit of the【Time Interval】.
The maximum value of the time interval is 1 day. The
maximum value that can be entered for the【Time
Interval】is 24 if the【Time Interval Unit】is set as
【Hour】. The maximum value that can be entered is
1440 if it is set as【Minute】. The maximum value that
can be entered is 86400 if the Time Interval Unit】is set
as【Second】. If the【Time Interval Unit】is set as
【100ms】, the maximum value that can be entered for
the【Time Interval】is fixed as 9.

【Logging Control Bit】

Set an address to control whether to execute【Data Log
Group】, the function will be executed when the
address is ON.

Execution Condition:【Trigger by Bit】

【Logging Control Bit】
Set an address to control whether to execute【Data Log
Group】.

【Trigger Condition】
There are three options:【Bit OFF -> ON】,【Bit ON ->
OFF】, and【Bit Change】.

【Reset Logging Control Bit】

When the【Trigger Condition】is【Bit OFF -> ON】or
【Bit ON -> OFF】, the bit will be automatically reset.

Note: If the communication error of the data log group

happened then the triggered bit cannot reset
automatically.
【Action】 【When Buffer is Full】
Set the action to take when the【Data Log Group】has
completed the number of data loggings set in

178
 【Occurrence】. If【Stop Data Logging】is selected, data
logging will be stopped; if【Overwrite】is selected, then
the【Data Log Group】will continue to log data and the
data previously saved will be overwritten as new data is
logged.

【Trigger a Bit】
Set to trigger a specific bit when the data is full; the
triggering address and the time to trigger the address can
be set on the right if this is enabled.

【Enable Buffer Clear Bit】

Set to enable a buffer clear bit; the【Buffer Clear Bit】can
be set at the right if this is enabled. When the status of this
address is 1, the data saved in the buffer will be cleared.

7.2.2 【Logging Address List】

The【Logging Address List】screen is as shown in the figure below, the meaning of
each setting are listed below:

Figure 117【Logging Address List】Setting Screen of【Data Log Group】

Table 42【Logging Address List】Setting Properties of【Data Log Group】

Property Description

【Total Bits】 Display the total bits of the data logged.

【Total Words】 Display the total words of the data logged.

【Add】 Add a new data log address. Only support this feature
when the address type is set as【Random】.
【Delete】 Delete a data log address. Only support this feature when

179
 the address type is set as【Random】.
【Copy】 Copy a data log address. Only support this feature when
the address type is set as【Random】.
【Paste】 Paste a cpoied data log address. Only support this feature
when the address type is set as【Random】.
【Data Type】 Set the data type of the data logged. Only the first row can
be modified if the logged address type is set as
【Sequential】.
【Address】 Set the address of the data logged. Only the first row can
be modified if the logged address type is set as
【Sequential】.
【Name】 Set the address name of the data logged; the default name
is the address is itself if no name is entered.
【Bits/Words】 Display the length of the data logged by【Data Type】.
【Words】can be modified if【Data Type】is set as【Ascii
String】.
【Gain】 The amount of【Gain】can be set.
Formula is as follows: y=Ax+B, gain is A, offset for the B, y
value is displayed for HMI, x is PLC value.For example, gain
A=5, offset B=2, when the PLC x=3, HMI value display is 17
(17=(5*3)+2).
Gain A Offset B PLC Value x HMI displayed
value y
A=5 B=2 x=3 y = 17
【Offset】 Set the【Offset】value. See【Gain】for more details.
【Precision】 Set the amount of decimal places shown.

7.2.3 【Export Data】

The【Export Data】screen is as shown in the figure below, the meaning of each setting
are listed below:

180
 Figure 118【Export Data】Setting Screen of【Data Log Group】

Table 43【Export Data】Setting Properties of【Data Log Group】

Property Description

【Export Data】 Set to enable to export data function; export settings will
appear below if this function is enabled.
【General】 【Format】
Set the format of the output file; TXT file , CSV file or FBF
file can be selected, FBF file is FATEK’s proprietary format,
which requires the format of reading or converting files
using【FBF Reader】in FvDesigner【Tools】.

【Destination】
Set the destination of the output file; available selections
include internal, microSD card or USB storage device.
If the output destination is internal storage, you can use
FTP to connect to the HMI to read the stored file.

【Export Mode】
Set the time to export the file; the file will be automatically
exported when the【Data Log Group】has completed the
number of times set in【Occurrence】 if 【When Buffer
is Full】 is selected. The data will be exported when the
specified bit is triggered if【When Bit is Triggered】is
181
 selected.

【Enable Address Mode】

After enabling, the exported file name, destination, suffix,
export mode, data mode, date and time filtering, etc., will
be controlled by the specific address. To be allowed to
enable this mode, you need to first enable【Export
Mode】and【When Bit is Triggered】. When【Export
Mode】is【When Buffer is Full】, the export method
cannot be set.
Note: After checking this item, the export data will be all
the contents of the current buffer data.

【File Name】
Set the name of the exported file; the file name of the
exported file includes the save date and time (such as:
DataLog_140519_151735.txt).

【Suffix】
Set the name of the exported file, such as yymmdd_hh,
the name of exported file only has a date and hours
(Example: DataLog_140519_17.txt)
This setting also provides regular export archive mode,
If the suffix selected is "yymm", it would produce one file
per month,
If the suffix selected is "yymmdd", it would produce one
file per day,
If the suffix select "yymmdd_hh", it would produce one file
per hour,
If the suffix selected is " yymmdd_hhmm", it would
produce one file per minute,
If the suffix selected is " yymmdd_hhmmss", it would
produce one file per second,
If the suffix to select "no", one file includes all data.

【Create a folder with the name from comment】

If this option is checked, the name of the folder will be
name from【Setting】【Comment】, for example,
comment temperature, the original Group_1 folder will be
changed to the temperature folder, which is originally
datalog \ Group_1 will become datalog \ temperature.

【Save to the default folder】

182
 There is none and folder created monthly two opitons, if
choose none then will not create another folder, for
example, datalog\Group_1\DataLog_170403. csv. if choose
folder created monthly then will create another monthly
folder each month, for example,
datalog\Group_1\201704\DataLog_170403.csv.
【Date/Time 【Date】
Format】 Set the display format of the date when exporting files.

【Time】
Set the display format of the time when exporting files.

【Combine Date and Time】

If set, the date and time columns will be combined into a
single column.
【Automatically Check to set the number of days the exported file should
be retained in memory. For example, if set to seven days,
Delete】 the HMI will use its internal calendar and files greater than
seven days will be removed.
【Manually Delete It will delete all files when the bit turns to ON.

(all files)】
【Status Address】 Set the saving address of the error code.
Error Code Description
0 No Error
1 Read Error
2 Write Error
5 Open Error
100 Not enough storage
space

【Settings】page as shown in the figure below, the options are as follows：

183
 【Export Data】【Settings】Properties Window
Figure 119【Data Log】

Table 44【Data Log】【Export Data】【Settings】Property Settings

Field Description

【Setting】 【File Name】

Use a defined address to set the name of the exported file.
5 characters is the default setting, maximum setting is 100
characters.

【Destination】
Use a defined address to set the destination of the output
file. The destination values are shown in the following
table,
Register Value Function
1 HMI
2 microSD Card
3 USB Storage Device
Other Values HMI

【Suffix】
Use a defined address to set the name of the exported file
and the date/time format. The suffix values are shown in
the following table,
Register Value Function
1 yymmdd
2 yymmdd_hh
3 yymmdd_hhmm
184
 4 yymmdd_hhmmss
5 None
6 yymm
Other Values yymmdd_hhmmss

【Export Mode】
Use a defined address to set the export mode. The export
mode values are shown in the following table,
Register Value Function
1 Overwrite Old Files
2 Continue to write on old file
Other Value Continue to write on old file

【Data Mode】
Use a defined address to set the data mode of the
exported data. The data mode values are shown in the
following table,
Register Value Function
1 Save all unsaved data and mark
the exported data as saved.
2 Save all data and mark the
exported data as saved
3 Saved all data for a specific time
without marking the exported
data as saved.
Other Values Save all data and mark the
exported data as saved
【Date / Time 【Start Date (Year/Month/Day)】
Filter】 Use a defined address to set the date at which filtering
starts.

【Start Time (Hour/Minute/Second)】

Use a defined address to set the time to start filtering.

【End Date (Year/Month/Day)】

Use a defined address to set the date at which filtering
ends.

【End Time (Hour/Minute/Second)】

Use a defined address to set the time at which filtering
ends.

185
 7.2.4 【Print Data】
【Print Data】page as shown below, the meaning of each setting is as follows :

Figure 120【Print Data】Setting Screen of【Data Log Group】

Table 45【Print Data】Setting Properties of【Data Log Group】

Properties Description

【Print Data】 Set whether to enable Print Data function, enable the
function do the following settings.
【Control】 【Trigger Bit】
Set the trigger bit of print control.
【Format】 【Date】
Set the date print format.

【Time】
Set time print format.

【Header】
If checked, according to the setting, it will print header first
then print the data log content. Press ‘’setting’’ button to
set the header.

【Setting】
Header setting, please refer to 7.2.4.1-【Print Data】
Header and Footer【Setting】for more details.

186
 【Footer】
If checked, according to the setting, it will print data log
content first then print the footer. Press ‘’setting’’ button
to set the footer.

【Setting】
Footer setting, please refer to 7.2.4.1-【Print Data】
Header and Footer【Setting】for more details.。

【Title】
Print the data log title.

【Horizontal Grid Line】

Print out with horizontal grid line.

【Vertical Grid Line】

Print out with vertical grid line.

【Preview】
Press the preview to view the following table settings,
whether it meets the printing requirements, press
‘’preview’’ following figure will appear

【Print Items】 Print items includes: Index, Date, Time and Data.

【Copy the Selected Item Settings to Others】

When a certain row is selected, this button will be
enabled. The user can use this button to copy the setting
value of the selected item to other items, which simplifies
the user's setting procedure and improves the set
efficiency.
187
 【Print】
If checked, the printed data will include this item.

【Min Text Width】

The minimum expected text width of the print items, when
the text width of the content is smaller than the minimum
word width, will be automatically filled with spaces to keep
the minimum word width setting. The letter width of the
letter or number is 1 and the Chinese is 2 .

【Left Gap】
Space on the left of the print item

【Right Gap】
Space on the right of the print item

【Lead Zero】
For Data Log’s items that are not ‘’text’’ type, when the
width of the printed content is less than the minimum
width, it will automatically filled with ‘’0’’.
【Calculation】 After the actual data that collected, will calculate for data
log items that are not "text" types, and the calculation
results will be printed in sequence.

【Number】
Set the number of calculations.

The following is the setting description of the calculation

item:
【Type】
Set the type of calculation, includes Total, Average,
Maximum and Minimum.

【Name】
Calculate the customized name of the project, which will
be printed with the calculation results.

7.2.4.1 【Print Data】Header and Footer【Setting】

For the header/footer, when click the【Setting】button, the following dialog box
appears. There are two modes:【Static】and【Dynamic】.
188
【Static】
Users can edit any text content as static header/footer content.

【Dynamic】
The user sets the variables and edits the pattern, and matches the keyword
"%[number]" (eg: %1, %2, %3, etc.) to achieve the dynamic header/footer
requirements, where the keyword will be replaced by the actual content of the
variable.

【Dtat Log】【Print Data】【Header/Footer】as shown in the figure below, the

meaning of each setting option is as follows:

【Header/Footer】Setting Screen of【Data Log Group】

Figure 121【Print Data】
(Static mode)

【Header/Footer】Setting Screen of【Data Log Group】

Figure 122【Print Data】
(Dynamic mode)

Table 46【Export Data】Setting Properties of【Data Log Group】

Options Description

189
 【Variable 【Refresh Mode】
Address】 The refresh mode for setting variable content can be
divided into:

➢ 【Refresh Periodically】: refresh variable content

periodically, when select this mode please set the
【Time Interval】.
➢ 【Refreshed By Trigger Bit(0->1)】：when the bit
turn 0 to 1, refresh variable content.
➢ 【Refreshed By Trigger Bit (1->0)】：when the bit
turn 1 to 0, refresh variable content.
➢ 【Refreshed By Trigger Bit Changed】: when the
bit turn 1 to 0, refresh variable content.

【Trigger Bit】
Set the refresh variable content trigger address.
This setting only needs to set when【Refresh Mode】
is【Refreshed By Trigger Bit(0->1)】、【Refreshed By Trigger
Bit (1->0)】or【Refreshed By Trigger Bit Changed】.

【Reset Trigger Bit】

Whether to reset trigger bit after refreshing variables.
This setting only needs to set when【Refresh Mode】
is【Refreshed By Trigger Bit(0->1)】or【Refreshed By
Trigger Bit (1->0)】.

【Number】
Set the number of variables.
【Variable】 【Data Type】
Set the data type of variable.

【Address】
Set the address of variable.

【Words】
The number of words required of data types to display
variables. If【Data Type】is【Ascii String】, then can set
the number of words to collect at the beginning of the
address.
190
 【Min Text Width】
Set the minimum text width of the variable content. When
the word width of the content is smaller than the minimum
word width, it will be automatically filled with spaces to
keep the minimum word width setting.

【Precision】
Set the precision of the variable.

【Gain】
Set the gain of the variable.

【Offset】
Set the offset of the variable.

【Lead Zero】
For Data Log’s items that are not ‘’text’’ type, when the
width of the printed content is less than the minimum
width, it will automatically filled with ‘’0’’.
【Template】 The user sets the variables and edits the pattern, and
matches the keyword "%[number]" (eg: %1, %2, %3, etc.)
to achieve the dynamic header/footer requirements, where
the keyword will be replaced by the actual content of the
variable.

【Preview】
For setting preview header/footer content, as shown
below:

7.3 Data Log Related Objects

This chapter will introduce objects related to【Data Log】.

191
 ➢ The【Historic Trend】is a curve object used to read the data recorded in
the recording buffer of the【Data Log】, in which the x value is time and
the y value is the data captured by the【Data Log】. For detailed
explanations, refer to chapter16.3.21-【Historic Trend】.
➢ The【Historic XY Scatter】is a curve object used to read the data recorded
in the recording buffer of the【Data Log】, in which both the X/Y values
are data captured by the【Data Log】. For detailed explanations, refer to
Chapter 16.3.22–【Historic XY Scatter】.
➢ The【Historic Data Table】is a table object used to read the data recorded
in the recording buffer of the【Data Log】. For detailed explanations, refer
to Chapter 16.3.23–【Historic Data Table】.
➢ The【Historic Data Selector】can select a【Data Log ID】or exported CSV
or TXT file. A dropdown menu object will allow users to view the data logs
sorted by either filename or date last modified. For detailed explanations,
refer to Chapter 16.3.24-【Historic Data Selector】.

192
 8. Alarm
When the HMI is operating, the【Alarm】function can be used if real-time detection
of excessive changes to specified numeric value is required. The【Alarm】function is
used to monitor specific addresses of the PLC or HMI. When the numeric value of the
monitored address reaches is outside a set range, the HMI will give out an alarm. In
addition, the user can also record the numeric values of 1~8 addresses during the
occurrence of the alarm in order to analyze reasons for the alarm, or when the alarm
occurs, email can be set to notify the administrator, etc.

This chapter will explain alarm related functions, the settings, and how to export the
alarm data for analysis.

8.1 Alarm List

Click on【Alarm】, which is located in the feature list on the left side of FvDesigner;
the【Alarm List】will pop up and existing【Alarms】will be displayed on the list according
to【Group ID】.

Figure 123【Alarm List】Screen

Press the【Add】button to add an alarm; the【Alarm】setting dialog will appear for

the user to operate.

To edit an existing【Alarm】, double click on an【Alarm】in the list or first click the
【Alarm】entry and then click the【Edit】button on the right. The setting dialog of
this【Alarm】entry will appear for the user to modify.

To delete an existing【Alarm】, select the【Alarm】entry and then click on the【Delete】

button to the right.

If【Enable Global Alarm Scrolling Text】is selected, then the【Global Alarm Scrolling
Text】function can be enabled. After enabling this option, click on the【Setting】button
to the right to modify the settings for【Global Alarm Scrolling Text】. Refer to Chapter
16.3.26-【Alarm Scrolling Text】for detailed explanations of the settings.

193
 8.2 Alarm Setting
The properties of an【Alarm】is divided into【Setting】and【Export Data】, in which
【Setting】is used to set the behavior and occurrence conditions of the【Alarm】 and
【Export Data】is used to set data export behaviors for alarms that already occurred.

8.2.1 【Setting】
The “Setting” screen is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of each setting are
also listed below:

Figure 124【Setting】Screen of【Alarm】

Table 47【Setting】Properties of【Alarm】

Property Description

【Group ID】 Set the Group ID of the【Alarm】.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the【Alarm】.
【Import】 A CSV or Excel file file can be selected after clicking this
option. All of the【Alarm】contents of the file will be
applied to the current【Alarm】settings.
【Export】 The settings of the current【Alarm】can be saved into a
CSV or Excel file after clicking this option.
【Group Setting】 Set the group behavior of【Alarm】.

【Polling Frequency】
Sets the Polling Frequency of【Alarm】. When the Polling
Frequency is set to 0, the system will read the monitoring
address as quickly as possible. If the Polling Frequency is
194
 set to a value greater than 0, the system will read the
monitoring address according to the set time. This lowers
the computing load of the system.

【Records】
Set the maximum number of alarms to save for the current
【Alarm】group.

【Backup Memory】
Set to enable Backup Memory.
Select to save the Alarm data of the HMI into the backup
memory of the HMI when the power to the HMI is
interrupted in order to avoid data loss.

【Independent alarm records for trigger, ack., and

recovery status】
If checked, the trigger time, acknowledgement time, and
recovery time will be recorded separately. If not checked,
the trigger time, acknowledgement time, and recovery
time will be recorded in the same row.

【Trigger a Bit】
Set the alarm to trigger a specified bit when the buffer is a
specified percentage full.

【Enable Buffer Clear Bit】

Set whether to enable the function to clear the alarm
buffer record.

【Turn on Backlight and Turn Off Screensaver】

Set whether the alarm turns off the screen saver and turns
on the backlight when an alarm in the given group occurs.
【Add】 Adds an alarm entry to the bottom of the alarm table
when this button is pressed. The alarm address will
automatically increase. For example, if the bottommost
entry in the alarm table has an address of M10, when the
【Add】button is pressed, the new alarm entry will have
an address of M11. When the【Data Type】is set to bit,
the address will increase bitwise.
【Delete】 The alarm data selected in the alarm table below will be
deleted when this button is pressed.
【Copy】 The alarm data selected in the alarm table below will be

195
 copied when this button is pressed.

【Paste】 A new alarm data entry will be added and the alarm
settings copied will be filled into this new alarm entry
when this button is pressed.
【Alarm Table】 Set the occurrence condition of the【Alarm】.

【Data Type】
Set the data type for the monitoring address of the
【Alarm】.

【Address】
Set the monitoring address of the【Alarm】.

【Condition】
Set the condition to determine that an【Alarm】has
occurred. When【Data Type】is Bit, the【Condition】is
fixed to “Equal to” (=).
When【Data Type】is not Bit, the【Condition】can be set
as
“Greater than” (>)
“Greater than or equal to” (>=)
“Equal to” (=)
“Less than” (<)
“Less than or equal to” (<=)
“Not equal to” (!=)
“Range” (A~B)

【Value】
Set a value to determine if an【Alarm】has occurred. If
the【Condition】is set to “Range (A~B)”, the value must
be filled according to the (A~B) format. For example 0~100
means that the alarm range is for the value of the
monitoring address to be greater than or equal to 0 and
less than or equal to 100.
If the【Data Type】is set to Bit. The value will be either
ON or OFF.
For other【Data Types】the value is dependent on the set
type. For example, 16 bit INT can be from -32,768 to
32,767.

196
 【Dynamic Value】
Users can set a specific register to dynamically change the
condition on the HMI to trigger the alarm.

【Message】
Set the message to display when an【Alarm】has
occurred.

【Level】
Set the level (1~8) of this【Alarm】entry. This can be used
to distinguish between different levels of alarm.

【Advanced Setting】
When the【Advanced Setting】button is pressed, a pop
up dialog will appear for users to set the advanced settings
for【Alarm】.

8.2.2 【Advanced Setting】

The【Advanced Setting】properties setting dialog is as shown in the figure below, the
meaning of each setting are listed below:

197
 Figure 125【Advanced Setting】Property Setting Dialog of【Alarm】

Table 48【Advanced Setting】Properties of【Alarm】

Property Description

【Dead Band】 Set the confirmed alarm recovery area after an

【Alarm】occurred.
For example, if the alarm occurrence condition is
set as x>100, and【Dead Band】is set as 5%,
then when x>100 the alarm occurs and when
x<96 the alarm will recover.
【Time Delay (the Multiple of Set the delay time to do trigger delay. If the
polling frequency set 1 second, time delay set 5,
Polling Frequency】 then the alarm will be triggered when all the
conditions were met within 5 seconds.
【Change Base Screen】 Set whether to enable the【Change Base
Screen】function. If the function is enabled, you
can select the【Base Screen】you want to
change to when the alarm is triggered.
【Show Window Screen】 Set to enable the【Show Window Screen】
function. The corresponding【Window Screen】
198
 for this alarm entry can be selected on the right
once this option is enabled.

If this function is enabled when the alarm occurs,

a window screen will display or a【Show
Window】sub switch can be pressed on the
【Alarm Display】object to display the
【Window Screen】set for this alarm.

【Close when Alarm is Recovered】

When the alarm is restored, the corresponding
window screen will automatically close.

【Reopen while Alarm is not Recovered】

The window screen for the alarm will constantly
reopen unless the alarm recovers.
【While Alarm is Triggered】 Set to execute other behaviors when an alarm is
triggered.

【Notification】
Set to notify specific addresses when an alarm is
triggered. If this option is enabled, set the
notification address and signal.
Level: Set the bit as 0 or 1.
Pulse: Set the bit to 1 and automatically restore to
0 after continuing the time set by【Width】.

【Send Email】
Checkable when SMTP is enabled, send mail to
the set personnel when the alarm is triggered. If
enable, you can set the address of the person to
be notified when the alarm occurs, as well as
additional messages and files. For details, refer
to ch8.2.3-【Send Email Setting】

【Play Audio】
Set to play an audio file when an alarm is
triggered. If this option is enabled, the audio set
on the【Audio Selector】on the right which was
selected from the【sound library】will be
played when an alarm occurs. The【Duration】
199
 for the playback of the audio is controlled by the
setting items below:【Single Shot】,【Time-
based】,【Until Acknowledged or Recovered】
and【Until Screen is Touched】are available for
selection.
When select enable and select the audio file is
from microSD or USB storage, you can set the file
name of the microSD or USB storage audio file,
when alarm happens, will play the set of the
audio, file name need to contain filename
extention.
If select【Address】, then the file name can be
controlled by the set of the address.
Build a audio file in the microSD or USB storage,
and put the audio file in the audio folder, the
audio file can be read by HMI when the alarm
ring.

【Buzzer】
Sets whether or not to play the buzzer when the
alarm is triggered. The buzzer sounds there are
short, long, short-short, and long-short 4 ways.
You can choose the buzz type, and adjust the
【Duration】where you can choose【Single
Shot】,【Time-Based】,【Until Acknowledged
or Recovered】or【Until Screen is Touched】.

【Play Time】
When the【Time-based】option is selected, an
option will appear and the play duration can be
set.
【Notify while Alarm is Set to notify specific addresses when an alarm is
acknowledged. If this option is enabled, the
Acknowledged】 notification address set on the right will be set or
reset when an alarm is acknowledged.
Level: Set the bit as 0 or 1.
Pulse: Set the bit to 1 and automatically restore
to 0 after continuing the time set by【Width】.
【Notify while Alarm is Set to notify specific addresses when an alarm is
recovered. If this option is enabled, the
Recovered】 notification address set on the right will be set or
reset when an alarm recovers.
200
 Level: Set the bit as 0 or 1.
Pulse: Set the bit to 1 and automatically restore
to 0 after continuing the time set by【Width】.
【Number of Recorded Set the number of address to read when an
alarm is triggered; it can be set between 1~8.
Address】 When the number set is changed, the number of
rows in the address record table below will also
change accordingly.
【Data Type】 Set the data type of the address to read when an
alarm is triggered.
【Address】 Set the address to read when an alarm is
triggered.
【Comment】 Set the comment of the address to read when an
alarm is triggered. This comment can allow users
to identify what the address represents.

8.2.3 【Send Email Setting】

The【Setting】dialog box for sending emails is shown in the figure below.
The meaning of each setting option is as follows:

Figure 126【Advanced Setting】【Send Email】Property Setting Dialog of【Alarm】

Table 49【Advanced Setting】【Send Email】Properties of【Alarm】

Options Description

【Recipent】 When the alarm occurs, the recipient of the email must
first set the【Contacts】and【Groups】in the
【Contact Lists】tab of the【SMTP】tab in【Severs】,
or the【Contacts】button on the right set【Contacts】
201
 and【Groups】to be selected here.
【Contacts】 Provide the e-mail address of the person who receive
the e-mail, and【Contacts】and【Groups】, etc. Press
【Contact Lists】, the following figure will appear, you
can add, delete, edit, import, export, etc. For more
details, refer to chapter4.3.1-【SMTP】setting.

【Title】 Title of email, the title will be group’s name if do not

checked the【Use Customized Title】box on the right
side, such as Alarm.Group 1.2, which indicates the
second alarm in the first group of the alarm. Check the
box【Use Customized Title】to edit the title of the mail
here.
【Attached Set whether to send an email when an alarm occurs
attach other messages or files at the same time.
Information】
【Attach Screenshot】
Check whether to attach HMI screenshot while sending
email.

【Attach Image from Video Input】

Check whether to attach image from video input while
sending email.

【Time】
Check whether to attach occurring time while sending
email.

202
 【Message】
Check whether to attach alarm message while sending
email.

【Record Address】
Check whether to attach record address while sending
email.
【Context】 Enter the context for sending email when the alarm
occurs.

8.2.4 【Export Data】

The【Export Data】screen is as shown in the figure below, the meaning of each setting
are listed below:

Figure 127【Export Data】Setting Screen of【Alarm】

Table 50【Export Data】Setting Properties of【Alarm】

Property Description

【Export Data】 Set to enable the export function of the alarm data. Export
setting items will appear below once this option is
selected.
【General】 【Format】
Set the format of the export file; TXT file or CSV file can be
selected.

203
 【Destination】
Set the destination of the exported file: internal, microSD
card or USB storage device can be selected.
If the output destination is internal storage, you can use
FTP to connect to the HMI to read the stored file.

【Export Mode】
Set the time to export the file. If【Export Regularly】is
selected, the alarm occurrence data saved by【Alarm】
will be exported according to a set interval. If【Triggered
by Bit】is selected, the alarm occurrence data saved by
【Alarm】will be exported when the set bit is triggered.

【Time Interval】
Set the time interval between each export of the alarm
occurrence data saved by【Alarm】; the time interval can
be set on the right and the time step can be hours or
minutes. This setting item will appear when the【Export
Mode】is set as【Export Regularly】.

【Trigger Bit】
Set the control address to export the alarm occurrence
data saved by【Alarm】. This setting item will appear
when【Export Mode】is set as【Triggered by Bit】.

【File Name】
Set the name of the exported file; the file name of the
exported file name includes the date and time the file was
saved (for example: Alarm_140519_151735.txt).

【Suffix】
Set the name of the exported file, such as yymmdd_hh,
the name of exported file only dates and hours
(Example: DataLog_140519_17.txt)
This setting also provides export archive mode,
If the suffix selected is "yymm", it would produce one file
per month,
If the suffix selected is "yymmdd", it would produce one
file per day,
If the suffix select "yymmdd_hh", it would produce one file

204
 per hour,
If the suffix selected is " yymmdd_hhmm", it would
produce one file per minute,
If the suffix selected is " yymmdd_hhmmss", it would
produce one file per second,
If the suffix to select "no", one file includes all data.

【Create a folder with the name from comment】

If this option is checked, the name of the folder will be
name from【Setting】【Comment】, for example,
comment temperature, the original Group_1 folder will be
changed to the temperature folder, which is originally
alarm \ Group_1 will become alarm \ temperature.

【Save to the default folder】

There is none and folder created monthly two opitons, if
choose none then will not create another folder, for
example, alarm \Group_1\ Alarm _170403. csv. if choose
folder created monthly then will create another monthly
folder each month, for example, alarm \Group_1\201704\
Alarm _170403.csv.
【Date/Time 【Date】
Format】 Set the display format of the date when exporting file.

【Time】
Set the display format of the time when exporting file.
【Output Data】 【Output Data】allows you to choose which items to
export. You can select whether the export file will contain
the alarm index, serial number, trigger date, alarm
annotation, trigger time, confirmation time, recovery time,
message, level, number of occurences, and record address.
【Automatically Check if you want to automatically delete the exported file.

Delete】
【Preserve files for】
For example, if you set 7 days, the HMI will check whether
there are files over 7 days according to the calendar in the
early morning of each day, and those files will be deleted.
【Manually Delete Set the control bit to delete the files manually.

(all files)】
【Control Bit】
Set a bit as trigger control, delete when on, and
automatically turn back to off after finish deleting.
【Status Address】 Set the save address for error codes.

205
 Error Code Description
0 No Error
1 Read Error
2 Write Error
5 Open Error
100 Not enough storage
space

8.3 Alarm Application Example

This section explains the application examples of the【Alarm】function and its setting
procedure.

8.3.1 Send Email when Alarm Occurs

This chapter will explain when the alarm occurs, how to let user to send email
through HMI, instantly send alarm messages to operators or set up e-mail recipients,
and attach some informations to let operators get more messages, for the major
problems happening on the equipment, it can be processed and maintained
immediately.

Setting steps as follow:

Step 1 : In order to send an email when an alarm occurs, set the【SMTP】function
first.
In the【System】window of the【Project Explorer】on the left of FvDesigner, click
【Servers】, enter the【Servers】setting page, switch to【SMTP】page, and
enable【SMTP】, figure as shown below.

Figure 128【SMTP】Setting window

Step 2 : In this example, we use Gmail Server, set the【Server】to smtp.gmail.com,

set the【Port】to 465, set the【Encryption】mode to SSL, and fill in the【User】’s

206
 e-mail address and the user’s email password in【Password】field.【User】and
【Password】should be filled in with your actual name and password, as shown below.

Figure 129 Server Setting Window in SMTP Setting

Step 3 : Fill in the【Name】and【Email Address】in the sender's properties. Please

fill in with your actual name and password, as shown below.

Figure 130 Sender Information setting in SMTP Setting

Step 4 : Fill in the【Contacts】and【Groups】. Please fill in with actual name and

password, as shown below.

Figure 131 SMTP contacts setting window

Figure 132 SMTP group setting window

207
 Step 5 : In order to send an email attach with video input screenshot when an
alarm occurs. Therefore, first set the【Video Input】function, click【Link】in the
【System】window in the【Project Explorer】on the left of FvDesigner to switch
to【Video Input】paging, and check the【Enable USB Camera】and【Auto
Connect to Camera】 function, as shown below

Figure 133【Video Input】setting window

Step 6 : Click the【Add】button to add an alarm group and edit the alarm message
and PLC address, as shown below.

Figure 134【Alarm】message editing

Step 7 : Click the【Advanced Setting】button to send email alarm messages, as

208
 shown below.

Figure 135 Alarm【Advanced Setting】setting window

Step 8 : Click on the drop-down menu on the right of the【Recipent】, select the
group of email recipients, and check the【Attach Screenshot】, 【Attach Image from
Video Input】,【Time】,【Message】options, and fill in the email context, as shown
below.

Figure 136【Email Setting】window

Step 9 : After compiling the project, download it to HMI and enter the HMI system
settings. Click【Ethernet】to edit the DNS of the domain, as shown below.

Figure 137【System Setting】window

209
 Figure 138【Ethernet】setting window

Step 10 : When this alarm occurs, the recipient will receive the mail, as shown below.

Figure 139 Recipient received mail when the alert occurred

8.4 Alarm Related Objects

The following objects can be used if the user needs to view various alarm data
records in real-time while the HMI is operating:

【Alarm Display】: Displays alarm related messages using a table. For more details,
refer to Chapter 16.3.25 -【Alarm Display】.
【Alarm Scrolling Text】: Displays alarm related messages using scrolling text. For
more details, refer to Chapter 16.3.26 -【Alarm Scrolling Text】.
【Alarm Data Selector】: Select an【Alarm ID】or exported CSV file. The【Alarm
Data Selector】allows users to a select an alarm from the dropdown and view it. The
files can be sorted by filename or date last modified. For more details, refer to
Chapter 16.3.27 -【Alarm Data Selector】.
【Global Alarm Scrolling Text】: Displays alarm related messages using scrolling text.
If this option is enabled, the【Global Alarm Scrolling Text】will be displayed at the
specific vertical position of the screen when an alarm occurs, no matter what screen
the HMI is currently displaying.

210
 9. Recipe
In practical applications, settings with similar properties or behaviors but have
different data contents for parameters are frequently used on equipment for
manufacturing processes or actions; the collection of these parameter contents is
called Recipe. Excellent recipe management helps increase engineering or production
efficiencies.

9.1 Recipe Data Flow

Before we start explaining the data flow of recipes on HMI, we must first understand
what recipe group files, recipe groups and recipes are.

Recipe
For instance, if a machine is able to produce bread and cakes, and their
ingredients are both flour, eggs, butter and chocolate, the ingredients can be
viewed as the parameters of the machine. However, because the ratio of
ingredients for making bread is different from making cakes, the ingredient
ratios of the two can be made into two sets of parameters: one for making
bread and one for making cakes. The two sets of parameters described above
are two different recipes; and every recipe will have a unique number.

Recipe Group
A group of recipes that have the same parameters is called a Recipe Group;
take the example above for instance, the two recipes (bread and cake) can
form a Recipe Group. The recipe function allows users to edit multiple recipe
groups, and every recipe group will have a unique Recipe Group ID. All the
recipes in the recipe group will have a unique number starting from 0. (For
example, the number of bread is 0 and the number of cake is 1)

Recipe Group File

There is the common format csv file which the user can use text editors on
their own computers or the Recipe Editor in the recipe function to edit the csv
file. A recipe group file saves all the data of a recipe group, including all the
parameter names and parameter values in the recipe.

Recipe Data Flow

When projects are executing on the HMI, all of the parameter data are saved
in the recipe group file first, and the user can use the function switch object to
import the file into the HMI. Complete parameter contents can be seen if the
project has the recipe table object.
There is a buffer in the HMI used to save the data of the current recipe; which
recipe to save in this buffer is determined by the Control Address of Recipe No.,
and the Control Address of Recipe No. is set in the recipe function. Please note
that no matter what the Recipe No. currently is, once the import file function
is used, the Recipe No. will be reset to 0.
211
 The export function can be used to export the recipe group of the HMI into the
recipe group file if the user changed the parameter data of the recipe group,
and the contents in the original recipe group file will be overwritten.
The function switch object can be used to write the contents of the current
recipe of the HMI to the target address (usually the PLC controller), and it can
write the data of the target address into the current recipe of the HMI.

Figure 140 Recipe Data Flow

9.2 Recipe Settings

The recipe function can be found by clicking【Recipe】in the【Functions】window of
【Project Explorer】located on the left side, to enter【Recipe Group List】.

Note: Each model of HMI has a different maximum number of recipes. For example, the P5 series
has a maximum of 20.

The【Add】or【Delete】button on the right can be clicked to add a new recipe group

or delete the selected recipe group; items in the recipe group list can also be double-
clicked to edit the selected recipe group. On the left side of every recipe group in the
recipe group list has a unique ID. This is called the recipe group ID.

Figure 141 Recipe Settings Screen

【Recipe】in the【Insert】tab function group of the Ribbon workspace can also be

clicked to add a new recipe group directly and enter the【Recipe Group Properties】
212
editing page. The new recipe group will be added after pressing the【OK】button.

Figure 142 Insert Recipe Screen

The following are detailed explanations of the【Recipe Group Properties】.

9.2.1 【General】

Figure 143【General】Screen of【Recipe】

Table 51【General】Properties of【Recipe】

Property Description

【Basic】 【Group Name】

The name of the recipe group.

【Comment】
Comment describing this recipe group.

【Backup Memory】
Select to save the recipe data of the HMI into the backup
memory of the HMI when the power to the HMI is
interrupted in order to avoid loss of data.
213
 【Recipe Name】 【Type】
Set the type of recipe name to Ascii or Unicode.

【Do Not Use Recipe Name】

Set if you do not want to use the recipe name.

【Use Recipe Name Address】

Check to specify the address and length of the recipe name,
when the recipe group changes, this address will display the
corresponding recipe name, or you can use this address to
modify the name of the current recipe group, when【Type】
is selected as【Ascii】, because a register contains 2 Ascii, for
example,【Length】is set to 5, so a total of 3 registers will be
occupied, and when【Type】is selected as【Unicode】, a register
will contain 1 Unicode, for example【Length】is set to 5, so a
total of 5 registers will be used.
【Parameter】 【No. of Recipe Parameters】
【Configuration】 Set the number of parameters for this recipe group.

【Current Recipe Start Address】

Every recipe group has a buffer memory space equal to the
size of a recipe on the HMI, and the current recipe start
address determines which address to start this buffer
memory.

【Target Address Type】

a. 【Continuous】
The target address can only be set for the first parameter
of in the table below. The addresses of the other
parameters will be filled in consecutively in memory and
the user cannot modify them.
b. 【Random】
The user can set the target address for every parameter,
but the addresses must be unique.

【Auto Access Target Address】

When modifying the value of the current recipe it will write
to the target address at the same time.

The following are the explanations for parameter settings.

【Parameter Name】
214
 The parameter name cannot be blank and each parameter
should have a unique name. It can be entered directly or
selected by【Font】.

【Data Type】
Available selections include【16Bit-BCD】,【16Bit-INT】,
【16Bit-UINT】,【32Bit-BCD】,【32Bit-INT】,【32Bit-
UINT】,【32Bit-FLOAT】and【Ascii-String】.

【Current Recipe Address】

The current recipe address of the parameter is determined
by the start address set by the user. The user cannot change
it.

【Length】
If the data type is 16-bit, it will take up the size of 1 word; if
the data is 32-bit, it will take up the size of 2 words. If the
data type is Ascii-String, the user can determine how many
words this parameter will take up. Every word contains 2
characters.

【Target Address】
Set the address of the target register (usually PLC).

【Digit Places】
Set the position of the decimal.

【Scope Control】
Allows the user to set a value range for this parameter. If not
selected, the default value range of the parameter will be
the range set by the【From】and【To】columns.

【From】
Set the minimum value of this parameter; this value cannot
be less than the absolute minimum value for the data type.
The default value for this field is the absolute minimum
value.

【To】
Set the maximum value of this parameter; this value cannot
be greater than the absolute maximum value for the data

215
 type. The default value for this field is the absolute
maximum value.

Data Type Absolute Minimum Value Absolute Maximum

Value
16Bit-BCD 0 9999
16Bit-INT -32768 32767
16Bit-UINT 0 65535
32Bit-BCD 0 99999999
32Bit-INT -2147483648 2147483647
32Bit-UINT 0 4294967295
32Bit-FLOAT -3.4E+38 3.4E+38

【Recipe Group 【No. of Recipe】

File】 Set the number of recipes for this recipe group.

Note: The memory size of every recipe group cannot exceed 6291456
words, which means that (the total number of words for every
parameter) x (the number of recipes) ≦ 6291456. If the user is
uncertain whether the limit has been exceeded, the user can move the
mouse cursor onto the text and a tooltip will tell the user how many
words are currently used.

【Control Address of Recipe No.】

The register data of this address is a 16-bit positive integer,
and it is used to represent the number of the current recipe.
The used recipe in a recipe group during HMI execution is
called current recipe.
Note: The Control Address of Recipe No. cannot be the same as the
Current Recipe Start Address.

【Power-On Reset Recipe No.】

If check the box, when HMI restarts will reset the【Control
Address of Recipe No.】to 0, that is, the group 0, the default
is checked; if you do not check this option, when HMI restarts
will not reset the【Control Address of Recipe No.】to 0, which
means that the recipe number has a power-off retention. In
addition, the internal memory V of the HMI has no power-off
retention, so when the【Control Address of Recipe No.】is set
to the internal memory V of the HMI, even if it is not checked,
it will not power-off retention.

【Open Recipe Editor】

216
 The recipe editor will appear, allowing the user to add a new
recipe group file when this button is pressed or edit a recipe
group file saved on the PC storage.
Note:
➢ The parameter name of the file must be the same as the
parameter name in the recipe setting when modifying an
existing file.
➢ When you use the function of simulation, the recipe group
file will be put in the path: C:\Users\User
Account\Documents\Fatek\FvDesigner\run\storage\internal
\recipe

9.2.2 【Advanced】

【Recipe】Settings
Figure 144【Advanced】

Table 52【Advanced】General Settings

Field Description

【Use Control Words】 Use the control word to control the recipes actions. Including;
reading, or writing data from/to the PLC, editing, and other
functions.

【Control Address】
Set the control address to a specific address that will trigger
the function
Note: After the control address is triggered, it must be reset
to zero to do the next function control.

# Controls the Features

value of the
address (Hex)
1 0010h The recipe data is transferred
217
 to the HMI
2 0011h MicroSD card recipe data is
transferred to the HMI
3 0012h USB port recipe data is
transferred to the HMI
4 0020h HMI recipe data is stored in the
interface
5 0021h HMI recipe data is stored in the
MicroSD card
6 0022h HMI recipe data is stored in a
USB storage device
7 0040h The HMI recipe data is
transferred to the target
address (Usually the PLC
address)
8 0080h The recipe data of the target
address (Usually the PLC
address) is transferred to the
HMI
9 0100h Add a set of recipes to the
specified recipe group, such as
the current group 3 recipe.
When this signal is triggered, a
new set of recipes will be
added and the new group will
be group 3. The former group 3
will become group 4.
10 0101h Add a set of recipes under the
specified recipe group, such as
group 3. When the signal is
triggered, a new set of recipes
is added. In this case, the
recipe group is 4.
11 0102h Copies a set of specified
recipes on a specified recipe
group, such as group 3. When
the signal is triggered, the
recipe of group 3 will be copied
to a set of recipes and will
become the new group 3. The
former group 3 will become
group 4.
12 0103h Copies a specific set of recipies
under the recipie group, such
as a recipe currently in group 3.
When the signal is triggered,
218
 replicates group 3’s recipes
with a set of recipes from
group 4.
13 0104h Deletes the current recipe
group
14 0200h Read the parameter data from
the source address then write
to the recipe group storage
space, this function transfers
the entire recipe group data.
15 0400h Write the parameter data of
the recipe storage space to the
source address, this function
transfers the entire recipe
group data.

【File Name】
Two types of file names,【Static】and【Dynamic】.
【Static】allows you to set the recipe below the checkbox.
【Dynamic】allows you to set the string length. The
maximum amount of characters is 16, the contents of the
string affect the file name.
Note: No need to enter ".csv" by yourself.
【Use Status Word】 Use the status word group to monitor the current state of
the recipe processing.

【Status Address】
Set the status address to the following to achieve the
desired status message, as show in the table below.
# Value of the Features
Status
Address (Hex)
1 0000h Initialize
2 4000h Busy
3 8000h Success
4 0100h Recipe data transfer to HMI
has failed.
5 0101h MicroSD card recipe data
transfer to HMI has failed.
6 0102h USB recipe data transfer to
HMI has failed
7 0200h HMI recipe data has failed to
save

219
 8 0201h HMI recipe data has failed to
save to the MicroSD card
9 0202h HMI recipe data has failed to
save to the USB storage
device
【Recipe Search】 Set whether to use the search recipe function. Use this
function to search for the current recipe name or the recipe
parameter column for a particular ASCII type.
【Search Recipe Name】
Use the【Search Recipe Name】 to search for recipes. When
using the【Do Not Use Recipe Name】option, you can search
for the recipe numbers.

【Search with Recipe(ASCII Type)】

Searches for recipes using ASCII type parameters

【Search for an exact match】

Search for recipes with the exact same parameters as
entered.

【Search Target Address】

Search using text address’ and character length, up to 16
characters

【Control Bit】
Search is initialized when the control bit changes from 0 to 1

【Status Address】
Shows the status of the current search. The following is a list
of status addresses and results
# The value of Features
the status
address (Hex)
1 0000h Initialize
2 4000h Busy
3 8000h Search action is complete

【Result Count Address】

Set the search result count address. After the search is
complete, the number of search results will be stored. If there
is no seach, the number stored will be 0

220
 【Result List Address】
Set the search result list address. After the search is
complete, a number that represents the temporary register is
stored. The magnitude of the number is the maximum
number of searches and the maximum number of recipes
that can be set.
【Support Recipe Set whether to use the entire recipe group and source
address to transfer data.
Group Data From/To
Source Address】
【Source Address】
Set the source address of the starting address. The software
will automatically calculate the total number of addresses
used and will prompt the user for the ending address.

【Include Recipe Name】

Set whether to include the recipe name when using the
entire recipe group and the source address.

【Length】
Set the recipe name length.

For example: each group of the recipe have 5 parameters,

there are 6 groups of recipes. Setting as follows, check
【Include Recipe Name】.

The results are shown below

221
 So the first group Recipe0 will occupy $U:300~$U:308,
$U:300~$U:303 is the recipe name of the first group
Recipe0, $U:304~$U:308 is the parameter of the first group,
The second group Recipe1 will occupy $U:309~$U:317,
$U:309~$U:312 is the recipe name of the second group
Recipe1, $U:313~$U:317 is the parameter of the second
group, and so on.

For example: each group of the recipe have 5 parameters,

there are 6 groups of recipes. Setting as follows, uncheck
【Include Recipe Name】.

The results are shown below

222
 So the first group Recipe0 will occupy $U:300~$U:304 as
parameter for the first group, the second group Recipe1 will
occupy $U:305~$U:309 as parameter for the second group,
and so on.

【Do Not Reset The Current Recipe No. When Transfer】

When unchecked, this function will reset the【Control
Address of Recipe No.】to zero after transmission.
After checking, the current selection will be kept.

9.2.3 【Recipe File List】

Figure 145【Recipe File List】Screen of【Recipe】

Table 53【General】Properties of【Recipe】

Property Description

【Add】 Add an already existing recipe group file to the recipe file
list.
【Delete】 Delete an item in the recipe file list.

【Clear All】 Delete all the items in the recipe file list.

223
 9.3 【Recipe Editor】
This function allows users to add recipe group files or edit existing recipe group files.
You can open this interface in【Open Recipe Editor】in the【Recipe Group
Properties】【General】setting function, or click RecipeEditor.exe from the
FvDesigner folder to open it.

Figure 146 Open【Recipe Editor】from software

Figure 147 Open【Recipe Editor】from folder

Table 54【Recipe Editor】Functions

Property Description

【Import Recipe Config】 It is visible when the editor is opened from the folder,
and the recipe file (.rpcfg) exported by the software
can be imported for editing.
【New Recipe】 Add a new recipe.

【Open Recipe】 Open an existing recipe file (.csv).

【Save Recipe】 Save the currently edited recipe group contents into a
recipe group file. The user can select to save it as a
csv file.
【Save Recipe As】 Save the currently edited recipe group contents into a
new file; the user can select to save it as a csv file.
【Exit】 Exit the recipe editor.

【No. of Recipe The “No. of Recipe Parameters” cannot be set if the

user is adding a recipe group file. The No. of Recipe
Parameters】 Parameters can be set if the user is modifying an
existing file.
224
 【No. of Recipe】 Determine how many recipes this recipe group file
has. A number will be automatically generated on the
left side of the recipe.
【Add to Recipe File Open the editor from software and the option can be
seen. If checked, this file will be automatically added
List】 to the recipe file list after finishing editing.
Note:
Please note that when the user is editing the value of the parameters, this value cannot exceed the
limit between the minimum and maximum value of this parameter, in which the data type of the
parameter usually defines the maximum/minimum value. However, the value set for the【Scope
Control】will be referred to if the user selects【Scope Control】in parameter settings.
If this parameter is an Ascii String, the length of characters entered by the user cannot exceed the
length configured for the parameter x2. If the parameter in the file opened by the user exceeded
the restricted range, the background will be displayed in red.

9.4 【Recipe Table】

The【Recipe Table】is used to view or edit the contents of the recipe group. In
addition, the user can decide to use a【Sub Switch】in the recipe table. 【Sub
Switch】allows users to load the data in the recipe group file into the【Recipe
Table】or save the parameter contents in the【Recipe Table】into a recipe group
file.
The【Recipe Table】object can be found in the【Recipe】category of the
【Toolbox】to the right; it can also be found by clicking the icon in the【Object】
group of the【Design】page on the Ribbon workspace. Please refer to the Chapter
16.3.29–【Recipe Table】for a detailed introduction to the properties of this object;
the following is only an introduction to special properties and functions related to
recipes.

225
 Figure 148【Recipe Table】Property Setting Screen

Table 55【Recipe Table】Functions

Property Description

【Recipe The recipe group ID and recipe group name can be seen here
if the user added a new recipe group in the recipe settings
Group】
function. The【OK】button can only be pressed after the user
has selected a recipe group.

【Table Type】 【Only Show Current Recipe】

Display the current recipe according to the Control Address of
the Recipe No. in recipe settings. The default value for index is
0.

【Show All】
Show all contents of the recipe group.
【Transpose】 Reverse the rows and columns. For example, row 1 in the
original table becomes column 1 in the transposed table.

226
 【Tap to Change When checked, you can click the recipe header or item to
automatically switch the current recipe to the clicked recipe.
Current Recipe】
【Allow Input】 The user will be able to change the parameter contents in the
recipe table during execution if this option is selected. If
【Function Switch】or【Sub Switch】in the Toolbox is also used,
the user can save the value contents of the recipe table into a
recipe group file, or change the parameter of the controller.

【Sub Switch】 If the【Save】or【Load】button in the【Sub Switch】page is

selected, corresponding buttons will also appear on the top-
right of the recipe table editing section screen when the
【OK】button is pressed.

【Save】
Once the user clicks this button during execution, the
parameter contents of the current【Recipe Table】will be
saved onto the recipe group file in recipe settings.

【Load】
Once the user clicks this button during execution, the contents
of this file will be loaded into the【Recipe Table】according
to the recipe group file in recipe settings.

227
 9.5 【Recipe Selector】
The【Recipe Selector】is used to select a current recipe. The operator can only see
the name of the recipe on the HMI and cannot know the contents of the recipe
parameters. Therefore, the parameter data is confidential.
The【Recipe Selector】object can be found in the【Recipe】category of
【Toolbox】, it can also be found by clicking the icon in the【Object】group of
the【Design】page on the Ribbon workspace. Please refer to the Chapter16.3.28–
【Recipe Selector】for detailed introduction to the properties of this object; the
following is only introduction to special properties and functions related to recipes.

Figure 149【Recipe Selector】Property Setting Screen

Table 56【Recipe Selector】Functions

Property Description

【Recipe The recipe group ID and recipe group name can be seen here if
the user added a new recipe group in the recipe settings
Group】
function. The【OK】button can only be pressed after the user
has selected a recipe group.

【Background】 【Background Selector】

Set the background color.

【List Background】
Set the background color of the list.

228
 9.6 【Function Switch】
There are a few functions in the【Function Switch】component related to recipes;
users can select these functions according to their needs. Please refer to the
following table for detailed introductions to these functions.
The【Function Switch】object can be found in the【Lamp/Switch】category of the
【Toolbox】to the right. Please refer to the Chapter16.3.2.4-【Function Switch】for
detailed introduction to the properties of this object. The following is only
introduction to special properties and functions related to recipes.

Figure 150【Function Switch】Property Setting Screen

Table 57【Function Switch】Recipe Functions

Property Description

【Function】 【Recipe: Import Recipe Group from File】

Import the contents of the recipe group file. If a recipe table
exists, the user will be able to see complete recipe group
contents. If the register addresses of some displayed objects are
the same as the current recipe address in the recipe settings,
users will also be able to see the value changes of the displayed
objects. A drop-down list will appear once this function is used;
the user must decide which recipe group to use for this function
switch.

Note: The current recipe of this recipe group will be set to Recipe No. 0
when this function is used.

【Recipe: Export Recipe Group back to File】

Export the contents of the recipe group into a recipe group file.
The user can choose to export a new file or overwrite the
original recipe group file. A drop-down list will appear once this
function is used; the user must decide which recipe group to
use for this function switch.

【Recipe: Write Current Recipe to Target Address】

A drop-down list will appear once this function is used; the user
must decide which recipe group to use for this function switch.
229
 The parameter value of the current recipe of the HMI will be
written to the register of the target address according to the
setting of this recipe group.

【Recipe: Read from Target Address to Current Recipe】

A drop-down list will appear once this function is used; the user
must decide which recipe group to use for this function switch.
The register contents of the target address will be read and the
value will be written to the current recipe of the HMI according
to the setting of this recipe group.

【Recipe: Add Default Recipe】

Add a set of recipes to or above the current recipe and switch
the current recipe to the most recent recipe

【Recipe: Copy Current Recipe】

Copy the the current recipe and put it above or below the
recipe you copied.

【Recipe: Delete Current Recipe】

Delete the current recipe and switch the deleted recipe group
with the next recipe group.

【Recipe: Transfer Source Address to Recipe Group】

The source address parameter data is written to the recipe
group. The source address can be set in the advanced tab of the
recipe. The function the entire recipe group data.

【Recipe: Transfer Recipe Group to Source Address】

The parameters of the recipe group are read and written to the
source address. The source address can be set in the advanced
tab of the recipe. The entire recipe group data is transferred.

【Recipe: Import Recipe group from File, then Transfer to Source

Address】
After importing the contents of the recipe group file into the
group storage space, the parameter data of the recipe group is
read and written to the source address. The source address can
be set in the advanced tab of the recipe. This function transfers
the entire recipe group data.

【Recipe: Transfer Source Address to Recipe Group, then Export

to File】
230
 After the source address data is read, it is written to the recipe
group. The contents of the recipe group are exported to the file.
The source address can be set in the advanced tab of the
recipe. This function sends the entire recipe group data.

【Recipe Set the corresponding recipe group for this function switch.

Group】

9.7 Example
The following example can allow the users to better understand how to use the recipe
functions and components related to recipes.

1. Adding a new recipe group in the recipe settings function. This recipe
group uses 4 parameters and 3 recipes; please refer to the following
figure for details on the settings:

Figure 151 Recipe Settings Example

231
 2. Press the【Open Recipe Editor】function and the【Recipe Editor】will
appear on the screen; the parameter contents inside will be the same as
the recipe settings, including the maximum and minimum value that the
user will be able to input. Refer to the following figure for editing
contents, and remember to save the file when editing is completed;
please remember to check 【Add to Recipe File List】.

Figure 152【Recipe Editor】Example

3. Pull two【Recipe Table】from【Toolbox】to the editing section of the

screen, and select (ID 0) MyRecipe0 for【Recipe Group】. Please select
【Only Show Current Recipe】for one of the recipe tables and【Show
All】and【Allow Input】for the other recipe table.

4. Pull a【Recipe Selector】from【Toolbox】to the editing section of the

screen, and select (ID 0) MyRecipe0 for recipe group.

5. Pull four【Function Switch】from【Toolbox】to the editing section of

the screen, and select (ID 0) MyRecipe0 for recipe group. The functions of
these four switches are【Recipe: Import Recipe Group from File】,
【Recipe: Export Recipe Group back to File】,【Recipe: Write Current
Recipe to Target Address】and【Recipe: Read from Target Address to
Current Recipe】respectively. In order to avoid confusion, the text:
Import, Export, 2PLC and 2HMI can be added to respective function
switches.

6. Pull six【Numeric Input/Display】and two【Text Input/Display】from

【Toolbox】to the editing section of the screen. The【Monitor
Address】of these 8 components corresponds to the【Current Recipe
Address】and【Target Address】in recipe settings. The【Data Type】of
the【Numeric Input/Display】component is also the same as the【Data
232
 Type】of the parameter. Set the maximum value and minimum value of
these components to provide a reasonable range.

7. Pull a【Numeric Input/Display】from【Toolbox】to the editing section

of the screen. The【Monitor Address】of this component is the same as
the【Control Address of Recipe No.】in recipe settings. Please also select
【Allow Input】.【Max.】is 2.【Min.】is 0 (because there are only 3
recipes, therefore the values used is 0~).

Figure 153 Example Screen

8. We can use the【Simulation】function once the project is created to

simulate the behavior of this project in the HMI on the computer. Click
【Simulation】in the【Project】function tab of the Ribbon taskbar. It
will ask the user to build the project first before executing the function.
The starting simulation screen is as shown below:

Figure 154 Simulation Screen 1

233
 9. Click the import function switch; this operation will read the contents of
the recipe group file into the HMI, including the current recipe and recipe
table. If the monitored addresses of the displayed objects are the same as
the current recipe address of the recipe settings, the displayed numeric
value or text will changes accordingly. The contents of the recipe selector
will also change accordingly. The current recipe will be reset to Recipe No.
0 every time a file is imported, so the contents of the recipe selector will
be the Blend1 with a number of 0. During this time the screen will be
displayed as follows:

Figure 155 Simulation Screen 2

10. Change the numeric input of the Control Address of Recipe No. To 2 and
the current recipe will change to Blend3.

Figure 156 Simulation Screen 3

234
 11. Click on the 2PLC function switch; this operation will write the data
contents of the current recipe into the register of the target address
(usually the controller). It can be observed that the displayed objects in
the target area are also the parameter data of Blend3 after clicking the
switch.

Figure 157 Simulation Screen 4

12. A keypad will appear allowing the user to input a numeric value once the
watermelon field in the recipe table below is clicked. Enter 400 and press
OK. It can be observed that the displayed objects for the recipe table and
current recipe also changes to 400.

Figure 158 Simulation Screen 5

13. Click the Export function switch; this operation will export the parameter
contents of this recipe group in the HMI onto the original file. Because we
changed the watermelon parameter data of Blend3, the recipe group file
will also save the changed data.

14. Click the 2HMI function switch; this operation will write the contents of
the target register back into the current recipe of the HMI. At this time, it
can be observed that the value of the watermelon parameters of Blend3
for the current recipe and recipe table changes back to 300.
235
 Figure 159 Simulation Screen 6

15. Click the Import function switch and it can be observed that the
watermelon parameter of Blend3 changes to 400 again. This is because
we used the export function before, so the contents of the file have also
been changed. However, because the file was imported again, the
number of the current recipe was reset to Recipe No. 0, so the current
recipe will show the data of Blend1.

Figure 160 Simulation Screen 7

236
 10. Operation Log
Historic logs are frequently required for the parameters and controls of certain
equipment in many applications in order to track phenomenon that users care about.
This is the function that the【Operation Log】provides. It can record the HMI operating
processes performed by the user into the memory and also save it as a CSV file so that
the user can view it afterwards.

10.1 【Operation Log】Settings

【Operation Log】can be accessed from the【Function】window located in the【Project
Explorer】to the left of the FvDesigner as shown below:

Figure 161 Setting Screen of【Operation Log】

Table 58 Setting Properties of【Operation Log】

Property Description

【Enable Check to enable the【Operation Log】; this is the master

237
 Operation Log】 switch of the【Operation Log】.
【Recording 【Number of Records】
Buffer (Backup Set the number of logs that the recording buffer can record.
Memory)】
【When the Recording Buffer is Limited】
This can be divided into the following two behaviors:
➢ 【Stop Operation Log】
Stop logging immediately; any operations afterwards will no
longer be recorded in the recording buffer. It can only start
logging again once the recording buffer is cleared.
➢ 【First in First out】
Delete the oldest log and places the newest log
information in the recording buffer.

【Number of Operation Logs Address】

Users can check the number of operation logs through a
specific register.

【Trigger a Bit】
When the number of the operation logs reach the maximum
limitation it will trigger the bit to notify users.
【Action】 【Record When Project Starts】
Check to record data in the recording buffer when the project
starts.

【Message】
Set the messages to record when【Record When Project
Starts】is selected.

【Record When Project Stops】

Check to record data in the recording buffer when the project
ends.

【Message】
Set the messages to record when【Record When Project
Stops】is selected.

【Record When Security Level Changes】

Check whether the information is recorded in the recording
buffer when the security level changes
238
 【Message】
Set the messages to record when【Record When Security
Level Changes】is selected.

【Record Communication Status】

The communication status of the HMI will be recorded.

【Message】
Set the messages to record when【Record Communication
Status】is selected.
【Save CSV File】 Check to save the operation log recorded in the recording
buffer into a CSV file.
【Destination】
Set the save location of the CSV file, including internal, microSD
card, USB storage device.

【Save Mode】
This can be divided into the following two modes:
➢ 【Time】
Save into CSV files at fixed times, in which the time
selections are as follows:

➢ 【Triggered by】
Use a certain triggering bit as the basis for saving the
CSV files.

【Prefix of File Name】

Set a prefix for the CSV file name; the system will use this prefix
with the date and time to form a unique file name when
writing CSV files. The user can move the mouse cursor over the
input field and the full name of the file will be displayed in the
reminder immediately, as shown in the figure below:

239
 【File Preservation Limit】
When enabled, it allows the user to set the number of days the
exported files are preserved. For example, if set for 7 days, the
HMI will check the date and will delete the files on the 7th day.
【CSV Content】 【Date】
Set the date format of the CSV content, in which the selections
are as follows:

【Time】
Set the time format of the CSV content, in which the selections
are as follows:

【Control 【Control Bit】

Address】 Set the bit address of the control mode.

【Trigger Condition】
Set the triggering conditions of the control mode, there are
【Bit OFF->ON】,【Bit ON->OFF】,【Bit Change】three
conditions. When the setting was the first two conditions
then the【Auto Reset】can be used.
For example: Select【Bit OFF->ON】and select【Auto
Reset】, after pressing the button to switch it to ON, and it
will automatically return to OFF.

【Control Mode Address】

Perform corresponding actions through parameters.
Parameter Action
0 Clear buffer
1 Archive
2 Clear buffer after archiving

10.2 【Operation Log】Settings of Objects

The descriptions above are for the function settings of the【Operation Log】, but every
object with operating behaviors has their own corresponding settings that must also
be set completely in order to use the Operation Log.
240
The following figure shows the setting screen of objects with operating behaviors; the
Operation Log setting of the objects can be found under the【Operation】tab, as shown
by the frame in the figure below.

Figure 162 Setting Screen of Objects with Operation Behaviors

Table 59 Object Setting Properties of【Operation Log】

Property Description

【Operation Log】 Select whether to enable the【Operation Log】of the

object.
It can also edit operation messages where the message can
be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.

10.3 Introduction to the Operation Log CSV

File
The CSV file contents of the Operating Log are as follows:
➢ 【Number】
Operation Log serial number
➢ 【Date】
Operation Log date
➢ 【Time】
Operation Log time
➢ 【User】
The user name at the time; no data will be recorded for this field when
【Security Manager】->【Mode】is set as【Level】.
➢ 【Level】
241
 The user level at the time
➢ 【Screen】
The screen where the operation object is located
➢ 【Part ID】
The ID of the operation object
➢ 【Comment】
Comments of the operation object
➢ 【Message】
Operating message of the operation object
➢ 【Address】
Access address of the operation object
➢ 【Pre Value】
The pre value of the operation object’s access address content
➢ 【Changed Value】
The current value after the operation object’s access address content has
changed

242
 11. Schedule
The【Schedule】function can be used if users want the HMI to automatically
execute specific actions regularly over long periods of time while the HMI is
operating; the【Schedule】function can automatically execute the action selected
by the user according to the date and time.

This chapter will explain the Schedule related screens and usage methods.

11.1 Schedule List

Click on【Schedule】in the【Project Explorer】of the FvDesigner and the【Schedule
List】will appear; current【Schedules】that were already set will be displayed on the
list in order according to the【Group ID】set for each schedule.

Figure 163【Schedule】List Screen

To set a new set of schedule, click on the【Add】button on the right and a

【Schedule】settings dialog will appear for the user to operate.

To edit a【Schedule】that was already set, double-click on the【Schedule】entry

on the list or first select the【Schedule】entry and then click on the【Edit】button
on the right; at this time the settings dialog for this【Schedule】entry will appear for
the user to modify.

To delete a 【Schedule】 that was already set, select the 【Schedule】entry and
click on the【Delete】button on the right to delete this【Schedule】entry.

11.2 Schedule Settings

The setting screen of the【Schedule】function is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting option are listed below:

243
 Figure 164【Schedule】Setting Screen

Table 60【Schedule】Setting Properties

Property Description

【Group ID】 Set the Group ID of the【Schedule】.

【Comment】 Set the comments of the【Schedule】.
【Mode】 Set the execution action behavior of the【Schedule】.

【Action Mode】
Set the execution action mode of the【Schedule】.
1 【Set Bit】: If the【Action Mode】is set to this mode,
when the system time reaches the set 【Start
Time】, the HMI will automatically set the【Action
Address】as 1.
2 【Reset Bit】: If the【Action Mode】is set to this
mode, when the system time reaches the set【Start
Time】, the HMI will automatically set the【Action
Address】as 0.
3 【Write Word】: If the【Action Mode】 is set to this
mode, when the system time reaches the set【Start
Time】, the HMI will automatically set the【Action
Address】to the【Start Value】.
4 【Run Script】: If the【Action Mode】is set to this
mode, when the system time reaches the set 【Start

244
 Time】, the HMI will automatically execute the【Start
Script】.

【Action Address】
Set the action address of the【Schedule】.

【Enable End Action】

Set to enable end action. The【End Value】,【End Script】
and【End Time】of the【Schedule】can be set when this
option is enabled; when the system time reaches the set
【End Time】, the HMI will automatically execute the end
action set.

【Power-ON Start/End Action】

Set to enable the Power-ON Start/End Action, This function
can only be enabled after selecting【Enable End Action】.

When Power-ON Start/End Action is enabled, if the HMI was

turned on between the Start and End Time interval set in
the【Schedule】, the HMI will automatically execute the
Start action once.

When Power-ON Start/End Action is enabled, if the HMI was

turned on outside the Start and End Time interval set in the
【Schedule】, the HMI will automatically execute the End
action once.

【Start Value】

245
 Set the value to write into the【Action Address】when the
【Schedule】executes the Start Action. The【Start Value】
cannot be changed if the【Action Mode】is set as【Set
Bit】or【Reset Bit】.

【End Value】
Set the value to write in the【Action Address】when the
【Schedule】executes the end action. The【End Value】
cannot be changed when the 【Action Mode】is set as
【Set Bit】or【Reset Bit】.

【Type】
This setting item will appear when the 【Action Mode】is
set as【Write Word】; it allows the setting of the【Start
Value】and【End Value】type. The【Start Value】and
【End Value】are fixed values when the type is set as
【Constant】, and the【Start Value】and【End Value】will
be the saved value of the address set when the type is set as
【Address】.

【Data Type】
This setting item will appear when the【Action Mode】is
set as【Write Word】; it allows the setting of the data type
for the【Start Value】and【End Value】setting address.

【Start Script】
This setting item will appear when the【Action Mode】is
set as【Run Script】; it allows setting of a script for the HMI
to execute when the system time reaches the【Start
Time】that was set.

【End Script】
This setting item will appear when the 【Action Mode】is
set as【Run Script】; it allows setting of a script for the HMI
to execute when the system time reaches the【End Time】
246
 that was set. Please note that this setting item cannot be
operated if【Enable End Action】was not selected.

【Enable Prohibit Action Bit】

The prohibit action bit can be set on the right when this
function is enabled. If the prohibit action bit is enabled
when the HMI is operating, if the value of the prohibit
action bit is 1, the Start Action or End Action that was set
will not be executed even if the system time as reached the
【Start Time】or【End Time】.
【Date/Time Set】 Set the date and time for the【Schedule】 to execute the
action.

【Type】
Set the type of the【Date/Time Set】; the date and time
will both have fixed values when the date/time set is set as
【Constant】,and the date and time for the【Schedule】to
execute actions will be dynamically determined by the
【Time Setting Address】that was set when the date/time
set is set as【Address】.

【Date Type】
The date type can be set when the【Type】is set as
【Constant】. Individual start day and end day can be set if
【Individual Day】is selected, and the start day can be set
as a specific date within a year if【Specific Day】is selected.
If neither【Individual Day】nor【Specific Day】was
selected, the start day can be set as a specific date within a
week.

【Changeable with Schedule Setting Table】

After checking, you can dynamically change the start date,
start time, and end time of the schedule on HMI.

【Start Month】
Set the month for the start month of the【Schedule】. This
setting item can only be set when the【Date Type】is set as
【Specific Day】.

247
 【Start Day】
Set the date for the【Schedule】to start execution.

【End Day】
Set the date for the【Schedule】 to end execution. This
setting item can only be set when the【Date Type】is set as
【Individual Day】.

【Start Time】
Set the time for the【Schedule】to start execution.

【End Time】
Set the time for the【Schedule】to end execution.

【Time Setting Address】

The【Time Setting Address】can be set when the【Type】
is set as【Address】. Once the【Time Setting Address】is
set, it will use 11 continuous addresses starting from itself
and the corresponding data type will be fixed as【16Bit-
UINT】. The meaning of the values each address saves is as
shown in the table below; please refer to Chapter 10.3 for
examples:

Time Setting Address When the bit 0 of this address is

set as 1, the HMI will read the 9
continuous addresses from
【Action Mode】to【End
Time(Sec.)】, and change the
start and end dates and time of
the【Schedule】 according to
the values read.
Status 【Time Setting Address】 + 1

When the bit 0 of the Time

Setting Address is set as 1, the
HMI will start to read the
following 9 continuous
addresses. This address will be
248
 set as 1 when the reading is
successful, and be set as 2 if the
reading failed; this address will
be set as 3 if the date or time
read is an invalid setting.
Action Mode 【Time Setting Address】 + 2

The End Action will be enabled

when the bit 0 of this address is
set as 1.

【Individual Day】will be
enabled if the bit 1 of this
address is set as 1.

【Specific Day】will be enabled

if the bit 2 of this address is set
as 1.

The action mode will be set as

【Individual Day】if the bit 1
and bit 2 of this address are
both set as 1.
Start Time(Day) 【Time Setting Address】 + 3

Sets the date for the

【Schedule】to start execution.

The value of this address will be

1~7, which corresponds to
Monday~Sunday, respectively. If
the Action Mode is set as
【Individual Day】.

The value of this address will be

1~12, which corresponds to
January~December,
respectively, and value 13 will
correspond to all months if the
Action Mode is set as【Specific
Day】.

If the Action Mode was not set

249
 as【Individual Day】or
【Specific Day】, the bits 0~6
of this address will correspond
to Monday~Sunday,
respectively.
Start Time(Hour) 【Time Setting Address】 + 4

Sets the hour of the Start Time

for the【Schedule】to start
execution.
Start Time(Min.) 【Time Setting Address】 + 5

Sets the minute of the Start

Time for the【Schedule】to
start execution.
Start Time(Sec.) 【Time Setting Address】 + 6

Sets the second of the Start

Time for the【Schedule】to
start execution.
End Time(Day) 【Time Setting Address】 + 7

Sets the date for the

【Schedule】to end execution.

The value of this address will be

1~7, which corresponds to
Monday~Sunday, respectively, if
the Action Mode is set as
【Individual Day】.

The value of this address will be

1~31, which corresponds to the
1st~31st respectively, if the
Action Mode is set as【Specific
Day】.
End Time(Hour) 【Time Setting Address】 + 8

Sets the hour of the End Time

for the【Schedule】to end

250
 execution.
End Time(Min.) 【Time Setting Address】 + 9

Sets the minute of the End Time

for the【Schedule】to end
execution.
End Time(Sec.) 【Time Setting Address】 + 10

Sets the second of the End Time

for the【Schedule】to end
execution.

11.3 Examples
Example 1: Execute start action at fixed times weekly.
Address Value Function
【Time Setting 1 Start reading the【Time Setting
Address】 Address】, and changes the
【Schedule】settings according to
the value read.
【Time Setting Bit 0: 0 Do not enable end action.
Bit 1: 0 Do not enable【Individual Day】.
Address】+2
Bit 2: 0 Do not enable【Specific Day】.
【Time Setting Bit 0: 0 Set not to execute【Schedule】on
Address】+3 Monday.
Bit 1: 1 Set to execute【Schedule】on
Tuesday.
Bit 2: 0 Set not to execute【Schedule】on
Wednesday.
Bit 3: 1 Set to execute【Schedule】on
Thursday.
Bit 4: 1 Set to execute【Schedule】on
Friday.
Bit 5: 0 Set not to execute【Schedule】on
Saturday.
Bit 6: 0 Set not to execute【Schedule】on
Sunday.
【Time Setting 8 Set the hour of the Start Time for

251
 Address】+4 the【Schedule】to start execution
as 8 A.M.
【Time Setting 30 Set the minute of the Start Time for
the【Schedule】to start execution
Address】+5
as 30 minutes.
【Time Setting 0 Set the second of the Start Time for
the【Schedule】to start execution
Address】+6
as 0 seconds.

Example 2: Individually setting the date and time to execute start action and end action
weekly.
Address Value Function
【Time Setting 1 Start reading the【Time Setting
Address】 Address】, and changes the
【Schedule】settings according to
the value read.
【Time Setting Bit 0: 1 Enable End Action.
Bit 1: 1 Enable【Individual Day】; The end
Address】+2
day and start day can be set
individually.
Bit 2: 0 Do not enable【Specific Day】.
【Time Setting 1 Set the start day for the
【Schedule】to start execution as
Address】+3
Monday.
【Time Setting 8 Set the hour of the Start Time for
the 【Schedule】to start execution
Address】+4
as 8 A.M.
【Time Setting 30 Set the minute of the Start Time for
the 【Schedule】to start execution
Address】+5
as 30 minutes.
【Time Setting 0 Set the second of the Start Time for
the 【Schedule】to start execution
Address】+6
as 0 seconds.
【Time Setting 7 Set the end day for the
【Schedule】to end execution as
Address】+7
Sunday.
【Time Setting 17 Set the hour of the End Time for the
【Schedule】to end execution as 5
Address】+8
P.M.
【Time Setting 0 Set the minute of the End Time for

252
 Address】+9 the【Schedule】to end execution
as 0 minutes.
【Time Setting 30 Set the second of the End Time for
the【Schedule】to end execution
Address】+10
as 30 seconds.

Example 3: Execute start action on specific day and time.

Address Value Function
【Time Setting 1 Start reading the【Time Setting
Address】 Address】, and changes the
【Schedule】settings according to
the value read.
【Time Setting Bit 0: 0 Do not enable end action.
Bit 1: 0 Do not enable【Individual Day】.
Address】+2
Bit 2: 1 Enable【Specific Day】.
【Time Setting Address】+3 and
【Time Setting Address】+7 will
save the start month and start day
settings respectively.
【Time Setting 6 Set the start month as June.

Address】+3
【Time Setting 0 Set the hour of the Start Time for
the【Schedule】to start execution
Address】+4
as 0 A.M.
【Time Setting 30 Set the minute of the Start Time for
the【Schedule】to start execution
Address】+5
as 30 minutes.
【Time Setting 0 Set the second of the Start Time for
the【Schedule】to start execution
Address】+6
as 0 seconds.
【Time Setting 30 Set the start day as the 30th.

Address】+7

253
 12. Data Transfer
The【Data Transfer】function can be used if the user wants the HMI to execute data
transfer actions under specific conditions while the HMI is operating; the 【 Data
Transfer】function will execute a data transfer according to the conditions set by the
user. There a two modes of data transfer:【Data to Data】and【CSV File to Data】.
This chapter will explain【Data Transfer】related pages and settings.

12.1 Data Transfer List (Data to Data Mode)

Click on【Data Transfer】in【Project Explorer】of the FvDesigner and the【Data
Transfer List】will appear;【Data Transfer】that are currently set will be displayed
on the list in the order of the【Group ID】set for them.

Figure 165【Data Transfer】List Screen

To set a new Data Transfer, click on the【Add】button on the right, and the【Data
Transfer】setting dialog will appear for the user to operate.
To edit a【Data Transfer】that was already set, double-click on the【Data Transfer】
entry or first select the【Data Transfer】entry and then click on the【Edit】button on
the right. The settings dialog of this【Data Transfer】entry will appear for the user to
modify.

To delete an existing 【Data Transfer】, select the【Data Transfer】entry and then click
on the【Delete】button on the right to delete this【Data Transfer】entry.

If you need to set a new data transfer, similar to the original, you can select the original
【Data Transfer】and click the【Copy】 button on the right side of the window.

12.2 Data Transfer Settings (Data to Data

Mode)
254
The settings screen of the【Data Transfer】is as shown in the figure below and the
meanings of each setting are listed below:

Figure 166 Setting Dialog of【Data Transfer】

Table 61 Setting Properties of【Data Transfer】

Property Description

【Group ID】 Set the group ID of the【Data Transfer】.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the【Data Transfer】.
【Address】 Set the behavior of the【Data Transfer】.

【Data Type】
Set the data type of the【Data Transfer】.

【No. of Bits】
Set the number of bits per transfer; it can be set
between1~65535 bits. The more number of bits per transfer,
the longer it will take for the transfer to be completed.
Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient time for the data
transfer to be completed every time it is executed.

【No. of Words】
Set the number of words per transfer; it can be set between
1~65535 words. The more number of words per transfer, the
longer it will take for the transfer to be completed. Therefore,
make sure there is sufficient time for data transfer to be
completed every time it is executed.

【Execution Condition】
Set the condition to execute【Data Transfer】. The【Trigger
Bit】and【Trigger Condition】can be set below if the
execution condition is set as【Triggered by Bit】; The data
255
 transfer will be executed when the status changes satisfy the
conditions set. The【Time Interval】can be set below if the
execution condition is set as【Time-based】; The HMI will
execute the data transfer according to the set time interval.

【Source Address】
Set the source address for executing the【Data Transfer】; The
HMI will read the No. of Bits or No. of Words set from the
source address and write them into the【Destination
Address】when the data transfer is executed.

【Destination Address】
Set the destination address for executing the【Data
Transfer】; The HMI will read the No. of Bits or No. of Words
set from the source address and write them into the
【Destination Address】when the data transfer is executed.

【Notification Bit】
Specify a bit to set or reset upon the completion of the data
transfer. This bit can be used to trigger other functions to run
on the transferred data.

12.3 Data Transfer List (CSV to Data Mode)

Click on 【Data Transfer】in【Project Explorer】 and the【Data Transfer List】
will appear. Switch to the 【CSV File to Data】 tab. 【Data Transfer】that are
currently set will be displayed on the list in the order of the【Group ID】set for
them.

Figure 167 CSV Data Transfer List Screen

To set a new Data Transfer, click on the【Add】button on the right, and the【Data
Transfer】setting dialog will appear for the user to operate.

To edit a【Data Transfer】that was already set, double-click on the【Data Transfer】

entry or first select the【Data Transfer】entry and then click on the【Edit】button on
256
the right. The settings dialog of this【Data Transfer】entry will appear for the user to
modify.

To delete an existing 【Data Transfer】, select the【Data Transfer】entry and then click
on the【Delete】button on the right to delete this【Data Transfer】entry.

If you need to create a new【Data Transfer】and set it similar to the original, select
the original【Data Transfer】and click the【Copy】button on the right side of the window.

12.4 Data Transfer Settings (CSV to Data

Mode)
The【CSV to Data Transfer Mode】settings are below. The meanings of each setting
are listed below.

Figure 168【CSV to Data Transfer Mode】Settings Screen

Table 62【CSV to Data Transfer Mode】Setting Properties

Property Description

【Group ID】 Set the group ID of the【Data Transfer】.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the【Data Transfer】.

257
 【CSV File Set the source of the【Data Transfer】.
Path】
【File Source】
Set the location of the CSV file source:【internal】, 【microSD
Card】, or 【USB Storage】.

【File Name】
Enter the file name of the CSV file. If【Dynamic Name】is
selected, the name of the file can be saved to a specified
location. This allows the program to change CSV files by saving a
new name into the specified location. The register address and
length can be set.
【CSV File 【Delimiter】
Content】 Set the delimiter between entries.

【CSV Data】
Set the start and end positions in the CSV file. Enter a【From】
column and row and an【To】column row. The direction the
data is read can be changed by clicking the【Direction】icon.
【Address】 【Data Type】
Select the data type of the【CSV to Data File Transfer】.

【Trigger Bit】
Set the address of the bit that triggers the【CSV to Data File
Transfer】.

【Trigger Condition】
Select the type of bit change that provides the trigger: OFF to
ON, ON to OFF, or both directions.

【Destination Address】
Set the target address of the【CSV to Data File Transfer】.

【Result State Address】

The【CSV to Data File Transfer】result status is stored in this
location.

Result Explanation
258
 0 Transfer Success
1 Source file open file failed
2 There are too few entries in the source
3 The source is unrecognized

【Notification Bit】
Notify a bit upon the completion of the【Data Transfer】.
Level: Set the bit as 0 or 1.
Pulse: Set the bit to 1 and automatically restore to 0 after
continuing the time set by【Width】.

259
 13. Script
Script provides a simple language to allow users to write their own programs. Available
statements include logical judgments, numerical computations, loop executions etc.
Users can flexibly use the statements provided by the system to complete a complex
task that cannot easily be accomplished with general objects. Existing scripts
previously created could also be reused in different projects to save development time.

13.1 When to execute scripts

Scripts can be set to be triggered and executed at the following different times:
⚫ Global
1. Project startup: Execute when the project starts.
2. Timer: After the script has finished executing, wait a fixed period of time
and then execute again.
3. Trigger by Bit: Execute the script when the status or changes of a specific
bit meet the conditions (Please refer to Table 79 Script Editor–Script
Properties Descriptions on the explanations for【Trigger】).
⚫ Screen
1. Screen open: Execute the script when a specific screen is opened.
2. Screen close: Execute the script when a specific screen is closed.
3. Screen cycle: Execute the script periodically when a specific screen is
displayed in the foreground.
⚫ Object
1. Bit Switch: Execute scripts when the actions meets the conditions.
2. Function Switch: Execute scripts when a switch is pressed.
⚫ Schedule
1. Execute scripts at the beginning or ending of a scheduled time.

13.2 Script Syntax

13.2.1 Registers
Scripts can use the following syntax to access HMI or external device registers:

Table 63 Script–Registers
Register Description
Internal Registers provided by the HMI; the access speed is generally
Registers faster than the external registers. 16Bits-UINT data type is used
to access the value in the register when internal registers are
used in a script; for example:
$U:V2 Volatile register
$U:NV2 Non-volatile register

260
 Internal registers can also be specified to access a specific bit
directly; the following syntax will use Bit as the data type to
access the value of the register:
$U:V0.0 The 0 bit (lowest bit) of register $U:V0
$U:NV1.15 The 15 bit (highest bit) of register$U:NV1
External Registers of devices connected to the HMI; the access speed is
Registers generally slower compared to Internal registers. Therefore it is
recommended to store temporary values during computation to
internal registers when writing a script, and then write the final
computed results into the external registers in order to get the
best performance. The value will be accessed as Bit data type
when the bit width of the external register is 1, otherwise it will
be accessed as 16Bits-UINT.
Using Fatek FBs PLC connection as an example (let’s assume that
the name of the connecting PLC device is 0):
@0:WY0 Allows accessing of the 16Bits-UINT value saved
in WY0
@0:Y0 Allows accessing of the Bit value saved inY0
Tag Tag provides the function to create aliases for registers, which
can be set in the【Tag Library】. Tags also have extra
advantages when used in scripts because the data types of the
tags in the【Tag Library】are specified. If the users want to use
data types other than 16Bits-UINT to access the value on the
register, they can create a tag matching to the register they want
to use and set the data type of the registers to the type they
want to use it as：
$T:FLOAT Allows accessing of $U:V500 to $U:V501 with
32Bits-FLOAT
$T:INT32 Allows accessing of $U:V400 to $U:V401 with
32Bits-INT
System System registers can be used to control some system settings
Register such as the brightness level of the backlight or time setting. It is
similar to tags in the way that the value of system registers are
also accessed with the data type set for the register when used
in a script. For example:
$S:OP_BUZZER Access with Bit data type
$S:SS_HMI_FREE_SPACE Access with 32Bit-UINT data type
Index Register Index register is a type of system register. It can be used together
with the internal or external registers to access the addresses
offset by index registers, for example:
$U:V0[$I1] When $S:I1 is 2, it is the same as
accessing$U:V2

261
 Table 64 Script–Tag Library settings used in examples
Name Data Type Address
UINT16 16Bit-UINT $U:V100
INT16 16Bit-INT $U:V200
UINT32 32Bit-UINT $U:V300
INT32 32Bit-INT $U:V400
FLOAT 32Bit-FLOAT $U:V500
BIT Bit $U:V600.0
STRING Ascii String $U:V700
BCD16 16Bit-BCD $U:V800
BCD32 32Bit-BCD $U:V900

13.2.2 Constants
The following constants can be used in scripts:

Table 65 Script–Constants
Type Description
Decimal Just use common numbers, for example:
Integer 1234
-32768
Hexadecimal Use 0x or 0X as prefix, for example:
Integer 0x1234 is equivalent to decimal integer 4660
0X1A2B is equivalent to decimal integer 6699
Binary Integer Uses b or B as suffix, for example:
000111b is equivalent to decimal integer7
Floating point Decimal integer plus decimal point, for example:
number 123.45
-32.768
String Constant Double quotes are added at the beginning and end of character
sequences, for example:
"abc"
"Hello World!"

13.2.3 Comments
Comments can be used as program code explanations in the script to increase the
readability of the program. Comments are omitted during script compilation.
Therefore they will not affect the execution results of script. Program code that will
not be used immediately can also be added into comments and moved out of the
comment block for use when needed.

262
 Table 66 Script–Comments
Type Description
Single-Line Texts between the // symbol up to the end of the line will be
Comment treated as comments
For example:
// This is a single line comment
Multi-Line Texts between the /* symbol and */ symbol will be treated as
Comment comments
For example:
/* This is a
multi-line
comment */

13.2.4 Assignment Operators

Assignment operators can be used to save constants into registers or save the
contents of the source register into the target register.

Table 67 Script–Assignment Operators

Type Description
Assignment Saves constants into registers, for example
= $U:V1 = 1234 // Saves integer 1234 into $U:V1
$T:FLOAT = 345.67 // Saves the float integer345.67 into
$T:FLOAT(1)
$T:STRING = "FATEK" // Saves the ASCII string into $T:STRING(2)

Saves the contents of the source register into the target register,
for example:
$U:V0 = $U:V3 // Saves the contents of register$U:V3 into$U:V0

When the data type of the target register is different from the
source register, the value read from the source register will first
be converted and then saved into the target register. Rounding
of decimal places and overflow may occur according to the
different data types, for example:
$U:V0 = 0xFFFFFFF // Only saves 0xFFFF into $U:V0(16Bit-UINT)
$T:INT32 = 345.67 // Only saves 345 into $T:INT32(32Bit-INT)
$T:BCD16 = 1234 /* Converted 1234 into BCD format and then
save, therefore the actual value saved
into $T:BCD16 is 0x1234 */
(1)Please refer to15.3.1-Tag Library Settings.
(2)Note that every character in an ASCII string will take up a byte, and a 0 will be

added at the end as the end of a string (which is called a null-terminating character);
therefore when “FATEK” is written, the content of the 3 words starting from
$T:STRING will be 0x4146('F','A'), 0x4554('T','E'), and 0x004B('K', 0) respectively.
263
 13.2.5 Unary Operators
Table 68 Script–Unary Operators
Type Description
Logic Not Determines the Boolean value of the operand and returns the
! reversed result; it will return 0 if the operand is a non-zero
value and it will return 1 if the operand is 0; for example
$U:V0.0 = !$U:V0.0 // reverse of bit $U:V0.0
Negative Sign Changes operand to positive or negative. If the operand is a
- positive value, it will return a negative value; if the operand is a
negative value, it will return a positive value. For example:
$T:INT16 = 123
$T:INT16 = -$T:INT16 // The value of $T:INT16 changed to -123
1's Complement Returns 1's complement of the operand, for example:
~ $U:V0 = 0x5a5a
$U:V0 = ~$U:V0 // The value of $U:V0 changed to 0xa5a5

13.2.6 Binary Operators

There are two types of Binary operators: Arithmetic Operators and Logical Operators
Table 69 Script–Arithmetic Operators
Type Example
Addition $U:V0 = 3 + 1 // Result is 4
+
Subtraction $U:V0 = 6 - 2 // Result is 4
-
Multiplication $U:V0 = 2 * 2 // Result is 4
*
Division $U:V0 = 8 / 2 // Result is 4
/
Modulus $U:V0 = 9 % 5 // Result is 4
%
Bitwise-and $U:V0 = 12 & 4 // Result is 4
&
Bitwise-or $U:V0 = 0 | 4 // Result is 4
|
Bitwise-xor $U:V0 = 65531 ^ 65535 // Result is 4
^
Left shift $U:V0 = 1 << 2 // Result is 4
<<
Right shift $U:V0 = 8 >> 1 // Result is 4
>>

264
 Table 70 Script–Logical Operators
Type Example
Logical and $U:V0.0 = 1 && 1 // Result is 1
&&
Logical or $U:V0.0 = 0 || 1 // Result is 1
||
Equal $U:V0.0 = 2 == 2 // Result is 1
==
Not equal $U:V0.0 = 1 != 2 // Result is 1
!=
Less than $U:V0.0 = 1 < 2 // Result is 1
<
Less than or equal $U:V0.0 = 2 <= 2 // Result is 1
<=
Greater than $U:V0.0 = 2 > 1 // Result is 1
>
Greater than or $U:V0.0 = 2 >= 2 // Result is 1
equal
>=
When there are multiple operators for a statement, their precedence are as shown in
the table below:
Table 71 Script–Operator precedence
0(Highest) ( ) Parenthesis
1 !–~ Reverse logic, negative sign, 1's complement
2 * / % Multiplication, division, modulus
3 + − Addition, subtraction
4 << >> Left shift, right shift
< <= Less than, less than or equal
5
> >= Greater than, greater than or equal
6 == != Equal, not equal
7 & Bitwise-and
8 ^ Bitwise-xor
9 | Bitwise-or
10 && Logical-and
11 || Logical-or
12(Lowest) = Assignment operator

13.2.7 Logical Statements

Logical Statement can execute different statement blocks according to different
265
conditions, allowing scripts to flexibly execute corresponding operations for different
situations.
Table 72 Logical Statement Syntaxes
Type Description
if <condition> Executes the statement in the if block when if
… <condition> is true, for example:
End if $U:V0 = 1
if $U:V0.0
$U:V3 = 2 // Will be executed
endif
if $U:V0 > 2
$U:V3 = 3 // Will not be executed
Endif
if <condition> Execute the statement in the if block when the if
… <condition> is true, or else execute the statement in the
else else block if the if <condition> is false; for example:
… $U:V0 = 1
End if if $U:V0 > 2
$U:V3 = 2 // Will not be executed
else
$U:V3 = 3 // Will be executed
endif
if <condition> When the if <condition> is true, execute the statement
… in the if block. Otherwise, determine the first else if
Else if <condition1> <condition>; if the first else if <condition> is true,
… execute the statement in the else if block. If the first
Else if <condition2> else if <condition> is still false, try the next else if
… <condition>, and so on. 0 or multiple else if blocks can
End if exist, for example:
$U:V0 = 1
if $U:V0 == 4
$U:V3 = 4 // Will not be executed
Else if $U:V0 == 3
$U:V3 = 3 // Will not be executed
Else if $U:V0 == 2
$U:V3 = 2 // Will not be executed
Else if $U:V0 == 1
$U:V3 = 1 // Will be executed
End if
if <condition> When the if <condition> is true, execute the statement
… in the if block. Otherwise, determine the first else if
elseif <condition> <condition>; if the first else if <condition> is true,
… execute the statement in its else if block. If the first else
elseif <condition> if <condition> is still false, try the next else if
… <condition>, and so on. 0 or multiple else if blocks can
else exist. If the if <condition> and all of the else if
266
 … <condition> are false, the statement in the else block
endif will be executed.
For example:
$U:V0 = 1
if $U:V0 == 4
$U:V3 = 4 // Will not be executed
Else if $U:V0 == 3
$U:V3 = 3 // Will not be executed
Else if $U:V0 == 2
$U:V3 = 2 // Will not be executed
else
$U:V3 = 3 // Will be executed
End if

13.2.8 Iterative Statements

Iterative Statements can execute statement blocks repeatedly according to different
conditions, allowing some repetitive tasks to be completed using fewer statements.

Table 73 Iterative Statement Syntax

Type Description
loop <count> Repeatedly execute the statements in the
… loop block <count> times
Endloop , <count> can be a register or a positive
integer constant.
For example:
/*Calculate the sum of 1 to 10 and save it
into $U:V0 */
$U:V0 = 0 // sum
$U:V1 = 0
loop 10
$U:V1 = $U:V1 + 1
$U:V0 = $U:V0 + $U:V1
endloop
for <reg> = <start> to <end> step If <start> is less than <end>, <reg> will be set
<n> to <start>, and the for block will be executed
… once. Then the value of <reg> will be added
Endfor by <n> and execute for block again, until
<reg> plus <n> is greater than <end>.
If <start> is greater than <end>, <reg> will be
subtracted by <n> instead, for block will be
executed every time until <reg> minus <n> is
less than <end>.
Note:
1. <reg> should be a register

267
 2. <start> and <end> can be either
registers or integer constants
3. <n> should be a positive integer or a
register containing positive integer
value
4. Step <n> can be ignored. In such
case, <n> will be 1
5. If <n> is 0, for block will not be
executed
For example:
/* Calculate the sum of $U:V0 to $U:V10 and
save it into$U:V11 */
$U:V11 = 0
for $S:I0 = 0 to 10
$U:V11 = $U:V11 + $U:V0[$I0]
endfor
while<condition> Execute the statement in the while block
… when the while <condition> is true, and
endwhile then check whether the while <condition> is
true or false again to determine whether to
execute again or exit the loop. If the while
<condition> is false, then the program exits
the loop. The while <condition> can be a
register or an expression combined by
multiple registers and operators.
For example:
/* Calculate the sum of 1 to 10 and save it
into$U:V0 */
$U:V0 = 0 // sum
$U:V1 = 0
while $U:V1 <= 10
$U:V1 = $U:V1 + 1
$U:V0 = $U:V0 + $U:V1
endwhile
Break break statement can be used in loop, for, or
while loops. When a break statement is
executed, the program will exit the current
loop and continue execution. break
statement is usually used with an if
statement so that it will exit the loop when
specific conditions are met; for example:
/* Search for the first non-zero word
between $U:V0 to $U:V10; if the value of
$U:V11 is 3 when the loop ends, then $U:V3
is the first non-zero word; if no non-zero
word can be found, the value of $U:V11 will
remain as 11 when the loop is finally
268
 existed*/
$U:V11 = 11
for $S:I0 = 0 to 10
if $U:V0[$S:I0] != 0
$U:V11 = $S:I0
break
end if
endfor
continue continue statement can be used in loop, for,
and while loops. When the continue
statement is executed, the statements in the
loops afterwards will be omitted and it will
jump directly to the next iteration of the
loop for execution, for example:
$U:V0 = 0
$U:V1 = 0
loop 10
$U:V0 = $U:V0 + 1 /* Will be executed 10
times */
if $U:V1 >= 5
continue
end if
$U:V1 = $U:V1 + 1 /* Will only be
executed the first 5
times*/
endloop

13.2.9 Built-in Functions

The script statement collection provides many built-in functions; users can use these
functions to execute numerical computations, string processing, file accessing and
other more complicated operations.
The built-in functions currently provided are shown in the table below. Refer to
【Built-in Function】in Chapter 13.3.2- Script Editor for details on using these built-
in functions.
Table 74 Script Built–in Functions
Type Function Description
Memory Operation memcmp Memory block comparison
memcpy Copy memory block
memsrch Search memory block
memset Memory block value
Trigonometry sin Sine
cos Cosine
tan Tangent
asin Arcsine
269
 acos Arccosine
atan Arctangent
Numeric Computation abs Absolute value
max Maximum value
min Minimum value
arrmax Maximum value for array
arrmin Minimum value for array
arrsum Sum or array
arrxor And-Or array
arrswp Swap high and low byte of array
pow Power
sqrt Square root
log Natural logarithm
log10 Common logarithm
rand Generate random number
String Operations strcat Concatenate string
strncat Concatenate string (restrict
length)
strcpy Copy string
strncpy Copy string (restrict length)
strcmp String comparison
strncmp String comparison (restrict
length)
stricmp String comparison(case-
insensitive)
strlen String length
strsrch Search string
num2str Numeric value to string
a2i String to integer
a2f String to floating point number
a2x String (hexadecimal) to integer
x2a Integer (hexadecimal) to string
(ASCII)
x2xarr String (ASCII) to String
xarr2a Convert words with the
hexadecimal representation to
an ASCII string.
a2harr Convert the unicode of the
string into consecutive integers
harr2a Convert the array of the
hexadecimal numbers to an
ASCII string.
n2a Convert multiple consecutive
integers to a string

270
 a2n Convert continuous multiple
strings to integers
File Operations file_open Open file (Internal Storage)
file_read Read file (Internal Storage)
file_write Write file (Internal Storage)
file_close Close file (Internal Storage)
file_delete Delete file (Internal Storage)
file_ rename Rename file (Internal Storage)
file_ copy Copy file (Internal Storage)
mkdir Create Directory (Internal
Storage)
screen_capture Saves current screen into
internal storage
SD File Operations sd_file_open Open file (SD Card)
sd_file_read Read file (SD Card)
sd_file_write Write file (SD Card)
sd_file_close Close file (SD Card)
sd_file_delete Delete file (SD Card)
sd_file_ rename Rename file (SD Card)
sd_ file_ copy Copy file (SD Card)
sd_mkdir Create Directory (SD Card)
sd_screen_capture Saves current screen into SD
storage
USB File Operations usb_file_open Open file (USB Storage)
usb_file_read Read file (USB Storage)
usb_file_write Write file (USB Storage)
usb_file_close Close file (USB Storage)
usb_file_delete Delete file (USB Storage)
usb _file_ rename Rename file (USB Storage)
usb _ file_ copy Copy file (USB Storage)
usb_mkdir Create Directory (USB Storage)
usb_screen_capture Saves current screen into USB
storage
Timer sleep Pause the execution of script in
seconds
msleep Pause the execution of script in
milliseconds
Date/Time Operation get_datetime Read date/time
set_datetime Set date/time
Print print_screen Prints current screen
Communication io write and read Write continuous data to the
specified device and read
continuous data to the specified
address
271
 io write Writing the lower bytes of
consecutive words to device.
io read1 Read the needed data length
from the target device and
display the result.
io read2 Read the data from the target
device and display the result.
init crc Initialize the CRC checksum.
checksum Calculate the sum of the codes
for consecutive addresses
Sound play_sound Play sound
play_sound 2 Play a sound file from an
external storage device
(microSD card or USB drive).
stop_sound Stop playing sound
beep Trigger the buzzer once
beepf Force trigger the buzzer once.
Draw change_bs Change the foreground screen
(base screen)
popup_windows Pop-up the window screen
close_all_windows Close all the window screens
System get_id Read the specified ID and store
it to the start address.

Note: Built-in functions may be added, removed or modified during software updates; please refer
to the built-in functions and related documentation listed in FvDesigner if the functions listed in
FvDesigner are different from the ones listed in this document.

13.2.10 Custom Functions

Users can combine the frequently used statements into custom functions. Call the
created custom function if these statements need to be used in different scripts. The
use of custom functions allows the scripts to be simpler and saves the time to
repeatedly write the same statement combinations.

Table 75 Script–Custom function-related statements

Related Statement Description
call <function> Calls the custom function named <function>,
and will start executing from the first
statement in the custom function; it will exit
the custom function and return to the script
to continue executing the next statement
after the call statement once it has finished
272
 executing the last statement in the custom
function.
The example below is used to determine
whether it is working hours now, and will
save the result into $U:V100; users can make
it into a custom function called IsWorkHour
if $S:TIME_LOCAL_HOUR >= 8 &&
$S:TIME_LOCAL_HOUR <= 17
$U:V100 = 1
else
$U:V100 = 0
endif

Just call IsWorkHour and then check

$U:V100 when used in a script; for example:
/* Determines whether it is working hour to
set the brightness level for the backlight of
the HMI */
call IsWorkHour
if $U:V100
$S:OP_BACKLIGHT_LEVEL = 80
else
$S:OP_BACKLIGHT_LEVEL = 30
endif
ret ret statements can be used in custom
functions so that it will exit the custom
function and return to the script to continue
executing the next statement after the call
statement once it executes up to the ret
statement; for example:
/* If $U:V0.0 is 0, then this custom function
will exit and return to the script to the line
after the call statement; the if $U:V0.1
statement behind will not be executed */
if $U:V0.0
@PLC0:Y0 = 1
else
ret
endif
if $U:V0.1
@PLC:Y1 = 1
Endif

13.3 Using Scripts

273
In this section, we will introduce how to create and edit the scripts and its related
attributes.

13.3.1 Script List

Click on【Script】in【Functions】of the【Project Explorer】, which is located to
the left side of the FvDesigner, to enter the【Script List】.

Figure 169【Script List】

The following are the description of each column in the script list:

Table 76【Script List】- Descriptions

Field Description

【ID】 Every script must have a unique ID; the range of the ID is from
0 to 65534.
【Comment】 Descriptions that help understand the contents or usage of a
script.
【Password】 Whether this script is protected by password or not.

【Trigger The conditions that the script will be triggered in the

background; please refer to Chapter 13.1- When to execute
Condition】 scripts for detailed explanations.
【Run at Set to execute the script when the project starts.

Startup】
【Valid】 Valid means that no errors were found when the script was
compiled.
【Reference】 When a script is used in an object or function, pressing【Go
to】can jump to the location where this script is used
immediately.

The following are the descriptions of the buttons on the right side of the script list:

Table 77 Script List–Descriptions of the buttons on the right side

Button Description

【Add】 Opens the【Script Editor】and a new empty script to edit.

274
 【Edit】 Opens the【Script Editor】and allows the script currently
selected in the Script List to be edited; double-clicking on the
script of a Script List has the same effect as selecting the
script first and then pressing【Edit】.
【Duplicate】 Makes a duplicate of the currently selected script.

【Delete】 Deletes the currently selected script.

【Import】 Imports scripts.

【Export】 Exports the currently selected script.

【Custom Opens the【Script Editor】and displays the【Custom

Functions】 Functions】for editing.

13.3.2 Script Editor

Figure 170 Script Editor Screen

The【Function】block to the left has three tab pages available for selection; Their
descriptions are as follows:

Table 78 Script Editor–Function Block Description

Tab Page Description

【Basic Provides a convenient interface for inputting various operators,

logical statements and iterative statements; the following menu
Functions】 will appear when users click on the pull-down menu button:

275
 Users can select the item to use and the contents of the【Basic
Function】tab page will be updated according to the selected
item.

Users can quickly input or select the register and data type to
use as parameters. Once selected, press【Insert】to add the
entire statement into the location where the cursor is located in
the editor to the right. The usage description and examples of
this statement can be checked below the【Insert】button.
【Built-in Provides a convenient interface to input the system’s built-in
functions. Its usage is similar to that of【Basic Functions】, the
Function】
following menu will appear after the user clicks on the pull-
down menu button:

276
 Users can select the item to use from the menu and then the
contents of the【Built-in Function】tab page will be updated
according to the selected item.

Users can quickly input or select the registers and its data type
to use as parameters. Once selected, press【Insert】to add the
entire statement into the location where the cursor is located in
the editor to the right. The usage description and examples of
this built-in function can be checked below the【Insert】button.
【Custom Provides users with list of custom functions.

Functions】

277
 【Call】
Inserts and calls the statement of the currently selected custom
function at the location where the cursor is located in the editing
section to the right.

【Create】
Creates a new custom functions; the following window will
appear once this button is pressed, asking for the name of the
custom function.

A new editor tab page will appear in the【Editor】section to the

right for editing the contents of the custom function after
entering a legal function name and pressing OK.
【Edit】
Opens a new editor tab page for editing the currently selected
custom function. It has the same effect as double-clicking on the
function name on the list.

【Delete】
Deletes the currently selected custom function.

【Import】
Import custom function. If it is protected by password, you have
to input password before import.
278
 【Export】
Export the selected function.

Descriptions of the top section of the【Editor】to the right are as follows:

Table 79 Script Editor–Script Properties Descriptions

Field Description

【Comment】 Used to input a comment for the script.

【ID】 Used to set the ID of the script.

【Protect by To decide whether this script is protected by password or not.

Password】
【Trigger】 Selects when to trigger this script:
【None】
Do not select any triggering condition (but the script may still
be executed when the project starts or triggered by other
objects or functions).

【Timer】
Script will be triggered continuously but there will be a fixed
delay time between the end of the first execution and the start
of the next execution.

【When Bit Becomes 1】

Executes the script once when the 【Bit】changed from 0 to
1.

【While Bit is 1】
Executes the script continuously once the【Bit】is 1.

【When Bit Becomes 0】

Executes the script once when the 【Bit】changed from 1 to
0.

【While Bit is 0】
Executes the script continuously once the【Bit】is 0.

【When Bit is Changed】

279
 Executes the script once when the【Bit】changed from 0 to 1
or 1 to 0.
【Run Once when Set to execute the script once when the project first starts.
Project Starts】
【Name】 The other fields above will disappear when editing a custom
function except【Protect by password】, only the name of
the custom function can be set.
【Continue when When there are using external registers in the script, it will
stop executing when the connection failed. This function will
Connection
ignore the connection failed part and execute other parts of
Failed】 the script.

The mid-bottom section of the【Editor】is divided into the statement editing section
and compilation message display section; Every time a change is made in the
statement editing section it will make the script compile again immediately, and the
compilation results will be displayed below. The user can fix statement errors
according to the message content and line number displayed until it displays
【Compilation succeeded】.

13.4 Examples
The examples below can allow users to have a better understanding on how to use
script functions:
13.4.1 Scrolling Lamp
Goal
The goal of this example is to create a scrolling lamp where the lamps will move back
and forth. As shown in the figure below, there are 15 lamps on the screen and three
of the lamps are lit. We wish to have a visual effect where these three lamps keep
moving to the left and then move back to the right once it reaches the end and
continues cycling in this manner.

Figure 171 Scrolling Lamp Example

280
Idea
In order to achieve the effect of the lamps moving towards the left, we can match
the 16 lamps on the screen to the 0 to 15th bit of a register word and then use scripts
to execute left shift computing to this register. When the 15th bit of the register is 1, it
means that the lamp has already moved to the left-most part; next the script should
right shift the register until the 0th bit of the register is 1 and then switch to left shift
again.
Now that we have an idea what needs to be accomplished, we can start
implementing this example.

1. First we will place 16 lamps on the screen, and set the monitor address of the
right-most lamp to $U:V0.0 and the second one to $U:V0.1, and so on and so
forth, until the address of all 16 lamps have been set.

Figure 172 Scrolling Lamp Example Screen Setting

2. Next we will add a script to control the movement of the lamps; first enter the
【Script List】and press 【Add】, input Move Lamp for the comment and then
input the following script contents and save:
/* When $U:V1 = 0, move left
When $U:V1 = 1, move right */
if !$U:V1
if !$U:V0.15 // Lamp not yet reached to the left-most position
$U:V0 = $U:V0 << 1 // Left shift the lamp
else
$U:V1 = 1 // Change the lamp movement to right shift
endif
else
if !$U:V0.0 // Lamp not yet reached the right-most position
$U:V0 = $U:V0 >> 1 // Right shift the lamp
else
$U:V1 = 0 // Change the lamp movement to left shift
endif
endif
3. Next is to add another script to initialize the value of the register; input Init Lamp
as the comment. the content is shown below:

281
 $U:V0 = 7 // Light up the three right-most lamps initially
$U:V1 = 0 // Start moving the lamp to the left
4. Finally right click the mouse at an empty space on the screen and select
【Properties】to enter the【Screen Properties】to set the two scripts to
execute when the screen opens and cycles respectively:

Figure 173 Using Script Setting for the Screen

Return to the【Script List】screen when the setting is complete and the following
results can be seen:

Figure 174 Script Setting Result

5. Finally, click on【Simulate】which is located in the functions tab page of

【Project】located in the toolbar on the top of the main screen and we will be
able to see on the simulation screen that the lamps are moving the way we
expected.

13.4.2 Load Balance

Goal
The goal of this example is to find the machine with excessive usage rate among 4
units. In order to simplify the problem, let’s assume that the usage rate of every
machine will be between 0% and 100%, and if the usage rate of a machine is 20%
over the average usage rate of the 4 units, it will be determined as the overloaded
machine. As shown in the example below, the average usage rate of the 4 machines
is (39+78+100+13)/4 = 57.5% and according to our definition of an overloaded
282
machine, units 2 and 3 are overloaded machines. We will display this result in the
Text Display below.

Figure 175 Example–Load Balance

Implementation Steps
1. We will use 4【Text】objects, 4【Numeric Input/Display】objects, 4【Slide
Switch】objects and a【Text Input/Display】object to form the screen that we
want, in which the monitoring address of the 4【Numeric Input/Display】and
【Slide Switch】objects are set as $U:V0, $U:V1, $U:V2 and $U:V3 respectively.
Since we will be using strings in the script, we must first create Ascii String type
tags to correspond to the registers; the following figure shows the【Tag Library】
settings used in this example.

Figure 176 Tag Library Setting–Load Balance Example

Next we will set the monitoring address of the【Text Input/Display】object as

$T:message, then we have completed the screen settings.
2. Next is to add a script used to determine the load balance; the contents of the
script are as follows:

283
 $U:V100 = arrsum($U:V0, 4) / 4 // Calculates $U:V0 to $U:V3
$U:V50 = 0 // 1 : Overloaded machines discovered 0: Not discovered
$T:space = " "
$T:overrun_devices = ""
// Start searching for 4 word values from $U:V0
for $S:I0 = 0 to 3
if $U:V0[$I0] >= 20 + $U:V100 // Determine whether the usage rate
is greater than average+20%
$U:V50 = 1
// Convert the overloaded machine number into text string
num2str($T:device_number, $S:I0 + 1)
strcat($T:overrun_devices, $T:device_number)
strcat($T:overrun_devices, $T:space)
endif
endfor

if $U:V50
// Message to display when overloaded machine was discovered
$T:message = "Loading too high:"
strcat($T:message, $T:overrun_devices)
else
// Message to display when no overloaded machine was discovered
$T:message = "Loading is balanced now"
endif

We will set the trigger time of this script as【Timer】and set the【Delay Time】as
1000 milliseconds, which means that it will check the load status approximately
every second. The script settings is as shown in the figure below:

Figure 177 Script Setting–Load Balance Example

3. Finally, click on【Simulate】which is located in the functions tab page of

【Project】located in the toolbar on top of the main screen, and the following
screen can be seen. Move each slide switch to change the usage rate of each
machine to see the corresponding changes in the message displayed below.

284
 Figure 178 Simulation Result–Load Balance Example

285
 14. MQTT
MQTT is a kind of communication protocol designed for IoT with simple and slight
features, it’s suitable with limited hardware and internet bandwidth environment, can
reach the needs of remote monitor and data exchange.
The mechanism of message delivery includes publish and subscribe modes, and each
of the message needs a topic name to be identified, such as Temperature. Client side
includes Publisher and Subscriber, Publisher publish message with topic, Subscriber
subscribe topic; Server side is the Broker, charge for receive the message from
Publisher then transfer to Subscriber.
When enable MQTT function on HMI, it can play the above mentioned three roles:
Publisher, Subscriber and Broker. HMI can publish the data that in the HMI and PLC
register address to Broker via MQTT, also can connect with Broker to get the
Subscriber’s data. HMI has built-in Broker and no need to search another Broker tool.
This chapter will describe the MQTT settings.

Figure 179 MQTT application schematic diagram

14.1 Server Settings

The MQTT function is in【Project Explorer】【Functions】,【Broker】paging is used
to set MQTT server (Broker), figure as below:

286
 Figure 180 【MQTT】【Broker】setting page

Table 80【MQTT】【Broker】setting properties

287
 Field Description

【Enable MQTT】 Enable to use【MQTT】. If want to use MQTT, enable the

function to setup.
【Basic】 【Connection Name】
Set the connection name, can be used as a description.

【Host (IP or Domain Name)】

Set the address of Broker, can field up IP or domain name.
Default is 127.0.0.1.
(Note: If specified local side 127.0.0.1, means to connect
the HMI built-in Broker, needs to check【Enable built-in
Broker in HMI】to connect successfully.)

【Port】
Set the Broker’s port. Default is 1883.

【Enable built-in Broker in HMI】

Decide whether to enable HMI built-in Broker, if enabled,
the link limitations are1024, IP and Port will automatically
change to default 127.0.0.1 and 1883.

【MQTT Version】
MQTT communication protocol version.

【Client ID】
Client-specific ID, can customized or use a special code
starting with % to form a unique ID:
%1: HMI name
%2: Random code
％％: Character%
(Note: if use the same Client ID to connect with the same
Broker may cause identification error and disconnection.)

【Keep Alive Timer】

Indicates the maximum time interval for the server to
receive messages from the client. If the server does not
receive a message from the client within one and a half of
the connection period, it will automatically disconnect
from the client. By the unit of second.

288
 【Clean Session】
The settings in the broker will all be cleared after offline,
includes the subscribe topics.

【Automatic Connection】
MQTT will automatically connected when turn on the HMI.

【Reconnection】
Whether to reconnect automatically if MQTT disconnect.
a. 【Interval】
Time interval for reconnection, by the unit of second.
b. 【Times】
Reconnection times, set ‘’-1’’ as unlimited times.
(Note: this reconnection mechanism will not be enabled
when the control address for control disconnection is
used.)
【Credential】 Enter the username and password when the connected
broker has set credential.
【Username】Credential user name.
【Password】Credential password.
【TLS/SSL】 If the connected broker has use TLS/SSL encrypted
message to transfer, user can import the certificate file
here.

【TLS Version】
TLS version.

【Server Certificate】
Use server side to certificate.
【Import】the need of certification.

【Client Certificate】
Use client side to certificate.
【Import】the need of certificate file and private key.

14.2 Topic Settings

The MQTT function is in【Project Explorer】【Functions】, check the checkbox
【Enable MQTT】then will appear the【Topic】paging.【Topic】is divided into
【Topic Publish】and【Topic Subscribe】. Click【Add】to add new topic, click
289
【Delete】to delete the selected topic, click【Edit】or double click the selected
topic to edit, if there is an existing item in the topic list, click【Export】to export the
topics into specific format of CSV file, click【Import】to import specific format of
CSV file to update the topics directly. There is an unique ID in the left side of the list,
is for topic’s ID.

Figure 181 【MQTT】【Topic】setting page

The following is a detailed description of the settings for【Topic Publish】and

【Topic Subscribe】.

14.2.1 【Topic Publish】

Figure 182 【MQTT】【Topic Publish】setting page

Table 81【MQTT】【Topic Publish】properties setting

290
 Field Description

【Basic】 【Name】
Set the topic name, can be used as a description.

【Topic】
The topic used by MQTT to send messages.
(Note: #,+ are wildcard character, cannot be used)

【Send Mode】
a. 【Period】
Send messages periodically, can set the interval times in
seconds.
b. 【Triggered】
Send messages when the data item value changed.

【Retain】
Determine whether the MQTT message should keep in the server.
Check this option as true then the server will retain this topic
message. If there is new subscriber or the previous disconnected
subscribers, will receive the latest remain message.

【QoS】
Set the QoS (Quality of Service) of MQTT, divided in three level:
Level Description
0 The message will only send once, no guaranteed
of delivery, will not be repeated.
1 The message will deliver at least once, guarantee
delivery, might repeated.
2 The message delivered once, guaranteed delivery,
will not be repeated.

【Data Format】
The message content of each topic is composed of the value of the
data item address, there are 3 formats as follows:

a. 【JSON】
{
291
 "d": {
"DataItem0": [true],
"DataItem1": [810],
"DataItem2": [1.7899999618530273],
"DataItem3": ["love"]
},
"error": [],
"ts": "2019-06-18T10:55:41.491"
}
b. 【Raw Data】
01 2a 03 b8 1e e5 3f 6c 6f 76 65
(Note: In order to exchange data successfully, the format and
data item settings for publish and subscribe must be the same.)
c. 【Custom】
Users can customize their own publish messages. The
variable keyword indicates DataItem Value “%n”.
Example figure as following, and the right side shows the
custom message result.

【DataItem 【No. of DataItems】

Setting】 Set the numbers of data items for this topic.

【Address Type】
a. 【Random】
Users can set the address of each data item.

b. 【Continuous】
Only the first item can set the address, the other item address
will automatically generate, user cannot modify.

The following is the setting description of the data item.

【Name】

292
 DataItem name cannot be blank and each of them should be
unique.

【Data Type】
【Bit】,【16Bit-BCD】,【16Bit-INT】,【16Bit-UINT】,【32Bit-
BCD】,【32Bit-INT】,【32Bit-UINT】,【32Bit-FLOAT】,【Ascii-
String】can select.

【Address】
According to data type, user can set each of the data item address.

【Length】
If the data type is 16-bit then will occupy 1 word, 32-bit will occupy 2
words; if use Ascii-String, user can decide to use how many words.
Each word can contain 2 characters.

14.2.2 【Topic Subscribe】

Figure 183 【MQTT】【Topic Subscribe】setting page

Table 82【MQTT】【Topic Subscribe】properties setting

Field Description
【Basic】 【Name】
Set the topic name, can be used as a description.

【Topic】
The topic used by MQTT to send messages.
(Note: #,+ are wildcard character, cannot be used)

293
 【QoS】
Set the QoS (Quality of Service) of MQTT, divided in three
level:
Level Description
0 The message will only send once, no
guaranteed of delivery, will not be
repeated.
1 The message will deliver at least once,
guarantee delivery, might repeated.
2 The message delivered once, guaranteed
delivery, will not be repeated.

【Data Format】
The message content of each topic is composed of the
value of the data item address, there are two formats as
follows:

a. 【JSON】
{
"d": {
"DataItem0": [true],
"DataItem1": [810],
"DataItem2": [1.7899999618530273],
"DataItem3": ["love"]
},
"error": [],
"ts": "2019-06-18T10:55:41.491"
}
b. 【Raw Data】
01 2a 03 b8 1e e5 3f 6c 6f 76 65
(Note: In order to exchange data successfully, the format
and data item settings for publish and subscribe must be
the same.)
【DataItem 【No. of DataItems】
Setting】 Set the numbers of data items for this topic.

【Address Type】
c. 【Random】
Users can set the address of each data item.
294
 d. 【Continuous】
Only the first item can set the address, the other item
address will automatically generate, user cannot
modify.

The following is the setting description of the data item.

【Name】
DataItem name cannot be blank and each of them should
be unique.

【Data Type】
【Bit】,【16Bit-BCD】,【16Bit-INT】,【16Bit-UINT】,
【32Bit-BCD】,【32Bit-INT】,【32Bit-UINT】,【32Bit-
FLOAT】,【Ascii-String】can select.

【Address】
According to data type, user can set each of the data item
address.

【Length】
If the data type is 16-bit then will occupy 1 word, 32-bit will
occupy 2 words; if use Ascii-String, user can decide to use
how many words. Each word can contain 2 characters.

14.3 Address Setting

The MQTT function is in【Project Explorer】【Functions】, check the checkbox
【Enable MQTT】then will appear the【Address】paging. Use【Status Address】to
monitor the MQTT connected status and use【Control Address】to control the
connection and broker settings of the MQTT. Figure as below:

295
 Figure 184 【MQTT】【Address】setting page

Table 83【MQTT】【Address】properties setting

Field Description
【Status Address】 Use status address can monitor the connection status of
the MQTT.

【Connection】
Set the status address of the MQTT connection. Following
is the connection status definition table, also can click

to view.
Value
No. Definition
(16Bit-INT)
1 0 Disable
2 1 Disconnected
3 2 Connected
4 -1 Error
【Control Address】 Use control address to control the connection of MQTT or
the real time update the broker’s setting.

【Connection】
Set the control address of the MQTT connection.
Following is the control connection definition table, also

can click to view.

Value
No. Definition
(16Bit-INT)
1 0 None
2 1 Disconnect
3 2 Connect
4 3 Update

296
 After changing the following control address related to
broker, update the control address command to update
the broker’s setting immediately.

【Host (IP or Domain Name)】

Set the IP control address, you can set the length of the
string, it will automatically calculate the length of the
continuous occupation register, the string can be up to
253 words, dynamically change the IP address of the
broker by changing the content of the register.

【Port】
Set the control address of the port, is control by a word,
dynamically change the port by changing the content of
the register.

【Client ID】
Set the control address of Client ID, you can set the length
of the string, it will automatically calculate the length of
the continuous occupation register, the string can be up
to 23 words, dynamically change the Client ID by
changing the content of the register.

【Username】
Set the control address of username, you can set the
length of the string, it will automatically calculate the
length of the continuous occupation register, the string
can be up to 256 words, dynamically change the
username by changing the content of the register.

【Password】
Set the control address of password, you can set the
length of the string, it will automatically calculate the
length of the continuous occupation register, the string
can be up to 256 words, dynamically change the password
by changing the content of the register.

【TLS/SSL】
Set whether to enable TSL/SSL control address, is control
by a bit, dynamically decided whether to enable TSL/SSL
certificate by changing the content of the register.

Following is the definition table, also can click to view.

No. Value Definition

297
 (Bit)
1 False Disable
2 True Enable

14.4 Tool
Introduce how to use MQTT related tool.

14.4.1 Select server (Broker)

a. HMI built-in broker

To enable the built-in broker, check the checkbox【Enable built-in Broker in HMI】in
【Broker】setting page, if【Host (IP or Domain Name)】set as local side 127.0.0.1
indicates MQTT will use the HMI built-in broker and it must check the【Enable built-in
Broker in HMI】to connect successfully. If use the third party MQTT client program,
then set the broker’s IP as HMI’s IP indicates to use the HMI broker to connect.

b. Public Broker

Enter the public broker IP or domain name in【Host (IP or Domain Name)】.

For example: Use Mosquitto public test broker (https://test.mosquitto.org/)

⚫ Host: test.mosquitto.org
⚫ Port: 1883

c. Set up your own Broker

Users can set up your own Broker.
For example: Use Mosquitto(http://mosquitto.org/download/), is free and open
source, for detail installation and operations please refer to the website.

14.4.2 Client-Side Application

To monitor the information transmitted by MQTT, needs to use a third-party MQTT
client application to connect to the selected broker and subscribe HMI’s publish topic
to receive the updated data. There are many free MQTT client-side applications that
can be downloaded to use.
For example: MQTT.fx (https://mqttfx.jensd.de/index.php/download)

298
 15. Resource
15.1 【Image Library】
The 【 Image Library 】 function can be used when designing projects with the
FvDesigner to create images that need to be used in the【Image Library】files (*.fil) in
advance so that they can be conveniently used when editing objects. In addition, the
generated【Image Library】files (*.fil) can also be exported when several people are
developing a project together, so that other developers can import and use the files.

15.1.1 Image Library Settings

Click on【Image Library】in【Project Explorer】of the FvDesigner and the【Image
Library】Edit Window (as shown in the figure below) will appear, where the usage
methods of each setting is as shown in the table below:

Figure 185 Image Library Editing Window

Table 84 Edit Window Setting Properties of the Image Library

Property Description

【Add】 Add an【Image Library】group; the system will

generate a new【Image Library】file (*.fil) when this
button is pressed.
【Remove】 Remove an【Image Library】group; this【Image
Library】will be removed from the image library when this
button is pressed, but the【Image Library】file (*.fil) will
not be deleted.

299
 【Import】 Import a new【Image Library】file and generates a
corresponding【Image Library】group.
【Export】 Save the current 【Image Library】group into the
specified path as a new file.
【Group List】 Display the【Image Library】groups currently included in
the computer. When the mouse is clicked on a specific
【Image Library】group, the item list on the right will
display all image contents included in that【Image
Library】group.
【Group Name】 Set the name for the currently selected【Image Library】
group.

Note: This name is only the displayed name of the【Image

Library】group; it is not the file name of the【Image
Library】file.
【Group Path】 Display the file path of the currently selected【Image
Library】group.
【Item Name】 Edit the item name of the currently selected image.

【Save】 Save the contents of the edited【Image Library】group

into the corresponding【Image Library】file.
【Add Item】 Add an image into the active【Image Library】group.
【Edit Item】 Change the saved image of the currently selected item.

【Delete Item】 Delete the currently selected image.

【Item List】 Display all the image contents included in the currently
selected【Image Library】; the【Add Item】,【Edit
Item】and【Delete Item】buttons on the top-right can be
used to edit the selected【Image Library】group.

15.1.2 Image Library Usage Method

The【Image Selector】must be used if the users want to use the image library they
created or the default image libraries provided by the FvDesigner. This chapter will
introduce the【Image Selector】usage and how to select images saved in the【Image
Library】.

300
15.1.2.1 Image Selector
The【Image Selector】is as shown in the figure ( ); it allows users to select
images. When the images saved in the【Image Library】need to be used, click on
the “ ”button to the left to select the image needed from the【Image Library】. If
the image needed is saved on the user’s computer, the “ ” button to the right can
be pressed to select the image needed from the user’s computer.

15.1.2.2 Image Library Selection Window

The image selection window of the【Image Library】is as shown in the figure below.
Use the pull-down menu to select the【Image Library】group where the image that
the user wants to use is located, and then select the image needed from the【Item
List】below. The【Item List】will synchronize and update the display of images
included in the【Image Library】group when switched to another【Image Library】
group.

Figure 186 Image Selection Window of Image Library

15.2 【Audio Library】

The【Audio Library】function can be used while designing projects with the
FvDesigner to create the audio files that need to be used into the【Audio Library】
files (*.fal) in advance so that they can be conveniently used when editing objects. In
addition, the generated 【Audio Library】files (*.fal) can also be exported when
several people are developing a project together, so that other developers can
import and use the files, too.

15.2.1 Audio Library Settings

301
Click on【Audio Library】in【Project Explorer】of the FvDesigner and the【Audio Library】
Edit Window (as shown in the figure below) will appear where the usage of each
setting is as shown in the table below:

Figure 187 Audio Library Edit Window

Table 85 Edit Window Setting Properties of Audio Library

Property Description

【Add】 Add an【Audio Library】group; the system will

generate a new【Audio Library】file (*.fal) when this
button is pressed.
【Remove】 Remove an【Audio Library】group; this 【Audio
Library】will be removed from the audio library when this
button is pressed, but the【Audio Library】file (*.fal) will
not be deleted.
【Import】 Import a new【Audio Library】file and generates a
corresponding【Audio Library】group.
【Export】 Save the current【Audio Library】 group into the
specified path as a new file.
【Group List】 Display the【Audio Library】groups currently included on
the computer. When a specific【Audio Library】group is
clicked, the item list on the right will display all audio
contents included in that【Audio Library】group.
【Group Name】 Set the name for the currently selected【Audio Library】
group.

Note: This name is only the displayed name of the【Audio

302
 Library】group; it is not the file name of the【Audio
Library】file.
【Group Path】 Display the file path of the currently selected【Audio
Library】group.
【Item Name】 Edit the item name of the currently selected audio file.

【Play】 Play the currently selected audio file. This button will
change to the【Stop】function when the audio file starts
to play; It can stop playing the audio file that is currently
playing.
【Save】 Save the contents of the edited【Audio Library】group
into the corresponding【Audio Library】file.
【Add Item】 Add an audio file into the active【Audio Library】group.
【Edit Item】 Change the currently selected audio.

【Delete Item】 Delete the audio file of the currently selected item.

【Item List】 Display all the audio contents included in the currently
selected【Audio Library】; the【Add Item】,【Edit
Item】and【Delete Item】buttons on the top-right can be
used to edit the selected【Audio Library】group.

15.2.2 Audio Library Usage Method

The【Audio Selector】must be used if the users want to use the audio files saved in
the【Audio Library】. This chapter will introduce the usage of the【Audio Selector】
and how to select audio saved in the【Audio Library】.

15.2.2.1 Audio Selector

The【Audio Selector】is as shown in the figure ( ); It allows
users to select the audio files to be used. When an audio file saved in the【Audio
Library】needs to be used, the “ ” button on the right can be pressed to select the
audio file from the【Audio Library】. The “ ” button to the left can be pressed to
play the selected audio file if the users want to listen to it.

15.2.2.2 Audio Library Selection Window

The audio file selection window of the【Audio Library】is as shown in the figure
below. Use the pull-down menu to select the【Audio Library】group where the
303
audio file that the user wants to use is located, and then select the audio file needed
from the【Item List】below. Click on the【Play】button located at the top-right to
play the selected audio file. The 【Item List】will synchronize and update the
display of audio files included in the【Audio Library】group when switched to
another【Audio Library】group.

Figure 188 Audio File Selection Window of Audio Library

15.3 【Tag Library】

The【Tag Library】can be used to define the frequently used registered addresses to
increase readability during the system design.

15.3.1 Tag Library Settings

Click on【Tag Library】in【Project Explorer】of the FvDesigner and the【Tag Library】
Edit Window (as shown in the figure below) will appear where the usage of each
setting is as shown in the table below:

Figure 189 Tag Library Edit Window

304
 Table 86 Edit Window Setting Properties of Tag Library
Property Description

【Add】 Add a tag.

【Delete】 Delete the selected tag.

【Filter】 Filter the name of tag. Allows designer to find tag quickly.
Filters includes name, type, address, length, comment, or
select all.

【Tags List Table】 The tag settings can be edited directly from the table.
The settings include:
【Name】Tag name of the address.
【Type】Data type of the address.
【Address】Address of the register
【Length】The amount of data for this data type.
【Comment】Comment explanation of this tag.
Right-click in the【Tags List Table】, the edit menu can
be opened as shown below.

The description of the item in the edit menu.

【Cut】Cut the selected tag in the【Tags List Table】.
The shortcut key is Ctrl+X.
【Copy】Copy the selected tag in the【Tags List
Table】. The shortcut key is Ctrl+C.
【Paste】Paste the copied tag in the【Tags List Table】.
The shortcut key is Ctrl+X.
【Insert】Insert a row in the【Tags List Table】.
【Delete Delete a row in the【Tags List Table】. The
shortcut key is Delete.
【Move Up】Move the selected row to up in the 【Tags

305
 List Table】. The shortcut key is Alt+Up.
【Move Down】 Move the selected row to down in the
【Tags List Table】. The shortcut key is Alt+Down.
【Import】 Import a 【Tag Library】CSV file and fills in the settings
included in this file into the 【Tag Library】of the
currently editing project.
Four formats can be imported as CSV file (* .CSV), Excel
file (* .xlsx, or * .xls), WinProladder file (* .pdw), as
shown below.

The WinProladder file is a Fatek PLC program, which

supports importing the file directly without any
conversion.

【Export】 Export the 【Tag Library】settings of the currently

editing project into a CSV file.
Three formats can be exported as CSV file (* .CSV), Excel
file (* .xlsx, or * .xls).

15.3.2 Tag Library Usage

The【Address Selector】must be used to select the tag in order to use the【Tag
Library】. The 【Address Selector】is as shown in the figure below; the address tag
can be entered directly in the edit field of the【Address Selector】, or press the
button to the right of the selector to open the【Address Selector】dialog to select a
tag.

306
 Figure 190 Inputting Address Tag in【Address Selector】Edit Field

Figure 191 Selecting Address Tag in【Address Selector】Dialog

15.4 【Text Library】

If there is the need to switch displayed texts in real-time in order to achieve multi-
language functionality while designing a project using the FvDesigner, the 【Text
Library】can be used to edit the text to display for different needs by creating a table.
This allows the project to switch between text groups currently displayed through the
【Control Address】while the HMI is operating.

15.4.1 Text Library Settings

Click on the【Text Library】in【Project Explorer】of the FvDesigner and the【Text Library】
Edit Window (as shown in the figure below) will appear where the usage of each
setting is as shown in the table below:

307
 Figure 192 Text Library Edit Window

Table 87 Edit Window Setting Properties of Text Library

Property Description

【Number of Groups】 Set the number of groups for the【Text Library】.

【Initial Group】 Set the text group to display when the HMI starts
operating.
【Control Address】 Set the control address of the【Text Library】. This
address is used to control the text group currently
displayed by the【Text Library】; the data type used is
fixed as【16Bit-UINT】. For example, when the value
of the【Control Address】is 0, the【Text Library】will
display the text in group 0.
【Filter】 Can select【Show Entire Table】and【Show All Text
Items】,【Show Entire Table】includes all contents,
【Show All Text Items】only shows text part.
【Default Font】 Set the default font of the currently selected group.

【Default Size】 Set the default size of the currently selected group.

【Header】 Set the header of the currently selected group.

【Import】

【Append】
Import a【Text Library】CSV file and fills in all the
contents included in the file into a new text group.

【Replace the Existed Group】

Import a【Text Library】CSV file and fills in all the
contents included in the file into the selected text
group.

308
 【Codec】
Set the text encoding format. The available codecs are
Big5 (Traditional Chinese), GB18030 (Simplified
Chinese), and UTF-8.
【Export】 Select the【Text Library】group and encoding format
that you want to export, and export the selected
【Text Library】group as a CSV file to the specified
folder.

【Text Table】 The text editing table for each group included in the
【Text Library】.
If the color of the text is black, means the object is
used, if the color of the text is gray, means the object
is not used, the designers can distinguish what objects
are being used.

15.4.2 Text Library Usage Method

The【Text Selector】must be used if the users want to use the text contents saved in
the【Text Library】. The【Text Selector】is as shown in the figure below; it includes
two text selection modes: entering the text directly or selecting text from the【Text
Library】. Users can switch between the two modes by using the button to the right.

Figure 193 Text Selector

The default setting for the【Text Selector】is the direct text input mode; the users can
enter the text that they want to display in the editing section to the left of the【Text

309
Selector】directly. To select texts saved in the【Text Library】, the button to the right
must first be pressed to switch modes. At this time the left of the【Text Selector】will
change into a pull-down menu and this menu includes all text contents saved in the
【Text Library】for the users to choose from. If the contents currently included in the
menu is inadequate for use, the user can also select the first option【Add/Edit Text】
in the menu and edit the contents of the【Text Library】in the window as shown in
the figure below.

Figure 194 Add/Edit Text Window

If the displayed text is selected from【Text Library】, the dialog of setting the text font
and size for different languages will appear after pressing the button. The user
can set the font and size of the text displayed in each language. If【Default Font】or
【Default Size】is selected, the font or size of the displayed text will be the font or size
set in the【Text Library】.

Figure 195 Text Library Font Window

15.5 【Font Library】

When using FvDesigner to design a project, you can use the【Font Library】function
to pre-set the required fonts and common texts and download them to the HMI for
use, so as to prevent the future HMI from displaying correctly.

15.5.1 Font Library Settings

310
Click【Font Library】in the【Project Explorer】to get to the window as seen below:

Figure 196【Font Library】

Table 88【Font Library】Edit Properties

Field Description

【Add】 Add languages such as Chinese (Traditional), Chinese

(Simplified), or other languages. The font can also be changed.
【Delete】 Remove the selected font.

【Edit】 Change the font used in the currently selected language.

【Font library The font library list contains fields such as language, font, and
common words.
list】
【Language】can display Chinese (Traditional), Chinese
(Simplified) or other languages.
【Name】The name of the selected language
【Font】Displays the font used for the selected language
【Common Words】can display commonly and uncommonly
used words.
【User Defined Text】Allows the user to input specific words
for the chosen language
【Font Library To get to the【Font Library Properties】, double-click the item
Properties】 in the font library list or press edit when the item is selected.
The window for【Font Library Properties】will pop up, as show
in the figure below.

311
 【Language】You can choose Chinese (Traditional), Chinese
(Simplified), or other languages.

【Name】The name of the specific text setting.

【Font】The font used for the text setting.

【Common Words】You can choose between 3 options, none,

common words, and common words and uncommon words.
Common words consists of about 4800 commonly used words
and common words and uncommon words consists of about
11000 words.

【User Defined Text】The user can input custom words for the
specified language

312
 16. Objects
FvDesigner provides dozens of practical objects for the users to choose from; the list
of all available objects is below. Click on the hyperlink to view detailed descriptions
of this object.
There are two ways to place an object onto the work space:
1. Left-click the mouse on an object in the object section of the design page
in the function section and then left-click the mouse on the work space.
2. Use the mouse to drag-and-drop an object in the toolbox onto the work
space.
Every object added to the work space will appear in the object list and has its own
unique ID. There are two ways to view and change the properties of an object:
1. Double-click on the object and the setting page of the object will appear.
2. Single-click on an object and then click on the right mouse button to
display the object menu, and then select Properties.
The Monitor Address can be set for many objects. This means that the data source of
this object is from the register address of the device (HMI, PLC). Details can be
viewed at the【Memory Address】section of the screen in order for the user to have
a better understanding of the usage status of the registers.

The properties (such as color etc.) of all Draw Objects can be set from the Ribbon
workspace on the software interface, as shown in the figure below.

Note: The Ribbon only has some common settings. Detailed settings for each object
must be set through another method.

Figure 197 Ribbon workspace for Style

The following is the list of objects provided by the FvDesigner; click on the hyperlink
of the object’s name to view the detailed descriptions of the object.

Table 89 Image Objects and Basic Object Library Categories

Function Description
【Draw】
Function Description
【Dot】 Draw a dot

【Line】 Draw a line

【Polyline】 Draw a polyline

【Rectangular】 Draw a rectangle

313
 【Polygon】 Draw a polygon

【Ellipse】 Draw an ellipse

【Arc】 Draw an arc

【Pie】 Draw a pie

【Table】 Draw a table

【Text】 Text input block

【Image】 Insert image block

【Scale】 Insert linear scale

【Pipeline】 Draw a pipeline

Basic Draw components.
【Lamp/Switch】 Basic Lamp/Switch.

Function Description
【Lamp】 Use the changes in the
lamp icon to display the
status of an address.
【Bit Switch】 Allow users to press the
switch to change the bit
status.
【Word Switch】 Allow users to press the
switch to change the word
value.
【Change Screen】 Allow users to press the
switch to change the
currently displayed screen.
【Function Switch】 Allow users to press the
switch to execute specific
functions.
【Numeric/Text】 Numeric/Text Display/Input.

Function Description
【Numeric Display/Input the value
saved on the address.
Input/Display】
【Text Display/Input the text
saved on the address.
Input/Display】
【Display】
Function Description

314
 【Date/Time Display the current date
and time according to the
Display】 format set by the user.
【Window Screen Display the window screens
created in the project.
Display】
Display Date/Time, Window Screen Display
【Graph】 Graph
Function Description
【Meter】 Use a pointer to represent
data
【Linear Meter】 Use the bar length/width
changes to represent data
【Data Block Captures continuous data
and plots it as a curve.
Graph】
【Data Block XY Capture continuous data
and plots it as a scatter
Scatter】 plot.
【Other Switch】 Other Switches.

Function Description
【Multistate Write the values
corresponding to the status
Switch】 set by the user sequentially
into the address.
【Slide Switch】 Allow users to write the
value into the address by
dragging a slide.
【Selector List】 Display values with a pull-
down menu allowing the
user to select the value
needed.
【Radio Button】 Combine multiple buttons
into a group, Only one of
the group buttons will be
ON.
【Keypad】

Function Description
【Input Display】 Used to display the
currently entered value or
text on the keypad screen.
【Key】 Used to provide the
functions required for

315
 entering values or text, etc.
on the keypad screen.
【Limit Value Used to display the
currently allowed
Display】 maximum or minimum
input value on the keypad
screen.
Keypad related objects.
【Animated Graphic】 Animated Graphic.

Function Description
【Animated Used when a dynamic
display of changes in
Graphic】 status, address and size is
required.
【Rotation Changing the indicator of
Rotation Indicator direction
Indicator】 and speed by register.
Select a .gif image to
【Gif Display】
display.
【Data Log】 Data Log-related objects.

Function Description
【Historic Trend】 Plot the data and
corresponding time
acquired by the【Data
Log】onto a curve.
【Historic XY Plot the data acquired by
the【Data Log】as a
Scatter】
historic XY scatter.
【Historic Data Display the data acquired
by the【Data Log】as a
Table】
table.
【Historic Data Read the【Historic XY
Selector】 Scatter】or【Historic Data
Table】data table files. The
corresponding file can be
selected from a dropdown
menu.
【Alarm】 Alarm-related objects.

Function Description

316
 【Alarm Display】 Use a table to display
alarm-related contents
including messages , levels,
when the alarm occurred, if
alarm was acknowledged
the recovery time, etc.
【Alarm Scrolling Use a scrolling text to
display alarm-related
Text】 contents including
messages, levels, when the
alarm occurred, if alarm
was acknowledged,
recovery time, etc.
Use a dropdown menu to
【Alarm Data
display alarm-related
Selector】 contents, including
messages, levels, when the
alarm occurred, if alarm
was acknowledged,
recovery time, etc.
【Recipe】 Recipe-related objects.

Function Description
【Recipe Selector】 Used to select the recipe.

【Recipe Table】 Used to view or edit the

recipe.
【Operation Logger】 Operation Logger-related objects.

Function Description
【Operation View the Operation Logger.

Viewer】
【Schedule】 Schedule-related objects.

Function Description
【Schedule Setting Table of view and setting
up.
Table】
【Video Input】 Video Input-related objects.

Function Description
【Video Input Display the video image.

Display】

317
 16.1 Introduction to Draw Objects
Draw Object provides a diverse number of drawing objects, as shown below:

Table 90 Draw Object objects

Item Description
【Dot】 Draw a dot

【Line】 Draw a line

【Polyline】 Draw a polyline

【Rectangle】 Draw a rectangle

【Polygon】 Draw a polygon

【Ellipse】 Draw an ellipse

【Arc】 Draw an arc

【Pie】 Draw a pie

【Table】 Insert a table

【Text】 Insert text

【Image】 Insert an image

【Scale】 Insert a scale

【Pipeline】 Draw pipeline

The drawing objects described above can all be found in Toolbox on the right side of
the Ribbon workspace on the software interface, as shown in the figure below:

Figure 198 Draw Object in the Ribbon workspace

Figure 199 Draw Object toolbox

318
 The properties (such as color etc.) of all Draw Object can be set through two
mechanisms:
1. Set from the Ribbon workspace on the software interface, as shown in
the figure below.
Hint: Ribbon only has some common settings. Detailed settings for each object must be set
through the other method

Figure 200 Ribbon workspace for Style

2. Double-click the left mouse button or click the right mouse button on the
object and select【Properties】to display and the object’s property page
and settings.

Figure 201 Click the right mouse button for setting functions

16.2 Draw Object Properties Dialog

16.2.1 【Dot】
16.2.1.1 【Setting】
The 【Dot】【Setting】 page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

319
 Figure 202 Setting page for【Dot】

Table 91 Property settings for【Dot】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of the object.

【Dot】 【Type】
Set the type of dot.

【Color】
Set the color of the dot.

【Size】
Set the size of the dot.

【Blink】
Set the blinking of the dot; four blinking speeds are available for
selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.

16.2.1.2 【Operation】
The 【Dot】【Operation】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 203【Dot】【Operation】Tab Settings

320
 Table 92【Dot】【Operation】Settings
Property Description

【Visibility Control the visibility of the object. The object can be controlled
by a bit or the user level.
Control】
【Enabled by Bit】
Set to control the visibility using a bit.

【Address】
Specify the address of the bit that controls the object.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Set to control the visibility using the user login level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the visible level and condition of the object.

16.2.2 【Line】
16.2.2.1 【Setting】
The【Line】【Setting】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is explained.

321
 Figure 204 Setting page for【Line】

Table 93 Property settings for【Line】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of the object.

【Line】 【Color/Width】
Set the color and the width of the line.

【Type】
Set the type of line.

【Arrow】
Set whether to have arrows on the ends of the line.

【Start Type】
Set the arrow type at the start of the line.

【End Type】
Set the arrow type at the end of the line.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the line; four blinking speeds are
available for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.

Tips:
1. User can create a line at an angle that is a multiple of 45 degrees
(including horizontal and vertical line) easily by holding "Shift" while
creating the line.
2. If user modifies the line’s length while pressing "Shift", the line’s angle
will be fixed.
3. Generally (without pressing any keypad), the angle can be changed at
322
 multiples of 5 degrees.
4. If user modifies the line’s length while pressing "Alt", the line angle can
be changed freely

16.2.2.2 【Operation】
The 【Line】【Operation】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 205【Line】【Operation】Tab Settings

Table 94【Line】【Operation】Settings
Property Description

【Visibility Control the visibility of the object. The object can be controlled
by a bit or the user level.
Control】
【Enabled by Bit】
Set to control the visibility using a bit.

【Address】
Specify the address of the bit that controls the object.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】

323
 Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Set to control the visibility using the user login level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the visible level and condition of the object.

16.2.3 【Polyline】
16.2.3.1 【Setting】
The 【Polyline】【Setting】 page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 206 Setting page for【Polyline】

Table 95 Property setting for【Polyline】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of the object.

【Line】 【Color/Width】
Set the color and the width of the line.

【Type】
Set the type of line.

【Arrow】
Set whether to have arrows on the ends of the line.

324
 【Start Type】
Set the arrow type at the start of the line.

【End Type】
Set the arrow type at the end of the line.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the line; four blinking speeds are
available for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.

Users can freely modify the corresponding dot positions for【Polyline】, as well as
add or delete a dot.
1. To modify the relative position of a dot
When the user double-clicks on an object, a dragging block will be
displayed for the dots of this object; this is when you can change the
position of the dots, as shown in the figure below:

Figure 207 Illustration diagram when users double-click on a【Polyline】

2. Adding a dot
When the user double-clicks on an object, a dragging block will be displayed
for the dots of this object; move the mouse anywhere on the line and the
cursor will change to . At this time, press and hold the left mouse button
and move the mouse to insert a dot anywhere you want.

Figure 208 Illustration diagram of adding a dot on a【Polyline】

3. Deleting a dot
When the user double-clicks on an object, a dragging block will be displayed
for the dots of this object; move the mouse onto any block on the line and
the cursor will change to . At this time, press and hold the right mouse
button to display the option to delete the dot.

Figure 209 Illustration diagram of deleting a dot on a【Polyline】

325
16.2.3.2 【Operation】
The【Polyline】【Operation】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 210【Polyline】【Operation】Tab Settings

Table 96【Polyline】【Operation】Settings
Property Description

【Visibility Control the visibility of the object. The object can be controlled
by a bit or the user level.
Control】
【Enabled by Bit】
Set to control the visibility using a bit.

【Address】
Specify the address of the bit that controls the object.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】

326
 Set to control the visibility using the user login level.

【Lowest User Level】

Select the minimum level of user logged in for the object to be
visible.

16.2.4 【Rectangle】
16.2.4.1 【Setting】
The 【Rectangle】【Setting】 page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 211 Setting page for【Rectangular】

Table 97 Property setting for【Rectangular】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of the object.

【Line】 【Color/Width】
Set the color and the width of the line.

【Type】
Set the type of line.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of the line.

327
 【Blink】
Set the blinking speed; four blinking speeds are available for
selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.
【Fill】 【Color】
Set the color or material type of the fill.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of the fill.

【Blink】
Set the blinking of the fill; four blinking speeds are available for
selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.
【Corner 【Type】
Type】 Set the corner type. Supports Normal, Rounded, and Clipped.

【Corner Size(H)】
Set the horizontal size of the corner.

【Corner Size(V)】
Set the vertical size of the corner.

16.2.4.2 【Operation】
The【Rectangle】【Operation】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

【Operation】Tab Settings
Figure 212【Rectangle】

Table 98【Rectangle】【Operation】Settings
Property Description

【Visibility Control the visibility of the object. The object can be controlled
by a bit or the user level.
Control】
328
 【Enabled by Bit】
Set to control the visibility using a bit.

【Address】
Specify the address of the bit that controls the object.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Set to control the visibility using the user login level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the visible level and condition of the object.

16.2.5 【Polygon】
【Polygon】is similar to【Polyline】. Users can freely modify the corresponding dot
positions as well as add and delete dots. The operating method is identical to
【Polyline】.
16.2.5.1 【Setting】
The 【Polygon】【Setting】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

329
 Figure 213 Setting page for【Polygon】

Table 99 Property settings for【Polygon】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of the object.

【Line】 【Color/Width】
Set the color and the width of the line.

【Type】
Set the type of line.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of the line.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the line; four blinking speeds are
available for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.
【Fill】 【Color】
Set the color or material type of the fill.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of the fill.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the fill; four blinking speeds are
available for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.

16.2.5.2 【Operation】
330
The【Polygon】【Operation】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 214【Polygon】【Operation】Tab Settings

Table 100【Polygon】【Operation】Settings
Property Description

【Visibility Control the visibility of the object. The object can be controlled
by a bit or the user level.
Control】
【Enabled by Bit】
Set to control the visibility using a bit.

【Address】
Specify the address of the bit that controls the object.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Set to control the visibility using the user login level.
331
 【User Level Condition】
Set the visible level and condition of the object.

16.2.6 【Ellipse】
16.2.6.1 【Setting】
The【Ellipse】【Setting】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 215 Setting page for【Ellipse】

Table 101 Property settings for【Ellipse】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of the object.

【Line】 【Color/Width】
Set the color and the width of the line.

【Type】
Set the type of line.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of the line.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the line; four blinking speeds are
available for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.

332
 【Fill】 【Color】
Set the color or material type of the fill.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of the fill.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the fill; four blinking speeds are
available for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.

16.2.6.2 【Operation】
The【Ellipse】【Operation】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 216【Ellipse】【Operation】Tab Settings

Table 102【Ellipse】【Operation】Settings
Property Description

【Visibility Control the visibility of the object. The object can be controlled
by a bit or the user level.
Control】
【Enabled by Bit】
Set to control the visibility using a bit.

【Address】
Specify the address of the bit that controls the object.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

333
 【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Set to control the visibility using the user login level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the visible level and condition of the object.

16.2.7 【Arc】
16.2.7.1 【Setting】
The【Arc】【Setting】 page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is explained.

Figure 217 Setting page for【Arc】

Table 103 Property settings for【Arc】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of the object.

【Line】 【Color/Width】
Set the color and the width of the line.
334
 【Type】
Set the type of line.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the line; four blinking speeds are
available for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.
【Arc Angle】 【Start Angle】
Set the starting angle of the arc.

【End Angle】
Set the ending angle of the arc.

Users can change the angle of the【Arc】directly:

When the user clicks on the object, dragging blocks will appear at the two ends of
this object. Drag the blocks to change the angle of the arc.

16.2.7.2 【Operation】
The【Arc】【Operation】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 218【Arc】【Operation】Tab Settings

Table 104【Arc】【Operation】Settings
Property Description

【Visibility Control the visibility of the object. The object can be controlled
by a bit or the user level.
Control】
【Enabled by Bit】
Set to control the visibility using a bit.

335
 【Address】
Specify the address of the bit that controls the object.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Set to control the visibility using the user login level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the visible level and condition of the object.

16.2.8 【Pie】
16.2.8.1 【Setting】
The【Pie】【Setting】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is explained.

336
 Figure 219 Setting page for【Pie】

Table 105 Property settings for【Pie】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of the object.

【Line】 【Color/Width】
Set the color and the width of the line.

【Type】
Set the type of line.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of the line.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the line; four blinking speeds are
available for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.
【Fill】 【Color】
Set the color or material type of the fill.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of the fill.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the fill; four blinking speeds are available
for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.
【Pie Angle】 【Start Angle】
Set the starting angle of the pie.

【End Angle】
Set the ending angle of the pie.

Users can change the angle of the【Pie】directly:

When the user clicks on the object, dragging blocks will appear at the two ends of
this object. Drag the blocks to change the angle of the arc.

16.2.8.2 【Operation】

The【Pie】【Operation】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is

337
explained.

Figure 220【Pie】【Operation】Tab Settings

Table 106【Pie】【Operation】Settings
Property Description

【Visibility Control the visibility of the object. The object can be controlled
by a bit or the user level.
Control】
【Enabled by Bit】
Set to control the visibility using a bit.

【Address】
Specify the address of the bit that controls the object.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Set to control the visibility using the user login level.

338
 【User Level Condition】
Set the visible level and condition of the object.

16.2.9 【Table】
16.2.9.1 【Setting】
The【Table】【Setting】 page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 221 Setting page for【Table】

Table 107 Property settings for【Table】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of the object.

【Border】 【Color/Width】
Set the color and the width of the border.

【Type】
Set the border type.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the border; four blinking speeds are
available for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.

339
 【Table Grid】 【Row】
Set the number of rows for the table.

【Column】
Set the number of columns for the table.

【Equal Grid Height】

Set the cells in the table to have the same height.

【Equal Grid Width】

Set the cells in the table to have the same width.

Note: When【Equal Grid Height】and【Equal Grid Width】are not

selected, users can drag the border of the grids to change the size of the
grids.
【Fill】 【Color】
Set the color or material type of the fill.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the fill; four blinking speeds are
available for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of the fill.
【Horizontal Select to display the horizontal grid lines.
【Color/Width】
Inside Line】
Set the color and width of the horizontal grid lines.

【Type】
Set the type of horizontal grid line.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the fill; four blinking speeds are available
for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.
【Vertical Select to display the vertical grid lines.
【Color/Width】
Inside Line】
Set the color and width of the vertical grid lines.

【Type】
Set the type of vertical grid line.

340
 【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the fill; four blinking speeds are available
for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.

16.2.9.2 【Operation】
The【Table】【Operation】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 222【Table】【Operation】Tab Settings

Table 108【Table】【Operation】Settings
Property Description

【Visibility Control the visibility of the object. The object can be controlled
by a bit or the user level.
Control】
【Enabled by Bit】
Set to control the visibility using a bit.

【Address】
Specify the address of the bit that controls the object.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show

341
 up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Set to control the visibility using the user login level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the visible level and condition of the object.

16.2.10 【Text】
16.2.10.1 【Setting】
The【Text】【Setting】 page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 223 Settings page for【Text】

Table 109 Property settings for【Text】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of the object.

【Text】 【Font】
Set the font of the text.

【Format】
Set the format of the text, bold, italics or bottom line.

【Color】
Set the color of the text.

342
 【Size】
Set the size of the text, default is 20.

【Direction】
Set the direction of the text, optional left to right or right to left.

【Alignment】
Set the alignment of the text.

【Margin】
Set the margin of the text.

【Word Spacing】
Set word sapcing of the text.

【Font Size Correlates with Geometry】

The size of the object may change more or less by the font size.

【Blink】
Select to turn on the blinking function for the texts.
【Display】 Divided into two parts: borders and backgrounds; can be set
individually.

Border:
【Show Border】
Select to display the border. When it is checked, the color, width
and blinking function of the border can be set at the bottom.

【Color/Thickness】
Set the displayed color and thickness of the border.

【Blink】
Set to turn on the blinking function of the border.

Background:
【Show Background】
Select to display the background. When it is checked, the color,
width and blinking function of the background can be set at the
bottom.

【Color】
Set the background color of the object.
343
 【Blink】
Set to turn on the blinking function for the background of the
object.

【Opacity】
Set the background opacity of the object. The larger the value,
the less transparent the background.
【Content】 Fill the words you want, can be entered directly or by the 【Font
Library】.

16.2.10.2 【Operation】
The 【Text】【Operation】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 224【Text】【Operation】Tab Settings

Table 110【Text】【Operation】Settings
Property Description

【Visibility Control the visibility of the object. The object can be controlled
by a bit or the user level.
Control】
【Enabled by Bit】
Set to control the visibility using a bit.

【Address】
Specify the address of the bit that controls the object.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

344
 【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Set to control the visibility using the user login level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the visible level and condition of the object.

16.2.11 【Image】
16.2.11.1 【Setting】
The【Image】【Setting】 page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 225 Settings page for【Image】

Table 111 Property settings for【Image】

Property Description

345
 【Preview】 Preview the appearance of the object.

【Setting】 【Source】
The source location of the image, you can select from file or
form library.

【Rotate】
Set the rotate degree of the figure, including CW 0 Degrees, CW
90 Degrees, CW 180 Degrees and CW 270 Degrees.

【Flip】
Set the degree the image is rotated, including no flip, X Axis and
Y Axis.

【Size】
Set the size restrictions of the image object. When 【Original】
is selected, the size of the image object is fixed at its original size.
When【Fixed Ratio】is selected, the image object can be scaled
proportional to its original ratio. The image object can be
stretched freely when neither is selected.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the image object. Four blinking speeds
are available for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.
【Brightness】 Set the brightness of the image object. The greater the value the
brighter the object will be displayed.
【Opacity】 Set the opacity of the image object. The greater the value the less
transparent the object will be displayed.
【Border】 Set the border of the image object. The display appearance of the
border can be set once this option is selected.

【Color/Thickness】
Set the displayed color and thickness of the border.

【Blink】
Set the blinking speed of the border. Four blinking speeds are
available for selection: None, Fast, Medium and Slow.
【Remove Set to remove the background. The transparent color can be set
【Auto】or【Manual】.
Background】

【Auto】
The software automatically determines the transparent color.

346
 【Manual】
The transparent color can be manually selected through the
image.

16.2.11.2 【Operation】
The【Image】【Operation】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 226【Image】【Operation】Tab Settings

Table 112【Image】【Operation】Settings
Property Description

【Visibility Control the visibility of the object. The object can be controlled
by a bit or the user level.
Control】
【Enabled by Bit】
Set to control the visibility using a bit.

【Address】
Specify the address of the bit that controls the object.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
347
 Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Set to control the visibility using the user login level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the visible level and condition of the object.

16.2.12 【Scale】
16.2.12.1 【Setting】
The【Scale】【Setting】 page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 227 Settings Page for【Scale】

Table 113 Property Settings for【Scale】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of the object.

【Line】 【Color/Width】
Set the line width and color.

【Line Type】
Select the appearance of the line.

348
 【Sub Scale Length】
Set the length of the minor scales.
【Scale】 【Number of Major Ticks】
Set the number of major divisions of the scale.

【Number of Sub Divisions】

Set the number of minor divisions of the scale.
【Direction】 【Horizontal】
Set to align the scale horizontally. If the scale has text, the text is
displayed above.

【Vertical】
Set to align the scale vertically. If the scale has text, the text is
displayed on the right.

【Inverse】
If the scale is aligned horizontally, set to display the text below the
scale.
If the scale is aligned vertically, set to display the text on the left
side of the scale.
【Text】 【Font】
Select the font of the text.

【Size】
Select the size of the text.

【Color】
Select the color of the text.

【Format】
Set the format of the text.

【Precision】
Set the number of decimal places for the text.

【Right/Bottom Value】
When the direction is horizontal, set the far right value of the text.
When the direction is vertical, set the bottom value of the text.

【Left/Top Value】
When the direction is horizontal, set the far left value of the text.

349
 When the direction is vertical, set the top value of the text.

350
16.2.12.2 【Operation】
The【Scale】【Operation】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 228【Scale】【Operation】Tab Settings

Table 114【Scale】【Operation】Settings
Property Description

【Visibility Control the visibility of the object. The object can be controlled
by a bit or the user level.
Control】
【Enabled by Bit】
Set to control the visibility using a bit.

【Address】
Specify the address of the bit that controls the object.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Set to control the visibility using the user login level.

【User Level Condition】

351
 Set the visible level and condition of the object.

16.2.13 【Pipeline】
FvDesigner provide user can build pipeline easily and can use in different
environment , such as water treatment application,display flow state and effect, etc.

The object can except drang【Pipeline】from【Toolbox】【Draw】to work space,

also can drag from【Ribbon】【Draw】, figure as shown below.

Figure 229【Pipeline】in【Toolbox】

Figure 230【Pipeline】in【Ribbon】

16.2.13.1 【General】

The【Pipeline】【General】page is as shown in the figure below, the meaning of

each setting item are listed below:

352
 Figure 231 Settings Page for【Pipeline】【General】

Table 115【General】Properties of【Pipeline】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Display】 【Type】
Pipeline has 3 types to choose, right side you can click【3D
Effect】,totally 5 types.

Type Illustration
Right Angle
Tyoe

Arc Angle Tyoe

Water Pipe
Type

353
 3D Arc Angle
Tyoe

3D Water Pipe
Type

【Pipe Diameter】
Set the diameter of pipe, the length of each pipe affects the
maximum diameter, with a maximum diameter of 40.

【Pipe Background Color】

Set the background color of pipe, if the 【Multi-State】has
checked, then set the color in the below table.

【Border Color/Width】
Set the color and width of border.
【Dynamic】 【Multi-State】
Check the pipeline whether to be multi-states function.

【Multi-State】【State Address】
Set the reading address of multi-state, the pipeline will read this
adress to change different states, such as set the address as
R30, when R30=0 display state 1, when R30=1 display state 2,
when R30=2 display state 3, and so on.

【Multi-State】【State Numbers】
Set the state numbers.

【Multi-State】【Table】
Set the color of each state.

【Enable Blink】
Check whether to let pipeline blink, if checked, will show up the
address and speed options to set, such as set the address set
as M10, when M10=ON the pipeline will blink.

【Enable Flow】
Check whether to let pipeline show flow effect, if checked, will

354
 show up the address and speed options to set, such as set the
address set as M20, when M20=ON the pipeline will show flow
effect.

16.2.13.2 【Pipe Item】

The【Pipeline】【Pipe Item】page is as shown in the figure below, the meaning of
each setting item are listed below:

Figure 232 Settings Page for【Pipeline】【Pipe Item】

Table 116【Pipe Item】Properties of【Pipeline】

Property Description

【Insert】 Insert joint to the middle of the pipe or add at the end of the
pipe.
【Delete】 Delete pipe or joint of the pipeline, the first pipe cannot be
deleted and the pipe that connected to the back will be
deleted.
【Table】 Display all of the pipe item, choose the pipe item , can modify
the property of【General】and【Flow Effect】modify the
property.

All of the pipe items are as follows:

Type Illustration
Pipe_H

355
 Pipe_V

Joint_L_LD

Joint_L_LU

Joint_L_RD

Joint_L_RU

Joint_T_L

Joint_T_R

Joint_T_D

Joint_T_U

Joint_X

【Pipe Item】 【General】【Type】

Set the type of pipe item, only joint can be modified.

【General】【Length】
Set the length of pipe item, only pipe can be modified.

【Flow Effect】
Set the flow effect of pipe item, only pipe can be modified.

【Flow Effect】【Type】
Set the type of all flow effect.

Flow effect types as follows:

Type Illustration
Arrow Flow Solid
Arrow Flow Hollow
Triangle Flow Solid
Triangle Flow Hollow
Polygon Flow 1 Solid
Polygon Flow 1 Hollow

356
 Polygon Flow 2 Solid
Polygon Flow 2 Hollow
Single Angle Flow
Double Angle Flow
Single Line Flow
Double Line Flow
Single Wave Flow
Double Wave Flow
Rectangle Flow Solid
Rectangle Flow Hollow

【Flow Effect】【Color】
Set the color of flow effect type.

【Flow Effect】【Copy to All Items(Direction Not Included)】

Copy the flow effect to all items.

【Flow Effect】【Direction】
Set the direction of flow effect.

16.2.13.3 【Operation】
The【Pipeline】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the meaning of
each setting item are listed below:

Figure 233 Settings Page for【Pipeline】【Operation】

357
 Table 117【Operation】Properties of【Pipeline】
Property Description

【Visibility Control】 Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or User Level.
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security Manager】

Select whether visibility is controlled by the level of the
user logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the visible level and condition of the object.

16.2.13.4 Pipeline Pipe Add or Delete

【Pipeline】in addition to adding, inserting and deleting in【Pipe Item】of object
properties setting, also can click the right mouse botton and select the desired item
to modify the pipe or joint, the quick menu will be displayed and select the item will
to modify.

Setting methods as follow:

1. Modify joint:
First, click the object you would like to modify and will appear a red outer frame,
as the left figure below.
358
Second, click the right botton of the mouse on the joint that you want to modify,
then will appear a quick menu, as the middle figure below.
Third, click replace and select the joint , result as the right figure below.

Figure 234【Pipeline】click the right mouse button to modify joint

2. Insert pipe:
First, First, click the object you would like to modify and will appear a red outer
frame, as the left figure below.
Second, click the right botton of the mouse on the pipe that you want to modify,
then will appear a quick menu, as the middle figure below.
Third, click replace and select the joint , result as the right figure below.

Figure 235【Pipeline】click the right mouse button to insert pipe

3. Remove pipe or joint :

First, click the object you would like to remove and will appear a red outer frame, as
the left figure below.
Second, click the right botton of the mouse on the object that you want to remove,
then will appear a quick menu, as the middle figure below.
Third, click remove then the object will be removed , result as the right figure below.

359
 Figure 236【Pipeline】click the right mouse button to remove pipe or joint

16.3 Base Object Properties Dialog

16.3.1 【Lamp】
When the numeric value of an address has changed, the【Lamp】object can be used
to map the changes of each numeric value of the register to a specific icon (such as
bright or dim lamp) in order to allow a more intuitive understanding of the current
numeric value of the register.

16.3.1.1 【Setting】
The【Lamp】 【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the meaning of each setting
item are listed below:

Figure 237【Setting】Screen of【Lamp】

Table 118【Setting】Properties of【Lamp】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

360
 【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Update】 Provide user can select a suitable speed to get the latest
data under different situation, such as you would like to get
the latest data or adjust the object on the screen to display
first, etc.
Provide three modes:
【once】: update once only when switch to this page or use
the system tag【OP_UPDATE_SCREEN_OBJECTS】, update
once when trigger once a time, it will keep update if the
monitor address is internal address.
【normal】: normal update speed.
【fast】: the fastest update speed.
【Address】 【Type】
Set whether the monitored address of the lamp is a Bit or
Word. The default setting is Bit.

【Address】
Set the address for the lamp to monitor.

【Enable Extended Lamp Feature】

Set to enable extra features for the lamp object. When set,
extension options will appear to the right. The original
address set in the window will no longer be read and is
replaced by the【Addresses 0~3】in the dialog as shown
below. After checked, the original【Type】and【Data
Type】setting value will be changed from the following
figure【Data Type】to set.

【Data Type】
Set the address type of【Addresses 0~3】. Data types
include Bit, 16Bit-BCD, 16Bit-INT, 16Bit-UINT, 32Bit-BCD,
361
 32Bit-INT and 32Bit-UINT.

【Number of states】
Set the number of states the lamp will have.

【State Switch Condition】

Set how the state of the lamp is determined. The conditions
include【Change State by Bit Combination】,【Change
State by Bit】, or【Change State by Data】.

【Change State by Bit Combination】uses 【Addresses

0~3】in combination to switch the displayed state.
For example, the【Number of states】is 4,【Address 0】is
M80,【Address 1】is M82,【Addresses 2】and【Addresses
3】are not set, the state will be determined as follows:
M80 = OFF and M82 = OFF State 0
M80 = ON and M82 = OFF State 1
M80 = OFF and M82 = ON State 2
M80 = ON and M82 = ON State 3, and so on.

【Change State by Bit】refers to【Addresses 0~3】to

switch the displayed state.
For example, the【Data Type】is set to Bit, the【Number of
states】is 4,【Address 0】is M80,【Address 1】is M82,
【Address 2】is M84, and【Address 3】is not set, the state
will be determined as follows:
M80, M82, M84 = OFF State 0
M80 = ON, M82 = OFF, M84 = OFF State 1
M80 = OFF, M82 = ON, M84 = OFF State 2
M80 = OFF, M82 = OFF, M84 = ON State 3, and so on.
If the【Data Type】is 16Bit-UINT, the【Number of states】
is 5,【Address 0】is R40, the other addresses are not set,
when R40 = 0 the state is 0. R40 = 1, state 1. R40 = 2, state 2.
R40 = 4, state 3. R40 = 8, state 4.

【Change State by Data】refers to switching the display

status according to the value of【Address 0】. In【Data
Type】, this option will appear for all types except Bit type.
If the【Data Type】is 16Bit-Uint, the【Number of states】is
362
 5,【Address 0】is R40, the other addresses are not set,
when R40 = 0, the state is 0. R40 = 1, state 1. R40 = 2, state
2, R40 = 3, state 3, R40 = 4, state 4, and so on.

【Addresses 0~3】
Specify the address to use to determine the state of the
lamp.

【Data Type】
Set the data type of the lamp; this setting item will appear
when the type is set as Word.
【State】 【Number of States】
Set the number of states of the lamp. When the Lamp Type
is Bit, the number of states is fixed as 2. If the Type is Word,
it can be set between 2~256.

【Custom State Value】

When choose【Word】, you can check【Custom State
Value】beside the【Number of States】.
If didn’t check【Custom State Value】, for example, the
address of the lamp is R52, munber of states is two, then
R52=0, state display as 0, R52=1, state display as 1.
After checked【Custom State Value】, you can press
【Detail】to set each single value and range corresponding
to the state.
Setting dialog as figure below.

【Out of Range Display State】

Set the status to be displayed when the value exceeds the
corresponding range

【Single Value】
Set the mode corresponding to the state as single value, the
field will changed after checked, then you can set each value
corresponding to the state in【Value】field.

363
 【Range】
Set the mode corresponding to the state as range, the field
will changed after checked, then you can set each value
corresponding to the state in【Lower Limit】and【Upper
Limit】field.

16.3.1.2 【Display】
The【Lamp】【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of each
setting item are listed below:

Figure 238【Display】Setting Screen of【Lamp】

Table 119【Display】Setting Properties of【Lamp】

Property Description

【State】 Select the state to be edited. 0 and 1 buttons are provided

to enable quick switching between states 0 and 1.
【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of the text displayed for the current editing
state.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the size of the text displayed for the current editing
state.

【Position】
Set the position of the text displayed for the current editing
state.

364
 【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the text of the current editing
state. There are four blinking speeds available to choose
from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Scrolling Text】
Set the scrolling text function for the text of the current
editing state. There are four scrolling speeds available to
choose, from slow to fast.

【Format】
Set the format of the text displayed for the current editing
state, including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the color of the text displayed for the current editing
state.

【Copy Attributes to All States】

The text properties for the current editing state is applied to
all states.

【Content (Direct Text)】

Set the text displayed for the current editing state. It can be
inputted directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.

【Copy to All States】

Apply the settings of the text for the current editing state to
all states.
【Background】 【Use Image】
Set whether to use an image for the displayed background
of the current editing state. When this option is checked, an
【Image Selector】will appear asking the user to select an
image either from the【Image Library】or from a file.

【Original Size of Image】

Display the original size of the image.

【Image Position】
Appears after checking【Original Size of Image】, you can
365
 select the position of the picture to be displayed.

【Color】
Set the displayed background color of the current editing
state. This setting item will appear if【Use Image】was not
selected.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the displayed background of
the current editing state. There are four blinking speeds
available to choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Remove Background】
Choose the color by setting a transparent color.

【Rotate】
Rotate the graph, includes CW 0 Degrees, CW 90 Degrees,
CW 180 Degrees and CW 270 Degrees.

【Flip】
Flip the graph, includes No Flip, X-Axis and Y-Axis.

【Copy to All States】

Apply the settings of the background for the currently
editing state to all states.
【Border】 Set the border of the lamp object, set the appearance after
checked.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of the border.

【Type】
Set the type of the boder, click for more types.

【Copy to All States】

Apply the settings of the border for the currently editing
state to all states.

16.3.1.3 【Operation】
The【Lamp】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of each

366
setting item are listed below:

Figure 239【Operation】Setting Screen of【Lamp】

Table 120【Operation】Setting Properties of【Lamp】

Property Description

【Visibility Control】 Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by

a specific Bit or User Level.
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true
then show up the object, when false not show the
object. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security Manager】

Select whether visibility is controlled by the level of
the user logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the visible level and condition of the object.

367
16.3.1.4 【External Lable】
The【Lamp】【External Lable】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of
each setting item are listed below:

Figure 240【External Lable】Setting Screen of【Lamp】

【External Lable】setting properties

Table 121【Lamp】
Option Description

【Enable External Checked, the bottom will appear the external lable
settings of the object.
Lable】
【Direction】 Set the display direction, there are horizontal and vertical
two selections.
【Space】 Set the space between external lable and the object.

【Left/Top Fill in the text to be displayed on the left / top lable of the
object, can be directly input or selected from【Font
Lable(Direct Text)】
Library】.
【Right/Bottom Fill in the text to be displayed on the right / bottom lable
of the object, can be directly input or selected from
Lable(Direct Text)】
【Font Library】.
【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of text.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the size of text, the default size is 20.

【Alignment】

368
 Set the alignment of text.

【Color】
Set the color of text.

【Format】
Set the format of text, includes Bold, Italic and Underline.

【Word Spacing】
Set the word space of text.

【Margin】
Set the margin of text.
【Background】 Check whether to display background, set the color and
opacity of background after checked.

【Color】
Set the background color of external lable.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of external lable background, the greater
the value the more the background opacity is.
【Border】 Check whether to display border.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of border.

【Type】
Set the type of border.

16.3.2 【Switch】
Switch allows users to perform specific operation behaviors by pressing objects,
including【Bit Switch】,【Word Switch】,【Change Screen】and【Function Switch】.

16.3.2.1 【Bit Switch】

The【Bit Switch】 【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of each
setting item are listed below:

369
 Figure 241【Setting】Screen of【Bit Switch】

Table 122【Setting】Properties of【Bit Switch】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Update】 Provide user can select a suitable speed to get the latest
data under different situation, such as you would like to get
the latest data or adjust the object on the screen to display
first, etc.
Provide three modes:
【once】: update once only when switch to this page or use
the system tag【OP_UPDATE_SCREEN_OBJECTS】, update
once when trigger once a time, it will keep update if the
monitor address is internal address.
【normal】: normal update speed.
【fast】: the fastest update speed.
【Execute while Select to execute the action set for the Bit Switch while
releasing. The action will be executed immediately when the
Releasing】 switch is pressed if this option is not selected.
【Play Audio while Select to play audio when the switch is pressed; an【Audio
Pressing】 Selector】will appear on the right when enabled. The switch
on the right of the【Audio Selector】can be pressed to
select an audio and the switch on the left of the【Audio
Selector】can be pressed to play the selected audio.
【Enable Multi- Select to enable the Multi-function Switch. A【Multi-
function】 function List】will appear on the left when selected.
370
 【Multi-function This list will appear when【Enable Multi-function】 is
List】 selected. The【Multi-function List】is used to display the list
of functions that will be executed when the switch is
pressed. A maximum of 16 operations can be set, and the
system will execute the operations in order when the switch
is pressed.

【Add】
Add to the number of switches in【Multi-function List】.
The type of switch to add can be selected.

【Delete】
Delete the switch currently selected in the【Multi-function
List】.

【Up】
Move the order of the switch currently selected in the
【Multi-function List】up.

【Down】
Move the order of the switch currently selected in the
【Multi-function List】down.

Note:
➢ The order of the object itself is fixed as first and it
cannot be moved up or down.
➢ The【Multi-function List】of an object can only
include one【Change Screen】 or 【Function
Switch】, and it must be last in the list.
【Address】 Set the operating address of the Bit Switch.

【Monitor Set the switch to change its state according to the value in
the monitored address. The user will be able to set the
Address】 address to monitor when this option is selected.
After checking【identical to Write Address】, the【Monitor
Address】cannot be modified and will be the same as the
write address.
【Enable Extended Set to enable extra features for the bit switch object. When
set, extension options will appear to the right. The original
Lamp Feature】 address set in the window will no longer be read and is

371
 replaced by the【Addresses 0~3】in the dialog as shown
below. After checked, the original【Type】and【Data
Type】setting value will be changed from the following
figure【Data Type】to set.

【Data Type】
Set the address type of【Addresses 0~3】. Data types
include Bit, 16Bit-BCD, 16Bit-INT, 16Bit-UINT, 32Bit-BCD,
32Bit-INT and 32Bit-UINT.

【Number of states】
Set the number of states the bit switch will have.

【State Switch Condition】

Set how the state of the bit switch is determined. The
conditions include【Change State by Bit Combination】,
【Change State by Bit】, or【Change State by Data】.

【Change State by Bit Combination】uses【Addresses

0~3】in combination to switch the displayed state.
For example, the【Data Type】is set to Bit, the【Number of
states】is 4,【Address 0】is M90,【Address 1】is M91,
【Addresses 2】and【Addresses 3】are not set, the state
will be determined as follows:
M90 = OFF and M91 = OFF State 0
M90 = ON and M91 = OFF State 1
M90 = OFF and M91 = ON State 2
M90 = ON and M91 = ON State 3, and so on.

【Change State by Bit】refers to【Addresses 0~3】to

switch the displayed state.
372
 For example, the【Data Type】is set to Bit, the【Number of
states】is 4,【Address 0】is M90,【Address 1】is M91,
【Address 2】is M92, and【Address 3】is not set, the state
will be determined as follows:
M90, M91, M92 = OFF State 0
M90 = ON, M91 = OFF, M92 = OFF State 1
M90 = OFF, M91 = ON, M92 = OFF State 2
M90 = OFF, M91 = OFF, M92 = ON State 3, and so on.
If the data type is 16Bit-UINT, the number of states is 5,
【Address 0】is R50, the other addresses are not set, when
R50 = 0 the state is 0. R50 = 1, state 1. R50 = 2, state 2. R50 =
4, state 3. R50 = 8, state 4.

【Change State by Data】refers to switching the display

status according to the value of【Address 0】. In【Data
Type】, this option will appear for all types except Bit type.
If the【Data Type】is 16Bit-Uint, the【Number of states】is
5,【Address 0】is R50, the other addresses are not set,
when R40 = 0, the state is 0. R50 = 1, state 1. R50 = 2, state
2, R50 = 3, state 3, R50 = 4, state 4, and so on.

【Addresses 0~3】
Specify the address to use to determine the state of the bit
switch.
【Custom State After check【Custom State Value】, you can click【Detail】
Value】 at the back, set the value and range of each state.
Setting dialog as below:

【Out of Range Display State】

373
 Set the state when the value display out of range.

【Single Value】
Set the mode of corresponding state as single value, the
following table will change after clicked, then you can set the
value of each corresponding state in【Value】field.

【Range】
Set the mode of corresponding state as range, the following
table will change after clicked, then you can set the value of
each corresponding state in【Lower Limit】and【Upper
Limit】field.

【Action】 Set the operation of the Bit Switch. Setting items that will
appear below varies according to the different operation
selected.
【Duration】 The duration of the operation when the Bit Switch is
pressed. The duration time can be set on the right when this
option is selected.

For example, if the operation is set as【Set Bit】, and the

duration is set as 1 second, when the Bit Switch is pressed
the【Address】will change to 1 and then automatically
change to 0 after 1 second.
【Execute Set to execute scripts when the Bit Switch is pressed. The ID
of the script to execute can be set on the right when this
Scripts】 option is selected.

If the【Action】is set as【Bit Momentary】,【Bit Invert】

or【Periodic Switch】, individual scripts can be set to
execute when the【Address】is 1 or 0.
【Set Bit】 The【Address】will change to 1 when the Bit Switch is
pressed.
【Reset Bit】 The【Address】will change to 0 when the Bit Switch is
pressed.
【Bit The【Address】will change to 1 when the Bit Switch is
Momentary】 pressed, and the【Address】will change to 0 when the Bit
Switch is released.
【Bit Invert】 The current state of the【Address】will change from 1 to 0
or 0 to 1 according to its current state.
374
 【Comparison】 If the numeric value of the【Reference Address】read by
【Data Type】satisfies the【Condition】and【Constant】
set when the Bit Switch is pressed, the【Address】will
change to 1.
【Periodic The state of the【Address】will change periodically
Switch】 according to the【Time Interval】and【Number of Times】
set for the【Address】when the Bit Switch is pressed.

16.3.2.2 【Word Switch】

The【Word Switch】【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of
each setting item are listed below:

Figure 242【Setting】Screen of【Word Switch】

Table 123【Setting】Properties of【Word Switch】

Property Description

【Preview】 Previews the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Update】 Provide user can select a suitable speed to get the latest data
under different situation, such as you would like to get the
latest data or adjust the object on the screen to display first,
etc.
Provide three modes:
【once】: update once only when switch to this page or use
the system tag【OP_UPDATE_SCREEN_OBJECTS】, update
once when trigger once a time, it will keep update if the
monitor address is internal address.

375
 【normal】: normal update speed.
【fast】: the fastest update speed.
【Execute while Select to execute the action set for the Word Switch while
releasing. The action will be executed immediately when the
Releasing】 switch is pressed if this option is not selected.
【Play Audio Select to play audio when the switch is pressed. An【Audio
while Pressing】 Selector】will appear on the right when enabled. The switch
on the right of the【Audio Selector】can be pressed to select
an audio and the switch on the left of the【Audio Selector】
can be pressed to play the selected audio.
【Enable Multi- Select whether to enable the Multi-function Switch. A【Multi-
function】 function List】will appear on the left when selected.
【Multi-function This list will appear when【Enable Multi-function】is
List】 selected. The【Multi-function List】is used to display the list
of functions that will be executed when the switch is pressed.
A maximum of 16 operations can be set, and the system will
execute the operations in order when the switch is pressed.

【Add】
Add to the number of switches in【Multi-function List】. The
type of switch to add can be selected.

【Delete】
Delete the switch currently selected in the【Multi-function
List】.

【Up】
Move the order of the switch currently selected in the【Multi-
function List】up.

【Down】
Move the order of the switch currently selected in the【Multi-
function List】down.

Note:
➢ The order of the object itself is fixed as first and it cannot
be moved up or down.

376
 ➢ The【Multi-function List】of an object can only include
one【Change Screen】or【Function Switch】, and it
must be last in the list
【Address】 Set the operating address of the Word Switch.

【Monitor Set the switch to change its state according to the value in the
monitored address. The user will be able to set the address to
Address】 monitor when this option is selected.
【Data Type】 Set the data type of the Word Switch.

【Action】 Set the operate actionof word switch, following will show
different options according different action.
【Write Data】 When pressing word switch,【Address】value will be set as
the set of【Data Type】and【Constant】.
【Add Data】 Press the word switch each time,【Address】value will add
【Constant】base on the current value according to the set of
the【Data Type】. The【Max】can control the upper limit of
the word switch adding value operation.

【Continuously Add】
If check this option, when pressing the word switch and
unrelease, word switch will excute【Add Data】continuously,
and after wait for【Time Delay】will excute【Add Data】
according to【Interval】time.

【Cyclically Add】
If check this option, when the value has add to【Max】, press
this word switch then will write【Min】to【Address】.
【Subtract Press the word switch each time,【Address】value will
Data】 subtract【Constant】base on the current value according to
the set of the【Data Type】. The【Min】can control the
lower limit of the word switch subtracting value operation.

【Continuously Subtract】
If check this option, when pressing the word switch and
unrelease, word switch will excute【Subtract Data】
continuously, and after wait for【Time Delay】will excute
【Subtract Data】according to【Interval】time.

377
 【Cyclically Subtract】
If check this option, when the value has subtract to【Min】,
press this word switch then will write【Max】to【Address】.
【Numeric When this button is pressed, the keyboard will pop up,
allowing the user to set the value to【Write Address】.
Input】
The setting method is the same as in chapter 16.3.3.1-
【Setting】.
【Enable Set to enable extra features for the bit switch object. When
set, extension options will appear to the right. The original
Extended Lamp
address set in the window will no longer be read and is
Feature】
replaced by the【Addresses 0~3】in the dialog as shown
below. After checked, the original【Type】and【Data Type】
setting value will be changed from the following figure【Data
Type】to set.

【Data Type】
Set the address type of【Addresses 0~3】. Data types include
Bit, 16Bit-BCD, 16Bit-INT, 16Bit-UINT, 32Bit-BCD, 32Bit-INT and
32Bit-UINT.

【Number of states】
Set the number of states the bit switch will have.

【State Switch Condition】

Set how the state of the bit switch is determined. The
conditions include【Change State by Bit Combination】,
【Change State by Bit】, or【Change State by Data】.

【Change State by Bit Combination】uses【Addresses 0~3】

in combination to switch the displayed state.

378
 For example, the【Data Type】is set to Bit, the【Number of
states】is 4,【Address 0】is M90,【Address 1】is M91,
【Addresses 2】and【Addresses 3】are not set, the state will
be determined as follows:
M90 = OFF and M91 = OFF State 0
M90 = ON and M91 = OFF State 1
M90 = OFF and M91 = ON State 2
M90 = ON and M91 = ON State 3, and so on.

【Change State by Bit】refers to【Addresses 0~3】to switch

the displayed state.
For example, the【Data Type】is set to Bit, the【Number of
states】is 4,【Address 0】is M90,【Address 1】is M91,
【Address 2】is M92, and【Address 3】is not set, the state
will be determined as follows:
M90, M91, M92 = OFF State 0
M90 = ON, M91 = OFF, M92 = OFF State 1
M90 = OFF, M91 = ON, M92 = OFF State 2
M90 = OFF, M91 = OFF, M92 = ON State 3, and so on.
If the data type is 16Bit-UINT, the number of states is 5,
【Address 0】is R50, the other addresses are not set, when
R50 = 0 the state is 0. R50 = 1, state 1. R50 = 2, state 2. R50 =
4, state 3. R50 = 8, state 4.

【Change State by Data】refers to switching the display status

according to the value of【Address 0】. In【Data Type】, this
option will appear for all types except Bit type.
If the【Data Type】is 16Bit-Uint, the【Number of states】is
5,【Address 0】is R50, the other addresses are not set, when
R40 = 0, the state is 0. R50 = 1, state 1. R50 = 2, state 2, R50 =
3, state 3, R50 = 4, state 4, and so on.

【Addresses 0~3】
Specify the address to use to determine the state of the bit
switch.
【Custom State After check【Custom State Value】, you can click【Detail】at
Value】 the back, set the value and range of each state.
Setting dialog as below:

379
 【Out of Range Display State】
Set the state when the value display out of range.

【Single Value】
Set the mode of corresponding state as single value, the
following table will change after clicked, then you can set the
value of each corresponding state in【Value】field.

【Range】
Set the mode of corresponding state as range, the following
table will change after clicked, then you can set the value of
each corresponding state in【Lower Limit】and【Upper
Limit】field.

【State】 Set the number of states, set whether the word switch
changes its status according to the value of the set monitor
address.

16.3.2.3 【Change Screen】

The【Change Screen】【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

380
 Figure 243【Setting】Screen of【Change Screen】

Table 124【Setting】Properties of【Change Screen】

Property Description

【Preview】 Previews the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Execute while Releasing】 Select to execute the action set for Change
Screen while releasing; the action will be
executing immediately when the switch is
pressed if this option is not selected.
【Play Audio while Pressing】 Select to play audio when the switch is
pressed; an【Audio Selector】will appear on
the right when enabled. The switch on the
right of the【Audio Selector】can be pressed
to select an audio and the switch on the left
of the【Audio Selector】can be pressed to
play the audio selected.
【Enable Multi-function】 Select whether to enable the Multi-function
Switch. A【Multi-function List】will appear
on the left when selected.
【Multi-function List】 This list will appear when【Enable Multi-
function】is selected. The【Multi-function
List】is used to display the list of functions
that will be executed when the switch is
pressed. A maximum of 16 operations can be
set, and the system will execute the
operations in order when the switch is
pressed.

【Add】
Add to the number of switches in【Multi-
function List】. The type of switch to add can
be selected.

【Delete】
Delete the switch currently selected in the
【Multi-function List】.

381
 【Up】
Move the order of the switch currently
selected in the【Multi-function List】up.

【Down】
Move the order of the switch currently
selected in the【Multi-function List】down.

Note:
The sequence of【Change Screen】is fixed as
the last one and cannot be moved up or
down. The【Multi-function List】in the
【Change Screen】cannot add【Change
Screen】or【Function Switch】.
【Type】 Set the operation type of Change Screen;
setting items that will appear below varies
according to the different operation selected.
【Screen Change】 The displayed screen of the human machine
interface will change to the screen set in
【Screen】when Change Screen is pressed.
【Previous Screen】 The displayed screen of the human machine
interface will change to the previous screen
displayed when Change Screen is pressed.
【Pop-up Window Screen】 When the button is pressed, the HMI display
will pop up the selected window screen.
【Close Pop-up Window When the button is pressed, the pop-up
window screen containing the button will
Screen】 close.
【Close Pop-up Window Screen When the button is pressed, the pop-up
window screen containing the button will
and Switch Screen】 close and the screen set to switch will appear.
【Change User Level】 When the button is pressed, security level of
the user will be changed to the selected value.
【Indicate Screen Already If the screen label is the same as the button's
setting then the color of the word will turn into
Opened】
the complementary color.

16.3.2.4 【Function Switch】

The【Function Switch】【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:
382
 Figure 244【Setting】Screen of【Function Switch】

Table 125【Setting】Properties of【Function Switch】

Property Description

【Preview】 Previews the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Execute Select to execute the action set for the Function Switch while
releasing. The action will be executed immediately when the
while
switch is pressed if this option is not selected.
Releasing】
【Play Audio Select to play audio when the switch is pressed; an【Audio
while Selector】will appear on the right when enabled. The switch on
Pressing】
the right of the【Audio Selector】can be pressed to select an
audio and the switch on the left of the【Audio Selector】can
be pressed to play the audio selected.
【Enable Multi- Select whether to enable the Multi-function Switch. A【Multi-
function】 function List】will appear on the left when selected.
【Multi- This list will appear when【Enable Multi-function】is selected.
function List】 The【Multi-function List】is used to display the list of functions
that will be executed when the switch is pressed. A maximum of
16 operations can be set, and the system will execute the
operations in order when the switch is pressed.

【Add】
Add to the number of switches in【Multi-function List】. The
type of switch to add can be selected.

383
 【Delete】
Delete the switch currently selected in the【Multi-function
List】.

【Up】
Move the order of the switch currently selected in the【Multi-
function List】up.

【Down】
Move the order of the switch currently selected in the【Multi-
function List】down.

Note:
The sequence of【Function Switch】is fixed as the last one and
cannot be moved up or down. The【Multi-function List】in the
【Function Switch】cannot add【Change Screen】or
【Function Switch】.
【Function】 Set the operation function of the Function Switch. Setting items
that will appear below varies according to the different
functions selected.
【System: The human machine interface will restart when the Function
Switch is pressed.
Restart HMI】
【System: The brightness of the human machine interface display will
increase when the Function Switch is pressed.
Increase
Brightness】
【System: The brightness of the human machine interface display will
decrease when the Function Switch is pressed.
Decrease
Brightness】
【System: Turn The brightness of the human machine interface display will
decrease to the lowest brightness level when the Function
Backlight OFF】 Switch is pressed.

【System: The system will pop-up system configuration when Function

Show System Switch is pressed, including four paging【General】,
Configuration】 【Ethernet】,【Screen Saver】and【Date/Time】,user can
select items to be displayed.
【General】paging including device name, station number, OS
Version, Firmware Version.

384
 【Ethernet】paging set whether to enable ethernet, whether
to use DHCP, display or set HMI IP Address, display or set HMI
Netmask, display , DNS setting or set HMI Gateway.
【Screen Saver】paging set whether to enable screen saver,
waiting time.
【Date/Time】paging display or set HMI date and time.
【System: The HMI will show the link setting configuration and users can
also adjust the settings as well.
Show Link
Note: the interface type can not be changed.
Setting】
【FvRT: Restart Restart the project.

Project】
【FvRT: Stop After stopping the FvRT setting, there are four ways to select as
below.
FvRT】
【Following FvRT setting】Perform the according to the seeting
of ‘After stopping the project’ in FvRT settings.
【Return to startup screen】Press the button to end up the
project then return to the FvRT startup interface.
【Close the program】Press the button to end up the project
and close the FvRT program.
【Shutdown the machine】Press the button to end up the
project and close the PC.
【FvRT: Execute the other software according to the default path on the
computer, it can also change the file path through the register
Run .EXE
modification.
Program】
【Security: Log The system will display the log in window for the operator to log
in when Function Switch is pressed.
in】
【Security: Log The operator will be logged out when Function Switch is
pressed.
Out】
【Security: The password table will be displayed for the operator to view.
For example, if the security level of the operator is 5, the level 5
Password
password table will appear. For more details refer to Chapter 5 -
Manager】 Security.
【Security: Update the username and user passwords, or passwords only, it
Import User depends on the setting in 【Security】.
Accounts】
【Overwrite】
If【Overwrite】is selected, the usernames and user passwords
currently saved on the human machine interface will be
385
 overwritten. If it is not selected, the new username and user
password will be added to the human machine interface.
【Script: The system will execute the selected【Script】when Function
Execute Switch is pressed.
Script】
【Recipe: Import the file contents of the recipe group; user will be able to
see the complete contents of the recipe group if recipe tables
Import Recipe
are available. Users will also be able to see the changes in the
Group from
numeric value of the displayed components if the register
File】 addresses of the displayed components are the same as the
current recipe address set in the recipe. A drop-down list will
appear below when this function is used for the user to decide
which recipe group will be used.

【Recipe Group】
The recipe group ID and recipe group name can be seen here if
the user adds new recipe groups with the recipe setting
function.

Note: the index of this recipe group will become 0 when this function is
used, so the current recipe collection will have an index value of 0.
【Recipe: Export the contents of the recipe group into a recipe group file.
The user can choose to export a new file or overwrite the
Export Recipe
original recipe group file. A drop-down list will appear below
Group back to
when this function is used for the user to decide which recipe
File】 group will be used.

【Recipe Group】
The recipe group ID and recipe group name can be seen here if
the user adds new recipe groups with the recipe setting
function.
【Recipe: Write A drop-down list will appear below when this function is used
for the user to decide which recipe group will be used. The
Current Recipe
contents of the parameter in the HMI current recipe will be
to Target
written to the register of the target address according to the
Address】 setting of this recipe group.

【Recipe Group】
The recipe group ID and recipe group name can be seen here if
the user adds new recipe groups with the recipe setting
function.
【Recipe: Read A drop-down list will appear below when this function is used
for the user to decide which recipe group will be used. The
From Target
register contents of the target address will be read and the
Address to
value will be written to the current recipe of the HMI according
386
 Current to the setting of this recipe group.
Recipe】
【Recipe Group】
The recipe group ID and recipe group name can be seen here if
the user adds new recipe groups with the recipe setting
function.
【Recipe: Add Add a set of recipes in recipe table to above or below the
current recipe and switch current recipeto the new recipe.
Default
Recipe】
【Recipe Group】
The recipe group ID and recipe group name can be seen here if
the user adds new recipe groups with the recipe setting
function.

【To】
Choose to add a new recipe to above or below the current
recipe.
For more detail please refer ch9-Recipe
【Recipe: Copy Copy current recipe in recipe table to above or below the
current recipe and switch current recipeto the new recipe.
Current
Recipe】
【Recipe Group】
The recipe group ID and recipe group name can be seen here if
the user adds new recipe groups with the recipe setting
function.

【To】
Choose to copy a set of recipes to above or below the current
recipe.
For more detail please refer ch9-Recipe
【Recipe: Delete the current recipe and switch current recipe to next
recipe.
Delete Current
Recipe】
【Recipe Group】
The recipe group ID and recipe group name can be seen here if
the user adds new recipe groups with the recipe setting
function.
For more detail please refer ch9-Recipe
【Recipe: Read the parameter data from source address and write to the
recipe group storage space, source address can be set in the
Transfer Source
advanced paging of the recipe, the function switch transfer all
Address to
recipe group data.
Recipe Group】
【Recipe Group】
387
 The recipe group ID and recipe group name can be seen here if
the user adds new recipe groups with the recipe setting
function.
For more detail please refer ch9-Recipe
【Recipe: Write the parameter data of the recipe group storage space to
source address, source address can be set in the advanced
Transfer Recipe
paging of the recipe, the function switch transfer all recipe
Group to
group data.
Source
Address】
【Recipe Group】
The recipe group ID and recipe group name can be seen here if
the user adds new recipe groups with the recipe setting
function.
For more detail please refer ch9-Recipe
【Recipe: After import the contents of the recipe group file to recipe
group stprage space and write the parameter data of the recipe
Import Recipe
group storage space to source address, source address can be
Group from
set in the advanced paging of the recipe, the function switch
File, then
transfer all recipe group data.
Transfer to
Source
【Recipe Group】
Address】
The recipe group ID and recipe group name can be seen here if
the user adds new recipe groups with the recipe setting
function.
For more detail please refer ch9-Recipe
【Recipe: After read the parameter data from source address and write to
the recipe group storage space, then export the contents of the
Transfer Source
recipe group storage space, source address can be set in the
Address to
advanced paging of the recipe, the function switch transfer all
Recipe
recipe group data.
Group,then
Export to File】
【Recipe Group】
The recipe group ID and recipe group name can be seen here if
the user adds new recipe groups with the recipe setting
function.
For more detail please refer ch9-Recipe
【File Transfer the files from HMI internal storage to USB storage.
Manager:
Transfer File
from HMI to
USB Storage】
【File Transfer the files from HMI internal storage to microSD card.
Manager:
Transfer File
388
 from HMI to
microSD Card】
【Switch to When the function switch is pressed, the display signal switches
to the VGA input.
VGA Input
Currently, the P5070VS and P5102VS models are supported.
Terminal】
【Long Press VGA Return Time (s)】
Set the long press time it takes for the screen to return from the
VGA display.
【Printer: Print When the function switch is pressed, the current screen will be
printed to the specified location.
Screen】
【Save To】allows the user to specify the location to save the
screenshot. The available options are internal, USB, SD, or
printer.

【Format】allows the user to change the type of file the

screenshot is. The available options are PNG or JPG.
【Printer: When the function switch is pressed, the current print job will
be stopped.
Abort Print
Job】
【FTP: Connect Use FTP to connect to the target HMI.

to FTP】
【PLC: Show When the function switch is pressed, HMI interface will show
Ladder 【Select Device】dialog, after selected the device, press
Viewer】 【OK】button, then it will excute read and display FATEK PLC
program of the link device.
For more detail please refer ch24-PLC Integration
【PLC: Update When the function switch is pressed, HMI UI will show【Select
FATEK PLC Update File】dialog, after selected the file, will show【Select
Project From
HMI or USB link Device】dialog, then press【OK】button, if you have set
Flash Drive】 the password will show up【Enter Password】dialog first , and
enter password to excute FATEK PLC program update.
For more detail please refer ch24-PLC Integration
【PLC: Show When the function switch is pressed, HMI UI will scan the dialog
list of the ethernet module of FATEK PLC on the internet, after
Ethernet
Module choose, press【Properties】button, will show the dialog of the
Configuration】 module property, provide view and modify, same as the use of
【Fatek Ethernet Module Configuration tool】dialog.
For more detail please refer ch24-PLC Integration

389
 【PLC: Run When this function button is pressed, FATEK PLC can be put into
Run state.
PLC】 For more detail please refer ch24.5-Control PLC run/stop from
HMI.
【PLC: Stop When this function button is pressed, FATEK PLC can be put into
stop state.
PLC】 For more detail please refer ch24.5-Control PLC run/stop from
HMI.
【Safe When the function switch is pressed, HMI UI will check whether
Removal: insert the USB Drive, if yes will show【Device Removal】dialog,
Remove USB figure show as below, press【Ok】button, will show a
Storage】 successful message as shown below.

【Safe When the function switch is pressed, HMI UI will check whether
Removal: insert the MicroSD card, if yes will show【Device Removal】
Remove dialog, figure show as below, press【Ok】button, will show a
microSD Card】 successful message as shown below.

【Installment: When the function switch is pressed, HMI UI will show

Enter 【Installment Password Enter】dialog, figure as shown below.
Installment If you have entered the last password or super user password, it
Password】 won’t show this dialog when press the function switch.

【Installment: When the function switch is pressed, HMI will pop-up modify
dialog, figure shown as below.
Modify
Installment】 For static mode:
The dialog can modify【Total Period】,【Super User】
password, next period deadline and password, etc.
If you have entered the last password or super user password, it
won’t show this dialog when press the function switch.

390
 For dynamic mode:
You can change the project key.

【Screen Lock: When the function switch is pressed, if the multi-link of the
Operation current HMI has open the【Operation Lock】function, then
Lock(Lock)】 other multi-link HMI will go into screen lock status, that is, other
multi-link HMI cannot operate, and other multi-link HMI will
show【Operation Lock】figure in the upper left corner, figure
as shown below, remide operator the HMI has already in the
operation lock status.

【Do Not Automatically Unlock】

If check the【Do Not Automatically Unlock】function, only
press【Screen Lock: Operation Lock(Unlock)】or【Screen Lock:
Operation Lock(Lock & Unlock)】can unlock other multi-link
HMI.
For more detail please refer ch26-Multi-Link
【Screen Lock: When the function switch is pressed, if the multi-link of the
Operation current HMI has open the【Operation Lock】function, then
Lock(Unlock)】 other multi-link HMI will go into screen unlock status, and other
multi-link HMI will show【Operation Lock】figure in the upper
left corner will disappear.
For more detail please refer ch26-Multi-Link
【Screen Lock: When the function switch is pressed, if the multi-link of the
Operation current HMI has open the【Operation Lock】function, then
Lock(Lock & other multi-link HMI will go into lock or unlock screen status
according to the status of the current HMI.
391
 Unlock)】 For more detail please refer ch26-Multi-Link

【Update: When this function button is pressed, a dialog window for

selecting the project update will be displayed. You can select
Project
the .uferp file stored in the HMI, SD card, or USB flash drive,
Update】 which is a USB update file created using the software. After
selection, you can update the current HMI project.
【Upload: When this function button is pressed, a dialog window for
selecting the project update is displayed. You can choose to
Project
store it in the HMI, SD card, or USB flash drive. The
Upload】 uploaded .cfrp file needs to be decompiled to see the project
content.
【SMTP: Modify sender’s SMTP Setting, Sender Information, Contact List,
Import and Export.
Modify Sender
Information】

For more detail please refer ch4.3-【SMTP】

Note: Due to security considerations during export, the
password will not be exported.
【SMTP: Add or remove contacts, etc.
Modify Contact
Lists】

For more detail please refer ch4.3-【SMTP】

Note: Press this button when the HMI is executing a project, it
does not support adding a group or changing the group name.

16.3.2.5 【Display】
The【Switch】【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of each
392
setting item are listed below:

Figure 245【Display】Setting Screen of【Switch】

Table 126【Display】Setting Properties of【Switch】

Property Description

【Set All the States to If it’s【Change Screen Switch】, there will appear a
State 0】 option as【Set All the States to State 0】, will set all the
switch as state 0.
【State】 Select the state needed to be edited. 0 and 1 buttons are
provided to enable quick switching between states 0 and
1.
【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of the text displayed for the current editing
state.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the size of the text displayed for the current editing
state.

【Position】
Set the position of the text displayed for the current
editing state.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the text of the current
editing state. There are four blinking speeds available to

393
 choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Scrolling Text】
Set the scrolling text function for the text of the current
editing state; There are four scrolling speeds available to
choose from slow to fast.

【Format】
Set the format of the text displayed for the current
editing state, including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the color of the text displayed for the current editing
state.

【Copy Attributes to All States】

The text properties for the current editing state is applied
to all states.

【Content (Direct Text)】

Set the displayed text of the currently editing state; it can
be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text
Library】.

【Copy to All States】

Apply the settings of the text for the current editing state
to all states.
【Background】 【Use Image】
Set whether to use an image for the displayed
background of the current editing state. When this option
is checked, an【Image Selector】will appear asking the
user to select an image either from the【Image Library】
or from a file.

【Original Size of Image】

Display the original size of the image.

【Image Position】
Appears after checking【Original Size of Image】, you
can select the position of the picture to be displayed.

394
 【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the background of the
current editing state. There are four blinking speeds
available to choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Pressing Effect】
Set the pressing effect of the current editing state. There
are two effects available for selection: None and
Highlight.

【Rotate】
Rotate the graph, includes CW 0 Degrees, CW 90
Degrees, CW 180 Degrees and CW 270 Degrees.

【Flip】
Flip the graph, includes No Flip, X-Axis and Y-Axis.

【Remove Background】
Choose the color by setting a transparent color.

【Color】
Set the displayed background color of the current editing
state. This setting item will appear if【Use Image】was
not selected.

【Copy to All States】

Apply the settings of the background for the current
editing state to all states.
【Border】 Set the border of the object, set the appearance after
checked.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of the border.

【Type】
Set the type of the boder, click for more types.

【Copy to All States】

Apply the settings of the border for the currently editing
state to all states.

395
16.3.2.6 【Operation】
The【Switch】 【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of each
setting item are listed below:

Figure 246【Operation】Setting Screen of【Switch】

Table 127【Operation】Setting Properties of【Switch】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The

396
 condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if the visibility is to be controlled by the level of the
user logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the visible level and condition of the object.
【Operation Operation control of the object. It can be controlled by a
specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control operation by a specific Bit.

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check whether to display the disable sign.

【Address】
Set the address of the operation control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
the object can be controlled, when false not the object can
not be controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’,
‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if operation is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Log】 Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.

397
 It can also edit operation messages in which the message
can be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text
Library】.
【Advanced 【Hold Time】
Operation Select to control the operation by hold time; hold time can
Control】 be divided into two types:
➢ 【Press On】: Press directly and confirm the
execution of this operation according to the【Min
Hold Time】.
➢ 【Double Press】: Use two quick presses to confirm
the execution of this operation.

【Operation Confirm】
Select to display the confirmation window after the
operation is executed.

【Max Waiting Time】

When the confirm window is displayed, the system will
close the confirmation window and cancel the operation if
the user did not respond within this time.

16.3.2.7 【External Lable】

The【Switch】【External Lable】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

398
 Figure 247【External Lable】Setting Screen of【Switch】

Table 128【Switch】【External Lable】setting properties

Option Description

【Enable External Checked, the bottom will appear the external lable
settings of the object.
Lable】
【Direction】 Set the display direction, there are horizontal and vertical
two selections.
【Space】 Set the space between external lable and the object.

【Left/Top Fill in the text to be displayed on the left / top lable of the
object, can be directly input or selected from【Font
Lable(Direct Text)】
Library】.
【Right/Bottom Fill in the text to be displayed on the right / bottom lable
of the object, can be directly input or selected from
Lable(Direct Text)】
【Font Library】.
【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of text.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the size of text, the default size is 20.

【Alignment】
Set the alignment of text.

【Color】
Set the color of text.

【Format】
Set the format of text, includes Bold, Italic and Underline.

【Word Spacing】
Set the word space of text.

【Margin】
Set the margin of text.
【Background】 Check whether to display background, set the color and
opacity of background after checked.

【Color】

399
 Set the background color of external lable.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of external lable background, the greater
the value the more the background opacity is.
【Border】 Check whether to display border.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of border.

【Type】
Set the type of border.

16.3.3 【Numeric Input/Display】

【Numeric Input/Display】can display the numeric value saved in specific addresses;
The【Numeric Input/Display】can also be clicked to enter specific numeric values to
the register address if the【Allow Input】setting is enabled.

16.3.3.1 【Setting】
The【Numeric Input/Display】【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 248【Setting】Screen of【Numeric Input/Display】

400
 Table 129【Setting】Properties of【Numeric Input/Display】
Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Update】 Provide user can select a suitable speed to get the latest data
under different situation, such as you would like to get the
latest data or adjust the object on the screen to display first,
etc.
Provide three modes:
【once】: update once only when switch to this page or use
the system tag【OP_UPDATE_SCREEN_OBJECTS】, update
once when trigger once a time, it will keep update if the
monitor address is internal address.
【normal】: normal update speed.
【fast】: the fastest update speed.
【Display】 【Monitor Address】
Set the monitored address of Numeric Input/Display. The
address can be from internal memory or a PLC register
address.

【Data Type】
Set the data type of Numeric Input/Display. The available data
types are: 16Bit-BCD, 16Bit-INT, 16Bit-UINT, 16Bit-HEX, 32Bit-
BCD, 32Bit-INT, 32Bit-UINT, 32Bit-HEX, 32Bit-FLOAT. When
32Bit-FLOAT is selected, you can also choose a display option
for【Exponential Format】.

【Total Digits】
Set the total number of digits of Numeric Input/Display.

【Digit Places】
Set the decimal place of the Numeric Input/Display. If check
【Address】then you can set the source address of digital
places, and digital places can be dynamically control, data
type used by address is same as【Data Type】.

【Default Range】
Set the【Max】and【Min】display of the Numeric
401
 Input/Display. The【Address】checkbox can be used to set
the source address for reading the maximum value or
minimum value by【Data Type】.
If this option is checked , the option will have a different
default range depending on the【Data Type】. For example,
type select as 16Bit-UINT, the【Max】is 65535,【Min】is 0
【Maximum Value】
Set the maximum value allowed for the numeric input /
display to be displayed. If you check the address, the
maximum value can be set to the value of the source address,
allowing the maximum value to be dynamic.

【Minimum Value】
Set the minimum value allowed for the numeric input /
display to be displayed. If you check the address, the
minimum value can be set to the value of the source address,
allowing the minimum value to be dynamic.
【Input】 【Allow Input】
Set whether to allow the input function for the Numeric
Input/Display object. Related input setting items will appear if
this option is selected.

【Source】
When setting the touch Numeric Input/Display object, the
source of the keyboard is【Pop-up Keypad】,【On-screen
Keypad】or【USB Barcode Scanner】.

【Pop-up Keypad】
Select the【Keypad Screen】no. to use.

【On-screen Keypad】
Use the self-planned keyboard on the basic screen, and the
Numeric Input/Display object object and the self-planned
keyboard must be on the same basic screen.

402
 【USB Barcode Scanner】
When the source is selected as a USB barcode scanner,
touching the Numeric Input/Display object changes the object
color and is put on standby for the input of the USB barcode
scanner. When the input is complete, the data is transferred
directly to the specified address.

【Default Range】
Default Range of the Numeric Input/Display object,if this
option is checked , the option will have a different default
range depending on the【Data Type】. For example, type
select as 16Bit-UINT, the【Max】is 65535,【Min】is 0 , if
don’t check this option, then can enter the【Max】and
【Min】of the Numeric Input/Display object.

【Max】
Set the maximum allowed input value for Numeric
Input/Display. The【Address】checkbox can be used to set
the source address for writing the maximum value by【Data
Type】.

【Min】
Set the minimum allowed input value for Numeric
Input/Display. The【Address】checkbox can be used to set
the source address for writing the minimum value by【Data
Type】.

【Write different Address】

403
 Set to allow writing to a different address for the Numeric
Input/Display object. Related settings will appear if this option
is selected, allowing the setting of a target address for writing
values. The source address for reading value and the target
address for writing value will be different if this option is
used.

【Notify before Writing】

The signal will notify before writing.
Level: Set the bit as 0 or 1.
Pulse: Set the bit to 1 and automatically restore to 0 after
continuing the time set by【Width】.

【Notify after Writing】

The signal will notify after writing.
Level: Set the bit as 0 or 1.
Pulse: Set the bit to 1 and automatically restore to 0 after
continuing the time set by【Width】.
【Post 【Gain/Offset】
Processing】 Set whether to allow post-processing functions for the
Numeric Input/Display object. Related post processing
settings will appear if this option is selected, allowing the
setting of processing functions (add, subtract, multiply and
divide) and constants.
Formula is as follows: y=Ax+B, gain is A, offset for the B, y
value is displayed for HMI, x is PLC value.
For example, gain A=5, offset B=2, when the PLC x=3, HMI
value display is 17 (17=(5*3)+2).
Gain A Offset B PLC Value x HMI displayed value y
A=5 B=2 x=3 y = 17

In the numerical input/display object, enter 12 and the PLC

value x will get 2 (x=(y-B)/A, 2=(12-2)/5).
Gain A Offset B PLC Value x HMI displayed value y
A=5 B=2 y = 12 x=2

The【Address】checkbox can be used to set the source

address for processing constant. The type of data used to read
the address is fixed to 16Bit-INT.

【Max./Min.】
Sets the ratio of the read source address and the display. Can
be set by【Data Max.】,【Data Min.】,【Display Max.】and

404
 【Display Min.】to determine the proportional relationship.
For example, read the PLC R100 address, and the maximum of
the R100 is 100, minimum is 0, in the HMI wants to show the
maximum is 1000, minimum is 0. So the【Data Max.】
indicates the maximum value of the source address, can be
set to 100,【Data Min.】indicates the minimum valueof the
source address, can be set to 0,【Display Max.】indicates the
maximum value of the display, can be set to 1000,【Data
Min.】indicates the minimum value of the display, can be set
to 0, when PLC register R100=50, then HMI will display as 500.

If check the【Address】then can set the source address of

the【Data Max.】,【Data Min.】,【Display Max.】and
【Display Min.】, the data type of the read address is fixed to
16Bit-INT.

16.3.3.2 【Display】
The【Numeric Input/Display】【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 249【Display】Setting Screen of【Numeric Input/Display】

Table 130【Display】Setting Properties of【Numeric Input/Display】

Property Description

【Content】 【Numeric Display】

Set the display method for the numeric value of Numeric
Input/Display. Selecting【Zero Suppress】will not display
the zeros in front and selecting【Leading Zeroes】will

405
 display the zeros in front.

【7-segment Display】
Set to allow the 7-segment display function for the Numeric
Input/Display object. If this option is selected, related
settings for the style of the 7-segment display will appear.
These styles include outline, filled, and flat.

【Mask】
Set the text of the numerical input/display object displayed
as asterisks (#), can not use the【Mask】function if use the
【7-segment Display】.

【Font】
Set the font for the displayed text of Numeric Input/Display,
can not use the【Mask】function if use the【7-segment
Display】.

【Size】
Set the size for the displayed text of Numeric Input/Display,
can not use the【Mask】function if use the【7-segment
Display】.

【Position】
Set the position for the displayed text of Numeric
Input/Display, can not use the【Mask】function if use the
【7-segment Display】.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the text of Numeric
Input/Display. There are four blinking speeds available to
choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast, can not use the
【Mask】function if use the【7-segment Display】.

【Scrolling Text】
Set the scrolling text function for the text of Numeric
Input/Display. There are four scrolling speeds available to
choose from slow to fast.

【Format】
406
 Set the format of the text displayed for the Numeric
Input/Display, including Bold, Italics and Underline, can not
use the【Mask】function if use the【7-segment Display】.

【Color】
Set the color for the displayed text of Numeric
Input/Display.
【Border】 【Type】
Set the border types for Numeric Input/Display.

【Color/Thickness】
Set the color and thickness for the displayed border of
Numeric Input/Display.

【Background】 If not check the background, then the【Upper Limit

Numeric Color】and【Lower Limit Numeric Color】of the
【Numeric Input/Display】【Alarm】paging can not be set.

【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the background of the Numeric
Input/Display. When this option is checked, an【Image
Selector】will appear asking the user to select an image
either from the【Image Library】or from a file.

【Rotate】
Rotate the graph, includes CW 0 Degrees, CW 90 Degrees,
CW 180 Degrees and CW 270 Degrees.

【Flip】
Flip the graph, includes No Flip, X-Axis and Y-Axis.

【Color】
Set the displayed background color of Numeric
Input/Display. This setting item will appear if 【Use
Image】 was not selected.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the background of the Numeric
Input/Display. There are four blinking speeds available to
choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.
407
16.3.3.3 【Alarm】
The【Numeric Input/Display】【Alarm】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 250【Alarm】Setting Screen of【Numeric Input/Display】

Table 131【Alarm】Setting Properties of【Numeric Input/Display】

Property Description

【Set Alarm】 Set to enable the alarm function of Numeric Input/Display.

Alarm related settings will appear below when this option is
selected.
【Range】 Set the range of the alarm; the alarm condition is fulfilled
when the numeric value of the Numeric Input/Display
reaches the maximum or minimum value.

【Max】
Set the maximum alarm value for the Numeric
Input/Display; the【Address】below can be used to set the
source address for the maximum value by the【Data
Type】 set in the【Setting】page.

【Min】
Set the minimum alarm value for the Numeric
Input/Display; the【Address】on the rear can be used to
set the source address for the minimum value by the【Data
Type】 set in the【Setting】page.
【Display】 Set the appearance of the Numeric Input/Display follows
the change when the alarm conditions are fulfilled.

408
 【Upper Limit Numeric Color】
Sets the color of the text for the Numeric Input/Display
when the set【Max】is exceeded. The【Blink】dropdown
menu can be used to set the blinking speed of the text.
There are four blinking speeds available to choose from:
None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Upper Limit Background Color】

Sets the color of the background for the Numeric
Input/Display when the set【Max】is exceeded. The
【Blink】dropdown menu can be used to set the blinking
speed of the background. There are four blinking speeds
available to choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Lower Limit Numeric Color】

Sets the color of the text for the Numeric Input/Display
when the set【Min】is not reached. The【Blink】
dropdown menu can be used to set the blinking speed of
the text. There are four blinking speeds available to choose
from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Lower Limit Background Color】

Sets the color of the background for the Numeric
Input/Display when the set【Min】is not reached. The
【Blink】dropdown menu can be used to set the blinking
speed of the background. There are four blinking speeds
available to choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

16.3.3.4 【Operation】
The【Numeric Input/Display】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

409
 Figure 251【Operation】Setting Screen of【Numeric Input/Display】

Table 132【Operation】Setting Properties of【Numeric Input/Display】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object; it can be controlled by a

specific Bit or by User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

410
 【User Level Condition】
Set the visible level and condition of the object.
【Operation Operation control of the object. It can be controlled by a
specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control operation by a specific Bit.

【Show Disabled Sign】

If the object is not enabled, the object will have an

indication that it is disabled.

【Address】
Set the address of the operation control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
the object can be controlled, when false not the object can
not be controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’,
‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if operation is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Log】 Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.
It can also edit operation messages, in which the message
can be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text
Library】.

411
 【Advanced 【Input Timeout】
Operation Select if the【Pop-up Keypad】,【On-screen Keypad】or
Control】
【USB Barcode Scanner】is controlled by time.

【Timeout Time】
If the user did not use the【Keypad Screen】within this
time, the system will close the【Keypad Screen】and
cancel the operation.

【Operation Confirm】
Select to display a confirmation window after the operation
is executed.

【Max Waiting Time】

The system will close the confirmation window and cancel
the operation if the user did not acknowledge it within this
time.

16.3.3.5 【External Lable】

The【Numeric Input/Display】 【External Lable】page is as shown in the figure below,
the meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 252【External Lable】Screen of【Numeric Input/Display】

Table 133【Text Input/Display】【External Lable】setting properties

Option Description

412
 【Enable External Checked, the bottom will appear the external lable
settings of the object.
Lable】
【Direction】 Set the display direction, there are horizontal and vertical
two selections.
【Space】 Set the space between external lable and the object.

【Left/Top Fill in the text to be displayed on the left / top lable of the
object, can be directly input or selected from【Font
Lable(Direct Text)】
Library】.
【Right/Bottom Fill in the text to be displayed on the right / bottom lable
of the object, can be directly input or selected from
Lable(Direct Text)】
【Font Library】.
【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of text.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the size of text, the default size is 20.

【Alignment】
Set the alignment of text.

【Color】
Set the color of text.

【Format】
Set the format of text, includes Bold, Italic and Underline.

【Word Spacing】
Set the word space of text.

【Margin】
Set the margin of text.
【Background】 Check whether to display background, set the color and
opacity of background after checked.

【Color】
Set the background color of external lable.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of external lable background, the greater
the value the more the background opacity is.
413
 【Border】 Check whether to display border.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of border.

【Type】
Set the type of border.

16.3.4 【Text Input/Display】

【Text Input/Display】can display the text saved in specific addresses. The【Text
Input/Display】can also be clicked to enter specific text to the register address if the
【Allow Input】setting is enabled.
16.3.4.1 【Setting】
The【Text Input/Display】 【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 253【Setting】Screen of【Text Input/Display】

Table 134【Setting】Properties of【Text Input/Display】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Update】 Provide user can select a suitable speed to get the latest
data under different situation, such as you would like to get
the latest data or adjust the object on the screen to display

414
 first, etc.
Provide three modes:
【once】: update once only when switch to this page or
use the system tag【OP_UPDATE_SCREEN_OBJECTS】,
update once when trigger once a time, it will keep update if
the monitor address is internal address.
【normal】: normal update speed.
【fast】: the fastest update speed.
【Display】 【Source】
The source of the text can be either an【Address】or from
the【Text Library】. If【Address】is selected, the
【Monitor Address】can be set below and directly
corresponds to the text to display. If【Text Library】is
selected, the【Monitor Address】corresponds to the entry
in the【Text Library】to read the text from.

【Monitor Address】
Set the monitored address of Text Input/Display; when this
setting is changed, the final address below will change
according to the inputted【Monitor Address】and【Total
Characters】.

【Text Type】
Set the display type of text input/display, includes Ascii
String, Unicode String(Simplified Chinese), Unicode
String(Others), etc.

【Ascii String】
When select as【Ascii String】, the object will display the
Ascii string corresponding to【Monitor Address】,
because one register includes 2 Ascii, such as【Total
Characters】set as 5, it will take 3 registers.

【Unicode String(Simplified Chinese)】

When select as【Unicode String(Simplified Chinese)】, the
object will display the Unicode string corresponding to
【Monitor Address】, because one register includes 1

415
 Unicode, such as【Total Characters】set as 5, it will take 5
registers.

【Unicode String(Others)】
When select as【Unicode String(Others)】, the object will
display the Unicode string corresponding to【Monitor
Address】, figure as shown below(display German),
because one register includes 1 Unicode, such as【Total
Characters】set as 15, it will take 15 registers.

【Total Characters】
Sets the total number of characters for Text Input/Display;
when this setting is changed, the final address above will
change according to the inputted【Monitor Address】and
【Total Characters】.

【Byte Swap】
Select whether to enable the high and low byte swapping
function.

【Each character occupies one word】

Set whether enable each character occupies one word, for
example R0=A, R1=B, R2=C, R3=D, R4=E.

【Data Type】
Set the data type of the monitored address. This option is
only enabled when【Text Library】is selected as the
【Source】.

【Start Row】
416
 Set the starting row in the【Text Library】that the text is
obtained. For example, if the start row is set to 1 and the
【Monitor Address】contains the value 3, the display will
display the 4th entry in the【Text Library】. The【Start
Row】can also be obtained from a specified address. This
option is only enabled when【Text Library】is selected as
the【Source】.
【Input】 【Allow Input】
Set whether to allow the input function for the Text
Input/Display object; related input settings will appear if
this option is selected.

【Source】
When setting the touch Text Input/Display object, the
source of the keyboard is【Pop-up Keypad】,【On-screen
Keypad】or【USB Barcode Scanner】.

【Pop-up Keypad】
Select the【Keypad Screen】no. to use.

【On-screen Keypad】
Use the self-planned keyboard on the basic screen, and the
Text Input/Display object object and the self-planned
keyboard must be on the same basic screen.

【USB Barcode Scanner】

When the USB barcode scanner is selected as the input
source, the text input/display object will change color when
touched and will wait for the input of the USB barcode
reader. After the input is entered, the data will be
transferred directly to the specified address.

When【Text Type】choose as【Unicode String(Simplified

Chinese)】, the input keypad can only use provide by
system, click【Text Input/Display】while executing, will
show up the pinyin keypad, figure shown as below.
Click the lower left corner【English/拼音(簡)】, can switch
to English or Pinyin.
If the input keypad is in pinyin, you can choose the word

417
 after enter pinyin.

【Write different Address】

Set to allow writing to a different address for the Text
Input/Display object. Related settings will appear if this
option is selected, allowing the setting of target address for
writing text. The source address for reading text and the
target address for writing text will be different if this option
is used.

【Notify before Writing】

The signal will notify before writing.
Level: Set the bit as 0 or 1.
Pulse: Set the bit to 1 and automatically restore to 0 after
continuing the time set by【Width】.

【Notify after Writing】

The signal will notify after writing.
Level: Set the bit as 0 or 1.
Pulse: Set the bit to 1 and automatically restore to 0 after

continuing the time set by【Width】.

16.3.4.2 【Display】
The【Text Input/Display】 【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

418
 Figure 254【Display】Setting Screen of【Text Input/Display】

Table 135【Display】Setting Properties of【Text Input/Display】

Property Description

【Content】 【Enable Word Wrap】

Enter a space in a word then will do the word wrap.

【Mask】
Set the text to be displayed as asterisks (*) for the Text
Input/Display object.

【Font】
Set the font for the text of the Text Input/Display.

【Size】
Set the size for the text of the Text Input/Display.

【Position】
Set the position for the text of the Text Input/Display.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the text of the Text
Input/Display. There are four blinking speeds available to
choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Scrolling Text】
Set the scrolling text function for the text of the Text
Input/Display. There are four scrolling speeds available to
choose from slow to fast.

【Format】
Set the format of the text for the Text Input/Display,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.
419
 【Color】
Set the color for the text of the Text Input/Display.
【Border】 【Type】
Set the border type for the Text Input/Display.

【Color/Thickness】
Set the color and thickness for the border of the Text
Input/Display.
【Background】 【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the background of the Text
Input/Display. When this option is checked, an【Image
Selector】will appear asking the user to select an image
either from the【Image Library】or from a file.

【Rotate】
Rotate the graph, includes CW 0 Degrees, CW 90 Degrees,
CW 180 Degrees and CW 270 Degrees.

【Flip】
Flip the graph, includes No Flip, X-Axis and Y-Axis.

【Color】
Set the background color of the Text Input/Display. This
setting item will appear if 【Use Image】 was not
selected.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the background of the Text
Input/Display. There are four blinking speeds available to
choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

16.3.4.3 【Operation】
The【Text Input/Display】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

420
 Figure 255【Operation】Setting Screen of【Text Input/Display】

Table 136【Operation】Setting Properties of【Text Input/Display】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or by User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

421
 【User Level Condition】
Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Operation control of the object. It can be controlled by a
specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control operation by a specific Bit.

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】 or

【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the operation control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
the object can be controlled, when false not the object can
not be controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’,
‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if operation is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Log】 Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.
It can also edit operation messages, in which the message
can be inputted directly or acquired from the Text Library.
【Advanced 【Input Timeout】
422
 Operation Select if the【Pop-up Keypad】,【On-screen Keypad】or
Control】
【USB Barcode Scanner】is controlled by time.

【Timeout Time】
If the user did not operate the【Keypad Screen】within this
time, the system will close the【Keypad Screen】and
cancel this operation.

【Operation Confirm】
Select to display the confirmation window after the
operation is executed.

【Max Waiting Time】

The system will close the confirmation window and cancel
this operation if the user did not acknowledge it within this
time.

16.3.4.4 【External Lable】

The【Text Input/Display】【External Lable】page is as shown in the figure below,
the meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 256【External Lable】Setting Screen of【Text Input/Display】

Table 137【Text Input/Display】【External Lable】setting properties

Option Description

【Enable External Checked, the bottom will appear the external lable
settings of the object.
Lable】
423
 【Direction】 Set the display direction, there are horizontal and vertical
two selections.
【Space】 Set the space between external lable and the object.

【Left/Top Fill in the text to be displayed on the left / top lable of the
object, can be directly input or selected from【Font
Lable(Direct Text)】
Library】.
【Right/Bottom Fill in the text to be displayed on the right / bottom lable
of the object, can be directly input or selected from
Lable(Direct Text)】
【Font Library】.
【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of text.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the size of text, the default size is 20.

【Alignment】
Set the alignment of text.

【Color】
Set the color of text.

【Format】
Set the format of text, includes Bold, Italic and Underline.

【Word Spacing】
Set the word space of text.

【Margin】
Set the margin of text.
【Background】 Check whether to display background, set the color and
opacity of background after checked.

【Color】
Set the background color of external lable.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of external lable background, the greater
the value the more the background opacity is.
【Border】 Check whether to display border.

【Color/Width】
424
 Set the color and width of border.

【Type】
Set the type of border.

16.3.5 【Date/Time Display】

【Date/Time Display】can display the current date and time according to the format
set by the user.

16.3.5.1 【Setting】
The【Date/Time Display】 【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 257【Setting】Screen of【Date/Time Display】

Table 138【Setting】Properties of【Date/Time Display】

Property Description

【Preview】 Previews the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Enable Date Display】 Set to enable date display; a date format

selector will appear for the user to select the
display format of the date if this option is
selected.
【Enable Time Display】 Set to enable time display. A time format
selector will appear for the user to select the
display format of the time if this option is
selected.
【Enable Day-of-week Display】 Set to enable day-of-the-week display; a day-
of-the-week format selector will appear for
the user to select the display format of the
day-of-the-week if this option is selected. This
option is not available if a【7-segment

425
 Display】is used, please uncheck the 【7-
segment Display】option in the【Date/Time
Display】【Display】page.

16.3.5.2 【Display】
【Date/Time Display】【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 258【Display】Setting Screen of【Date/Time Display】

Table 139【Display】Setting Properties of【Date/Time Display】

Property Description

【Content】 【7-segment Display】

Set to use the 7-segment display function for the Date/Time
Display object. If this option is selected, related settings for
setting of style of the 7-segment display will appear,
including outlined, filled, flat.

Note: while this option is selected, because it can only show part of
text (0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S, 6, 7, 8, 9/g, A, B, C, D, E, F, H, H, L, o, P, r, u, U,
Y), the【Enable Day-of-week Display】function will be disabled.

【Font】
Set the font for the text of the Date/Time Display.

【Size】
Set the size for the text of the Date/Time Display.

【Position】
Set the position for the text of the Date/Time Display.

426
 【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the text of the Date/Time
Display. There are four blinking speeds available to choose
from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Scrolling Text】
Set the scrolling text function for the text of the Date/Time
Display. There are four scrolling speeds available to choose
from slow to fast.

【Format】
Set the format of the text for the Date/Time Display,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the color for the text of Date/Time Display.
【Border】 【Type】
Set the border type for the Date/Time Display.

【Color/Thickness】
Set the color and thickness for the border of the Date/Time
Display.
【Background】 【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the background of the Date/Time
Display. When this option is checked, an【Image Selector】
will appear asking the user to select an image either from
the【Image Library】or from a file.

【Rotate】
Rotate the graph, includes CW 0 Degrees, CW 90 Degrees,
CW 180 Degrees and CW 270 Degrees.

【Flip】
Flip the graph, includes No Flip, X-Axis and Y-Axis.

【Color】
Set the background color of the Date/Time Display. This
setting item will appear if 【Use Image】 was not
selected.

【Blink】
427
 Set the blinking function for the background of the
Date/Time Display. There are four blinking speeds available
to choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

16.3.5.3 【Operation】
The【Date/Time Display】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 259【Operation】Setting Screen of【Date/Time Display】

Table 140【Operation】Setting Properties of【Date/Time Display】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
428
 condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

16.3.6 【Window Screen Display】

【Window Screen Display】can display the【Window Screen】created in the
project, and supports using the numeric value of specific addresses to control the
【Window Screen】displayed by the Window Screen Display.
16.3.6.1 【Setting】
The【Window Screen Display】【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 260【Setting】Screen of【Window Screen Display】

Table 141【Setting】Properties of【Window Screen Display】

Property Description

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Select Screens by Address】 Set to select a screen by address.

The【Window Screen】displayed by Window

Screen Display will be determined by the
numeric value saved in【Window Selection
Address】if this setting is selected. If this

429
 setting is not selected, the Window Screen
Display will have a fixed display of the
【Window Screen】selected by【Window
Number】.
【Window Number】 Set the【Window Screen】displayed by the
Window Screen Display.

This setting will appear if【Select Screens by

Address】is not selected.
【Window Selection Address】 Set the【Window Selection Address】of the
Window Screen Display. When the HMI is
operating, the Window Screen Display will read
the【Window Selection Address】according to
the【Data Type】Set, and display the
【Window Screen】with the number that
matches the numeric value read.

This setting will appear if【Select Screens by

Address】is selected.
【Data Type】 Set the Data Type of the【Window Selection
Address】.
【Auto adjust object size】 Set the size of【Window Screen Display】,
automatically adjust object size depending on
the selected window screen.

16.3.6.2 【Operation】
The【Window Screen Display】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

430
 Figure 261【Operation】Setting Screen of【Window Screen Display】

Table 142【Operation】Setting Properties of【Window Screen Display】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

16.3.7 【Meter】
【Meter】can read the value of specific registers and display this value by a pointer
indicator.
Introduction to the property setting dialog are as follows:
16.3.7.1 【General】
The【Meter】【General】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of each
431
setting item are listed below:

Figure 262【General】Setting Screen of【Meter】

Table 143【General】Setting Properties of【Meter】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Update】 Provide user can select a suitable speed to get the latest data
under different situation, such as you would like to get the latest
data or adjust the object on the screen to display first, etc.
Provide three modes:
【once】: update once only when switch to this page or use the
system tag【OP_UPDATE_SCREEN_OBJECTS】, update once
when trigger once a time, it will keep update if the monitor
address is internal address.
【normal】: normal update speed.
【fast】: the fastest update speed.
【Monitor 【Address】
Address】 Set the address to monitor.

【Data Type】
Set the data format of the monitored address.

432
 【Source 【Dynamic Range】
Range】 Select to allow a maximum and minimum value of for the display
range to change according to the contents of the specified
address.

【Max】
Set the maximum value of the display range. When【Dynamic
Range】is selected, the address for maximum display range will
be set.

【Min】
Set the minimum value of the display range. When【Dynamic
Range】 is selected, the address for minimum display range will
be set.

Note: When【Dynamic Range】is selected, the content value of the

maximum address must be greater than the content value of the minimum
address in order for the display range to be changed validly.

【Post 【None】
Processing】 The object unused the post processing function.

【Gain/Offset】
Set whether to allow post-processing functions for the object.
Related post processing settings will appear if this option is
selected, allowing the setting of processing functions (add,
subtract, multiply and divide) and constants.
Formula is as follows: y=Ax+B, gain is A, offset for the B, y value is
displayed for HMI, x is PLC value.
For example, gain A=5, offset B=2, when the PLC x=3, HMI value
display is 17 (17=(5*3)+2).
Gain A Offset B PLC Value x HMI displayed value y
A=5 B=2 x=3 y = 17

In the object, enter 12 and the PLC value x will get 2 (x=(y-B)/A,
2=(12-2)/5).
Gain A Offset B PLC Value x HMI displayed value y
A=5 B=2 y = 12 x=2

The【Address】checkbox can be used to set the source address

for processing constant. The type of data used to read the data
type of the read address will change according to the setting of
the monitor address.

433
 【Max./Min.】
Sets the ratio of the read source address and the display. Can be
set by【Data Max.】,【Data Min.】,【Display Max.】and
【Display Min.】to determine the proportional relationship.
For example, read the PLC R100 address, and the maximum of
the R100 is 100, minimum is 0, in the HMI wants to show the
maximum is 1000, minimum is 0. So the【Data Max.】indicates
the maximum value of the source address, can be set to 100,
【Data Min.】indicates the minimum valueof the source
address, can be set to 0,【Display Max.】indicates the maximum
value of the display, can be set to 1000,【Data Min.】indicates
the minimum value of the display, can be set to 0, when PLC
register R100=50, then HMI will display as 500.

If check the【Address】then can set the source address of the【Data

Max.】,【Data Min.】,【Display Max.】and【Display Min.】, the
data type of the read address will change according to the setting
of the monitor address.

16.3.7.2 【Display】
The【Meter】【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of each
setting item are listed below:

Figure 263【Display】Setting Screen of【Meter】

Table 144【Display】Setting Properties of【Meter】

Property Description

434
 【Meter Type】 【Type】
Set the meter type. There are the following four types:

【Meter 【Shape】
Shape】 Set the meter shape. There are Circular/Semicircular/Quadrant
available for selection.

【Swing Shape】 Set the swinging angle of the meter indicator.

【Shape Select】
Users can click this button to set common pointer swinging
angles quickly.

【Swing Direction】
Set the swinging direction. There are two options:【CC】
(Clockwise) and【CCW】(Counter-Clockwise).

【Start Angle】
Set the start angle of the meter.

【End Angle】
Set the end angle of the meter.
【Border】 【Color】
Set the color of the border.
【Background】 【Color】
Set the background color and filling of the meter.
【Indicator】 【Color】
Set the color of the indicator.
【Decoration】 【Glass effect】
Set whether or not the “glass effect” is shown.

435
16.3.7.3 【Scale】
The【Meter】【Scale】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of each
setting item are listed below:

Figure 264【Scale】Setting Screen of【Meter】

Table 145【Scale】Setting Properties of【Meter】

Property Description

【Scale Frame】 【Color】

Set the color of the scale.

【Major Number】
Set the number of major ticks.

【Sub Number】
Set the number of minor ticks.
【Text】 【Style】
Set the style of the text, including radial and normal.

【Radial】
The text is angled such that it is perpendicular to the major
ticks.

【Normal】
The text is angled such that it is parallel to the horizontal.

【Font】
Select the font for the text.

436
 【Format】
Select the format of the text.

【Color】
Select the color of the text.

【Auto Fit Size】

If checked, the size of the text is automatically adjusted
according to the size of the object. If not checked, the user is
able to manually adjust the text size.

【Precision】
Set the number of decimal places the labels display.

16.3.7.4 【Range】
The【Meter】【Range】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of each
setting item are listed below:

Figure 265【Range】Setting Screen of【Meter】

Table 146【Range】Setting Properties of【Meter】

Property Description

【Scale Frame】 Select to display range marks on the meter.

【Dynamic Range】
Select to allow a maximum and minimum value of for the
display range to change according to the contents of the
specified address.

Note: When 【 Dynamic Range 】 is selected, the content value of the

maximum address must be greater than the content value of the minimum
address in order for the range marks to be changed validly.

437
 【Upper Limit】 【Color】
Set the color of the upper limit range.

【Value】
Set the value of the upper limit. When【Dynamic Range】is
selected, the address of the upper limit value will be set.
【Normal】 【Color】
Set the color of the normal range.
【Lower Limit】 【Color】
Set the color of the lower limit range.

【Value】
Set the value of the lower limit. When【Dynamic Range】is
selected, the address of the lower limit value will be set.

16.3.7.5 【Operation】
The【Meter】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of
each setting item are listed below:

Figure 266【Operation】Setting Screen of【Meter】

Table 147【Operation】Setting Properties of【Meter】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object can be controlled by a specific

Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.
438
 【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

16.3.8 【Linear Meter】

【Linear Meter】can read the value of specific registers and display the value read
using changes in the length or width of a bar.
Introduction to the property setting dialog is as follows
16.3.8.1 【General】
The【Linear Meter】【General】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

439
 Figure 267【General】Setting Screen of【Linear Meter】

Table 148【General】Setting Properties of【Linear Meter】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Update】 Provide user can select a suitable speed to get the latest data
under different situation, such as you would like to get the latest
data or adjust the object on the screen to display first, etc.
Provide three modes:
【once】: update once only when switch to this page or use the
system tag【OP_UPDATE_SCREEN_OBJECTS】, update once
when trigger once a time, it will keep update if the monitor
address is internal address.
【normal】: normal update speed.
【fast】: the fastest update speed.
【Monitor 【Address】
Address】 Set the address to monitor.

【Data Type】
Set the data format of the monitor address.

440
 【Source 【Dynamic Range】
Range】 Select to allow a maximum and minimum value for the display
range to change according to the contents of the specified
address.

【Max】
Set the maximum value of the display range. When【Dynamic
Range】is selected, the address for maximum display range will
be set.

【Min】
Set the minimum value of the display range. When【Dynamic
Range】 is selected, the address for minimum display range will
be set.

Note: When【Dynamic Range】is selected, the content value of the

maximum address must be greater than the content value of the minimum
address in order for the display range to be changed validly.

【Post 【None】
Processing】 The object unused the post processing function.

【Gain/Offset】
Set whether to allow post-processing functions for the object.
Related post processing settings will appear if this option is
selected, allowing the setting of processing functions (add,
subtract, multiply and divide) and constants.
Formula is as follows: y=Ax+B, gain is A, offset for the B, y value is
displayed for HMI, x is PLC value.
For example, gain A=5, offset B=2, when the PLC x=3, HMI value
display is 17 (17=(5*3)+2).
Gain A Offset B PLC Value x HMI displayed value y
A=5 B=2 x=3 y = 17

In the object, enter 12 and the PLC value x will get 2 (x=(y-B)/A,
2=(12-2)/5).
Gain A Offset B PLC Value x HMI displayed value y
A=5 B=2 y = 12 x=2

The【Address】checkbox can be used to set the source address

for processing constant. The type of data used to read the data
type of the read address will change according to the setting of
the monitor address.

441
 【Max./Min.】
Sets the ratio of the read source address and the display. Can be
set by【Data Max.】,【Data Min.】,【Display Max.】and
【Display Min.】to determine the proportional relationship.
For example, read the PLC R100 address, and the maximum of
the R100 is 100, minimum is 0, in the HMI wants to show the
maximum is 1000, minimum is 0. So the【Data Max.】indicates
the maximum value of the source address, can be set to 100,
【Data Min.】indicates the minimum valueof the source
address, can be set to 0,【Display Max.】indicates the maximum
value of the display, can be set to 1000,【Data Min.】indicates
the minimum value of the display, can be set to 0, when PLC
register R100=50, then HMI will display as 500.

If check the【Address】then can set the source address of the

【Data Max.】,【Data Min.】,【Display Max.】and【Display
Min.】, the data type of the read address will change according
to the setting of the monitor address.

16.3.8.2 【Display】
The【Linear Meter】【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 268【Display】Setting Screen of【Linear Meter】

442
 Table 149【Display】Setting Properties of【Linear Meter】
Property Description

【Type】 There are 2 types: Rectangle and Cylinder.

【Shape】 【Direction】:
Set the direction of the Linear Meter; there are【Upward】,
【Downward】,【Leftward】and【Rightward】available to
choose from.

【Bi-Direction Mode】
Select for a Linear Meter that changes with respect to the
reference point -【Middle Value】.

【Middle Value】
Sets the reference point of【Bi-Direction Mode】.

【Indicator】:
【Background】
Set the background color of the indicator.

【Display】
Set the display color of the indicator.
【Border】 【Color】
Set the color of the border.
【Background】 【Color】
Set the color and filling of the background.
【Decoration】 【Glass Effect】
Set whether or not the “glass effect” is shown.

16.3.8.3 【Scale】
The【Linear Meter】【Scale】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of
each setting item are listed below:

443
 Figure 269【Scale】Setting Screen of【Linear Meter】

Table 150【Scale】Setting Screen of【Linear Meter】

Property Description

【Scale Frame】 【Color】

Set the color of the scale.

【Major Number】
Set the number of major ticks.

【Sub Number】
Set the number of minor ticks.
【Text】 【Font】
Select the font for the text.

【Format】
Select the format of the text.

【Color】
Select the color of the text.

【Auto Fit Size】

If checked, the size of the text is automatically adjusted
according to the size of the object. If not checked, the user is
able to manually adjust the text size.

【Precision】
Set the number of decimal places the labels display.
【Scale When the user set the direction of the Linear Meter to
【Upward】or【Downward】,【Left】or【Right】can be
Position】

444
 selected for the scale position. When the direction of the
Linear Meter is 【Leftward】or【Rightward】,【Top】or
【Bottom】can be selected for the scale position.

16.3.8.4 【Range】
The【Linear Meter】【Range】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of
each setting item are listed below:

Figure 270【Range】Setting Screen of【Linear Meter】

Table 151【Range】Setting Properties of【Linear Meter】

Property Description

【Range Select if the color for the indicator of the Linear Meter will be
changed according to the contents of the monitored address.
Display】
【Dynamic Range】
Select to allow a maximum and minimum value for the display
range to change according to the contents of the specified
address.

Note: When【Dynamic Range】is selected, the content value of the

upper limit address must be greater than the content value of the lower
limit address in order for the color of the indicator to change accordingly.
【Upper Limit】 【Display】
Set the color of the upper limit range.

【Value】
Set the value of the upper limit. When【Dynamic Range】is
selected, the address of the upper limit value will be set.
【Lower Limit】 【Display】
Set the color of the lower limit range.

445
 【Value】
Set the value of the lower limit. When【Dynamic Range】is
selected, the address of the lower limit value will be set.

16.3.8.5 【Operation】
The【Linear Meter】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 271【Operation】Setting Screen of【Linear Meter】

Table 152【Operation】Setting Properties of【Linear Meter】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object can be controlled by a specific

Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then

446
 show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

16.3.9 【Data Block Graph】

【Data Block Graph】is an object used to display curves, in which the x value of the
curve uses continuous data values from a specified address as the source, and the y
value is derived from the contents of the continuous data. Its main functions are as
follows:
➢ Read the continuous data of a specified address directly.
➢ Pauses or starts updating the reading of the continuous data of a
specified address through the【Sub Switch】, and clearing the displayed
data. It can also temporarily preserve the old curve (persistence) for
comparison purposes.
Introduction to the【Data Block Graph】property settings dialog box are as follows:

16.3.9.1 【General】
The【Data Block Graph】 【General】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 272【General】Setting Screen on【Data Block Graph】

Table 153【General】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

447
 【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Basic】 【No. of Data per Curve】

Set the amount of data per curve, which is the number of
dots per curve.

【Mode】
Set the mode of data curve operation, you can choose
【Data Block】or【ECG】.

【Update Mode】
Set the update mode, includes【Period】and【Bit Trigger】.

【Period】
Set the curve to be updated at a period time when it is
display, set the period time of each curves after the option
was checked.

【Bit Trigger】
Set the curve to be updated by trigger a bit when it is display,
set the address of trigger bit of each curves after the option
was checked.

【Direction Type】
Support 4 types: RightUp, LeftUp, RightDown, and LeftDown.

【Two Y Axes Mode】

Select to display two y axes on the graph.
【Global Display Represents the range that can be displayed.
【Min】
Range】
Set the minimum Global Range value for the Y-axis.

【Max】
Set the maximum Global Range value for the Y-axis.

Note: The【Global Display Range】represents the range that can be

displayed. If【Max】is 100 and【Min】is 0, data exceeding this range
will not be able to be displayed.

【Display Precision】
Set the number of decimal places the labels display.
448
16.3.9.2 【Curve】
The【Data Block Graph】 【Curve】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 273【Curve】Setting Screen on【Data Block Graph】

Table 154【Curve】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】

Property Description

【Curves】 【No. of Curves】

Set the number of curves. The maximum is 32.

【No. of Curves (ECG)】

When【ECG】is selected, the curve will become 2 lines as a group,
starting from curves 0-0, 0-1, the next group will be curves 1-0, 1-
1, and so on, can be established in total 32 ECG curves (16 groups).

【Visibility Mask】
Select to use a visibility mask to control the visibility of the each
curve. The user should assign a 32Bit-UINT register as the mask
such that the 0 bit controls the display of curve 0, the 1 but
controls the display of curve 1, and so on.

【Visibility Mask (ECG)】

When selecting the【ECG】, the user needs to set a register with a
16Bit-UINT data type. The 0th bit controls the visibility of the 0-0
and 0-1 curves, and the 1st bit controls the visibility of the 1-0 and
1-1 curves, and so on.
449
 【Display Range】
Set the display mode for the display range of the curve. It is one of
the two following types:
➢ 【Global】
The display ranges of all the curves are identical to the
【Global Display Range】.
➢ 【Individual】
The display range of all the curves can be different from the
【Global Display Range】.

Explanation: When to set【Display Range】as【Individual】-When the value

ranges of the number of curves are different, for example when the value
range of curve a is 0~10, and curve b is 0~1000, it can be discovered that the
degree of changes for curve a will be difficult to observe if the two curves are
placed in the same figure. This is when【Display Range】can be set as
【Individual】and the display range of each curve can be defined; the system
will automatically zoom the value of the curves according to the value in
【Global Display Range】. Take this case for example,
If the value in【Global Display Range】is 0~100, when the value of curve a is
5, the system will zoom it to 50; and when the value of curve b is 500, the
system will also zoom it into 50, and so on.

The parameters for curve properties in the table are as follows:

【Y Start Address】
Set the starting address for the source of the Y value of the curve.

【Y Data Type】
Set the data type for the Y value of the curve.

Explanation: The range of the curve reading address is determined by the

【No. of Data per Curve】, 【Start Address】 and【Data Type】; users can
determine the range by looking at the following example.

➢ Example 1:
【No. of Data per Curve】= 3; Y-axis【Start Address】@0:R0; Y-axis【Data
Type】=16Bit-UINT
Dot X value Y value
0 0 @0:R0
1 1 @0:R1
2 2 @0:R2

➢ Example 2:
【No. of Data per Curve】= 3; Y-axis【Start Address】=$U:V0; Y Y-axis【Data
Type】=32Bit-UINT
Dot X value Y value
0 0 @0:R0@0:R1

450
 1 1 @0:R2@0:R3
2 2 @0:R4~@0:R5

【Display Name】
The name of the curve to display on the graph.

【Y Max】
Set the maximum Individual Display Range value for the Y value of
the curve, if【Display Range】is【Individual】

【Y Min】
Set the minimum Individual Display Range value for the Y-axis, if
【Display Range】is【Individual】.

【Cursor Display】
Four options are available: None, Scale Data, Original Data, and
Both. For example, if the【Global Display Range】was set to
0~100, the【Display Range】was set to individual,【Y Max】is set
to 200 and【Y Min】is set to 0, when Y is 60, the cursor is set such
that the scaled value of 30 is displayed. If the【Cursor Display】is
set to orginal, the original value of 60 is displayed.

【Y Axis】
If【Two Y Axes Mode】is selected, the setting is used to decide
the curve’s reference y-axis.

【Line】
Select whether to display the curve line.

【Line Color】
Set the color of the curve.

【Line Type】
Set the line type of curve, including solid, dash, dot, dash dot, dash
dot dot, etc.

【Line width】
Set the width of the curve.

451
 【Symbol】
Select to display the curve symbols.

【Symbol Color】
Set the color of the symbols.

【Symbol Type】
Set the symbol type.

16.3.9.3 【Advanced Curve】

The【Data Block Graph】 【Advanced Curve】page is as shown in the figure below,
the meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 274【Advanced Curve】Setting Screen of【Data Block Graph】

Table 155【Advanced Curve】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】

Property Description

【Advnaced Curve Select to enable the advanced curve display mode.

Display Mode】
【Mode】
There are four filter modes for setting the curve display,
which are:
【Single Value Filter Mode (>=)】Display all curves greater
than or equal to the filtered value.
【Single Value Filter Mode (>)】Display all curves greater
than the filtered value.
【Single Value Filter Mode (<)】Display all curves less than
the filtered value.
【Single Value Filter Mode (<=)】Display all curves less
than or equal to the filtered value.

The following is an example:

Select the mode【Single Value Filter Mode (>=)】and set
452
 this value to 30.

【Filter Value】 Set the filter value of the filter mode.

【Dynamic Range(32bit-FLOAT)】
Check whether the filter value can be changed according
to the content of the specified address. The data type is
32-bit floating point.

【Y Axis (Left)】
Set the filter value of the left Y axis.

【Y Axis (Right)】
Set the right Y-axis filter value (this setting can only be set
when【Two Y Axes Mode】is checked).

16.3.9.4 【Display】
The【Data Block Graph】 【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 275【Display】Setting Screen of【Data Block Graph】

Table 156【Display】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】

Property Description

【Border】 Select to display the border.

453
 【Color】
Set the color of the border.

【Type】
Set the border type.
【Background】 Select to display the background.
【Color】
Set the color of the background.
【Graph Select to display the graph background.
【Color】
Background】
Set the color of the graph background.
【Cursor】 Select to display the cursor.
【Color】
Set the color of the cursor.

【Show Cursor and Curve Value】

Select to display the value of cursor and curve.

【Show Cursor and Curve Value】【Display】

Set the visibility of the values. If【Always】is set, the
values are always shown. If【Controlled by Bit】is
selected, the visibility depends on the specified bit.

【Show Curve Name】

Select to display the curve name.

【Show Curve Name】【Display】

Set the visibility of the curve name. If【Always】is set, the
curve name is always shown. If【Controlled by Bit】 is
selected, the visibility of the curve name depends on the
specified bit.

【Font】
Set the font and size of the cursor value.

【Background】
Set the background color of the cursor value.

【Text】
Set the text color of the cursor value.
454
 【Opacity】
Set the background opacity of the cursor value.

16.3.9.5 【Axis】
The【Data Block Graph】 【Axis】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 276【Axis】Setting Screen of【Data Block Graph】

Table 157【Axis】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】

Property Description

【Common】 【Axis Color】

Set the color of the axis.
【X-axis】 【Number of Major Division】
【Division】 Set the number of major divisions for the X-axis.

【Number of Sub Division】

Set the number of sub divisions for the X-axis.

【Show Tick】
Select to display the ticks.

【Show Value】
Select to display the values on the X-axis.

【Value/Tick Color】
Set the colors of the values and ticks.

455
 【Show Grid】
Select to display vertical gridlines and set the color of the
gridlines.
【Y-axis】 【Number of Major Division】
【Division】 Set the number of major divisions for the Y-axis.

【Number of Sub Division】

Set the number of sub divisions for the Y-axis.

【Show Tick】
Select whether to display the tick on the Y-axis.

【Show Value】
Select to display the values on the Y-axis.

【Value/Tick Color】
Set the colors of the values and ticks.

【Show Grid】
Select to display horizontal gridlines and sets the color of
the gridlines.
【Y-axis】 【Position】
【Position】 Set the Y-axis position.

16.3.9.6 【Advanced】
The【Data Block Graph】 【Advanced】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

456
 Figure 277【Advanced】Setting Screen of【Data Block Graph】

Table 158【Advanced】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】

Property Description

【Advanced】 【Start/Stop State Address】

Set such that the【Data Block Graph】will start/stop at
the specified address. Only the display unit’s internal
memory is supported.
A value of 0 specifies the start state. A value of 1 specifies
the stop state.

【The initial state is stopped】

Check whether to set the【Data Block Graph】initial state
to stop state.
【Register Control】 【X Axis Scale】
X axis scale numbers can be specified by register, it will
appear register setting below after checked, and will
display the number of consecutive occupancy registers,
this register is in 16 Bit-UINT format, table as below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Major Division
1 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Sub Division

【Y Axis Scale】
Y axis scale numbers can be specified by register, it will
appear register setting below after checked, and will
display the number of consecutive occupancy registers,
this register is in 16 Bit-UINT format, table as below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Major Division
1 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Sub Division

【X Axis Range】
X axis range can be specified by register, it will appear
register setting below after checked, and will display the
number of consecutive occupancy registers, table as
below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.

457
 0&1 Maximum 32Bit-INT x x
value of x axis.
2&3 Minimum 32Bit-INT x x
value of x axis.
Note: The X-axis range of【ECG】is【No. of Data per
Curve】, and dynamic adjustment is not supported.

【Y Axis Range】
Y axis range can be specified by register, it will appear
register setting below after checked, and will display the
number of consecutive occupancy registers, table as
below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 & 1 The maximum 32Bit- x x
of the Y-axis FLOAT
on the left
side of the
graph
2 & 3 The minimum 32Bit- x x
of the Y-axis FLOAT
on the left
side of the
graph
4 Decimal point 16Bit-UINT 0 5
position of the
Y-axis value on
the left side of
the graph
5 & 6 The maximum 32Bit- x x
of the Y-axis FLOAT
on the right
side of the
graph
7 & 8 The minimum 32Bit- x x
of the Y-axis FLOAT
on the right
side of the
graph
9 Decimal point 16Bit-UINT 0 5
position of the
Y-axis value on
the right side
of the graph
Note: maximum value should bigger than minimum
value.

458
 【Curves (ECG)】
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 & 1 X-axis 32Bit- x x
maximum FLOAT
value of curve
0-0 and 0-1.
2 & 3 X-axis 32Bit- x x
minimum FLOAT
value of curve
0-0 and 0-1.
4 & 5 Y-axis 32Bit- x x
maximum FLOAT
value of curve
1-0 and 1-1.
6 & 7 Y-axis 32Bit- x x
minimum FLOAT
value of curve
1-0 and 1-1.
8 & 9 X-axis 32Bit- x x
maximum of FLOAT
curve 2-0 and
2-1.
10 & X-axis 32Bit- x x
11 minimum of FLOAT
curve 2-0 and
2-1.
60 & Y-axis 32Bit- x x
61 maximum FLOAT
value of curve
15-0 and 15-1.
62 & Y-axis 32Bit- x x
63 minimum FLOAT
value of curve
15-0 and 15-1.
Note: maximum value should bigger than minimum
value.

16.3.9.7 【Sub Switch】

The【Data Block Graph】 【Sub Switch】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

459
 Figure 278【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Data Block Graph】

Table 159【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】

Property Description

【Sub Switch List】 【Sub Switch List】that can be selected for【Data Block
Graph】. Sub switches can be enabled after selecting them.
Settings for the appearance of the selected sub switches will
also appear on the right.
When different sub switches are selected from the list, the
appearance settings to the right will be updated according
to the sub switches selected.

In which the (Sub Switches) are divided into:

➢ 【Start】—Start updating curve.
➢ 【Stop】—Stop updating curve.
➢ 【Clear】—Clear curve.
➢ 【Hor. Zoom In】—Horizontal zoom in.
➢ 【Hor. Zoom Out】—Horizontal zoom out.
➢ 【Ver. Zoom In】—Vertical zoom in.
➢ 【Ver. Zoom Out】—Vertical zoom out.
➢ 【Move Left】—Move Left.
➢ 【Move Right】—Move Right.
➢ 【Move Up】—Move Up.
➢ 【Move Down】—Move Down.
➢ 【Persistence On】-Preserve old curves ON; used

460
 for comparing curves. The color of old curves will
be darker than the original ones.
➢ 【Persistence Off】-Preserve old curves OFF; clears
all old curves.

Some sub switches are not supported under【ECG】, as

follow:
【Hor. Zoom In】,【Hor. Zoom Out】,【Move Left】,
【Move Right】,【Persistence On】,【Persistence Off】.
【Display】【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the text font of the sub switch currently selected.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the text size of the sub switch currently selected.

【Position】
Set the text position of the sub switch currently selected.

【Format】
Set the text format of the sub switch currently selected,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the text color of the sub switch currently selected.

【Content(Direct Text)】
Set the text of the sub switch currently selected.
【Display】 Set the background of the sub switch currently selected.
Check it to activate background settings, and the displayed
【Background】 background of the sub switch currently selected can be
edited below. If this option is not checked, the background
will be transparent.

【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the background of the sub switch
currently selected. When this option is checked, image
selection settings will appear asking the user to select an
image either from the【Image Library】or from a file.

【Background Color】
Set the background color of the sub switch currently

461
 selected. This setting item will appear if 【Use Image】was
not selected.
【Display】【while 【Play Audio】
Pressing】 Select to play audio when the sub switch is pressed. An
【Audio Selector】will appear on the right when enabled.
The switch on the right of the【Audio Selector】can be
pressed to select an audio and the switch on the left of the
【Audio Selector】can be pressed to play the selected
audio.

【Pressing Effect】
Set the pressing effect of the sub switch currently selected.
There are two effects available for selection:【None】and
【Highlight】.
【Advanced】 Operation control of sub switch, it can enabled by bit or
security.
【Operation
【Enable by Bit】
Control】 Check whether the sub switch operation is controlled by a
bit

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the sub switch operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
the object can be controlled, when false not the object can
462
 not be controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’,
‘<=’.

【Enable by Security】
Select the sub switch whether controlled by user level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

【Hold Time】
Check whether the operation is controlled by hold time.
Hold time can be divided into two kinds:
➢ 【Press On】: press directly, according to the【Min.
Hold Time】to confirm whether the operation is
executed.
➢ 【Double Press】: quickly double press to confirm
whether the operation is executed.

【Operator Confirm】
Check whether show comfirmation message window after
checking the operation.

【Max. Waiting Time】

When the confirmation message window is displayed, If the
user does not reply within this time, the system will close
the confirmation message window and cancel this operation

16.3.9.8 【Operation】
The【Data Block Graph】 【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

463
 Figure 279【Operation】Setting Screen of【Data Block Graph】

Table 160【Operation】Setting Properties of【Data Block Graph】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object; it can be controlled by a specific

Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security Manager】

Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.
Log】 It can also edit operation messages in which the message can
be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.

16.3.10 【Data Block XY Scatter】

【Data Block XY Scatter】 is an object used to display a curve, in which the sources
of both X/Y values are the continuous data contents of specified addresses. Its main
464
 functions are as follows:
➢ Read the continuous data of the specified addresses directly.
➢ Pauses or starts updating the reading of the continuous data of a
specified address through the【Sub Switch】and clearing the displayed
data. It can also temporarily preserve the old curve for comparison
purposes.
Introduction to the property setting dialog box are as follows:

16.3.10.1 【General】
The【Data Block XY Scatter】【General】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 280【General】 Setting Screen of 【Data Block XY Scatter】

Table 161【General】 Setting Properties of【Data Block XY Scatter】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Basic】 【No. of Data per Curve】

Set the amount of data per curve, which is the number of
dots per curve.

【Update Mode】
Set the update mode, includes【Period】and【Bit Trigger】.

【Period】
Set the curve to be updated at a period time when it is
display, set the period time of each curves after the option
was checked.

【Bit Trigger】
465
 Set the curve to be updated by trigger a bit when it is display,
set the address of trigger bit of each curves after the option
was checked.

【Direction Type】
Supprt 4 types: RightUp, LeftUp, RightDown, and LeftDown.
【Global Display Set the range that can be displayed.
【Max】
Range】
Set the maximum Global Range value for the X-axis/Y-axis.

【Min】
Set the minimum Global Range value for the X-axis/Y-axis.

Note: The 【Global Display Range】 represents the range that can be
displayed. If【Max】is 100 and【Min】 is 0, data exceeding this range
will not be able to be displayed.

【Display Precision】
Set the number of decimal places the labels display.

16.3.10.2 【Curve】
The【Data Block XY Scatter】【Curve】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 281【Curve】Setting Screen of 【Data Block XY Scatter】

466
 Table 162【Curve】Setting Properties of 【Data Block XY Scatter】
Property Description

【Curves】 【No. of Curves】

Set the number of curves. The maximum is 32.

【Visibility Mask】
Select to use a visibility mask to control the visibility of the each
curve. The user should assign a 32bit UINT register as the mask
such that the 0 bit controls the display of curve 0, the 1 but
controls the display of curve 1, and so on.

【Display Range】
Set the display mode for the display range of the curve. It is one of
the two following types:
➢ 【Global】
The display ranges of all the curves are identical to the
【Global Display Range】.
➢ 【Individual】
The display range of all the curves can be different from the
【Global Display Range】.

Explanation: When to set【Display Range】as【Individual】-When the value

ranges of the number of curves are different, for example when the value
range of curve a is 0~10, and curve b is 0~1000, it can be discovered that the
degree of changes for curve a will be difficult to observe if the two curves are
placed in the same figure. This is when【Display Range】can be set as
【Individual】and the display range of each curve can be defined; the system
will automatically zoom the value of the curves according to the value in
【Global Display Range】. Take this case for example,
If the value in【Global Display Range】is 0~100, when the value of curve a is
5, the system will zoom it to 50; and when the value of curve b is 500, the
system will also zoom it into 50, and so on.

The parameters for curve properties in the table are as follows:

【X/Y Start Address】
Set the starting address for the source of the X/Y value of the
curve.

【XY Data Type】

Set the data type for the X/Y value of the curve.

Explanation: The range of the curve reading address is determined by the

【No. of Data per Curve】,【Start Address】and【Data Type】; users can

467
 determine the range by looking at the following example.

➢ Example 1:
【No. of Data per Curve】= 3; Y-axis【Start Address】@0:R0; Y-axis【Data
Type】=16Bit-UINT
Dot X value Y value
0 0 @0:R0
1 1 @0:R1
2 2 @0:R2

➢ Example 2:
【No. of Data per Curve】= 3; Y-axis【Start Address】=$U:V0; Y Y-axis【Data
Type】=32Bit-UINT
Dot X value Y value
0 0 @0:R0@0:R1
1 1 @0:R2@0:R3
2 2 @0:R4~@0:R5

【X/Y Max】
Set the maximum Individual Display Range value for the Y value of
the curve, this option will appear if【Display Range】is
【Individual】.

【X/Y Min】
Set the minimum Individual Display Range value for the Y-axis, this
option will appear if【Display Range】is【Individual】.

【Display Name】
The name of the curve to display on the graph.

【Line】
Select to display the curve line.

【Line Color】
Set the color of the curve.

【Line Type】
Set the line type of curve, including solid, dash, dot, dash dot, dash
dot dot, etc.

【Line width】
Set the width of the curve.

468
 【Symbol】
Select to display the curve symbols.

【Symbol Color】
Set the color of the symbols.

【Symbol Type】
Set the symbol type.

【Fill】
Set whether to fill-up the block.

【Fill Type】
Set the fill-up direction.

【Fill Color】
Set the fill-up color.

16.3.10.3 【Display】
The【Data Block XY Scatter】【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 282【Display】Setting Screen of【Data Block XY Scatter】

Table 163【Display】Setting Properties of【Data Block XY Scatter】

Property Description

【Border】 Select to display the border.

【Color】
Set the color of the border.
469
 【Type】
Set the border type.
【Background】 Set the visibility of the background.
【Color】
Set the color of the background.
【Graph Select to enable a graph background.
【Color】
Background】
Set the color of the graph background.
【Cursor】 Set the visibility of the cursor.
【Color】
Set the color of the cursor.

【Show Cursor Value】

Select the visibility of the cursor value.

【Show Cursor Value】【Display】

Set the visibility of cursor values. If【Always】is set, the
cursor values are always shown. If【Controlled by Bit】is
selected, the visibility of cursor values depends on the
specified bit.

【Show Curve Name】

Select to display the curve name.

【Show Curve Name】【Display】

Set the visibility of the curve name. If【Always】is set, the
curve name is always shown. If【Controlled by Bit】 is
selected, the visibility of the curve name depends on the
specified bit.

【Font】
Set the font type and size of cursor values.

【Background】
Set the background color of the cursor values.

【Text】
Set the text color of the cursor values.

470
 【Opacity】
Set the background opacity of the cursor values.

16.3.10.4 【Axis】
The【Data Block XY Scatter】【Axis】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 283【Axis】Setting Screen of【Data Block XY Scatter】

Table 164【Axis】Setting Properties of【Data Block XY Scatter】

Property Description

【Common】 【Axis Color】

Set the color of the axis.
【X-axis】 【Number of Major Division】
【Division】 Set the number of major divisions for the X-axis.

【Number of Sub Division】

Set the number of sub divisions for the X-axis.

【Show Tick】
Select to display the ticks.

【Show Value】
Select to display the values on the X-axis.

【Value/Tick Color】
Set the color of the values and ticks.

【Show Grid】
Select to display vertical gridlines, and set the color of the
gridlines.

471
 【Y-axis】 【Number of Major Division】
【Division】 Set the number of major divisions for the Y-axis.

【Number of Sub Division】

Set the number of sub divisions for the Y-axis.

【Show Tick】
Select to display the ticks on the Y-axis.

【Show Value】
Select to display the values on the Y-axis.

【Value/Tick Color】
Set the color of the values and ticks.

【Show Grid】
Select to display horizontal gridlines, and set the color of
the gridlines.

16.3.10.5 【Advanced】
The【Data Block XY Scatter】【Advanced】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 284【Advanced】Setting Screen of【Data Block XY Scatter】

Table 165【Advanced】Setting Properties of【Data Block XY Scatter】

Property Description

472
 【Advanced】 【Start/Stop State Address】
Set such that the【Data Block Graph】will start/stop at
the specified address. Only the display unit’s internal
memory is supported.
A value of 0 specifies the start state. A value of 1 specifies
the stop state.

【The initial state is stopped】

Set the initial state of of the data to stop.
【Register Control】 【X Axis Scale】
X axis scale numbers can be specified by register, it will
appear register setting below after checked, and will
display the number of consecutive occupancy registers,
this register is in 16 Bit-UINT format, table as below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Major Division
1 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Sub Division

【Y Axis Scale】
Y axis scale numbers can be specified by register, it will
appear register setting below after checked, and will
display the number of consecutive occupancy registers,
this register is in 16 Bit-UINT format, table as below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Major Division
1 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Sub Division

【X Axis Range】
X axis range can be specified by register, it will appear
register setting below after checked, and will display the
number of consecutive occupancy registers, table as
below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 & 1 Maximum of x 32Bit- x X
axis. FLOAT
2 & 3 Minimum of x 32Bit- x X
axis. FLOAT
4 The decimal 16Bit-UINT 0 5
point position
of the X axis
473
 value

Note: maximum value should bigger than minimum

value.
【Y Axis Range】
Y axis range can be specified by register, it will appear
register setting below after checked, and will display the
number of consecutive occupancy registers, table as
below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 & 1 The maximum 32Bit- x x
of the Y-axis FLOAT
on the left
side of the
graph
2 & 3 The minimum 32Bit- x x
of the Y-axis FLOAT
on the left
side of the
graph
4 Curve left side 16Bit-UINT 0 5
of the Y-axis
value of the
decimal point
position
5 & 6 The maximum 32Bit- x x
of the Y-axis FLOAT
on the right
side of the
graph
7 & 8 The minimum 32Bit- x x
of the Y-axis FLOAT
on the right
side of the
graph
9 Curve right 16Bit-UINT 0 5
side of the Y-
axis value of
the decimal
point position
Note: maximum value should bigger than minimum
value.

【Curves】
If curve Y-axis display range use【individual】, check this

474
 option, each of the Y-axis curve can be specified by
register, and will display the number of consecutive
occupancy registers, table as below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 & 1 X-axis 32Bit- x x
maximum FLOAT
value of curve
0.
2 & 3 X-axis 32Bit- x x
minimum FLOAT
value of curve
0.
4 & 5 Y-axis 32Bit- x x
maximum FLOAT
value of curve
0.
6 & 7 Y-axis 32Bit- x x
minimum FLOAT
value of curve
0.
8 & 9 X-axis 32Bit- x x
maximum of FLOAT
curve 1.
10 & X-axis 32Bit- x x
11 minimum of FLOAT
curve 1.
12 & Y-axis 32Bit- x x
13 maximum FLOAT
value of curve
1.
14 & Y-axis 32Bit- x x
15 minimum FLOAT
value of curve
1.
… … 32Bit- x x
FLOAT
248 & X-axis 32Bit- x x
249 maximum of FLOAT
curve 31.
250 & X-axis 32Bit- x x
251 minimum of FLOAT
curve 31.
252 & Y-axis 32Bit- x x
253 maximum FLOAT
value of curve
31.

475
 254 & Y-axis 32Bit- x x
255 minimum FLOAT
value of curve
31.

Note: maximum value should bigger than minimum

value.

16.3.10.6 【Sub Switch】

The【Data Block XY Scatter】【Sub Switch】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 285【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Data Block XY Scatter】

Table 166【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Data Block XY Scatter】

Property Description

【Sub Switch List】 【Sub Switch List】that can be selected for【Data Block XY
Scatter】. Sub switches can be enabled after selecting
them. Settings for the appearance of the selected sub
switches will also appear on the right.

When different sub switches are selected from the list, the
appearance settings to the right will be updated according
to the sub switches selected.

In which the【Sub Switches】are divided into:

➢ 【Start】—Start updating curve.
➢ 【Stop】—Stop updating curve.

476
 ➢ 【Clear】—Clear curve.
➢ 【Hor. Zoom In】—Horizontal zoom in.
➢ 【Hor. Zoom Out】—Horizontal zoom out.
➢ 【Ver. Zoom In】—Vertical zoom in.
➢ 【Ver. Zoom Out】—Vertical zoom out.
➢ 【Move Left】—Move Left.
➢ 【Move Right】—Move Right.
➢ 【Move Up】—Move Up.
➢ 【Persistence On】-Preserve old curves ON; used
for comparing curves. The color of old curves will
be darker than the original ones.
➢ 【Persistence Off】-Preserve old curves OFF; clears
all old curves.
【Display】【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the text font of the sub switch currently selected.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the text size of the sub switch currently selected.

【Position】
Set the text position of the sub switch currently selected.

【Format】
Set the text format of the sub switch currently selected,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the text color of the sub switch currently selected.

【Content(Direct Text)】
Set the text of the sub switch currently selected.
【Display】 Set the background of the sub switch currently selected.
Check it to activate background settings, and the displayed
【Background】 background of the sub switch currently selected can be
edited below. If this option is not checked, the background
will be transparent.

【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the displayed background of the sub
switch currently selected. When this option is checked,
477
 image selection settings will appear asking the user to select
an image either from the【Image Library】or from a file.

【Background Color】
Set the background color of the sub switch currently
selected. This setting will appear if 【Use Image】was not
selected.
【Display】【while 【Play Audio】
Pressing】 Select to play audio when the sub switch is pressed. An
【Audio Selector】will appear on the right when enabled.
The switch on the right of the【Audio Selector】can be
pressed to select an audio and the switch on the left of the
【Audio Selector】can be pressed to play the audio
selected.

【Pressing Effect】
Set the pressing effect of the sub switch currently selected.
There are two effects available for selection:【None】and
【Highlight】.
【Advanced】 Operation control of sub switch, it can enabled by bit or
security.
【Operation
【Enable by Bit】
Control】 Check whether the sub switch operation is controlled by a
bit

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the sub switch operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

478
 【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
the object can be controlled, when false not the object can
not be controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’,
‘<=’.

【Enable by Security】
Select the sub switch whether controlled by user level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

【Hold Time】
Check whether the operation is controlled by hold time.
Hold time can be divided into two kinds:
➢ 【Press On】: press directly, according to the【Min.
Hold Time】to confirm whether the operation is
executed.
➢ 【Double Press】: quickly double press to confirm
whether the operation is executed.

【Operator Confirm】
Check whether show comfirmation message window after
checking the operation.

【Max. Waiting Time】

When the confirmation message window is displayed, If the
user does not reply within this time, the system will close
the confirmation message window and cancel this operation

16.3.10.7 【Operation】
The【Data Block XY Scatter】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

479
 Figure 286【Operation】Setting Screen of【Data Block XY Scatter】

Table 167【Operation】Setting Properties of【Data Block XY Scatter】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object; it can be controlled by a specific

Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
480
 【Operation Select to enable the 【Operation Logger】of the object. It
Logger】 can also edit operation messages in which the message can be
inputted directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.

16.3.11 【Multistate Switch】

【Multistate Switch】can write the numeric value corresponding to the set state into
specific registers. The state can be changed by pressing the Multistate Switch and the
numeric value written into the register will also change accordingly.

16.3.11.1 【Setting】
The【Multistate Switch】 【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 287【Setting】Screen of【Multistate Switch】

Table 168【Setting】Properties of【Multistate Switch】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Update】 Provide user can select a suitable speed to get

the latest data under different situation, such
as you would like to get the latest data or
adjust the object on the screen to display first,
etc.
Provide three modes:

481
 【once】: update once only when switch to
this page or use the system tag
【OP_UPDATE_SCREEN_OBJECTS】, update
once when trigger once a time, it will keep
update if the monitor address is internal
address.
【normal】: normal update speed.
【fast】: the fastest update speed.
【Execute while Releasing】 Select to execute the action set for the
Multistate Switch while releasing. The action
will be executing immediately when the Step
Switch is pressed if this option is not selected.
【Play Audio while Pressing】 Select to play audio when the Multistate
Switch is pressed. An【Audio Selector】will
appear on the right when enabled. The switch
on the right of the【Audio Selector】can be
pressed to select an audio and the switch on
the left of the【Audio Selector】can be
pressed to play the audio selected.
【Write Address】 Set the operating address of the Multistate
Switch.
【Data Type】 Set the Data Type of the Multistate Switch.

【Number of States】 Set the number of states of the Multistate

Switch; the maximum number of states is 256.
【State Type】 Set the State Type of the Multistate Switch.

The【Written Value】cannot be edited and

numeric values identical to each state number
will be automatically filled out if【Value】is
selected. For example, the【Written Value】
will be 0 of the state is 0.

Users can switch between states from the list

on the left and customize the numeric value
corresponding to each state from【Written
Value】if【Custom】is selected.
【Control Type】 Support 2 types to control: Button and List.

【Written Value】 Sets the numeric value to write for each state
when the Multistate Switch is pressed.
【Notification】 Set to allow the notification function for the

482
 Multistate Switch. Related settings will appear
if this option is selected, allowing setting of
bit and value for notification.

16.3.11.2 【Display】
The【Multistate Switch】 【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 288【Display】Setting Screen of【Multistate Switch】

Table 169【Display】Setting Properties of【Multistate Switch】

Property Description

【State】 Switch to the state currently editing. 0 and 1 buttons are

provided to enable quick switching between states 0 and 1.
【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of the text for the current editing state.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the size of the text for the current editing state.

【Position】
Set the position of the text for the current editing state.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the text of the current editing
state. There are four blinking speeds available to choose
from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

483
 【Scrolling Text】
Set the scrolling text function for the text of the current
editing state. There are four scrolling speeds available to
choose from slow to fast.

【Format】
Set the format of the text for the current editing state,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the color of the text for the current editing state.

【Copy Attributes to All States】

The text properties for the current editing state is applied to
all states.

【Content (Direct Text)】

Set the text of the current editing state. It can be inputted
directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.

【Copy Content to All States】

Apply the settings of the text for the current editing state to
all states.
【Background】 【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the background of the current
editing state. When this option is checked, an【Image
Selector】will appear asking the user to select an image
either from the【Image Library】or from a file.

【Original Size of Image】

Display the original size of the image.

【Image Position】
Appears after checking【Original Size of Image】, you can
select the position of the picture to be displayed.

【Color】
Set the background color of the currently editing state. This
setting item will appear if【Use Image】was not selected.

484
 【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the background of the current
editing state. There are four blinking speeds available to
choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Pressing Effect】
Set the pressing effect of the current editing state. There
are two effects available for selection: None and Highlight.

【Rotate】
Rotate the graph, includes CW 0 Degrees, CW 90 Degrees,
CW 180 Degrees and CW 270 Degrees.

【Flip】
Flip the graph, includes No Flip, X-Axis and Y-Axis.

【Remove Background】
Choose transparent color through【Choose Color】.

【Copy to All States】

Apply the settings of the background for the current editing
state to all states.
【Border】 Set the object border.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of the border.

【Type】
Set the type of the border.

【Copy to All States】

Apply the settings of the border for the current editing state
to all states.

16.3.11.3 【Operation】
The【Multistate Switch】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

485
 Figure 289【Operation】Setting Screen of【Multistate Switch】

Table 170【Operation】Setting Properties of【Multistate Switch】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if the visibility is to be controlled by the level of the
user logged in.

486
 【User Level Condition】
Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Operation control of the object; it can be controlled by a
specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control operation by a specific Bit.

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】 or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the operation control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
the object can be controlled, when false not the object can
not be controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’,
‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if the operation is to be controlled by the level of the
user logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Log】 Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.
It can also edit operation messages in which the message
can be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text

487
 Library】.
【Advanced 【Hold Time】
Operation Select if the operation is controlled by hold time. Hold time
Control】 can be divided into two types:
➢ 【Press On】: Press directly and hold to confirm
the execution of this operation according to the
【Min Hold Time】.
➢ 【Double Press】: Use two quick presses to
confirm the execution of this operation.

【Operation Confirm】
Select to display a confirmation window after the operation
is executed.

【Max Waiting Time】

When the confirmation window is displayed, the system will
close the confirmation window and cancel this operation if
the user does not acknowledge it within this time.

16.3.11.4 【External Lable】

The【Multistate Switch】【External Lable】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 290【External Lable】Setting Screen of【Multistate Switch】

Table 171【Multistate Switch】【External Lable】setting properties

Option Description

488
 【Enable External Checked, the bottom will appear the external lable
settings of the object.
Lable】
【Direction】 Set the display direction, there are horizontal and vertical
two selections.
【Space】 Set the space between external lable and the object.

【Left/Top Fill in the text to be displayed on the left / top lable of the
object, can be directly input or selected from【Font
Lable(Direct Text)】
Library】.
【Right/Bottom Fill in the text to be displayed on the right / bottom lable
of the object, can be directly input or selected from
Lable(Direct Text)】
【Font Library】.
【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of text.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the size of text, the default size is 20.

【Alignment】
Set the alignment of text.

【Color】
Set the color of text.

【Format】
Set the format of text, includes Bold, Italic and Underline.

【Word Spacing】
Set the word space of text.

【Margin】
Set the margin of text.
【Background】 Check whether to display background, set the color and
opacity of background after checked.

【Color】
Set the background color of external lable.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of external lable background, the greater
the value the more the background opacity is.
489
 【Border】 Check whether to display border.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of border.

【Type】
Set the type of border.

16.3.12 【Slide Switch】

【Slide Switch】allows users to write the numeric value corresponding to the final
position of the slider into the set register by dragging.

16.3.12.1 【Setting】
The【Slide Switch】【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of
each setting item are listed below:

Figure 291【Setting】Screen of【Slide Switch】

Table 172【Setting】Properties of【Slide Switch】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Address】 【Write Address】

Set the register address to write the numeric
value when the user operates the Slide
Switch.

【Data Type】
Set the Data Type of the Slide Switch Write
Address.
490
 【Control】 【Direction】
Set the moving direction of the Slide Switch,
including left to right, right to left, top to
bottom, bottom to top.

【Input Range】
Set the【Max】and【Min】numeric values
for the Slide Switch to write. The【Address】
below can be used to set the source address
for reading the maximum value or minimum
value by【Data Type】.
【Notification】 Set to allow the notification function for the
Slide Switch. Related settings will appear if
this option is selected, allowing setting of a
register for notification, includes reset and
set.

16.3.12.2 【Display】
The【Slide Switch】【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of
each setting item are listed below:

Figure 292【Display】Setting Screen of【Slide Switch】

Table 173【Display】Setting Properties of【Slide Switch】

Property Description

【Ticks】 【Display Scale】

Set whether to display the scale of the Slide Switch.

【Position】
Set the position to display the scale for the Slide Switch.
491
 【Number of Major Ticks】
Set the number of major ticks for the Slide Switch.

【Color of Major Ticks】

Set the color of the major ticks for the Slide Switch.

【Number of Minor Ticks】

Set the amount of minor ticks for the Slide Switch.

【Color of Minor Ticks】

Set the displayed color of the minor ticks for the Slide
Switch.
【Numerical 【Display Numerical Marks】
Scale】 Set to display the numerical marks for the Slide Switch.

【Color】
Set the color for the numerical marks on the Slide Switch.
【Appearance】 【Border Type】
Set the border type of the Slide Switch.

【Border Color/Width】
Set the border color and border thickness of the Slide
Switch.

【Background Color】
Set the background color of the Slide Switch.

【Slider Color】
Set the slider color of the Slide Switch.

【Groove Color】
Set the groove color of the Slide Switch.

16.3.12.3 【Operation】
The【Slide Switch】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

492
 Figure 293【Operation】Setting Screen of【Slide Switch】

Table 174【Operation】Setting Properties of【Slide Switch】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

493
 【User Level Condition】
Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Operation control of the object. It can be controlled by a
specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control operation by a specific Bit.

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】 or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the operation control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
the object can be controlled, when false not the object can
not be controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’,
‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if operation is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Log】 Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.
It can also edit operation messages in which the message
can be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text
Library】.

494
16.3.12.4 【External Lable】
The【Slide Switch】【External Lable】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 294【External Lable】Setting Screen of【Slide Switch】

【External Lable】setting properties

Table 175【Slide Switch】
Option Description

【Enable External Checked, the bottom will appear the external lable
settings of the object.
Lable】
【Direction】 Set the display direction, there are horizontal and vertical
two selections.
【Space】 Set the space between external lable and the object.

【Left/Top Fill in the text to be displayed on the left / top lable of the
object, can be directly input or selected from【Font
Lable(Direct Text)】
Library】.
【Right/Bottom Fill in the text to be displayed on the right / bottom lable
of the object, can be directly input or selected from
Lable(Direct Text)】
【Font Library】.
【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of text.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the size of text, the default size is 20.

【Alignment】
Set the alignment of text.
495
 【Color】
Set the color of text.

【Format】
Set the format of text, includes Bold, Italic and Underline.

【Word Spacing】
Set the word space of text.

【Margin】
Set the margin of text.
【Background】 Check whether to display background, set the color and
opacity of background after checked.

【Color】
Set the background color of external lable.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of external lable background, the greater
the value the more the background opacity is.
【Border】 Check whether to display border.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of border.

【Type】
Set the type of border.

16.3.13 【Selector List】

【Selector List】allows users to display multiple switches using a pull-down menu so
that related switches can be organized into a single list, making it convenient for the
operators to select the switches needed.

16.3.13.1 【Setting】
The【Selector List】【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of
each setting item are listed below:

496
 Figure 295【Setting】Screen of【Selector List】

Table 176【Setting】Properties of【Selector List】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Switch Name】 Set the name of the switch currently

selected. Users can change the currently
selected switch from the【Switch List】.
【Play Audio while Pressing】 Select to play audio when the Step Switch
is pressed. An【Audio Selector】will
appear on the right when enabled. The
switch on the right of the【Audio
Selector】can be pressed to select an
audio and the switch on the left of the
【Audio Selector】can be pressed to play
the audio selected.
【Execute when Item is Selected】 Select whether to enable the【Execute
when Item is Selected】function. When it
is enabled, the function of a switch will be
executed immediately when the user
selected a switch from the Selector List
object. If it is not enabled, the function of
the selected switch will only be executed
after the user pressed the【Execute】
button.

497
 When the Switch using【Bit Momentary】
action of【Bit Switch】in the【Switch
List】, or the【Continuously Add】/
【Continuously Subtract】of【Add Data】
action /【Subtract Data】 action in the
【Word Switch】, 【Execute When this
Item is Selected】the option will not be
able to check.
【Bit Switch】 Change the currently editing switch type to
【Bit Switch】,for the related property
settings please refer to the description of
the switch.
【Word Switch】 Change the currently editing switch type to
【Word Switch】,for the related property
settings please refer to the description of
the switch..
【Change Screen】 Change the currently editing switch type to
【Change Screen】,for the related
property settings please refer to the
description of the switch..
【Function Switch】 Change the currently editing switch type to
【Function Switch】,for the related
property settings please refer to the
description of the switch..
【Notification】 Set whether to allow the notification
function. Related setting items will appear
if this option is selected, allowing setting of
bit and value for notification.
【Switch List】 Display the switch list currently included in
the Selector List item object.

【Add】
Increase the number of switches in the
【Switch List】; the type of switch to add
can be selected.

【Delete】
Delete the switch currently selected in the
【Switch List】.

498
 【Up】
Move the order of the switch currently
selected in the【Switch List】up.

【Down】
Move the order of the switch currently
selected in the【Switch List】down.

Note: When all members of the selector list are【Word Switches】, the action set to【Write

Data】, and the【Data Types】are the same, if the address is changed through the list, the
constant change will show up in the monitoring object. If the address is changed through an outside
object, the item in the list will change accordingly. This does not apply if the 【Data Type】is 32Bit-
Float.

Example: There are three【Word Switches】in the【Selector List】. The actions are all set to

【Write Data】and the【Data Types】are the same. All three switches also control the same
register: R100. Item1 is set write 1 into the address, Item2 is set write 2 into the address, and Item3
is set to write 3 into the address. If R100 has 2 written into it, the item shown in the selector list will
be item 2.

16.3.13.2 【Display】
The【Selector List】【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of
each setting item are listed below:

Figure 296【Display】Setting Screen of【Selector List】

Table 177【Display】Setting Properties of【Selector List】

Property Description

499
 【Menu】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of the text displayed for the Selector List.

【Size】
Set the size of the text displayed for the Selector List.

【Position】
Set the position of the text displayed for the Selector List.

【Format】
Set the format of the text displayed for the Selector List,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the color of the text displayed for the Selector List.

【Background Color】
Set the displayed background color of the Selector List.

【Selection Background Color】

Set the displayed background color of the selected item in
Selector List.

【Border Type】
Set the displayed border type of the Selector List.

【Border Color/Width】
Set the displayed border color and border thickness of the
Selector List.
【Background】 【Use Image】
Set whether to use an image for the background of the
【Execute】button. When this option is checked, an
【Image Selector】will appear asking the user to select an
image either from the【Image Library】or from a file.

【Original Size of Image】

Display the original size of the image.

【Image Position】
Appears after checking【Original Size of Image】, you can
500
 select the position of the picture to be displayed.

【Background Color】
Set the background color of the【Execute】button. This
setting item will appear if【Use Image】was not selected.

【Pressing Effect】
Set the pressing effect of the【Execute】button. There are
two effects available for selection: None and Highlight.

【Text Font】
Set the text font of the【Execute】button.

【Text Size】
Set the text size of the【Execute】button.

【Text Color】
Set the text color of the【Execute】button.

【Text】
Set the text for the【Execute】button. It can be inputted
directly.

16.3.13.3 【Operation】
The【Selector List】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

501
 Figure 297【Operation】Setting Screen of【Selector List】

Table 178【Operation】Setting Properties of【Selector List】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Operation control of the object. It can be controlled by a
specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control operation by a specific Bit.

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】 or

502
 【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the operation control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
the object can be controlled, when false not the object can
not be controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’,
‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if operation is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Log】 Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.
It can also edit operation messages in which the message
can be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text
Library】.
【Advanced 【Hold Time】
Operation Select to control the operation by hold time; hold time can
Control】 be divided into two types:
➢ 【Press On】: Press directly and confirm the
execution of this operation according to the【Min
Hold Time】.
➢ 【Double Press】: Use two quick presses to confirm
the execution of this operation.

【Operation Confirm】
503
 Select to display the confirmation window after the
operation is executed.

【Max Waiting Time】

When the confirm window is displayed, the system will
close the confirmation window and cancel the operation if
the user did not respond within this time.

16.3.13.4 【External Lable】

The【Selector List】【External Lable】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 298【External Lable】Setting Screen of【Selector List】

Table 179【Selector List】【External Lable】setting properties

Option Description

【Enable External Checked, the bottom will appear the external lable
settings of the object.
Lable】
【Direction】 Set the display direction, there are horizontal and vertical
two selections.
【Space】 Set the space between external lable and the object.

【Left/Top Fill in the text to be displayed on the left / top lable of the
object, can be directly input or selected from【Font
Lable(Direct Text)】
Library】.
【Right/Bottom Fill in the text to be displayed on the right / bottom lable
of the object, can be directly input or selected from
Lable(Direct Text)】
【Font Library】.
【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
504
 Set the font of text.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the size of text, the default size is 20.

【Alignment】
Set the alignment of text.

【Color】
Set the color of text.

【Format】
Set the format of text, includes Bold, Italic and Underline.

【Word Spacing】
Set the word space of text.

【Margin】
Set the margin of text.
【Background】 Check whether to display background, set the color and
opacity of background after checked.

【Color】
Set the background color of external lable.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of external lable background, the greater
the value the more the background opacity is.
【Border】 Check whether to display border.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of border.

【Type】
Set the type of border.

16.3.14 【Radio Button】

【Radio Button】includes multiple buttons and status,in this group button, only one
of the state objects can be operated at a time, write the data to the corresponding
value or corresponding bit of the PLC, and at the same time only one state will be on,
505
 for operator easy to use.

16.3.14.1 【Setting】
【Radio Button】【Setting】paging shown as below, each of the setting meaning as
follow:

Figure 299【Radio Button】【Setting】setting paging

Table 180【Radio Button】【Setting】setting properties

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Excute while Select to execute the action set for the radio button
while releasing. The action will be executed
Releasing】 immediately when the switch is pressed if this option
is not selected.
【Play Audio while Select to play audio when the switch is pressed. An
【Audio Selector】will appear on the right when
Pressing】
enabled. The switch on the right of the【Audio
Selector】can be pressed to select an audio and the
switch on the left of the【Audio Selector】can be
pressed to play the selected audio.
【Address】 Set the operate address of the radio button.

【Data Type】 Set the data type of the radio button, including 16Bit-
BCD、16Bit-INT、16Bit-UINT、32Bit-BCD、32Bit-
INT、32Bit-UINT and 32Bit-FLOAT, etc.
506
 【Total Buttons】 Set the numbers of total buttons.

【Direction】 Set the direction of the radio button, including right

to left, left to right, top to bottom, bottom to top.
【Button Spacing】 Set button spacing of each button.

【Show Mark】 Set whether mark the radio button.

【Mark Backgroung Color】

Set the background color that the radio button mark
to display.

【Mark Color】
Set the color that radio button mark to display.
【Value】 Set each button write the vaiue to the【Address】.
【Notification】 Set whether permit radio button to enable
notification function. After enable, can set the
notification address and the value that want to write
in while excute the radio button
【Value List】 Display Each button in the radio button group
corresponds to the value written to【Address】,
while【Total Buttons】increase or decrease,
【Value List】will also changed.

16.3.14.2 【Display】
【Radio Button】【Display】paging shown as below, each of the setting meaning as
follow:

507
 Figure 300【Radio Button】【Display】setting paging

Table 181【Radio Button】【Display】setting properties

Property Description

【State】 Select the state needed to be edited. 0 and 1 buttons are

provided to enable quick switching between states 0 and 1.
【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of the radio button.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the size of the radio button.

【Position】
Set the position of the radio button.

【Format】
Set the format of the radio button, including bold, italic,
underline

【Color】
Set the color of the radio button.

【Copy Attributes to All States (Button)】

Applies the text attribute setting of the current edit state to
all states

【Copy Attributes to All Buttons (State)】

Apply the text attribute settings for the current edit state
to all buttons

【Content】
Set the text displayed of the current edit status, either
directly or by the【Text Library】.

【Copy Content to All States (Button)】

Applies the text settings of the current edit state to all
states.

【Copy Content to All Buttons (State)】

Applies the text settings of the current edit state to all
buttons.
508
 【Background】 【Use Image】
Sets whether or not to use the picture for the background
displayed by the current edit status. After checked, will
appear【Image Selector】to provide user to select the
image from【Image Library】or from file.

【Color】
Set the background color of the current edit status. If
unchecked【Use Image】, this option will appear.

【Pressing Effect】
Set the pressing effect of the current edit status, there are
two kinds of effects nine and highlight can choose.

【Rotate】
Rotate the graph, includes CW 0 Degrees, CW 90 Degrees,
CW 180 Degrees and CW 270 Degrees.

【Flip】
Flip the graph, includes No Flip, X-Axis and Y-Axis.

【Remove Background】
Choose transparent color through【Choose Color】.

【Copy to All States (Button)】

Apply the background settings for the current edit state to
all states.

【Copy to All Buttons (State)】

Apply the background settings for the current edit status
to all buttons.

16.3.14.3 【Operation】
The【Radio Button】 【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

509
 Figure 301【Radio Button】【Operation】setting paging

Table 182【Radio Button】【Operation】setting properties

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
510
 logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Operation control of the object. It can be controlled by a
specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control operation by a specific Bit.

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】 or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the operation control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
the object can be controlled, when false not the object can
not be controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’,
‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if operation is to be controlled by the level of the
user logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Log】 Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.
It can also edit operation messages in which the message
can be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text
511
 Library】.

16.3.14.4 【External Lable】

The【Radio Button】 【External Lable】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 302【Radio Button】【External Lable】setting paging

Table 183【Radio Button】【External Lable】setting properties

Option Description

【Enable External Checked, the bottom will appear the external lable
settings of the object.
Lable】
【Direction】 Set the display direction, there are horizontal and vertical
two selections.
【Space】 Set the space between external lable and the object.

【Left/Top Fill in the text to be displayed on the left / top lable of the
object, can be directly input or selected from【Font
Lable(Direct Text)】
Library】.
【Right/Bottom Fill in the text to be displayed on the right / bottom lable
of the object, can be directly input or selected from
Lable(Direct Text)】
【Font Library】.
【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of text.

【Direct Text Size】

512
 Set the size of text, the default size is 20.

【Alignment】
Set the alignment of text.

【Color】
Set the color of text.

【Format】
Set the format of text, includes Bold, Italic and Underline.

【Word Spacing】
Set the word space of text.

【Margin】
Set the margin of text.
【Background】 Check whether to display background, set the color and
opacity of background after checked.

【Color】
Set the background color of external lable.

【Opacity】
Set the opacity of external lable background, the greater
the value the more the background opacity is.
【Border】 Check whether to display border.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of border.

【Type】
Set the type of border.

16.3.15 【Input Display】

【Input Display】is used on a【Base Screen】/【Window Screen】/【Keypad
Screen】; it can display the numeric value or text currently entered with the keypad.
The【Input Display】property settings dialog is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting option are listed below:

513
 Figure 303 Setting Dialog of【Input Display】

Table 184 Setting Properties of【Input Display】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Content】 【7-segment Display】

Set to use the 7-segment display function for the Input
Display object. If this option is selected, related setting
items for setting of style of the 7-segment display will
appear.

Note: while this option is selected, it can only show part of text (0/O,
1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S, 6, 7, 8, 9/g, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o, P, r, u, U, Y).

【Font】
Set the font for the text of Input Display.

【Size】
Set the size for the text of Input Display.

【Position】
Set the position for the text of Input/Display.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the text of the Input/Display.
There are four blinking speeds available to choose from:
None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Scrolling Text】
Set the scrolling text function for the text of the

514
 Input/Display. There are four scrolling speeds available to
choose from slow to fast.

【Format】
Set the format of the text for the Input/Display, including
Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the color for the text of the Input/Display.
【Border】 【Type】
Set the border types for Input Display.

【Color/Thickness】
Set the color and thickness for the border of the
Input/Display.
【Background】 【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the background of the Input/Display.
When this option is checked, an【Image Selector】will
appear asking the user to select an image either from the
【Image Library】or from a file.

【Color】
Set the background color of the Input/Display. This setting
item will appear if【Use Image】was not selected.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the background of the
Input/Display. There are four blinking speeds available to
choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

16.3.16 【Key】
Key is used on a【Base Screen】/【Window Screen】/【Keypad Screen】. It can provide
the functions for the keypad needed for inputting numeric value or text. The 9
functions include【Text】,【ENT】,【CLR】,【BS】,【DEL】,【LEFT】,【RIGHT】,
【Caps Lock】and【CANCEL】.
16.3.16.1 【Setting】
The【Key】【Setting】 page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of each
setting item are listed below:

515
 Figure 304【Setting】Screen of【Key】

Table 185【Setting】Properties of【Key】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Function】 Set the function type of the key.

【Play Audio while Pressing】

Select to play audio when the Key is pressed. An【Audio
Selector】will appear on the right when enabled. The switch
on the right of the【Audio Selector】can be pressed to select
an audio and the switch on the left of the【Audio Selector】
can be pressed to play the audio selected.

【Type】
Input text mode; the text inputted in【Input Text】will be
entered on the【Keypad Screen】after this key is pressed.

【ENT】
The numeric value or text entered on the【Keypad Screen】
will be submitted and the 【Keypad Screen】will be closed
after this key is pressed.

【CLR】
The numeric value or text entered on the 【Keypad Screen】
will be cleared after this key is pressed.

【BS】
A single numeric value or text prior to the position of the
516
 cursor will be deleted after this key is pressed.

【DEL】
A single numeric value or text after the position of the cursor
will be deleted after this key is pressed.

【LEFT】
The cursor will move one space forward after the user presses
this key.

【RIGHT】
The cursor will move one space backward after the user
presses this key.

【Caps Lock】
The case mode of the text input will be changed after this key
is pressed.

【CANCEL】
The【Keypad Screen】will be closed and input will be
cancelled after the user presses this key.

16.3.16.2 【Display】
The【Key】 【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of each setting
item are listed below:

Figure 305【Display】Setting Screen of【Key】

Table 186【Display】Setting Properties of【Key】

Property Description
517
 【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of the text for the key.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the size of the text for the key.

【Position】
Set the position of the text for the key.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the text of the key. There are
four blinking speeds available to choose from: None, Slow,
Medium and Fast.

【Scrolling Text】
Set the scrolling function for the text of the key. There are
four scrolling speeds available to choose from slow to fast.

【Format】
Set the format of the text for the key, including Bold, Italics
and Underline.

【Color】
Set the color of the text for the key.

【Content(Direct Text)】
Set the text of the key; it can be inputted directly or
acquired from the【Text Library】.
【Background】 Background settings for the key. The background of the key
can be edited below if the background setting is selected,
otherwise the background will be transparent.

【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the background of the key. When
this option is checked, an【Image Selector】will appear
asking the user to select an image either from the【Image
Library】or from a file.

【Original Size of Image】

Display the original size of the image.

518
 【Image Position】
Appears after checking【Original Size of Image】, you can
select the position of the picture to be displayed.

【Color】
Set the background color of the key. This setting item will
appear if【Use Image】was not selected.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the background of the key.
There are four blinking speeds available to choose from:
None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Pressing Effect】
Set the pressing effect of the key. There are two effects
available for selection: None and Highlight.

16.3.16.3 【Operation】
The【Key】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of each
setting item are listed below:

Figure 306【Operation】Setting Screen of【Key】

Table 187【Operation】Setting Properties of【Key】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】

519
 Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

16.3.17 【Limit Value Display】

【Limit Value Display】is used on a【Base Screen】/【Window Screen】/【Keypad
Screen】, it can display the maximum or minimum input value allowed for the
current keypad.
The【Limit Value Display】settings page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 307 Setting Dialog of【Limit Value Display】

520
 Table 188 Setting Properties of【Limit Value Display】
Property Description

【Preview】 Previews the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Content】 【Limit Value Type】

Set to display【Max】or【Min】for Limit Value Display.

【7-segment Display】
Set to use the 7-segment display function for the Limit
Value Display object. If this option is selected, related
setting items for setting of style of the 7-segment display
will appear, including outline, filled, flat.

Note: When using the 7-segment display function, only part of the text
(0 / O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 / S, 6, 7, 8, 9 / g, A, B, C, D, E , F, h, H, L, o, P, r, u, U,
Y) can be displayed.

【Font】
Set the font of the text for the Limit Value Display.

【Size】
Set the size of the text for the Limit Value Display.

【Position】
Set the position of the text for the Limit Value Display.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the text of the Limit Value
Display. There are four blinking speeds available to choose
from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Scrolling Text】
Set the scrolling text function for the text of the Limit Value
Display. There are four scrolling speeds available to choose
from slow to fast.

【Format】
Set the format of the text for the Limit Value Display,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.

521
 【Color】
Set the color of the text for the Limit Value Display.
【Border】 Border settings for the Limit Value Display. The border of
the Limit Value Display can be edited below if border setting
is selected, otherwise the Limit Value Display will be
displayed with no border.

【Type】
Set the border types for the Limit Value Display.

【Color/Thickness】
Set the color and thickness for the border of the Limit Value
Display.
【Background】 Background settings for the Limit Value Display. The
background of the Limit Value Display can be edited below if
background setting is selected, otherwise the background
will be transparent.

【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the background of Limit Value
Display. When this option is checked, an【Image Selector】
will appear asking the user to select an image either from
the【Image Library】or from a file.

【Color】
Set the background color of the Limit Value Display. This
setting item will appear if 【Use Image】 was not
selected.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the background of the Limit
Value Display. There are four blinking speeds available to
choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

16.3.18 【Animated Graphic】

【Animated Graphic】can control multiple states. The state, position and size displayed
by【Animated Graphic】can be changed by setting specific control addresses in order
to achieve effects such as moving objects, zooming in, zooming out etc.
16.3.18.1 【Setting】
522
The【Animated Graphic】 【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 308【Setting】Screen of【Animated Graphic】

Table 189【Setting】Properties of【Animated Graphic】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Update】 Provide user can select a suitable speed to get the latest data
under different situation, such as you would like to get the
latest data or adjust the object on the screen to display first,
etc.
Provide three modes:
【once】: update once only when switch to this page or use
the system tag【OP_UPDATE_SCREEN_OBJECTS】, update
once when trigger once a time, it will keep update if the
monitor address is internal address.
【normal】: normal update speed.
【fast】: the fastest update speed.
【Graphic】 【Number of States】
Set the number of states for the animated graphic.

【State Control】
Set the state changing method of the animated graphic;
【Automatic】mode means that the state of the animated
graphic will change regularly.
【Dynamic】mode indicates the state of the dynamic graphic,
523
 which will change according to the value【State Control
Address】.

【Time Interval】
Set the state change time interval for the animated graphic.

【State Control Address】

Sets the time interval for the dynamic graphic state change,
and change according to the register’s value.
【Movement】 【Type】
Set the position changing method of the animated graphic.
【Dynamic】mode means that the position of the animated
graphic will change according to the numeric value saved on
the【Position Control Address】.

【Still】mode means that the position of the animated

graphic will remain the same.

【Polyline】mode means that the position of the animated

graphic will change according to the planning path or position.

【Position Control Address】

Divided into X-axis and Y-axis control addresses. If the
【Type】is【Dynamic】, the user can move the animated
graphic by changing the numeric value saved in the X-axis and
Y-axis control address.

【Move Control】
Display when【Type】select as【Polyline】, main to set the
path or position under【Polyline】mode.

【Along Path】
The animated graph change the position according to the
planning path.

【Along Position】
The animated graph change the position according to the
524
 planning position(point).

【Dynamically Change Position】

The animated graph change the position(point) according to
the【Position Control Address】value, if【Position Control
Address】=0 display point 1, 【Position Control Address】
=5 display point 6.

【Rate】
Animated graph moving speed, the unit is v/s.

【Edit Path】
Will show up this option when【Type】select as【Polyline】,
click to show the figure as below. Provide user to change the
position by modify x-axis and y-axis or adjust the path by
【Insert】and【Remove】.

Except adjust the path by【Edit Path】also can directly edit

on the work space by dragging, table as follow:

- Add point : click the animated graph, move the mouse to

the desired path and will show up a hand sign, click the
left botton of the mouse and move to the desired new
point.

- Adjust point : click the animated graph, move the mouse

to the desired position and will show up a arrow sign,
click the left botton of the mouse and move to the
525
 desired new point.

- Remove point : click the animated graph, move the

mouse to the desired point and will show up a arrow
sign, click the right botton of the mouse to remove the
point.

Click Object Add/Adjust/Remo Result

ve
Add
point

Adjust
point

Remove
point

【Data Type】 Set the data type of the animated graphic; this setting will
appear when the selection of the【Type】for【State
Control】or【Movement】is controlled by specific addresses.

16.3.18.2 【Display】
The【Animated Graphic】 【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting are listed below:

526
 Figure 309【Display】Setting Screen of【Animated Graphic】

Table 190【Display】Setting Properties of【Animated Graphic】

Property Description

【State】 Select the state needed to be edited. 0 and 1 buttons are

provided to enable quick switching between states 0 and 1.
【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the font of the text for the current editing state.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the size of the text for the current editing state.

【Position】
Set the position of the text for the current editing state.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the text of the current editing
state. There are four blinking speeds available to choose
from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Scrolling Text】
Set the scrolling text function for the text of the current
editing state. There are four scrolling speeds available to
choose from slow to fast.

【Format】
Set the format of the text for the current editing state,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the color of the text for the current editing state.

【Copy Attributes to All States】

The text properties for the current editing state is applied to
all states.

【Content (Direct Text)】

Set the text of the current editing state. It can be inputted
directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.

527
 【Copy Contents to All States】
Apply the settings of the text for the current editing state to
all states.
【Background】 Background settings for the current editing state. The
displayed background of the animated graphic can be
edited below if background setting is selected. Otherwise,
the background of the currently editing state will be
transparent.

【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the displayed background of the
current editing state. When this option is checked, an
【Image Selector】will appear asking the user to select an
image either from the【Image Library】or from a file.

【Original Size of Image】

Display the original size of the image.

【Image Position】
Appears after checking【Original Size of Image】, you can
select the position of the picture to be displayed.

【Color】
Set the background color of the current editing state. This
setting item will appear if【Use Image】was not selected.

【Blink】
Set the blinking function for the background of the current
editing state. There are four blinking speeds available to
choose from: None, Slow, Medium and Fast.

【Remove Background】
Choose transparent color through【Choose Color】.

【Rotate】
Rotate the graph, includes CW 0 Degrees, CW 90 Degrees,
CW 180 Degrees and CW 270 Degrees.

【Flip】
Flip the graph, includes No Flip, X-Axis and Y-Axis.

528
 【Copy to All States】
Apply the settings of the background for the current editing
state to all states.
【Border】 Set the object border.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of the border.

【Type】
Set the type of the border.

【Copy to All States】

Apply the settings of the border for the current editing state
to all states.

16.3.18.3 【Operation】
The【Animated Graphic】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 310【Operation】Setting Screen of【Animated Graphic】

Table 191【Operation】Setting Properties of【Animated Graphic】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】

529
 Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

16.3.19 【Rotation Indicator】

【Rotation Indicator】is made up of multiple indicators arranged as a ring. Designers
can set the rotation display mode or speed by the PLC register or HMI internal
address.
16.3.19.1 【Setting】
The【Rotation Indicator】【Setting】 page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 311【Setting】Screen of【Rotation Indicator】

530
 Table 192【Setting】Properties of【Rotation Indicator】
Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Update】 Provide user can select a suitable speed to get the latest
data under different situation, such as you would like to get
the latest data or adjust the object on the screen to display
first, etc.
Provide three modes:
【once】: update once only when switch to this page or use
the system tag【OP_UPDATE_SCREEN_OBJECTS】, update
once when trigger once a time, it will keep update if the
monitor address is internal address.
【normal】: normal update speed.
【fast】: the fastest update speed.
【Number of Set the number of indicators to display in the【Rotation
Lamps】 Indicator】object. There can be 8 to 40 indications in
multiples of 4.
【Degree-0 Set the zero degree position of【Rotation Indicator】which
Position】 is the starting position when rotating, including top, bottom,
left, and right.
【Display Control Set the display control address for the【Rotation
Address】 Indicator】object.
HMI will reads the【Display Control Address】. When the
range of read number is between 0 ~ 7,【Rotation
Indicator】is displayed following the table below. If the
range of reading number is not 0 ~ 7, the【Rotation
Indicator】will retain the previous displayed mode.

Value Display mode

0 All indicators will display OFF state.
HMI does not read the value of【Velocity
Control Address】and【Angle Control
Address】.
1 The【Rotation Indicator】displays the
indicator clockwise to the zero degree
531
 position, following the specified angle of the
【Angle Control Address】.
HMI does not read the value of【Velocity
Control Address】.
2 The【Rotation Indicator】displays the
indicator counterclockwise to the zero degree
position, following the specified angle of the
【Angle Control Address】.
HMI does not read the value of【Velocity
Control Address】.
3 The indicator light rotates clockwise, and its
velocity of the rotation speed depends on the
value of the【Velocity Control Address】.
HMI does not read the value of【Angle
Control Address】.
4 The indicator light rotates counterclockwise,
and its velocity of rotation speed depends on
the value of the【Velocity Control
Address】.
HMI does not read the value of【Angle
Control Address】.
5 The indicator display is set to the degree zero
position.
HMI does not read the value of【Velocity
Control Address】or the【Angle Control
Address】.
6 All indicators will display the ON state.
HMI does not read the value of【Velocity
Control Address】or the【Angle Control
Address】.
7 Flashes all indicators.
The blinking rate changes according to the
value of the【Velocity Control Address】.
HMI does not read the value of【Angle
Control Address】.
【Velocity Control Sets the rotation speed or blinking rate for the【Rotation

532
 Address】 Indicator】object.
If the value of 【Display Control Address】is 3 or 4, its
range is 0 ~ 1000 at a multiple of 10ms.
If the value of【Display Control Address】is 7, its range is 0
~ 100 at a multiple of 100ms.
【Angle Control Sets the angle for the【Rotation Indicator】object.
Address】 Its range is 0 ~ 360. If the value is greater than 360,
【Rotation Indicator】will retain the previously displayed
mode.
【Data Type】 Set the data type of the【Rotation Indicator】.
【Ring】 【Width】
Sets the width of the ring for the【Rotation Indicator】.

【Color】
Sets the color of the ring for the 【Rotation Indicator】.
If the color setting is not checked, it will be displayed as
transparent.

【Border Thickness】
Sets the border width of the ring for the【Rotation
Indicator】.

【Border Color】
Sets the border color of the ring for the【Rotation
Indicator】.
【Lamp】 【Radius】
Sets the radius of the indicator for the【Rotation
Indicator】.

【ON Appearance】
Sets the color or picture of the ON state for the 【Rotation
Indicator】.
If you check the “Use Image” option, the【Image Selector】
will appear for users to choose an image from the【Image
Library】or from a file.

533
 【OFF Appearance】
Sets the color or picture of the OFF state for the【Rotation
Indicator】.
If you check the “Use Image” option, the【Image Selector】
will appear for users to choose an image from【Image
Library】 or from a file.

【Blink Appearance】
Sets the color or picture of the flashing state for the
【Rotation Indicator】. If you check the “Use Image” option,
the 【Image Selector】will appear for users to choose an
image from【Image Library】 or from a file.

【Border Thickness】
Sets the border width of the lamp for the【Rotation
Indicator】.

【Border Color】
Sets the border color of the lamp for the【Rotation
Indicator】.

16.3.19.2 【Operation】
The【Rotation Indicator】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 312【Operation】Screen of【Rotation Indicator】

534
 Table 193【Operation】Properties of【Rotation Indicator】
Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

16.3.20 【Gif Display】

【Gif Display】can display .gif files as a dynamic image.

16.3.20.1 【Setting】
The【Gif Display】【Setting】 page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

535
 Figure 313 【Setting】Screen of【GIF Display】

Table 194【Setting】Properties of【GIF Display】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Basic】 【Open FIle】

Select a GIF format image on the computer.

【Size】
Select the size of the GIF image.

【Original Size】
Set the image to be its original size. The image size cannot
be changed in the work space. If this option is not changed,
the size is adjustable.

【Fixed Ratio】
The image size can be adjusted but its original aspect ratio
will be maintained.
【Animation】 【Enable by Bit】
Set whether the GIF image is dynamically controlled by this
bit.

536
 【DynamicSpeed】
Set whether the change speed of the GIF dynamic graph is
controlled by the register

【Speed】
Adjust the playback speed of the GIF. When
【DynamicSpeed】is unchecked, you can set the constant
value of the change dpeed, when check【DynamicSpeed】,
you can set register in this field.
【Dynamic The GIF with the current settings applied is previewed here.

Preview】

16.3.20.2 【Operation】
The【GIF Display】【Operation】page is a shown in the figure below. Each option is
explained.

Figure 314【Operations】Screen of【GIF Display】

Table 195【Operation】Properties of【GIF Display】

Property Description

【Visibility Control the visibility of the object. The object can be controlled
by a bit or the user level.
Control】
【Enabled by Bit】
Set to control the visibility using a bit.

【Address】
Specify the address of the bit that controls the object.

537
 【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Set to control the visibility using the user login level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

16.3.21 【Historic Trend】

【Historic Trend】is a curve object used to read the data in the Recording Buffer of
the【Data Logger】, in which the X value is time and the Y value is the data captured
by the【Data Logger】. Its functions are as follows:
➢ View the data of the【Data Logger】.
➢ Pause or start updating the data of the【Data Logger】through the【Sub
Switch】, and clear the displayed data. It can also zoom or move the
figure.

16.3.21.1 【General】

【Historic Trend】【General】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of each

setting is as follows :

538
 Figure 315【General】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】

Table 196【General】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Basic】 【Data Log ID】

Select the ID of the Data Log to track.

【Source】
Select the【Historic Trend】source:【Data Log】or【File】.

【Data Log】
Use【Data Log】as the source of the data. Refer to Chapter 7
-Data Log.

【File】
Use an exported CSV or TXT file as the source of the data.
When this option is selected, set the【File Address】. This
register value corresponds to the position of the file in a path.
For example, if the the register was R50, a 0 in R50
corresponds to the first file in the path, 1 corresponds to the
second, and so on.

539
 【Mode】
Select the【Historic Trend】display mode: 【Time Mode】
or【Index Mode】.

【Time Mode】
Set the X-axis of the【Historic Trend】as time.

【Index Mode】
Set the X-axis of the【Historic Trend】as a specified index.

【Two Y Axes Mode】

Check whether to display two Y-axes on the graph.

【Refresh data automatically】

When source choose as【file】will appear this option, check
this option, it will automatically refresh when new data
comes.
【Global Display Represents the range that can be displayed.

Range】
【Min】
Set the minimum Global Range value for the Y-axis.

【Max】
Set the maximum Global Range value for the Y-axis.

Note: The【Global Display Range】represents the range that can be

displayed. If【Max】is 100 and【Min】is 0, data exceeding this range
will not be able to be displayed.

【Display Precision】
Set the number of decimal places represented for Y-axis
values.

【X Axis (Index Points) Max】

If the【Index Mode】is set to【Index Mode】the maximum
X-axis index point can be selected.

16.3.21.2 【Curve】
540
【Historic Trend】【Curve】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of each
setting is as follows :

Figure 316【Curve】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】

Table 197【Curve】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】

Property Description

【Curve】 【No. of Curve】

Select the number of curves. The maximum curve lines are
up to 32.

【Visibility Mask】
Select whether to use visibility mask to control the visibility
of the each curve. While selecting, use should assign the
32bit UINT register as the mask, in which the 0 bit control
the display of the curve 0, and so on.

【Display Range】
Used to set the display mode for the display range of the
curve. It is usually one of the two following types:
➢ 【Global】
The display ranges of all the curves are identical to
the【Global Display Range】.
➢ 【Individual】
The display range of all the curves can be different
from the【Global Display Range】.

Explanation: When to set【Display Range】as【Individual】- When

the value ranges of the number of curves are different, for example
when the value range of curve a is 0~10, and curve b is 0~1000, it can
541
 be discovered that the degree of changes for curve a will be difficult to
observe if the two curves are placed in the same figure. This is when
【Display Range】can be set as【Individual】and the display range of
each curve can be defined. The system will automatically zoom the
value of the curves according to the value in【Global Display Range】.
Take this case for example, if the value in【Global Display Range】is
0~100, when the value of curve a is 5, the system will zoom it to 50
and when the value of curve b is 500, the system will also zoom it into
50, and so on.

Another time to use-

When【Global Display Range】is set to 0~100,【Display Precision】is
set to 1, then the axis will display 0.0~100.0 at this time, and the value
of curve a is 0~1000. When the curve A value is 500, it will be It is
scaled to 50.0.

The curve property table is described below:

【Y Source】
Set the source for the Y value of the curve; the selection of
the source depends on the setting of the【Data Logger】.

【Display Name】
Set the name of the curve.

【Y Max】
Set the maximum Individual Display Range value for the Y
value of the curve, this option will appear if【Display
Range】is【Individual】..

【Y Min】
Set the minimum Individual Display Range value for the Y
value of the curve, this option will appear if【Display
Range】is【Individual】..

【Cursor Display】
Four options are available: None, Scale Data, Original Data,
and Both. For example, if the【Global Display Range】was
set to 0~100, the【Display Range】was set to individual,
【Y Max】is set to 200 and【Y Min】is set to 0, when Y is
60, the cursor is set such that the scaled value of 30 is
displayed. If the【Cursor Display】is set to orginal, the
original value of 60 is displayed.
542
 【Y Axis】
If【Two Y Axes Mode】is selected, the setting is used to
decide the curve’s reference y-axis.

【Line Color】
Set the line color of the curve.

【Line Type】
Set the line type of curve.

【Line Width】
Set the curve width.

【Symbol】
Check whether to display curve’s symbol.

【Symbol Color】
Set the symbol color.

【Symbol Type】
Set the symbol type.

【Fill】
Check whether to fill up the curve.

【Fill Color】
Set the fill color.

16.3.21.3 【Advanced Curve】

【Historic Trend】【Advanced Curve】setting paging as shown below, the meaning
of each setting is as follows :

543
 Figure 317【Advanced Curve】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】

Table 198【Advanced Curve】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】

Property Description

【Advnaced Curve Select to enable the advanced curve display mode.

Display Mode】
【Mode】
There are four filter modes for setting the curve display,
which are:
【Single Value Filter Mode (>=)】Display all curves greater
than or equal to the filtered value.
【Single Value Filter Mode (>)】Display all curves greater
than the filtered value.
【Single Value Filter Mode (<)】Display all curves less than
the filtered value.
【Single Value Filter Mode (<=)】Display all curves less
than or equal to the filtered value.

The following is an example:

Select the mode【Single Value Filter Mode (>=)】and set
this value to 30.

【Filter Value】 Set the filter value of the filter mode.

【Dynamic Range(32bit-FLOAT)】
Check whether the filter value can be changed according
to the content of the specified address. The data type is
32-bit floating point.

【Y Axis (Left)】
Set the filter value of the left Y axis.

【Y Axis (Right)】
Set the right Y-axis filter value (this setting can only be set
when【Two Y Axes Mode】is checked).

544
16.3.21.4 【Display】
【Historic Trend】【Display】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of each
setting is as follows :

Figure 318【Display】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】

Table 199【Display】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】

Property Description

【Border】 Select to display the border.

【Color】
Set the color of the border.

【Type】
Set the border type.
【Background】 Select to display the background.
【Color】
Set the color of the background.
【Graph Select to display the graph background.
【Color】
Background】
Set the color of the graph background.
【Cursor】 Select to display the cursor.
【Color】
Set the color of the cursor.

【Show Cursor and Curve Value】【Display】

Set the visibility of cursor values. If【Always】is set, the
cursor and curve values are always shown. If【Controlled

545
 by Bit】is selected, the visibility of the values depends on
a specified bit.

【Show Curve Name】【Display】

Set the visibility of the curve name. If【Always】is set, the
curve name is always shown. If【Controlled by Bit】 is
selected, the visibility of the curve name depends on the
specified bit.

【Cursor Original Address (Raw Data)】

Display the original value where the cursor place.

【Font】
Set the font and size of cursor values.

【Background】
Set the background color of the cursor values.

【Text】
Set the text color of the cursor values.

【Opacity】
Set the background opacity of the cursor values.

16.3.21.5 【Axis】
【Historic Trend】【Axis】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of each
setting is as follows :

546
 Figure 319【Axis】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】

Table 200【Axis】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】

Property Description

【Common】 【Axis Color】

Set the color of the axis.
【Time Range】 Set the time range of the X-axis
(Time Mode) 【Day】
Set the number of days.

【Hour】
Set the number of hours.

【Min.】
Set the number of minutes.

【Sec.】
Set the number of seconds.
【X-axis (Time)】 【Number of Major Division】
Sets the number of major divisions on the X-axis.

【Number of Sub Division】

Sets the number of sub divisions on the X-axis.

【Show Tick】
Select to display the ticks.

【Show Value】(Index Mode)

Select to display the value.

【Show Date】
Select to display the date on the X-axis, and sets the
display format of the date.

【Show Time】
Select to display the time on the X-axis, and sets the
display format of the time.

【Value/Tick Color】
Set the colors of the time and ticks.

547
 【Show Grid】
Select to display vertical gridlines, and sets the color of the
gridlines.
【Y-axis】 【Number of Major Division】
【Division】 Set the number of major divisions on the Y-axis.

【Number of Sub Division】

Set the number of sub divisions on the Y-axis.

【Show Tick】
Select to display the ticks on the Y-axis.

【Show Value】
Select to display the values on the Y-axis.

【Value/Tick Color】
Set the colors of the values and ticks.

【Show Grid】
Select whether to display horizontal gridlines, and sets the
color of the gridlines.
【Y-axis】 【Position】
【Position】 Set the Y-axis position:【Left】or【Right】

16.3.21.6 【Advanced】
【Historic Trend】【Advanced】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of each
setting is as follows :

548
 Figure 320【Advanced】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】

Table 201【Advanced】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】

Property Description

【Advanced】 【Start/Stop State Address】

Set the【Data Block Graph】will start/stop at the specified
address. Only the display unit’s internal memory is
supported.
A value of 0 specifies the start state. A value of 1 specifies
the stop state.

【The initial state is stopped】

Set the initial state of of the data to stop.

【Use X-Axis Scroll Bar】

Set to enable the X-axis scroll bar functionality. Allows for
easy viewing of the historic trend curve.
【Register Control】 【X Axis Scale】
X axis scale numbers can be specified by register, it will
appear register setting below after checked, and will
display the number of consecutive occupancy registers,
this register is in 16 Bit-UINT format, table as below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Major Division
1 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Sub Division

【Y Axis Scale】
Y axis scale numbers can be specified by register, it will
549
 appear register setting below after checked, and will
display the number of consecutive occupancy registers,
this register is in 16 Bit-UINT format, table as below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Major Division
1 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Sub Division

【X Axis Range】
X axis range can be specified by register, it will appear
register setting below after checked, and will display the
number of consecutive occupancy registers, table as
below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 & 1 Maximum of 32Bit-FLOAT x Greater
x axis. than the
minimum
value.

【Y Axis Range】
Y axis range can be specified by register, it will appear
register setting below after checked, and will display the
number of consecutive occupancy registers, table as
below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 & 1 The maximum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
of the Y-axis
on the left
side of the
graph
2 & 3 The minimum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
of the Y-axis
on the left
side of the
graph
4 Curve left side 16Bit-UINT 0 5
of the Y-axis
value of the
decimal point
position
5 & 6 The maximum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
of the Y-axis
on the right
side of the
graph
550
 7&8 The minimum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
of the Y-axis
on the right
side of the
graph
9 Curve right 16Bit-UINT 0 5
side of the Y-
axis value of
the decimal
point position

Note: maximum value should greater than minimum

value.

【Curves】
If curve Y-axis display range use【individual】, check this
option, each of the Y-axis curve can be specified by
register, and will display the number of consecutive
occupancy registers, table as below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 & 1 Maximum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
value of curve
0
2 & 3 Minimum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
value of curve
0
4 & 5 Maximum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
value of curve
1
6 & 7 Minimum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
value of curve
1
8 & 9 Maximum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
value of curve
2
10 & Minimum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
11 value of curve
2
124 & Maximum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
125 value of curve
31
126 & Minimum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
127 value of curve
31

Note: maximum value should greater than minimum

551
 value.

16.3.21.7 【Sub Switch】

【Historic Trend】【Sub Switch】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 321【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】

Table 202【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】

Property Description

【Sub Switch List】 【Sub Switch List】that can be selected for【Historic

Trend】. Sub switches can be enabled after selecting them.
Settings for the appearance of the selected sub switches
will also appear on the right.

When different sub switches are selected from the list, the
appearance settings to the right will be updated according
to the sub switches selected.

In which the Sub Switches are divided into:

➢ 【Start】-Start updating the curve to display the
data captured by the 【Data Logger】on the
curve.
➢ 【Stop】-Stop updating the curve; which means
stop updating the data captured by the【Data
Logger】.

552
 ➢ 【Clear】-Clear the curve, but the data recorded in
the【Data Logger】 will be retained.
➢ 【Hor. Zoom In】—Horizontal zoom in.
➢ 【Hor. Zoom Out】—Horizontal zoom out.
➢ 【Ver. Zoom In】—Vertical zoom in.
➢ 【Ver. Zoom Out】—Vertical zoom out.
➢ 【Move Left】—Move Left.
➢ 【Move Right】—Move Right.
➢ 【Move Up】—Move Up.
➢ 【Move Down】—Move Down.
➢ 【Search】—Perform a search of a time curve.
When pressed a dialog window appears, allowing a
selection of【Scope】or a【single point search】.

➢ 【Load】—If the source of the【Historic Trend】is

【File】, a dialog window will appear, displaying
the file source.
【Display】【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the text font of the sub switch currently selected.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the text size of the sub switch currently selected.

【Position】
Set the text position of the sub switch currently selected.

【Format】
Set the text format of the sub switch currently selected,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the text color of the sub switch currently selected.

【Content(Direct Text)】
Set the text of the sub switch currently selected.
553
 【Display】 Set the background of the sub switch currently selected.
Check it to activate background settings, and the displayed
【Background】 background of the sub switch currently selected can be
edited below. If this option is not checked, the background
will be transparent.

【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the displayed background of the sub
switch currently selected. When this option is checked,
image selection settings will appear asking the user to select
an image either from the【Image Library】or from a file.

【Background Color】
Set the background color of the sub switch currently
selected. This setting will appear if【Use Image】was not
selected.
【Display】【while 【Play Audio】
Pressing】 Select to play audio when the sub switch is pressed. An
【Audio Selector】will appear on the right when enabled.
The switch on the right of the【Audio Selector】can be
pressed to select an audio and the switch on the left of the
【Audio Selector】can be pressed to play the audio
selected.

【Pressing Effect】
Set the pressing effect of the sub switch currently selected.
There are two effects available for selection:【None】and
【Highlight】.
【Advanced】 Operation control of sub switch, it can enabled by bit or
security.
【Operation
【Enable by Bit】
Control】 Check whether the sub switch operation is controlled by a
bit

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】

554
 Set the address of the sub switch operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
the object can be controlled, when false not the object can
not be controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’,
‘<=’.

【Enable by Security】
Select the sub switch whether controlled by user level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

【Hold Time】
Check whether the operation is controlled by hold time.
Hold time can be divided into two kinds:
➢ 【Press On】: press directly, according to the【Min.
Hold Time】to confirm whether the operation is
executed.
➢ 【Double Press】: quickly double press to confirm
whether the operation is executed.

【Operator Confirm】
Check whether show comfirmation message window after
checking the operation.

【Max. Waiting Time】

When the confirmation message window is displayed, If the
user does not reply within this time, the system will close
the confirmation message window and cancel this operation

555
16.3.21.8 【Operation】
【Historic Trend】【Operation】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of each
setting is as follows :

Figure 322【Operation】Setting Screen of【Historic Trend】

Table 203【Operation】Setting Properties of【Historic Trend】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object can be controlled by a specific

Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
556
 logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.
Log】 It can also edit operation messages in which the message can
be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.

16.3.22 【Historic XY Scatter】

【Historic XY Scatter】 is a curve object used to read the【Recording Buffer】data
of the【Data Log】, in which the X/Y values are both data captured by the【Data
Log】. Its main functions are as follows:
➢ View the Recording Buffer data of the【Data Log】.
➢ Pause or start updating the data of the 【Data Log】through the【Sub
Switch】and clear the displayed data.

16.3.22.1 【General】
【Historic XY Scatter】【General】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 323【General】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】

Table 204【General】Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Basic】 【Data Log ID】

557
 Set the ID of the Data Log group to display.

【Global Display Set the range that can be displayed.

【Max】
Range】
Set the maximum Global Range value for the X-axis/Y-axis.

【Min】
Set the minimum Global Range value for the X-axis/Y-axis.

Note: The【Global Display Range】represents the range that can be

displayed. If【Max】is 100 and【Min】is 0, data exceeding this range
will not be able to be displayed.

【Display Precision】
Set the number of decimal places represented for X/Y-axis
values.

16.3.22.2 【Curve】
【Historic XY Scatter】【Curve】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of each
setting is as follows :

Figure 324【Curve】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】

Table 205【Curve】 Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】

Property Description

【Curve】 【No. of Curve】

Select the number of curves up to a maximum of 32.

558
 【Visibility Mask】
Select whether to use visibility mask to control the visibility
of the each curve. While selecting, use should assign the
32bit UINT register as the mask, in which the 0 bit control
the display of the curve 0, and so on.

【Display Range】
Used to set the display mode for the display range of the
curve. It is usually one of the two following types:
➢ 【Global】
The display ranges of all the curves are identical to
the【Global Display Range】.
➢ 【Individual】
The display range of all the curves can be different
from the【Global Display Range】.

Explanation: When to set【Display Range】as【Individual】-

Whenthe value ranges of the number of curves are different, for
example when the value range of curve a is 0~10, and curve b is
0~1000, it can be discovered that the degree of changes for curve a
will be difficult to observe if the two curves are placed in the same
figure. This is when【Display Range】can be set as【Individual】and
the display range of each curve can be defined. The system will
automatically zoom the value of the curves according to the value in
【Global Display Range】. Take this case for example, if the value in
【Global Display Range】is 0~100, when the value of curve a is 5, the
system will zoom it to 50 and when the value of curve b is 500, the
system will also zoom it into 50, and so on.

【X/Y Source】
Set the source for the X/Y valuesX/ of the curve; the
selection of the source depends on the setting of the
【Data Logger】.

【Display Name】
Set the name of the curve.

【X/Y Max】
Set the maximum Individual Display Range value for the X/Y
value of the curve, this option will appear if【Display
Range】is【Individual】.

559
 【X/Y Min】
Set the minimum Individual Display Range value for the Y
value of the curve, this option will appear if【Display
Range】is【Individual】.

【Line】
Set to show the curve.

【Line Color】
Set the line color of the curve.

【Line Type】
Set the line type of curve.

【Line Width】
Set the curve width.

【Symbol】
Select to display the curve symbols.

【Symbol Color】
Set the color of the symbols.

【Symbol Type】
Set the symbol type.

【Fill】
Check whether to fill up the curve.

【Fill Type】
Set the fill type.

【Fill Color】
Set the fill color.

16.3.22.3 【Display】
【Historic XY Scatter】【Display】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :
560
 Figure 325【Display】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】

Table 206【Display】Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】

Property Description

【Border】 Select to display the border.

【Color】
Set the color of the border.

【Type】
Set the border type.
【Background】 Select to display the background.
【Color】
Set the color of the background.
【Graph Select to display the graph background.
【Color】
Background】
Set the color of the graph background.
【Cursor】 Select to display the cursor.
【Color】
Set the color of the cursor.

【Show Cursor Value】

Select to display the cursor value.

【Show Cursor Value】【Display】

Set the visibility of cursor values. If【Always】is set, the
cursor values are always shown. If【Controlled by Bit】is
selected, the visibility of cursor values depends on the
specified bit.
561
 【Show Curve Name】
Select to display the curve name.

【Show Curve Name】【Display】

Set the visibility of the curve name. If【Always】is set, the
curve name is always shown. If【Controlled by Bit】 is
selected, the visibility of curve name depends on the
specified bit.

【Font】
Set the font type and size of cursor values.

【Background】
Set the background color of the cursor values.

【Text】
Set the text color of the cursor values.

【Opacity】
Set the background opacity of the cursor values.

16.3.22.4 【Axis】
【Historic XY Scatter】【Axis】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of each
setting is as follows :

Figure 326【Axis】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】

Table 207【Axis】Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】

Property Description

【Common】 【Axis Color】

Set the color of the axis.
562
 【X-axis】 【Number of Major Division】
【Division】 Set the number of major divisions of the X-axis.

【Number of Sub Division】

Set the number of sub divisions of the X-axis.

【Show Tick】
Select to display the ticks on the X-axis.

【Show Value】
Select to display the values on the X-axis.

【Value/Tick Color】
Set the color of the values and ticks.

【Show Grid】
Select to display vertical gridlines and set the color of the
gridlines.
【Y-axis】 【Number of Major Division】
【Division】 Set the number of major divisions of the Y-axis.

【Number of Sub Division】

Set the number of sub divisions of the Y-axis.

【Show Tick】
Select to display the ticks on the Y-axis.

【Show Value】
Select to display the values on the Y-axis.

【Value/Tick Color】
Set the color of the values and ticks.

【Show Grid】
Select to display horizontal gridlines, and set the color of
the gridlines.

16.3.22.5 【Advanced】
【Historic XY Scatter】【Advanced】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :
563
 Figure 327【Advanced】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】

Table 208【Advanced】Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】

Property Description

【Advanced】 【Start/Stop State Address】

Set such that the【Data Block Graph】will start/stop at
the specified address. Only the display unit’s internal
memory is supported.
A value of 0 specifies the start state. A value of 1 specifies
the stop state.

【The initial state is stopped】

Set the initial state of of the data to stop.
【Register Control】 【X Axis Scale】
X axis scale numbers can be specified by register, it will
appear register setting below after checked, and will
display the number of consecutive occupancy registers,
this register is in 16 Bit-UINT format, table as below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Major Division
1 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Sub Division

【Y Axis Scale】
Y axis scale numbers can be specified by register, it will
appear register setting below after checked, and will
display the number of consecutive occupancy registers,
this register is in 16 Bit-UINT format, table as below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Major Division
564
 1 Number of 16Bit-UINT 1 30
Sub Division

【X Axis Range】
X axis range can be specified by register, it will appear
register setting below after checked, and will display the
number of consecutive occupancy registers, table as
below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 & 1 Maximum of x 32Bit-FLOAT x x
axis.
2 & 3 Minimum of x 32Bit-FLOAT x x
axis.
4 The decimal 16Bit-UINT 0 5
point position
of the X axis
value

Note: maximum value should bigger than minimum

value.

【Y Axis Range】
Y axis range can be specified by register, it will appear
register setting below after checked, and will display the
number of consecutive occupancy registers, table as
below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 & 1 The maximum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
of the Y-axis
on the left
side of the
graph
2 & 3 The minimum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
of the Y-axis
on the left
side of the
graph
4 Curve left side 16Bit-UINT 0 5
of the Y-axis
value of the
decimal point
position
5 & 6 The maximum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
of the Y-axis
on the right
side of the
565
 graph
7 & 8 The minimum 32Bit-FLOAT x x
of the Y-axis
on the right
side of the
graph
9 Curve right 16Bit-UINT 0 5
side of the Y-
axis value of
the decimal
point position
Note: maximum value should bigger than minimum
value.

【Curves】
If curve Y-axis display range use【individual】, check this
option, each of the Y-axis curve can be specified by
register, and will display the number of consecutive
occupancy registers, table as below.
Word Description Data Type Min. Max.
0 & 1 X-axis 32Bit-FLOAT x x
maximum
value of curve
0.
2 & 3 X-axis 32Bit-FLOAT x x
minimum
value of curve
0.
4 & 5 Y-axis 32Bit-FLOAT x x
maximum
value of curve
0.
6 & 7 Y-axis 32Bit-FLOAT x x
minimum
value of curve
0.
8 & 9 X-axis 32Bit-FLOAT x x
maximum of
curve 1.
10 & X-axis 32Bit-FLOAT x x
11 minimum of
curve 1.
12 & Y-axis 32Bit-FLOAT x x
13 maximum
value of curve
1.
566
 14 & Y-axis 32Bit-FLOAT x x
15 minimum
value of curve
1.
… … 32Bit-FLOAT x x
248 & X-axis 32Bit-FLOAT x x
249 maximum of
curve 31.
250 & X-axis 32Bit-FLOAT x x
251 minimum of
curve 31.
252 & Y-axis 32Bit-FLOAT x x
253 maximum
value of curve
31.
254 & Y-axis 32Bit-FLOAT x x
255 minimum
value of curve
31.
Note: maximum value should bigger than minimum
value.

16.3.22.6 【Sub Switch】

【Historic XY Scatter】【Sub Switch】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 328【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】

Table 209【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】

Property Description

567
 【Sub Switch List】 【Sub Switch List】that can be selected for【Historic XY
Scatter】. Sub switches can be enabled after selecting
them. Settings for the appearance of the selected sub
switches will also appear on the right.

When different sub switches are selected from the list, the
appearance settings to the right will be updated according
to the sub switches selected.

In which the【Sub Switches】are divided into:

➢ 【Start】—Start updating curve and displays the
data captured by 【Data Log】on the curve.
➢ 【Stop】—Stop updating curve, which means stop
updating the data captured by【Data Log】.
➢ 【Clear】—Clear the curve, but the data recorded
in 【Data Log】will be preserved.
➢ 【Hor. Zoom In】—Horizontal zoom in.
➢ 【Hor. Zoom Out】—Horizontal zoom out.
➢ 【Ver. Zoom In】—Vertical zoom in.
➢ 【Ver. Zoom Out】—Vertical zoom out.
➢ 【Move Left】—Move Left.
➢ 【Move Right】—Move Right.
➢ 【Move Up】—Move Up.
➢ 【Move Down】—Move Down.
【Display】【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the text font of the sub switch currently selected.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the text size of the sub switch currently selected.

【Position】
Set the text position of the sub switch currently selected.

【Format】
Set the text format of the sub switch currently selected,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
568
 Set the text color of the sub switch currently selected.

【Content(Direct Text)】
Set the text of the sub switch currently selected.
【Display】 Set the background of the sub switch currently selected.
Check it to activate background settings, and the displayed
【Background】 background of the sub switch currently selected can be
edited below. If this option is not checked, the background
will be transparent.

【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the displayed background of the sub
switch currently selected. When this option is checked, an
image selection setting item will appear asking the user to
select an image either from the【Image Library】or from a
file.

【Background Color】
Set the displayed background color of the sub switch
currently selected. This setting item will appear if【Use
Image】was not selected.
【Display】【while 【Play Audio】
Pressing】 Select to play audio when the sub switch is pressed. An
【Audio Selector】will appear on the right when enabled.
The switch on the right of the【Audio Selector】can be
pressed to select an audio and the switch on the left of the
【Audio Selector】can be pressed to play the audio
selected.

【Pressing Effect】
Set the pressing effect of the sub switch currently selected.
There are two effects available for selection:【None】and
【Highlight】.
【Advanced】 Operation control of sub switch, it can enabled by bit or
security.
【Operation
【Enable by Bit】
Control】 Check whether the sub switch operation is controlled by a
bit

【Show Disabled Sign】

569
 Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the sub switch operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
the object can be controlled, when false not the object can
not be controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’,
‘<=’.

【Enable by Security】
Select the sub switch whether controlled by user level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

【Hold Time】
Check whether the operation is controlled by hold time.
Hold time can be divided into two kinds:
➢ 【Press On】: press directly, according to the【Min.
Hold Time】to confirm whether the operation is
executed.
➢ 【Double Press】: quickly double press to confirm
whether the operation is executed.

【Operator Confirm】
Check whether show comfirmation message window after
checking the operation.

570
 【Max. Waiting Time】
When the confirmation message window is displayed, If the
user does not reply within this time, the system will close
the confirmation message window and cancel this operation

16.3.22.7 【Operation】
【Historic XY Scatter】【Operation】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 329【Operation】Setting Screen of【Historic XY Scatter】

Table 210【Operation】Setting Properties of【Historic XY Scatter】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object can be controlled by a specific

Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
571
 show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Select to enable the 【Operation Log】 of the object.
Log】 It can also edit operation messages in which the message can
be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.

16.3.23 【Historic Data Table】

【Historic Data Table】 is a table object used the read the Recording Buffer data of
the【Data Log】. Its main functions are as follows:
➢ View the Recording Buffer data of the【Data Log】.
➢ Pause or start updating the data of the 【Data Log】through the【Sub
Switch】, and clear the displayed data.

16.3.23.1 【General】
【Historic Data Table】【General】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

572
 Figure 330【General】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Table】

Table 211【General】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Table】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Basic】 【Data Log ID】

Set the ID of the Data Log group to display.

【Source】
Set the source from the【Data Log】
or【File】.

【Data Log】
Use【Data Log】as the source of the data. Refer to
Chapter 7 -Data Log.

【File】
Display the CSV or TXT file exported by【Data Log】, or
display the CSV or TXT file with the same format content

573
 as【Data Log ID】. After clicking the file, the
corresponding address setting will appear at the back.
This address will mainly Corresponding file order, for
example, this address is set to R25, and there are 3 files
under datalog\Group_1. At this time, R25 will correspond
to the following values according to the order.

If one more file is added at this time, there are 4 files in

total, and the corresponding values of R25 in this order
will be as shown below.

So when R25 changes its content value, it also changes its

displayed file.

【Fresh data automatically】

Set under the【File】mode whether to automatically
update the table display based on the stored data.
【Header】 Select to display the header.
【Font】
Set the font of the header.

【Size】
Set the size of the header.

【Color】
Set the color of the header.

【Background】
Set the background color of the header.
【Additional Info.】 【Show Index】
Select to display the index, and set its display color.

【Show Date】
Select to display the date, and set its display color and
format.

【Show Time】

574
 Select to display the time, and set its display color and
format.
【Border】 Select to display the border.
【Type】
Set the border type.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of the border.
【Grid/Background】 【Grid】
Set the color of the grid.

【Horizontal】
Select to display horizontal gridlines.

【Vertical】
Select to display vertical gridlines.

【Background】
Set the color of the background.
【Data】 【Show Oldest Data First】
Set whether to display the oldest data in the top of the
form, if unchech then the oldest data will in the bottom of
the form.

【Font】
Set the font of the data.

【Size】
Set the size of the data.

【Customize Height】
Users can customize the field height.

16.3.23.2 【Data Items】

【Historic Data Table】【Data Items】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

575
 Figure 331【Data Items】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Table】

Table 212【Data Items】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Table】

Property Description

【Set When this button is pressed, the software calculates the

required column width at the time of planning and sets its field
Recommended
width
Width to All
Columns】
【Header】 【Index】
Edit the 【Index】entry of the header text. The text can be
entered directly or selected from the text library, the width of
the entry can be adjusted by incrementing or decrementing the
pixel count.

【Date】
Edit the 【Date】entry of the header text. The text can be
entered directly or selected from the text library, the width of
the entry can be adjusted by incrementing or decrementing the
pixel count.

【Time】
Edit the 【Time】entry of the header text. The text can be
entered directly or selected from the text library, the width of
the entry can be adjusted by incrementing or decrementing the
pixel count.
【Data Items】 【Copy the Selected Item Settings to Others】
This button will be enabled when an entire row is selected.
Users can use this button to copy the settings of the selected
item into other items. This simplifies the setting process for
the user.

【Up】
576
 This button will be enabled when an entire row is selected;
users can use this button to change the order of the item.

【Down】
This button will be enabled when an entire row is selected;
users can use this button to change the order of the item.

The items within the table are determined by the【Data

Log】, in which the item settings include:
➢ 【Display】
Set the visibility of this item.
➢ 【Customized】
The color of the item.
➢ 【Alignment】
The alignment of the item.
➢ 【Name】
This is used to view the names set by the【Data
Log】and cannot be set. Please go to the settings
page of the【Data Log】to change the name of the
item.
➢ 【Width】
Column width setting.

16.3.23.3 【Sub Switch】

【Historic Data Table】【Sub Switch】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

577
 Figure 332【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Table】

Table 213【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Table】

Property Description

【Sub Switch List】 【Sub Switch List】that can be selected for【Historic Data
Table】. Sub switches can be enabled after selecting them.
Settings for the appearance of the selected sub switches will
also appear on the right.

When different sub switches are selected from the list, the
appearance settings to the right will be updated according
to the sub switches selected.

In which the【Sub Switches】are divided into:

➢ 【Auto Scroll】- Auto Scroll ON/OFF; this is an
inverted switch. When new data is updated to the
【Historic Data Table】, if the Auto Scroll switch is
ON, the table will automatically scroll to the
location of the newest data, otherwise the table
will not scroll automatically.
➢ 【Save】- Save all data in 【Data Log】. The
saving method depends on the settings of 【Data
Log】.
➢ 【Load】- When【Source】is【File】, pressing
this button will display the following dialog
window. To allow the operator to choose which
files in the【Historic Data Table】to display. These
files can be from within the HMI, Micro SD card, or
USB.

If import file format is not the same, the following

dialog window will appear.

578
 If file import is successful, the following dialog
window will appear.

➢ 【Search】- Allows the operator to search the data

in【Historic Data Table】. Pressing this button will
display following dialog windowand allows the
operator to enter the date and time to search the
data in the【Historic Data Table】.

After the search, the【Historic Data Table】will

display the line and invert the colors of the result.

If searched data is not found in the【Historic Data

Table】, the following dialog window will appear.

【Display】【Text】 【Direct Text Font】

Set the font of the sub switch currently selected.

579
 【Direct Text Size】
Set the text size of the sub switch currently selected.

【Position】
Set the text position of the sub switch currently selected.

【Format】
Set the text format of the sub switch currently selected,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the text color of the sub switch currently selected.

【Content(Direct Text)】
Set the text of the sub switch currently selected.
【Display】 Set the background of the sub switch currently selected.
Check it to activate background settings, and the displayed
【Background】 background of the sub switch currently selected can be
edited below. If this option is not checked, the background
will be transparent.

【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the displayed background of the sub
switch currently selected. When this option is checked, an
image selection setting item will appear asking the user to
select an image either from the【Image Library】or from a
file.

【Background Color】
Set the background color of the sub switch currently
selected. This setting will appear if 【Use Image】was not
selected.
【Display】【while 【Play Audio】
Pressing】 Select to play audio when the sub switch is pressed. An
【Audio Selector】will appear on the right when enabled.
The switch on the right of the【Audio Selector】can be
pressed to select an audio and the switch on the left of the
【Audio Selector】can be pressed to play the audio
selected.

【Pressing Effect】
580
 Set the pressing effect of the sub switch currently selected.
There are two effects available for selection:【None】and
【Highlight】.
【Advanced】 Operation control of sub switch, it can enabled by bit or
security.
【Operation
【Enable by Bit】
Control】 Check whether the sub switch operation is controlled by a
bit

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the sub switch operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
the object can be controlled, when false not the object can
not be controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’,
‘<=’.

【Enable by Security】
Select the sub switch whether controlled by user level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

【Hold Time】
Check whether the operation is controlled by hold time.
Hold time can be divided into two kinds:
581
 ➢ 【Press On】: press directly, according to the【Min.
Hold Time】to confirm whether the operation is
executed.
➢ 【Double Press】: quickly double press to confirm
whether the operation is executed.

【Operator Confirm】
Check whether show comfirmation message window after
checking the operation.

【Max. Waiting Time】

When the confirmation message window is displayed, If the
user does not reply within this time, the system will close
the confirmation message window and cancel this operation

16.3.23.4 【Operation】
【Historic Data Table】【Operation】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 333【Operation】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Table】

Table 214【Operation】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Table】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object can be controlled by a specific

Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.
582
 【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.
Log】 It can also edit operation messages in which the message can
be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.

16.3.24 【Historic Data Selector】

The【Historic Data Selector】allows a user to select and view a【Data Log】that was
exported into a CSV or TXT file. When the【Historic Data Selector】is accessed, a
dropdown menu gives the user the files to view. Clicking on one of the files allows the
user to view it.

16.3.24.1 【Setting】
【Historic Data Selector】 【Setting】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

583
 Figure 334【General】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Selector】

Table 215【General】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Selector】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Basic】 【Data Log ID】

Set the ID of the Data Log group to display.

【Address】
Set up a register to control the displayed files.
This address mainly corresponds to the order of the files. For
example, this address is set to R25, and there are 3 files under
datalog\Group_1. At this time, R25 will correspond to the
values in the following order.

If one more file is added at this time, there are 4 files in total,
and the corresponding values of R25 in this order will be as
shown below.

【Display Format】
Press the selector than will display the corresponding file name
of the【Data Log ID】, and the display format can be selected
from【Show File Name】or【Show Last Modified Date Time】.

584
 【Show Last Modified DateTime】
When the Data Selector is accessed, it will display the data
collection date and time of the corresponding file.

【Show Date】
Set whether to display the date of the file and set the display
format, select【Show Last Modified DateTime】, this option
will appear.

【Show Time】
Set whether to display the file time and set the display format,
select【Show Last Modified DateTime】, this option will
appear.

16.3.24.2 【Display】
585
 【Historic Data Selector】 【Display】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 335【Display】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Selector】

Table 216【Display】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Selector】

Property Description

【Background】 【Selector Background】

Set the color of the background.

【List Background】
Set the color of the list background
【Border】 【Type】
Set the border type.

【Color/Width】
Set the color of the border.
【Text】 【Font】
Set the font and size of cursor values.

【Size】
Set the size of the text.

【Color】
Set the color of the text.

【Type】
Set the format of the text.

16.3.24.3 【Operation】
【Historic Data Selector】 【Operation】setting paging as shown below, the meaning
of each setting is as follows :
586
 Figure 336【Operation】Setting Screen of【Historic Data Selector】

Table 217【Operation】Setting Properties of【Historic Data Selector】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object can be controlled by a specific

Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

587
 【User Level Condition】
Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Operation control of the object, which can be controlled by a
specific bit or user level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control operation by a specific bit.

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】 or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then the
object can be controlled, when false not the object can not be
controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security Manager】

Select if operation is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.
Log】 It can also edit operation messages in which the message can
be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.

588
 16.3.25 【Alarm Display】
【Alarm Display】is used to display the status of alarms that occurred during project
execution. It can notify the operator of alarm related contents including alarm
messages, levels occurrences, acknowledgement and recovery time etc.

16.3.25.1 【Setting】
The【Alarm Display】【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of
each setting item are listed below:

Figure 337【Setting】Screen of【Alarm Display】

Table 218【Setting】Properties of【Alarm Display】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Setting】 【Display Type】

Set the display type of the Alarm Display. When【History】
is selected, the Alarm Display will give a complete display of
alarm related messages. When【Log】is selected, the
Alarm Display will display the various changes of alarm state
entry by entry. When【Active】is selected, the Alarm
Display will only display alarms that have not yet recovered.
When【Load CSV File】is selected, the Alarm Display will
display the contents of the specified CSV file.

【New Alarm on Top】

589
 Set to place new alarms on the top of the table. If not
selected, new alarms will be added to the bottom of the
table.

【Alarm Group】
Set the displayed Alarm Group of the Alarm Display. If the
【Direct】option is selected, the Alarm Display will only
display the alarm groups set below. If the【Address】
option is selected, the alarm group displayed by Alarm
Display will be determined by the numeric value of the
address set below.

【Single】
Set the alarm display only display a alarm group.

【Multiple】
Set the alarm display can display multiple groups, you can
select the group to be displayed at【Setting】, need to set
the alarm group in the alarm function, click to select, If you
set 2 alarm groups,click on the settings will appear as shown
below 2 alarm groups to choose from.

【Enable File Control】

If the【Display Type】is seleted as【Load CSV File】, this
option will be available. If selected, the file control can be
done using a register. The value in the register corresponds
to the file order inside the specified path. New CSV files are
added to the top of the path, i.e position 0.

590
 【Enable File Control】(Load CSV File)
Set the bit to control whether to enable the file.

【Refresh Data Automatically】(Load CSV File)

Set under the【Load CSV file】mode whether to
automatically update the table display based on the stored
data.
【Item】 Set the display contents of the Alarm Display.

【Show Alarm Index】

Set to allow Alarm Display to display the index of the Alarm.

【Show Serial Number】

Set to allow Alarm Display to display the alarm’s serial
number. For all alarm groups, all automatically generated
alarms have serial numbers that increment by 1 unless the
serial number has been cleared.

【Show Trigger Date】

Set to allow Alarm Display to display the trigger date.

【Show Alarm Comment】

Set to allow Alarm Display to display the alarm comment.

【Show Trigger Time】

Set to allow Alarm Display to display the trigger time.

【Show Ack. Time】

Set to allow Alarm Display to display the alarm
acknowledgement time.

【Show Recovery Time】

Set to allow Alarm Display to display the alarm recovery
time.

【Show Last Time】

Set to allow Alarm Display to display the last alarm event,
591
 including trigger time, confirmation time, and recovery
time.

【Show Message】
Set to allow Alarm Display to display the alarm message.

【Show Level】
Set to allow Alarm Display to display the alarm level.

【Show Record Address】

Set to allow Alarm Display to display the saved numeric
value of the alarm record address.

【Show Occurrence】
Set to allow Alarm Display to display the alarm occurrences.

【Date Format】
This option will appear if【Show Trigger Date】is selected.
It can be used to select the display format of the date for
the Alarm Display.

【Time Format】
This option will appear if【Show Trigger Time】,【Show
Ack. Time】or【Show Recovery Time】is selected. It can be
used to select the display format of the time for the Alarm
Display.
【Color】 【Change Alarm Color by】
Set the condition for the displayed color change of the
Alarm Display. When【Status】is selected, the Alarm
Display will determine the display color according to the
status of the alarm. When【Level】is selected, the Alarm
Display will determine the display color according to the
level of the alarm. When【Status + Level】is selected, the
Alarm Display will determine the displayed color according
to the status and level of the alarm.

16.3.25.2 【Header】
The【Alarm Display】【Header】page is as shown in the figure below, the displayed
headers of the Alarm Display can be modified in this page.

592
 Figure 338【Display】Setting Screen of【Alarm Display】

Table 219【Header】Setting Properties of【Alarm Display】

Property Description

【Set When this button is pressed, the software calculates the

required column width at the time of planning and sets its
Recommended
field width
Width to All
Columns】
【Header】 Select the displayed text for the alarm display. The text can be
entered directly or selected from the Text Library.

【Width】
Set the width of each column.

16.3.25.3 【Display】
The【Alarm Display】【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings of
each setting item are listed below:

593
 Figure 339【Display】Setting Screen of【Alarm Display】

Table 220【Display】Setting Properties of【Alarm Display】

Property Description

【Text】 【Alignment】
Set the alignment of alarm message text.

【Font for Alarm String from Direct Text】

The font of the alarm string can be set here.

【Size for Alarm String from Direct Text】

The size of the alarm string can be set here.

【Font for Alarm String from Text Library】

The font and size of the alarm string can be set here.
【Appearance】 【Row Height】
Set the row height of the Alarm Display.

【Background】
Set the background color of the Alarm Display.

【Show Border】
Set to display the border. When it is checked, the color,
width and type of the border can be set.

【Type】
Set the border type of the Alarm Display.

【Color/Width】
Set the border color and thickness of the Alarm Display.

【Header】
Set the header appearance of the Alarm Display. It includes
【Text】to set the text color of the header and
【Background】to set the background color of the header.

【Grid】
Set to display the【Horizontal】and【Vertical】gridlines of
the Alarm Display; if display is selected, the color of the

594
 gridlines can be set.

16.3.25.4 【Sub Switch】

The【Alarm Display】 【Sub Switch】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 340【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Alarm Display】

Table 221【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Alarm Display】

Property Description

【Sub Switch 【Sub Switch List】can be selected for Alarm Display. Sub
List】 switches can be enabled after selecting them. Settings for the
appearance of the selected sub switches will also appear on
the right.

When different sub switches are selected from the list, the
appearance settings to the right will be updated according to
the sub switches selected.

【Acknowledge】
Change the status of the currently selected alarm to
acknowledge.

【Clear】
Clear all alarms displayed on Alarm Display.

【Auto Scroll】
Set to enable the auto scroll function. If enabled, when a new

595
 alarm occurs, the Alarm Display will automatically scroll to the
position of the newest alarm.

【Show Window】
When this switch is pressed, the system will display the
【Window Screen】that corresponds to the currently
selected alarm in the【Alarm】setting.

【Filter】
Apply a filter to the alarm time display in order to find the
alert message. Filter options include trigger time,
confirmation time, recovery and last time.

【Load】
When the display time for the alarm display is set to【CSV
File】, pressing the sub-button loads the specified CSV file.
The operator can select where the CSV file should be
imported from: HMI internal memory, Micro SD card, or USB.

【Save】
Export the data on the display according to the export
settings. If the filter is used, only the filtered data will be
exported.
【Display】 【Direct Text Font】
【Text】 Set the text font of the sub switch currently selected.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the text size of the sub switch currently selected.

596
 【Position】
Set the text position of the sub switch currently selected.

【Format】
Set the text format of the sub switch currently selected,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the text color of the sub switch currently selected.

【Content(Direct Text)】
Set the text of the sub switch currently selected.
【Display】 Set the background of the sub switch currently selected.
Check it to activate background settings, and the displayed
【Background】 background of the sub switch currently selected can be edited
below. If this option is not checked, the background will be
transparent.

【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the displayed background of the sub
switch currently selected. When this option is checked, an
image selection setting item will appear asking the user to
select an image either from the【Image Library】or from a
file.

【Background Color】
Set the background color of the sub switch currently selected.
This setting will appear if 【Use Image】was not selected.
【Display】 【Play Audio】
【while Select to play audio when the sub switch is pressed. An
【Audio Selector】will appear on the right when enabled.
Pressing】
The switch on the right of the【Audio Selector】can be
pressed to select an audio and the switch on the left of the
【Audio Selector】can be pressed to play the audio selected.

【Pressing Effect】
Set the pressing effect of the sub switch currently selected.
There are two effects available for selection:【None】and
【Highlight】.
【Advanced】 Operation control of sub switch, it can enabled by bit or

597
 【Operation security.
【Enable by Bit】
Control】
Check whether the sub switch operation is controlled by a bit

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the sub switch operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then the
object can be controlled, when false not the object can not be
controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enable by Security】
Select the sub switch whether controlled by user level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

【Hold Time】
Check whether the operation is controlled by hold time. Hold
time can be divided into two kinds:
➢ 【Press On】: press directly, according to the【Min.
Hold Time】to confirm whether the operation is
executed.
➢ 【Double Press】: quickly double press to confirm
whether the operation is executed.

598
 【Operator Confirm】
Check whether show comfirmation message window after
checking the operation.

【Max. Waiting Time】

When the confirmation message window is displayed, If the
user does not reply within this time, the system will close the
confirmation message window and cancel this operation

16.3.25.5 【Operation】
The【Alarm Display】 【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 341【Operation】Setting Screen of【Alarm Display】

Table 222【Operation】Setting Properties of【Alarm Display】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.
599
 【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Log】 Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.
It can also edit operation messages in which the message
can be inputted directly or acquired from the Text Library.

16.3.26 【Alarm Scrolling Text】

Alarm Scrolling Text is used to display alarm states that occurred during project
execution. The difference between Alarm Display and Alarm Scrolling Text is that Alarm
Scrolling Text uses scrolling text to display the contents of the alarm currently occurring,
including alarm messages, level, occurrences, acknowledgement and recovery time
etc.
16.3.26.1 【Setting】
The【Alarm Scrolling Text】 【Setting】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 342【Setting】Screen of【Alarm Scrolling Text】

600
 Table 223【Setting】Properties of【Alarm Scrolling Text】
Property Description

【Preview】 Previews the appearance of this object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Setting】 【Text Scrolling Speed】

Set the scrolling speed of Alarm Scrolling Text. There are
four speeds that can be set from slow to fast:【Speed 1】to
【Speed 4】.
Also can set the text movement direction【To Left】or
【To Right】.

【Alarm Group】
Set the Alarm Group of the Alarm Scrolling Text to display. If
the【Direct】option is selected, the Alarm Scrolling Text
will only display the alarm groups set below. If the
【Address】option is selected, the alarm group displayed
by Alarm Scrolling Text will be determined by the numeric
value of the address set below.

【Single】
Set the alarm display only display a alarm group.

【Multiple】
Set the alarm display can display multiple groups, you can
select the group to be displayed at【Setting】, need to set
the alarm group in the alarm function, click to select, If you
set 2 alarm groups,click on the settings will appear as shown
below 2 alarm groups to choose from.

601
 【Item】 Set the display contents of Alarm Scrolling Text.

【Show Alarm Index】

Set to allow the Alarm Display to display the index of the
Alarm.

【Show Serial Number】

Set to allow Alarm Display to display the alarm’s serial
number. For all alarm groups, all automatically generated
alarms have serial numbers that increment by 1 unless the
serial number has been cleared.

【Show Trigger Date】

Set to allow the Alarm Scrolling Text to display the trigger
date.

【Show Alarm Comment】

Set to allow the Alarm Scrolling Text to display the alarm
comment.

【Show Trigger Time】

Set to allow the Alarm Scrolling Text to display the trigger
time.

【Show Message】
Set to allow the Alarm Scrolling Text to display the alarm
message.

【Show Level】
Set to allow the Alarm Scrolling Text to display the alarm
level.

【Show Record Address】

Set to allow the Alarm Scrolling Text to display the saved
numeric value of the alarm record address.

【Show Occurrence】
Set to allow the Alarm Scrolling Text to display the alarm
occurrences.

【Date Format】
This option will appear if【Show Trigger Date】is selected.

602
 It can be used to select the display format of the date for
the Alarm Scrolling Text.

【Time Format】
This option will appear if【Show Trigger Time】is selected.
It can be used to select the display format of the time for
the Alarm Scrolling Text.
【Color】 【Change Alarm Color by】
Set the condition for the displayed color change of the
Alarm Scrolling Text. The Alarm Scrolling Text will determine
the display color according to the level of the alarm.

16.3.26.2 【Display】
The【Alarm Scrolling Text】 【Display】page is as shown in the figure below, the meanings
of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 343【Display】Setting Screen of【Alarm Scrolling Text】

Table 224【Display】Setting Properties of【Alarm Scrolling Text】

Property Description

【Text】 【Font for Alarm String from Direct Text】

The font of the alarm string can be set here.

【Size for Alarm String from Direct Text】

The size of the alarm string can be set here.

【Font for Alarm String from Text Library】

The font and size of the alarm string can be set here.
【Appearance】 【Background】
Set the background color of the Alarm Scrolling Text.

【Show Border】
603
 Set to display the border. When it is checked, the color,
width and type of the border can be set at the bottom.

【Type】
Set the border type of the Alarm Scrolling Text.

【Color/Width】
Set the border color and border thickness of the Alarm
Scrolling Text.

16.3.26.3 【Operation】
The【Alarm Scrolling Text】【Operation】page is as shown in the figure below, the
meanings of each setting item are listed below:

Figure 344【Operation】Setting Screen of【Alarm Scrolling Text】

Table 225【Operation】Setting Properties of【Alarm Scrolling Text】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a

specific Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

604
 【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

16.3.27 【Alarm Data Selector】

The【Alarm Data Selector】allows a user to select and view an【Alarm】that was
exported into a CSV file. When the【Alarm Data Selector】is accessed, a dropdown
menu gives the user the files to view. Clicking on one of the files allows the user to
view it.

16.3.27.1 【Setting】
【Alarm Data Selector】 【Setting】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 345【General】Setting Screen of【Alarm Data Selector】

Table 226【General】Setting Properties of【Alarm Data Table】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

605
 【Basic】 【Alarm Group】
Set the ID of the alarm group to display

【Address】
Select the register to control the visibility of a file. This address
corresponds to the file path of alarms. The value stored in the
register corresponds to the file number in the path, with the
topmost file at position 0.

【Display Format】
Select how the alarm data files are displayed when the Alarm
Data Selector is accessed. There are two options for【Display
Format】:【Show File Name】and【Show Last Modified
DateTime】.

【Show File Name】

When the Alarm Data Selector is accessed, it will display the
file names.

【Show Last Modified DateTime】

When the Alarm Data Selector is accessed, it will display the
data collection date and time of the corresponding file.

606
 【Show Date】
Select to show the dates of the files when the Alarm Data
Selector is accessed. The format of the date can be set.

【Show Time】
Select to show the times of the files when Alarm Data Selector
is accessed. The fomat of the time can be set.

16.3.27.2 【Display】
【Alarm Data Selector】 【Display】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 346【Display】Setting Screen of【Alarm Data Selector】

Table 227【Display】Setting Properties of【Alarm Data Table】

Property Description

【Background】 【Selector Background】

Set the color of the background.

【List Background】

607
 Set the color of the list background

【Border】 【Type】
Set the border type.

【Color/Width】
Set the color of the border.
【Text】 【Font】
Set the font and size of cursor values.

【Size】
Set the size of the text.

【Color】
Set the color of the text.

【Type】
Set the format of the text.

16.3.27.3 【Operation】
【Alarm Data Selector】 【Operation】setting paging as shown below, the meaning
of each setting is as follows :

Figure 347【Operation】Settings Screen of【Alarm Data Selector】

Table 228【Operation】Setting Properties of【Alarm Data Table】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object can be controlled by a specific

Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.
608
 【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Operation control of the object, which can be controlled by a
specific bit or user level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control operation by a specific bit.

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】 or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
609
 Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then the
object can be controlled, when false not the object can not be
controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security Manager】

Select if operation is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.
Log】 It can also edit operation messages in which the message can
be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.

16.3.28 【Recipe Selector】

【Recipe Selector】allows user to select a specific recipe in a recipe group during
execution. Please refer to Chapter 9–Recipe for functions related to recipes.
16.3.28.1 【General】
【Recipe Selector】【General】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of each
setting is as follows :

Figure 348【General】Setting Page of【Recipe Selector】

610
 Table 229【General】Setting Properties of【Recipe Selector】
Property Description

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Recipe Group】 If the user adds a new recipe group in the recipe setting
function, the ID and name of the recipe group will be
displayed here. The user must select a recipe group before
the【OK】button is pressed.
【Background】 【Selector Background】
Set the background color of the selector.

【List Background】
Set the background color of the drop-down list.
【Border】 【Type】
Set the border type.

【Color/Width】
Set the border color and width.
【Text】 【Font】
Set the text font.

【Size】
Set the text font size.

【Color】
Set the text color.

【Type】
Set the format of the text.

16.3.28.2 【Advanced】
【Recipe Selector】【Advanced】setting paging as shown below, the meaning
of each setting is as follows :

611
 Figure 349【Advanced】Setting Page of【Recipe Selector】

Table 230【General】Setting Properties of【Recipe Selector】

Property Description

【Source】 Set the source of recipe selector.

【Recipe Name】
Default value, use the recipe name as the data of recipe
selector.

【Recipe Parameter(ASCII Type)】

When there is an ASCII String type in the recipe parameter
【Sort】 Set whether the recipe selector data is sorted by text.

【No Sort】
Default value, The recipe selector data is not sorted and
displayed in the original order.

【Ascending】
The recipe selector data is sorted in positive order.

【Descending】
The recipe selector data is sorted in reverse order.
【Use Filter】 Is to use the filter in dynamic mode, by specifying the
value or text of【Filter String Address】, filter the options
required in the recipe selector, for example, 【Filter String
Address】=50, and R50=A, then the recipe selector only
displays the recipe group name with the "A" text.

【Use Filter】
Set whether to enable filtering.

【Filter String Address】

612
 Set the text address used for dynamic filtering, and the
length of the text.

16.3.28.3 【Operation】
【Recipe Selector】【Operation】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 350【Operation】Setting Page of【Recipe Selector】

Table 231【Operation】Setting Properties of【Recipe Selector】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a specific

bit or user level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
613
 include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Select to enable the【Operation Logger】of the object. It can
Log】 also edit operation messages in which the message can be
inputted directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.
【Operation Operation control of the object, which can be controlled by a
specific bit or user level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control operation by a specific bit.

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then the
object can be controlled, when false not the object can not be
controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if operation is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.
614
 【User Level Condition】
Set the level and condition of the object.

16.3.29 【Recipe Table】

【Recipe Table】is used to read recipe group data set in the【Recipe】function.
Users can also dynamically change the data in the recipe table during execution.
Please refer to Chapter 9–Recipe for functions related to recipes. Recipe Table has
the following functions:
➢ To view the complete data of recipe group select【Show All】or select
【Only Show Current Recipe】to show current recipe.
➢ Use the【Sub Switch】to load or save the recipe group file.
16.3.29.1 【General】
【Recipe Table】【General】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of each
setting is as follows :

Figure 351【General】Setting Page of【Recipe Table】

Table 232【General】Setting Properties of【Recipe Table】

Property Description

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

615
 【Basic】 【Recipe Group】
If the user adds a new recipe group in the recipe setting
function, the ID and name of the recipe group will be
displayed here. The user must select a recipe group
before the【OK】button is pressed.

【Table Type】
If【Only Show Current Recipe】is selected, the current
recipe will be displayed according to the【Control
Address of Recipe No.】in the recipe setting. If【Show
All】is selected, all contents of the recipe group will be
displayed.

【Transpose】
Reverse the rows and columns. For example, row 1 in
the original table becomes column 1 in the transposed
table.

【Tap to Change Current Recipe】

Users can change the current recipe group by clicking on
during the execution period,【Control Address of Recipe
No.】will also change.

【Allow Input】
The user will be able to dynamically change the
parameters and the recipe names in the recipe table
during execution if this option is selected.

【Input Method for Recipe name】

Select the input method for recipe name, inculde
【None】and【Pinyin(Simplified Chinese)】two ways.

616
 【None】
If【Input Method for Recipe name】select as【None】
will show up the figure as below, provide user to modify
or input recipe name through the following keypad.

【Pinyin(Simplified Chinese)】
If【Input Method for Recipe name】select as
【Pinyin(Simplified Chinese)】will show up the figure as
below, provide user to modify or input recipe name
through the following keypad, switch to English or
Pinyin.

【Header】 【Font Color】

Set the header font color.

617
 【Background】
Set the header background color.

【Font for String from Direct Text】

Set the header font.

【Size】
Set the header font size.

【Font for String from the Text Library】

when the text is from library, can set the font and size.

【Customized Height】
User can customized the height of the header field.
【Border】 【Type】
Set the border type.

【Color/Width】
Set the border color and width.
【Grid/Background】 【Grid】
Set the line color of the grid.

【Horizontal】
Select to display the horizontal grid lines.

【Vertical】
Select to display the vertical grid lines.

【Background】
Set the background color.
【Data】 【Font】
Set the data font.

【Size】
Set the data font size.

【Customized Height】
User can customized the height of the data field.

618
16.3.29.2 【Data Item】
【Recipe Table】【Data Item】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of each
setting is as follows :

Figure 352【Data Item】Setting Page of【Recipe Table】

Table 233【Data Item】Setting Properties of【Recipe Table】

Property Description

【Set Recommended When this button is pressed, the software calculates

the required column width at the time of planning
Width to All Columns】 and sets its field width.
【Vertical Header Width Set the column width of【Recipe Table】header.
(Recipe Parameter
Name)】 【Column Width】
Set the column width of【Recipe Table】field, in
addition to the left field, this【Transpose】option
needs to be checked.
【Copy Width(Recipe Set Select a parameter name from below, and then click
this button to change the settings of other items to
Name)】 the same as the settings of the item selected.
【Color】 Set color of the parameter data.

【Alignment】 Determine the alignment of the parameter data.

【Column width】 Set the column width of recipe parameter.

16.3.29.3 【Sub Switch】

【Recipe Table】【Sub Switch】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of each
setting is as follows :

619
 Figure 353【Sub Switch】Setting Page of【Recipe Table】

Table 234【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Recipe Table】

Property Description

【Sub Switch If the【Save】or【Load】button is selected from the table,

List】 corresponding buttons will also appear at the top-right side of
the recipe table in the workspace after pressing the【OK】
button.
【Save】
If the user presses this button during execution, the current
parameter contents of the【Recipe Table】will be saved to the
recipe group file configured in the recipe setting.

【Load】
If the user presses this button during execution, the contents of
the recipe group file configured in the recipe setting will be
loaded into the【Recipe Table】.
【Display】 【Direct Text Font】
【Text】 Set the text font of the sub switch currently selected.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the text size of the sub switch currently selected.

【Position】
Set the text position of the sub switch currently selected.

620
 【Format】
Set the text format of the sub switch currently selected,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the text color of the sub switch currently selected.

【Content(Direct Text)】
Set the text of the sub switch currently selected.
【Display】 Set the background of the sub switch currently selected. Check
it to activate background settings, and the displayed
【Background】 background of the sub switch currently selected can be edited
below. If this option is not checked, the background will be
transparent.

【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the displayed background of the sub
switch currently selected. When this option is checked, an
image selection setting item will appear asking the user to
select an image either from the【Image Library】or from a
file.

【Background Color】
Set the background color of the sub switch currently selected.
This setting will appear if【Use Image】was not selected.
【Display】 【Play Audio】
【While Select to play audio when the sub switch is pressed. An
【Audio Selector】will appear on the right when enabled. The
Pressing】
switch on the right of the【Audio Selector】can be pressed to
select an audio and the switch on the left of the【Audio
Selector】can be pressed to play the audio selected.

【Pressing Effect】
Set the pressing effect of the sub switch currently selected.
There are two effects available for selection:【None】and
【Highlight】.
【Advanced】 Operation control of sub switch, it can enabled by bit or
security.
【Operation
【Enable by Bit】
Control】 Check whether the sub switch operation is controlled by a bit
621
 【Show Disabled Sign】
Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】or
【Enable by Security】.

【Address】
Set the address of the sub switch operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then the
object can be controlled, when false not the object can not be
controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enable by Security】
Select the sub switch whether controlled by user level.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

【Hold Time】
Check whether the operation is controlled by hold time. Hold
time can be divided into two kinds:
➢ 【Press On】: press directly, according to the【Min. Hold
Time】to confirm whether the operation is executed.
➢ 【Double Press】: quickly double press to confirm
whether the operation is executed.

【Operator Confirm】
Check whether show comfirmation message window after
checking the operation.

622
 【Max. Waiting Time】
When the confirmation message window is displayed, If the
user does not reply within this time, the system will close the
confirmation message window and cancel this operation

16.3.29.4 【Operation】
【Recipe Table】【Operation】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of each
setting is as follows :

Figure 354【Operation】Setting Page of【Recipe Table】

Table 235【Operation】Setting Properties of【Recipe Table】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a specific

bit or user level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

623
 【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Select to enable the【Operation Logger】of the object. It can
Log】 also edit operation messages in which the message can be
inputted directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.
【Operation Operation control of the object, which can be controlled by a
specific bit or user level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control operation by a specific bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then the
object can be controlled, when false not the object can not be
controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security Manager】

Select if operation is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

624
 Set the level and condition of the object.

16.3.30 【Operation Viewer】

【Operation Viewer】is an object used to read the Recording Buffer data of the
【Operation Log】. Its main functions are as follows:
➢ View the Recording Buffer data of the【Operation Log】.
➢ Data filter function, which displays items that the user is only interested in.
➢ Pause or start updating the data of the Recording Buffer through the【Sub
Switch】, and clear or save the data in the Recording Buffer.
16.3.30.1 【General】
【Operation Viewer】【General】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 355【General】Setting Screen of【Operation Viewer】

Table 236【General】Setting Properties of【Operation Viewer】

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Header】 Select to display the header.

【Font】
Set the font of the header.

【Size】
Set the size of the header.

625
 【Color】
Set the color of the header.

【Background】
Set the background color of the header.

【Customized Height】
User can customized the height of the header field.
【Border】 Select to display the border.
【Type】
Set the border type.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of the border.
【Grid/Background】 【Grid】
Set the color of the grid.

【Horizontal】
Select to display horizontal gridlines.

【Vertical】
Select to display vertical gridlines.

【Background】
Set the color of the background.
【Data】 【Show Oldest Data First】
Set whether to display the oldest data in the top of the
form, if unchech then the oldest data will in the bottom of
the form.

【Font for String from Direct Text】

The font of the string can be set here.

【Size】
Set the font size for the direct text.

【Font for String from Text Library】

The font and size of the string can be set here.

【Customized Height】
626
 User can customized the height of the data field.

16.3.30.2 【Content】
【Operation Viewer】【Content】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 356【Content】Setting Screen of【Operation Viewer】

Table 237【Content】Setting Properties of【Operation Viewer】

Property Description

【Set Recommended When this button is pressed, the software calculates

the required column width at the time of planning and
Width to All Columns】 sets its field width.

【Content】 Every Operation Log data entry includes information;

users can choose to display the items they are
interested in. The following are the descriptions of
each item:
➢ 【Number】
Operation Log serial number.
➢ 【Date】
Operation Log date. Can select the format of the date
in the right.
➢ 【Time】
Operation Log time. Can select the format of the time
in the right.
➢ 【User ID】
The current user name; when【Security Manager】->
【Mode】is【Level】, no information will be recorded
627
 in this field.
When【Mode】is【User】, the current signer will
display, however, if the security level is forced to
change by address(【Security Level】address of
【Project Explorer】-> 【Unit Setting】-> 【Control
Address】), the user ID will be displayed as "?" Until
the next normal login, this field will show the current
login.

➢ 【Level】
The level of the current user.
➢ 【Screen】
The screen the operating object is located.
➢ 【Part ID】
The ID of the operating object.
➢ 【Comment】
The comment of the operating object.
➢ 【Message】
The message of the operating object.
➢ 【Address】
The access address of the operating object.
➢ 【Previous Value】
The previous value of the access address
content for the operating object.
➢ 【Changed Value】
The current value of the changed access
address content for the operating object.

The setting of the items can be divided into:

➢ 【Display】
Set the visibility of this item.
➢ 【Text】
Set the display text for the header. The text can
be entered directly or selected from the text
library.
➢ 【Color】
The color of this item.
➢ 【Column Width】
The column width of this item.
➢ 【Alignment】
628
 The alignment method of this item.
➢ 【Type】
This setting is only available for【Date】 and
【Time】. It sets the display format.

16.3.30.3 【Sub Switch】

【Operation Viewer】【Sub Switch】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 357【Sub Switch】Setting Screen of【Operation Viewer】

Table 238【Sub Switch】Setting Properties of【Operation Viewer】

Property Description

【Sub Switch List】 【Sub Switch List】that can be selected for【Operation

Viewer】. Sub switches can be enabled after selecting
them. Settings for the appearance of the selected sub
switches will also appear on the right.

When different sub switches are selected from the list, the
setting contents of the appearance setting items to the right
will be updated according to the sub switches selected.

In which the【Sub Switches】are divided into:

➢ 【Save】- Save the Recording Buffer data of the
【Operation Log】into a CSV file.
➢ 【Clear】- Clear the Recording Buffer data of the

629
 【Operation Log】.
➢ 【Save & Clear】- Saves the Recording Buffer data
of the【Operation Log】into a CSV file and then
clears the data.
【Display】【Text】 【Direct Text Font】
Set the text font of the sub switch currently selected.

【Direct Text Size】

Set the text size of the sub switch currently selected.

【Position】
Set the text position of the sub switch currently selected.

【Format】
Set the text format of the sub switch currently selected,
including Bold, Italics and Underline.

【Color】
Set the text color of the sub switch currently selected.

【Content(Direct Text)】
Set the text of the sub switch currently selected, the text
can be entered directly or selected from the【Text
Library】.
【Display】 Set the background of the sub switch currently selected.
Check it to activate background settings, and the displayed
【Background】 background of the sub switch currently selected can be
edited below. If this option is not checked, the background
will be transparent.

【Use Image】
Set to use an image for the displayed background of the sub
switch currently selected. When this option is checked, an
image selection setting item will appear asking the user to
select an image either from the【Image Library】or from a
file.

【Background Color】
Set the background color of the sub switch currently
selected. This setting will appear if 【Use Image】was not

630
 selected.

【Display】【while 【Play Audio】

Pressing】 Select to play audio when the sub switch is pressed. An
【Audio Selector】will appear on the right when enabled.
The switch on the right of the【Audio Selector】can be
pressed to select an audio and the switch on the left of the
【Audio Selector】can be pressed to play the audio
selected.

【Pressing Effect】
Set the pressing effect of the sub switch currently selected.
There are two effects available for selection:【None】and
【Highlight】.
【Advanced】 Operation control of sub switch, it can enabled by bit or
security.
【Operation
【Enable by Bit】
Control】 Check whether the sub switch operation is controlled by a
bit

【Address】
Set the address of the sub switch operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
the object can be controlled, when false not the object can
not be controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’,
‘<=’.

【Enable by Security】
Select the sub switch whether controlled by user level.

631
 【User Level Condition】
Set the level and condition of the object.

【Show Disabled Sign】

Check if you want to display the forbidden symbol, it’s valid
when check【Enable by Bit】,【Enabled by Word】 or
【Enable by Security】.

【Hold Time】
Check whether the operation is controlled by hold time.
Hold time can be divided into two kinds:
➢ 【Press On】: press directly, according to the【Min.
Hold Time】to confirm whether the operation is
executed.
➢ 【Double Press】: quickly double press to confirm
whether the operation is executed.

【Operator Confirm】
Check whether show comfirmation message window after
checking the operation.

【Max. Waiting Time】

When the confirmation message window is displayed, If the
user does not reply within this time, the system will close
the confirmation message window and cancel this operation

16.3.30.4 【Operation】
【Operation Viewer】【Operation】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

632
 Figure 358【Operation】Setting Screen of【Operation Viewer】

Table 239【Operation】Setting Properties of【Operation Viewer】

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object can be controlled by a specific

Bit or User Level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific Bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control Bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.
【Operation Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object.
Log】 It can also edit operation messages in which the message can
be inputted directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.

16.3.31 【Schedule Setting Table】

【Schedule Setting Table】is the object that used to read【Schedule】of
【Function】inside the【Project Exploer】, so need to plan the【Schedule】
633
 function first. In addition to its main function can show the start time of the
schedule, the end time, the start date, etc., allows designers to quickly design, but
also provides HMI operation to dynamically change the start time and end time of
each schedule

16.3.31.1 【General】
【Schedule Setting Table】【General】setting paging as shown below, the meaning
of each setting is as follows :

Figure 359【Schedule Setting Table】【General】setting paging

Table 240【Schedule Setting Table】【General】property setting

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【General】 【Show Schedule】

click【Setting】on the right, able to select scheduled
schedule group number in the【Schedule】function.

【Row Height】
Set each of the row height in the table.

【Font】
Set the font of the text in the table.

634
 【Text Size】
Set the text size in the table.

【Text Alignment】
Set the alignment of the text in the table, including left,
center, right and so on。
【Header】 【Text Color】
Set the text color of the header.

【Background Color】
Set the background color.
【Content】 【Text Color】
Set the text color of the content.

【Background Color】
Set the background color.
【Border】 【Type】
Set border type.

【Color/Width】
Set the color and width of the border.
【Grid】 【Horizontal】
Check whether you want to display the horizontal and set
the horizontal color.

【Vertical】
Check whether you want to display the vertical and set the
vertical color

16.3.31.2 【Header】
【Schedule Setting Table】【Header】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

635
 Figure 360【Schedule Setting Table】【Header】setting paging

Table 241【Schedule Setting Table】【Header】property setting

Property Description

【Content】 Each of the schedule includes multiple information, the

user can select the item using the checklist and can change
the title display text on the right, the following is a
description of each item:
➢ 【Group】
The group serial number of the schedule.
➢ 【Comment】
Comment of the schedule.
➢ 【Time Type】
The type of the schedule is a constant or an
address.
➢ 【Start Time】
Start time of the schedule.
➢ 【End Time】
End time of the schedule.
➢ 【Start Day】
Start day of the schedule.
➢ 【Set】
Press to modify the start and end times of each
schedule.

16.3.31.3 【Operation】
【Schedule Setting Table】【Operation】setting paging as shown below, the
meaning of each setting is as follows :

636
 Figure 361【Schedule Setting Table】【Operation】setting paging

Table 242 【Schedule Setting Table】【Operation】property setting

Property Description

【Visibility Visibility control of the object. It can be controlled by a specific

bit or user level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control visibility by a specific bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the visibility control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then show
up the object, when false not show the object. The condition
include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

637
 Set the level and condition of the object.

【Operation Select to enable the【Operation Log】of the object. It can

Log】 also edit operation messages in which the message can be
inputted directly or acquired from the【Text Library】.
【Operation Operation control of the object, which can be controlled by a
specific bit or user level.
Control】
【Enable by Bit】
Select to control operation by a specific bit.

【Address】
Set the address of the operation control bit.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to operate object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the operation is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the operation control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then the
object can be controlled, when false not the object can not be
controlled. The condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if operation is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

16.3.32 【Video Input Display】

【Video Input Display】can be used to display the video of the camera that
connected to the HMI USB port, for the setting of USB camera image parameters,
please refer to Chapter3.3.3-Video Input .
16.3.32.1 【Setting】
【Video Input Display】【Setting】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
638
 each setting is as follows :

Figure 362【Video Input Display】【Setting】setting paging

Table 243【Video Input Display】【Setting】setting property

Property Description

【Preview】 Preview the appearance of this object.

【Name】 The default name of the object.

【Comment】 Set the comment of the object.

【Basic】 【Auto Play】

Set wether to auto play when swith to this page when the
camera was not started yet.

16.3.32.2 【Operation】
【Video Input Display】【Operation】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 363【Video Input Display】【Operation】setting paging

Table 244【Video Input Display】【Operation】property setting

Property Description

639
 【Visibility Visibility control of Object, it can be controlled by bit or
user level.
Control】
【Enabled by Bit】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by a bit.

【Address】
Set the visibility control bit address.

【State】
Set the control bit as 1 or 0 to show object.

【Enabled by Word】
Check whether the visibility is controlled by word.

【Address】
Set the visibility control word address.

【Condition】
Set the condition of word control and when it is true then
show up the object, when false not show the object. The
condition include’ =’,’ !=’, ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’.

【Enabled by Security】
Select if visibility is to be controlled by the level of the user
logged in.

【User Level Condition】

Set the level and condition of the object.

640
 17. User Toolbox
Although the【Toolbox】provided by this software is able to meet the needs of most
users, the objects provided in the 【Toolbox】are all pre-set and does not allow users
to use objects that they changed on their own. The software also provides the【User
Toolbox】function because not only does it allow users to access objects that they have
modified, it also provides【Import】and【Export】functions so that the objects in the
【User Toolbox】can be quickly transferred between different computers, speeding
up development.
This chapter will explain【User Toolbox】related pages and their operating methods.

17.1 Basic Operations

Select the 【User Toolbox】 in the【View】page of the【Ribbon】and the【User
Toolbox】will appear as shown in the figure below.

Figure 364 View page of the Ribbon

641
 Figure 365 User Toolbox

The basic operations of the【User Toolbox】can be divided into three parts:

1. Adding objects to the【User Toolbox】.
2. Adding the objects in the【User Toolbox】to the【Work Space】.
3. Introduction to menu operations.

17.1.1 Adding objects to the User Toolbox

Move the mouse cursor over the object in the【Work Space】to add to the【User
Toolbox】, then press the ctrl key and left mouse button to start dragging the object.
Drag the object into the【User Toolbox】and then release the left mouse button.
The object will be added to the【User Toolbox】according to the location where the
mouse button was released, figure as shown below.

642
 Ctrl+left mouse button

Figure 366 add object to【User Toolbox】

The default name of the added object is “category_number”, as shown in the figure
below.

Figure 367 User Toolbox–Default name

If the left mouse button was released in the【Work Space】, the object will be
added to the【Work Space】where the mouse button was released.

Note: The object names within the User Toolbox do not relate to the object names and comments in
the work space.

17.1.2 Adding the objects in User Toolbox to the

Work Space
Move the mouse cursor over the object in the【User Toolbox】to add to the【Work
Space】, then press and hold the left mouse button to start dragging the object.

643
Drag the object into the【Work Space】and then release the left mouse button at
the location to add the object. The object will be added to the【Work Space】at the
location where the mouse button was released, figure as shown below.

Left mouse button

Figure 368 drag object from【User Toolbox】to【Work Space】

If the left mouse button was released in the【User Toolbox】, the object will be
moved to the location where the mouse button was released so that the user can
change the category the object belongs to and its location in the【User Toolbox】.

Note: If the text library, tag library or other settings are used by the objects in the User Toolbox,
please remember to import the text library, tag library and other settings when adding the object in
order to guarantee that the settings of the object during use are the same as the settings when it
was added.

17.1.3 Menu Introduction

A【Menu】will appear when the right mouse button is pressed in the【User
Toolbox】. The options within the menu changes according to the location where the
right mouse button is pressed, as shown in the figure below. Options within the
【Menu】are as listed in the table below.

644
 Figure 369 Menu–Mouse over category (Left); Mouse over object (Middle); Mouse
not over category or object (Right)

Table 245 Options within the menu

Option Description
【Expand All】 Expand all【Category】in the【User Toolbox】, allowing
users to see all【Object】.
【Collapse All】 Collapse all【Category】in the【User Toolbox】so that
users cannot see the【Object】, just the【Category】.
【Add Category】 Add a【Category】; the window below will appear.

【Delete Category】 Delete the selected【Category】along with all the

【Object】in the【Category】.
【Rename Change the name of the selected【Category】; the
Category】 window below will appear.

【Move Up Move the selected【Category】up a level.

Category】
【Move Down Move the selected【Category】down a level.
Category】
【Delete Object】 Delete the selected【Object】.
645
 【Rename Object】 Change the name of the selected【Object】; The window
below will appear.

【Add from Add a new object from the built-in template library.

Template Library】
【Import】 Add the previously saved【User Toolbox】file (*.utf) into
the current【User Toolbox】.
【Export】 Save the current【User Toolbox】into a file (*.utf).

17.2 Import and Export

In order for users to transfer the【User Toolbox】they are modified between the
different computers, this software provides the【Import】and【Export】functions.
This section will introduce how to use these functions.

17.2.1 Import
Press the right mouse button within the【User Toolbox】and select【Import】from
the menu that pops up, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 370 Menu–Import

The window below will appear. Select the file (*.utf) to import and then press【Open
File】to import the file.

646
 Figure 371 Select file to import

17.2.2 Export
Press the right mouse button within the【User Toolbox】and select【Export】from
the menu that pops up, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 372 Menu–Export

The window below will appear; select the【Category】to export here, as shown in
the figure below.

Figure 373 Select category to export

The window below will appear. Press【Save】after selecting the name and location
of the file (*.utf) to export the file.

647
 Figure 374 Select the name and location for the file export

17.3 Name Conflicts

Identical【Category Names】are not allowed in the【User Toolbox】in order to
prevent the users from getting confused. Similarly, identical【Object Names】are
also not allowed within the same【Category】. Therefore, when conflicts occur due
to repeated names, the【Category Name Conflict】window or the【Object Name
Conflict】window will appear according to the situation to help users solve this
problem. This section will now introduce the pages related to the【Category Name
Conflict】and【Object Name Conflict】windows.

Note: Identical object names are allowed if used in different categories.

17.3.1 Category Name Conflict

Occurs when there are identical【Category Name】during【Rename Category】or
【Import】.
The following window will appear if they occurred during the【Rename Category】,
notifying the user that this name has already been used, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 375 Repeated category name warning

648
The following window will appear if they occurred during【Import】, allowing the user
to select what action to take next, as shown in the figure and table below.

Figure 376 Category Name Conflict selection window

Table 246 Category Name Conflict options

Option Description
【Rename】 Change the name of the category to import and then add
it to the【User Toolbox】.
【Merge】 Merge the category to import with the category within the
【User Toolbox】.
【Skip】 Skip and do not process this category import.

【Cancel】 Cancel this import.

17.3.2 Object Name Conflict

Occurs when there are identical 【Object Name】 during the【Rename Object】or
【Import】.
The following window will appear if they occurred during【Rename Object】, reminding
the user that this name has already been used, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 377 Repeated object name warning

The following window will appear if they occurred during 【Import】, allowing the
user to select what action to take next, as shown in the figure and table below.

649
 Figure 378 Object Name Conflict selection window

Table 247 Object Name Conflict options

Option Description
【Rename】 Change the name of the object to import and then add it
to the current【Category】.
【Replace】 Replace the object in the current【Category】with the
object to import.
【Skip】 Skip and do not process this object import.

【Cancel】 Cancel this import.

650
 18. Build Running Package and

Simulation
18.1 【Download Current Project】
When a running package (.cfrp) has been successfully built and had no errors during
simulation, it is ready to be downloaded to the HMI. Fatek provides diverse download
methods. Users can download the running package from the PC to the HMI through a
serial port connection, Ethernet connection or by using a USB cable.

18.1.1 Downloading the running package and

operating system from a PC
The download function can be found in the【Project】function tab on the ribbon
taskbar on top of the FvDesigner. Click on【Download Current Project】and a dialog
window will open and enter the【Download Manager】setting screen.

Figure 379 Open download function

The following are detailed descriptions for the【Download Manager】.

651
 Figure 380 Download Manager function interface

Table 248 Download Manager–related parameters

Property Description

【Connection 【COM】
Setting】 Select to perform download through the serial port; the port
number used for downloading must also be specified when this
option is selected.

【Ethernet】
Select to perform download through the Ethernet. The IP
address of the target HMI must also be specified when this
option is selected. Press【Scan】on the right to acquire the
HMI IP addresses and device names currently online. Users can
also manually enter the IP address of the target HMI to perform
download.

Note: The Scan button may have no effect under certain network
environments (usually when the DHCP server cannot accurately configure
the IP addresses). In this case, the command prompt can be opened to
execute the following commands in sequence to restore the function.
1. netsh winsock reset
2. netsh interface ipv4 reset
3. ipconfig /flushdns
Please re-start the computer when completed for the settings to take
effect.
652
 【USB】
Perform download through USB.
The default path of USB Driver is under C:\Program
Files\Fatek\FvDesigner\Ver1.5\usb driver
The USB drivers can be installed by clicking【Install USB
Driver】in the【Tools】tab.

【Data 【Running Package】

Source】 Download the current rinning package, if want to download
other running package, go to the Tools page to do download.

【Firmware】
The HMI firmware will be downloaded once this option is
selected.
The default path of【Firmware】is under
(Under 64-bit Windows)
C:\Program Files (x86)\FATEK\FvDesigner\Ver1.5\application
\firmware\FvFirmwareC.frt
(Under 32-bit Windows)
C:\Program Files\FATEK\FvDesigner\Ver1.5\application
\firmware\FvFirmwareC.frt
【Delete on This field determines whether to clear the existing data saved
on the HMI:
Target】
【Select/Deselect All】
After checked, all the following options will be checked. If not
checked, all items below will be unchecked.

【Backup Memory】
If this option is selected, the NV and XNV registers on the HMI
will be cleared when the download process begins.

【Alarm】
If this option is selected, the existing alarm log on the HMI will
be deleted when the download process begins. The HMI will
clear all files under /internal/alarm/.

【Recipe】
If this option is selected, the existing recipe files on the HMI will
653
 be deleted when the download process begins. The HMI will
clear all files under /internal/recipe/.

【Data Log】
If this option is selected, the existing data log on the HMI will be
deleted when the download process begins. The HMI will clear
all files under /internal/datalog/.

【Print】
If this option is selected, the screenshots saved in the HMI
internal memory will be deleted when the download process
begins. The HMI will clear all files under /internal/hardcopy/.

【Link】
If this option is selected, the program will start the deletion of
the original link parameters and replace them with the new link
parameters.

【Security Password】
If this option is selected, the password table on the HMI will be
deleted when the download process begins. If this option is
selected, the original password table will be retained.

【Operation Log】
If this option is selected, the existing operation log on the HMI
will be deleted when the download process begins. The HMI will
clear all files under /internal/operationlog/.

【Data Transfer】
If this option is selected, the data transfer files on the HMI will be
deleted when the download process begins. The HMI will clear all
files under /internal/datatransfer/.

【Installment】
If this option is selected, the download process will delete the
original installment information and the previously entered
records.

【Schedule】
If this option is selected, the download process will delete the
original data that has been modified through the【Schedule】on
the HMI, so the schedule will based on the project; if not checked,
the original data that has been modified through the【Schedule】
654
 on HMI will be retained.

【Others】
If this option is selected, all other files on the HMI will be deleted
when the download process begins. The HMI will clear all files
under /internal/ not including the options detailed above.

【Other 【Reboot after Download】

Settings】 Set to reboot HMI after downloading project is complete.

【Synchronize HMI date and time with PC】

Set to synchronize the date and time of HMI with PC after
downloading project is complete.

【User Defined Startup Screen】

Allows designers to define their own HMI boot screen, such as
the title of the company, etc., after the option is checked, you
can choose a picture on the PC. After the project download is
complete, the HMI boot screen will be changed. Fatek HMI
factory boot screen, default location:
(Under 64-bit Windows)
C:\Program Files (x86)\FATEK\FvDesigner\Ver1.5\startup screen
(Under 32-bit Windows)
C:\Program Files\FATEK\FvDesigner\Ver1.5\startup screen

【Write System Setting】

Providing parameters that can be set to the HMI at the same time
when the project downloads, can reduce the tedious setting
work, especially when the same project is downloaded to
multiple HMI, each of the HMI does not need to enter the system
settings screen settings, after checked, select the *.fscfg file on
the right, or press the Edit button on the right to edit the *.fscfg
file. For details, refer to chapter18.1.2-Write System Setting .

【Update Internal Register($U:XNV)】

Update XNV register data to HMI.

655
 【Status】 Displays the current download status and download progress.

【Start】
Press this switch to start downloading once setting configuration
is complete.

【Close】
Press this switch to end downloading and close the download
window.

Note:
If the HMI has been updated to a new version of firmware or the program has update, the files
associated with the old version of sotware cannot be used.

18.1.2 Write System Setting

Providing parameters that can be set to the HMI at the same time when the project
downloads, can reduce the tedious setting work, especially when the same project is
downloaded to multiple HMI, each of the HMI does not need to enter the system
settings screen settings, after checked, select the *.fscfg file on the right, or press the
Edit button on the right to edit the *.fscfg file. Pressing the【Edit】button on the right
will bring up the system setting configuration window as shown in the figure below.

The meaning of each setting option is as follows:

18.1.2.1 【Basic】
【System Setting Configure】【Basic】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 381【System Setting Configure】【Basic】setting page

Table 249 【System Setting Configure】【Basic】properties setting

Properties Description

【Basic】 【Use password to protect this configuration files】

Check if you want to set a password to protect this
configuration file. If you select it, you can set the password
on the right. When you press the【Edit】button on the
656
 right again to edit the *.fscfg file, the following figure will
appear, requiring a password to continue editing.

【Mask Passwords】
Mask the password of【Use password to protect this
configuration files】, default is checked .

【HMI Model】
Select the model you want to set.

18.1.2.2 【System】
【System Setting Configure】【System】setting paging as shown below, the meaning
of each setting is as follows :

Figure 382【System Setting Configure】【System】setting page

Table 250 【System Setting Configure】【System】properties setting

Properties Description

【System】 【Overwrite Device Name】

Check whether to overwrite the name of the HMI. After
checked, the name of the HMI can be edited under【Device
Name】.

657
 【Overwrite Station Number】
Check whether to overwrite the station number of the HMI.
After checked, the station number of the HMI can be edited
under【Station Number】.

【Overwrite System Password】

Check whether to overwrite the system password of the
HMI. After checked, the system password of the HMI can be
edited under【Enable System Password】.

【Enable System Password】

Check whether to enable the system password of the HMI.
After checked, the system password of the HMI can be
edited on the right.

【Select Locked Options】

After checked【Enable System Password】, can check the
items to be locked in the system settings of the HMI at the
bottom, includes【Lock Ethernet】、【Lock Servers】、【Lock
Backlight】、【Lock Display】、【Lock Time】、【Lock System
Info】、【Lock MISC-Audio Buzzer】、【Lock MISC-Remote
Password】and【Lock MISC-Customer ID】.

【Mask Passwords】
Mask the password of【Use password to protect this
configuration files】, default is checked .

18.1.2.3 【Ethernet】
【System Setting Configure】【Ethernet】setting paging as shown below, the meaning
of each setting is as follows :

658
 Figure 383【System Setting Configure】【Ethernet】setting page

Table 251 【System Setting Configure】【Ethernet】properties setting

Properties Description

【Ethernet】 【Overwrite Ethernet】

Check whether to overwrite the ethernet setting of the
HMI. After checked, the ethernet setting of the HMI can be
edited under【Enable Ethernet】.

【Enable Ethernet】
Check whether to enable【Ethernet】on the HMI. After
checked, the ethernet IP address or【DHCP】of the HMI
can be edited under【Enable Ethernet】.

【Use DHCP】
Check whether to use【Use DHCP】, if【Use DHCP】is
checked, the four options of【IP Address】、【Net Mask】、
【Gateway】and【DNS】will be turned off and set by the
system.

18.1.2.4 【Sever】
【System Setting Configure】 【Server】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

659
 Figure 384【System Setting Configure】【Sever】setting page

Table 252 【System Setting Configure】【Sever】properties setting

Properties Description

【Overwrite FTP Check whether the HMI FTP server settings are overwritten
or not. After checked, select【Enable FTP Server】below
Server】
and edit other FTP-related settings.

【Enable FTP Server】

Check whether to enable the【Enable FTP Server】function
of the HMI. If select it, you can edit the FTP port, user name
and password below.

【Port】
Select the port of FTP server to use.

【Enable Read-Only Account】

Check whether to enable read-only account.
After checked,you can set the user’s name and password
below.

【Enable Read-Write Account】

Check whether to enable read-write account.
After checked,you can set the user’s name and password
below.

660
 【Overwrite VNC Check whether the HMI VNC server settings are overwritten
or not. After checked, select【Enable VNC Server】below
Server】
and edit other VNC-related settings.

【Enable VNC Server】

Check whether to enable the【Enable VNC Server】
function of the HMI. If select it, you can edit the VNC port,
and password below.

【Connection】
Set the number of VNC clients that can be connected to this
VNC server at the same time. The maximum number of
supported devices will vary depending on the model.

【Port】
To set the VNC connection port, you can only set the
connection line for the first client. The second line will
automatically increase. For example, the first setting is
5900, and the second line is 5901.

【Password】
Enter the password of VNC server.
【Overwrite Pass Check whether to overwrite port of the pass through
setting.
Through】
【Port】
Set the port the pass through.
【Mask 【Mask Passwords】
Passwords】 Mask the password of【FTP Server】and【VNC Server】
that user edited.

18.1.2.5 【Display】
【System Setting Configure】【Display】setting paging as shown below, the meaning
of each setting is as follows :

661
 Figure 385【System Setting Configure】【Display】setting page

Table 253 【System Setting Configure】【Display】properties setting

Properties Description

【Overwrite Check whether to overwrite the language setting of the HMI

Language】
【Language】
Select language to overwrite
【Overwrite Check whether to overwrite the rotation setting of the HMI

Rotation】
【Rotation】
Select rotation to overwrite
Note: Changes will not take effect until the next reboot.
【Overwrite Check whether to overwrite the backlight brightness of the
HMI.
Brightness】
【Brightness】
Set the backlight brightness of the HMI.

18.1.2.6 【Time】
【System Setting Configure】【Time】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 386【System Setting Configure】【Time】setting page

662
 Table 254 【System Setting Configure】【Time】properties setting
Properties Description

【Overwrite Check whether to overwrite the calender setting of the

HMI.
Calender】
【Calender】
Select calender to overwrite.
【Overwrite Check whether to overwrite the time zone of the HMI.

TImezone】
【Time Zone】
Select time zone to overwrite.
【Overwrite NTP】 Check whether to overwrite the NTP of the HMI.

【Enable NTP】
Check whether to enable NTP.

18.1.2.7 【MISC】
【System Setting Configure】【MISC】setting paging as shown below, the meaning of
each setting is as follows :

Figure 387【System Setting Configure】【MISC】setting page

Table 255 【System Setting Configure】【MISC】properties setting

Properties Description

【Overwrite Check whether to overwrite the buzzer setting of the HMI.

Buzzer】
【Enable Buzzer】
Check whether to enable buzzer.
【Overwrite Check whether the audio setting of the HMI.

Audio】
【Enable Audio】
Check whether to enable audio.

663
 【Overwrite Check whether to overwrite the remote password setting of
the HMI.
Remote
Password】
【Enable Remote Password】
Check whether to enable remote password, set the
password on the right.
【Overwrite Check whether to overwrite the customer ID setting of the
HMI.
Customer ID】
【Enable Customer ID】
Check whether to enable customer ID, set the password on
the right.
【Mask 【Mask Passwords】
Passwords】 Mask the password of【Remote Password】and
【Customer ID】that user edited.

18.1.3 Download Security

If system password is set, HMI will ask user for this password to proceed before
downloading. If the project has a set download password, you must enter the correct
input cfrp download password to continue to download, if the error is entered, the
download will be terminated.

18.2 【Upload】
Users can upload the running package (.cfrp) saved on the HMI, which includes the
project, recipes, fonts, etc. onto the computer so that users can easily transfer the
running package onto different HMIs. This is helpful in situations such as when
expanding similar plants, where network or computer equipment is limited.
18.2.1 Uploading running package to a computer
from the HMI
The upload function can be found in the【Project】function tab on the ribbon
taskbar on top of the FvDesigner. Click on【Upload】 and a dialog window will open
and enter the【Upload Manager】setting screen.

Figure 388 Open the upload function

664
The following are detailed descriptions for the【Upload Manager】.

Figure 389 Upload Manager function interface

Table 256 Upload Manager-related parameters

Properties Description

【Connection 【COM】
Setting】 Select to perform the upload through the serial port. The port
number used for uploading must also be specified when this
option is selected.

【Ethernet】
Select to perform the upload through the Ethernet. The IP address
of the target HMI must also be specified when this option is
selected. Press【Scan】on the right to acquire the HMI IP
addresses and device names currently online. Users can also
manually enter the IP address of the target HMI to perform the
upload.
Note: The Scan button may have no effect under certain network
environments (usually when the DHCP server cannot accurately configure the
IP addresses). In this case, the command window can be opened to execute
the following commands in sequence to restore the function.
1. netsh winsock reset
2. netsh interface ipv4 reset
3. ipconfig /flushdns
Please re-start the computer when completed for the settings to take effect.

【USB】
Perform the upload through USB.

The USB Driver is under the FvDesigner installation path. The

default USB Driver is under the C:\Program
Files\Fatek\FvDesigner\Ver1.5\usb driver data file.
665
 You can also click on【Install USB Driver】in the【Tools】tab of
the ribbon to install directly.

【Choose a 【Save To】

path to Specify the storage path after the running package is uploaded.
upload
running
package】
【Other 【Upload Internal Register ($U:XNV)】
settings】 Upload HMI’s XNV register data as well.

【Status】 Displays the current upload status and upload progress.

【Start】
Press this switch to start uploading once setting configuration is
completed.

【Close】
Press this switch to end uploading and close the upload window.

18.2.2 Upload Security

If system password is set, HMI will ask user for this password to proceed before
uploading. If the project has a set upload password, you must enter the correct input
cfrp uppassword to continue to upload, if the error is entered, the upload will be
terminated.

18.3 【Make USB Update File】

Users can also update the project by using a USB flash disk, it's convenient to update
plenty of HMI within a short time.

18.3.1 Make USB Update File from PC

The function of making USB update file can be found in the【Project】function tab
on the task bar above FvDesigner, and click【Make USB Update File】. After the
dialog window opens, you can directly enter the setting page.

666
 Figure 390 Make USB Update File

Figure 391 Make USB Update File setting page

Table 257 Make USB Update File function setting

Properties Description

【Data】 【Target Folder】

Choose the folder to save the file.

【File Name】
Name the file.
【Delete This field determines whether to clear the existing data saved on
the HMI:
from HMI】
【Select/Deselect All】
After checked, all the following options will be checked. If not
checked, all items below will be unchecked.

【Backup Memory】
If this option is selected, the NV and XNV registers on the HMI will
be cleared when the download process begins.

【Alarm】
If this option is selected, the existing alarm log on the HMI will be
deleted when the download process begins. The HMI will clear all
files under /internal/alarm/.

667
 【Recipe】
If this option is selected, the existing recipe files on the HMI will
be deleted when the download process begins. The HMI will clear
all files under /internal/recipe/.

【Data Log】
If this option is selected, the existing data log on the HMI will be
deleted when the download process begins. The HMI will clear all
files under /internal/datalog/.

【Print】
If this option is selected, the screenshots saved in the HMI internal
memory will be deleted when the download process begins. The
HMI will clear all files under /internal/hardcopy/.

【Link】
If this option is selected, the program will start the deletion of the
original link parameters and replace them with the new link
parameters.

【Security Password】
If this option is selected, the password table on the HMI will be
deleted when the download process begins. If this option is
selected, the original password table will be retained.

【Operation Log】
If this option is selected, the existing operation log on the HMI will
be deleted when the download process begins. The HMI will clear
all files under /internal/operationlog/.

【Data Transfer】
If this option is selected, the data transfer files on the HMI will be
deleted when the download process begins. The HMI will clear all
files under /internal/datatransfer/.

【Installment】
If this option is selected, the download process will delete the
original installment information and the previously entered
records.

【Schedule】
If this option is selected, the download process will delete the
original data that has been modified through the【Schedule】on
668
 the HMI, so the schedule will based on the project; if not checked,
the original data that has been modified through the【Schedule】
on HMI will be retained.

【Others】
If this option is selected, all other files on the HMI will be deleted
when the download process begins. The HMI will clear all files
under /internal/ not including the options detailed above.
【Other 【Userdefined Startup Screen】
settings】 Allows designers to define their own HMI boot screen, such as the
title of the company, etc., after the option is checked, you can
choose a picture on the PC. After the project download is
complete, the HMI boot screen will be changed. Fatek HMI factory
boot screen, default location:
(Under 64-bit Windows)
C:\Program Files (x86)\FATEK\FvDesigner\Ver1.5\startup screen
(Under 32-bit Windows)
C:\Program Files\FATEK\FvDesigner\Ver1.5\startup screen

【Write System Setting】

Providing parameters that can be set to the HMI at the same time
when the project downloads, can reduce the tedious setting work,
especially when the same project is downloaded to multiple HMI,
each of the HMI does not need to enter the system settings screen
settings, after checked, select the *.fscfg file on the right, or press
the Edit button on the right to edit the *.fscfg file. For details,
refer to chapter18.1.2-Write System Setting .

18.4 【Compile】
18.4.1 Compile Introduction
Compile is used to confirm the accuracy of the current plan and also converts the
HMI plan project into a running package that can be placed into the HMI. The
running package includes settings and the converted language required for the HMI.
The compiling running packages includes the two parts: (1) Starting compilation (2)
Checking for errors after compilation is complete. The introduction to these two
parts are as follows.

18.4.2 Start compiling running packages

To start compiling, press the【Compile】switch in the【Project】section of the HMI
toolbar.

669
 Figure 392 Perform compile from the toolbar above

18.4.3 Ending compile and error check

When the compilation ends, the compile process will be displayed in the【Output
Message】below, and a running package (with file extension cfrp, which is short for
Compress FATEK Running Package) to be used on the HMI will be generated. This
running package can be placed in the HMI for use.

Figure 393 Compilation process illustration

Figure 394 Compilation results illustration

If any errors were generated during the compilation, it will be displayed in the
【Output Message】. The error information will include the (1) component, (2)
success or error code and (3) compile message as shown in Figure 393. Users can
click on the message once to move to the object or double-click on the message to
open the error screen and focus on the component setting screen of the error,
670
allowing the user to quickly debug the error.

Figure 395 Single click on the compile failure message window to jump to the
component

Figure 396 Double click on the compile failure message to open the screen setting

18.4.4 Decompile
The main purpose of the decompile function is to copy the project (.cfrp) from the
HMI to the computer or the compiled project (.cfrp) and restore it to the file format
(.fpj) so that the FvDesigner software can edit it.

To start the【Decompile】function, press the【Decompile】icon in the Project tab.

671
 Figure 397 Decompile Function

Figure 398 Decompile dialog window

Table 258 Decompile dialog window settings

Field Description

【Source Project】 Specify the path and file for the project source

【Target Folder】 Specify the destination path for the generated file from the
project decompilation.
【Target Select whether the file name generated after the
decompilation is the same as the project source or
Filename】 determined by the user.

18.5 【Simulation】
18.5.1 Simulation Introduction
【Simulation】is used to perform preliminary tests before downloading the running
package to the HMI in order to reduce the likelihood of finding errors after being
downloaded into the HMI. Running simulations can verify the accuracy of the project
plan. The simulation function can be run on the PC to simulate how the running
package will run on the HMI. Simulations provided by Fatek are divided into【Offline
Simulation】and【Online Simulation】. The simulation setting window can be used
to determine whether to start the Offline or Online Simulation.

672
 Figure 399 Simulation setting window

18.5.2 Starting Simulation

Users can start【Simulation】by opening the simulation setting window from
【Project】, and then selecting whether to perform【Offline Simulation】or
【Online Simulation】.

Figure 400 Starting simulation

18.5.3 Offline Simulation

Figure 401 Offline Simulation

【Offline Simulation】is as shown in Figure 401. A simulator will open on the PC and
create a virtual PLC that is connected to the HMI in the memory of the PC. Therefore,
no communication errors will be generated during the simulated connection. The
simulated connection is used to verify the accuracy of the screen and logic.

673
 18.5.4 Online Simulation
The difference between【Online Simulation】and【Offline Simulation】is that the
PLC to connect (serial or network connection) can be set. As shown below, Online
Simulation can be started when the setting is complete.

Figure 402 Online simulation connection setting

【Online Simulation】is as shown in Figure 402 Similar to【Offline Simulation】, a

simulator is opened on the PC. However, the PC will communicate with the PLC.
Therefore, if there is no PLC connected to the PC, the PLC is not responding, or there
is a PLC connection setting error, communication error message will be generated.
Online Simulation not only can verify the accuracy of the screen/logic, but it can also
verify the accuracy of the communication.
Note: Online Simulation
1) It can only be run for 30 minutes.
2) If serial port configuration of project is different from the PC, you have to configure
the serial port number before running an Online Simulation.

Figure 403 Online simulation illustration

674
 19. Tool
19.1 【File Transfer】
【File Transfer】allows the user to transfer files from the computer to the HMI or
vice versa via USB connection. To use the【FTP Transmission Function】, please refer
to Chapter 4.1 -【FTP Server】for instructions.

The operation flow of【File Transfer】will be described in detail below.

You can open the file transfer function window by clicking File Transfer on the Tools
tab of the FvDesigner taskbar.

Figure 404【File Transfer】

Click【File Transfer】, the window that pops up is the file transfer function.

Figure 405【File Transfer】Window

Tabel 259【File Transfer】Button descriptions

Field Description

【Connection 【COM】
Settings】 Do the file transfer through COM port.

675
 【USB】
Do the file transfer through mini-USB port.
【Start When the computer is connected to the HMI via USB, the
user can press start connection to start the file transfer.
Connection】
【Stop Connecting】 To end the file transfer, press【Stop Connecting】.
【Close】 Same function as【Stop Connecting】,but also close the
window afterwards.

Open【Remote System Setting】and connect to your HMI device. Click MISC, enable
the remote password setting, and set a password. Now, when performing the【File
Transfer】function, the user will be prompted to enter the password in order to
complete the transfer.

Figure 406【File Transfer】Password Prompt Window

After connecting to the HMI successfully, you will see the following window.

Figure 407【File Transfer】Successful Connection Window

Table 260【File Transfer】After Connecting

Field Description

【Local】 【Local Path】

676
 Displays current computer path

【Home】
Click this icon to return to My Computer(home page).

【Previous Page】
Click this icon to return to the previous path.

【Delete】
Click this icon to delete the local archive.

【Select Location】
Click this icon to jump out of the window and easily
select the desired local folder.

Press the right mouse button on a file to to display the

menu below

【Enter Folder】
Click this icon enter the currently selected folder.

【Add New Folder】

Click this icon to create a new folder in the selected
location.

【Download】
Click this icon to download selected files to the HMI.

【Delete】

677
 Click this icon to delete the selected file.

【Rename】
Click rename to change the name of a file or folder.
【HMI】 【HMI Path】
Displays current HMI path.

【Home】
Click this icon to go back to the home page.

【Previous Page】
Press this icon to go back to the previous path.

【Delete】
Click this icon to delete the selected HMI file.

【Refresh】
Click this icon to refresh the current server-side folder
information.

Press the right mouse button to view the menu below.

【Open Folder】
Click this icon to open the selected folder.

【Add a new folder】

Click this icon to add a new folder and enter the folder
name, as shown in the window below.

【Upload】
Click this icon to upload the selected file to the local
directory.

【Delete】
678
 Click this icon to delete the HMI file.

【Rename】
Click rename to change the selected folder name.
【Transmission】 【Download】
Click this icon to download the selected files to the
HMI.

【Upload】
Click this icon to upload the selected files to the local
directory (computer).

You can also perform these two tasks by simply dragging

the desired item to the other directory.

After successfully connecting the computer and the HMI, the files are ready to be
transferred. A datalog transfer will be similar to the image below.

Figure 408【File Transfer】Download File Complete

19.2 【Pass Through】

Pass Through is communication between a PLC and PC through the HMI.

679
Generally, when the PC wants to perform serial communications with the PLC,
related application programs such as WinProLadder (Fatek PLC programming
software), is used on the PC and communicates directly with the PLC through the
【Ethernet】or the COM port/USB on the PC. However, under some circumstances,
the PC cannot connect to the PLC directly or connection information with the PLC
cannot be acquired directly. The【Pass Through Function】is provided for such
conditions so that the PC can perform serial communications with the PLC indirectly,
and also acquire the register data of the device. The communication mode is as
shown in Figure 409 Pass Through architecture.

Figure 409 Pass Through architecture

19.2.1 Setting Pass Through

To use pass through, users must first use the FvDesigner to connect to the HMI that
they want to pass through and switch it to【Pass Through Mode】. The goal of this
action is to tell the HMI to change its operating mode in preparation to be used for
【Pass Through】. After successfully setting the HMI to the pass through mode, the
HMI will be able to transfer all data coming from the specific port of the PC to the
specified PLC.

After the setup, users can use the WinProLadder or other related applications to
specify the same port to communicate with the HMI. Although the PC is not directly
connected to the PLC, the HMI will transfer all data received from the specified port to
the PLC. Therefore in terms of behavior, the result will be the same as connecting
directly to the PLC. When the task is complete, FvDesigner can be used again to switch
HMI back to the normal operation mode.

The following are detailed descriptions of the【Pass Through】operating process.

The Pass Through function can be launched by clicking on the【Pass Through】icon in

the【Tools】function tab of the FvDesigner task bar to open the function window.

Figure 410 【Pass Through】

The dialog that appears after pressing【Pass Through】is the main operating inter-face
680
of the【Pass Through】function. Parameters that can be set include three major
categories that correspond to the individually related parameters of PC, HMI and PLC,
respectively. For the PC side, the serial port to be used by the HMI can be set (can only
be set when the serial port communication is selected). For the HMI side, its IP address,
the input COM used to receive data from the PC side and the output COM used to send
the data to the PLC side can be set. For the PLC side, related parameters used can be
set for the serial communication between the PLC and the HMI.

Figure 411 Pass Through parameter setting page

Detailed descriptions of each parameter are as follows:

Table 261 Pass Through related parameters

Property Description

【Pass Through 【COM】

by】 Use the serial port to communicate between the PC and the
HMI.

【Ethernet (TCP)】
Use Ethernet to communicate between the PC and the HMI.

【USB】
Use USB to communicate between the PC and the HMI.
【PLC Type】 【COM】
Use the serial port to communicate between the HMI and
the PLC.

【Ethernet (TCP)】
Use Ethernet to communicate between the HMI and the PLC.
【Connection 【PC】

681
 Setting】 1. 【Output COM】: When【COM】or【USB】is
selected for【Pass Through by】, this field will be
enabled to specify the serial port to use for the PC
output. On the other hand when the【Ethernet
(TCP)】is selected, this field is disabled.

【HMI】
1. 【IP Address】: Specifies the IP address of the
target HMI to pass through; when the【Ethernet
(TCP)】is selected for【Pass Through by】, all IP
addresses of HMIs in the local area network will
automatically be scanned for the user to select the
target HMI for pass through. User can press the
【 】button after this field to refresh IP address
list or manually input an IP address.
2. 【Input COM】: When【COM】is selected for
【Pass Through by】, press the button【 】to get
all available serial ports on the target HMI. When
the【Ethernet (TCP)】is selected for【Pass Through
by】, this field will be locked and unavailable for
use.
3. 【Output COM】: Press the button【 】to get all
available serial ports on the target HMI; The scan
results will be displayed in this pull-down menu.
4. 【Transparent Mode (FATEK PLC only)】: Users can
do the operation on the HMI at the same time.

【PLC】
1. 【Baud Rate】: This field can be used to set the baud
rate of the target device to pass through.
2. 【Stop Bits】: This field can be used to set the stop
bits of the target device to pass through.
3. 【Parity Check Bits】: This field can be used to set the
parity check bits of the target device to pass through.
4. 【Data Bits】: This field can be used to set the data
bits of the target device to pass through.
5. 【IP Address】: Specifies the IP address of the target
PLC to pass through; when the【Ethernet (TCP)】is
682
 selected for【PLC Type】, all IP addresses of PLCs in
the local area network will automatically be scanned
for the user to select the target PLC for pass through.
User can press the 【 】button after this field to
refresh IP address list or manually input an IP address.
6. 【Port】: Set the port while using the【Ethernet
(TCP)】.
【Start Pass Through】
After setting the【Connection Setting】related parameters,
press【Start Pass Through】to perform pass through.

【End Pass Through】

To end pass through, press 【End Pass Through】on the PC
or HMI.

【Close】
This function is the same as【End Pass Through】; It will also
close the dialog window after ending pass through.

19.2.2 Pass Through Example

The following shows a simple example for performing pass through Ethernet using
WinProLadder (Fatek PLC programming software).

As described in the previous section of this chapter, FvDesigner must be used to

connect to the HMI to pass through in order to use the HMI. Its operating mode must
be switched to【Pass Through Mode】so that the HMI can transfer the data received
from the specified port to the specified Output COM. In order to achieve this goal, first
open the FvDesigner and click on the【Pass Through】function,

683
 Figure 412 Pass Through parameter setting interface

then select the 【 Ethernet 】 as the connection method since the PC will not be
connected to the HMI through the serial port. The HMI【Output COM】must still be
set.

The user must first press the【 】after the【IP Address】field to get all HMI IP address
on the network those are available for pass through, or enter an IP manually. The user
must know which serial port is used by the HMI to connect to the PLC, else the pass
through function will not be able to operate.

Next, the user must set the related parameters of the serial port used with the PLC.
Please note that if the parameters set here are not correct for this PLC, it is likely for
unexpected communication failures to occur.

After setting all the parameters, press【Start Pass Through】to switch the target HMI
to pass through mode to facilitate the follow-up actions. If the HMI was successfully
switched to pass through mode, the status of the operating inter-face will change as
shown in the figure below. The status field will show that the HMI was successfully
changed to pass through mode.

684
 Figure 413 Successfully switched HMI to Pass Through mode

At this time all pre-procedures are completed and the HMI is ready to transfer data
between the PC and PLC at any time. User can open the WinProLadder and select【PLC】
→【Connect】

Figure 414 Open WinProLadder connection settings

Connection-related options will appear after clicking. The communication between

the PC side and the HMI side in this pass through is through the 【Ethernet】. Therefore,
select FATEK-TCP for the connection name.

Figure 415 Selecting the communication protocol

The TCP connection-related parameters can be set after pressing Edit, as shown in the
figure below:

685
 Figure 416 Setting the WinProLadder Ethernet communication parameters

Users need to specify IP address of the HMI, which is going to pass through to the PLC.
After configuration is completed, the user can press the OK button to perform pass
through.

Note: When using Pass Through function, if the PLC is Fatek HB1, and HMI communicates with the
PLC via PLC Port, the baud rate needs to set at 115200 in WinProLadder. .

19.3 【PLC Resource Review】

The 【PLC Resource Review】function can be used if the user needs information on
the PLC driver versions supported by FvDesigner or internal PLC single point and
register information. The【PLC Resource Review】function allows users to find
related information.

This chapter will explain【PLC Resource Review】related pages and the usage.

19.3.1 Usage Methods

Select【PLC Resource Review】in the【Tools】page of the【Ribbon】and the following
window will appear.

Figure 417 【PLC Resource Review】

686
 Figure 418 PLC Resource Review

The PLC manufacturer and series model can be selected at the top half of the【PLC
Resource Review】 as shown in the figure below.

Figure 419 PLC Resource Review–Select PLC manufacturer and series model

Information on the supported PLC driver versions, internal PLC single point, and
registers is available for access will appear when the selection is complete, as shown
in the figure below.

Figure 420 Information of supported PLC driver versions

Figure 421 Information on internal PLC single point and registers available for access

687
Introduction to the internal PLC single point and registers available for access is as
shown in the table below.

Table 262 Introduction to internal single point and register information

Name Description

【Device Type】 Represent the code of the single point or register in the PLC.

【Data Bits】 Represent the number of bits occupied by the data of this
【Device Type】.
【Address Represent the address format that must be used to access
this【Device Type】.
Format】
【Max】 Represent the maximum value of the address range
available for access for this【Device Type】.
【Min】 Represent the minimum value of the address range
available for access for this【Device Type】.
【Description】 Describe the function and usage of the【Device Type】.

19.4 【Remote System Setting】

Users can remote the HMI's system setting to modify the settings.

Figure 422【Remote System Setting】

19.4.1 Usage Method

Users need to set up the HMI’s IP before doing connection. After connect successfully
users can directly modify the settings, but【Link】and【Calibration】were unable
to do. More details please refer to ch21-System Settings.

Figure 423【Remote System Setting】setting page

688
 Figure 424【Remote System Setting】successfully connect to HMI

19.5 【FATEK PLC Transfer Encrypt Tool】

This function is that when the user uses the HMI's USB storage device to update the
linked FATEK PLC ladder diagram program, the operation can be protected, thereby
protecting the PLC ladder diagram program and intellectual property planned by the
designer. More details please refer to ch24.3-【FATEK PLC Transfer Encrypt Tool】

Figure 425【FATEK PLC Transfer Encrypt Tool】

19.6 【FBF Reader】

【FBF Reader】is used when reading the *.FBF file of the FATEK’s own format or
when converting a *.FBF file to another file format. It can be converted to a *.TXT
file, *.CSV file, or *.PDF file. For how to generate *.FBF files, please refer to
chapter7.2.3-【Export Data】 .

The following will explain in detail the operation flow of【FBF Reader】.

FBF Reader function Click【FBF Reader】on the【Tools】tab on the ribbon to open

the function window.

Figure 426【FBF Reader】

689
After selecting【FBF Reader】, the popup dialog box is the main operation interface
of【FBF Reader】function, as shown below.

Figure 427【FBF Reader】function dialog

Tabel 263【FBF Reader】menu descriptions

Properties Description

【File】 【Open】
Open FATEK’s own format *.FBF file.

【Save as】
After reading FATEK’s own format *.FBF file, save as *.TXT
file, *.CSV file or *.PDF file, etc.

Save as new file if choose to save as PDF, the following

dialog will appear, you can set the font type, size and
format. Press the【Generate】button to convert the *.FBF
file to a PDF file.

690
 【Quit】
Leave and close the FBF Reader.
【Function】 【Font Setting】
Adjust the font size to the display *.FBF file in FATEK’s own
format.

Tabel 264【FBF Reader】tool bar descriptions

Icon Description

【Open】
Open FATEK’s own *.FBF file.
【Save as】
After reading FATEK’s own format *.FBF file, save as *.TXT
file, *.CSV file or *.PDF file, etc.
【Font Setting】
Adjust the font size to the display *.FBF file in FATEK’s own
format.
Set the date and time to search for FBF files.
Search, set the date and time to search the FBF file and
press this button, the cursor will be displayed in this
column, as shown below.

691
 19.7 【Install USB Driver】
The FvDesigner can do the connection with HMI by using mini-USB cable, to install
the driver to make sure the function work.

Figure 428【Install USB Driver】

19.8 【Download】
Users can download the project with the extension filename .cfrp except the current
project.

Figure 429【Download】

692
 Figure 430【Download】setting page

19.9 【iAccess】
This function needs to login to the FATEK cloud, provides project upload, download,
and remote.

Figure 431【iAccess】

Figure 432【iAccess】login page

693
 Figure 433【iAccess】operation page

694
 20. Address Registers
The FvDesigner has four types of internal address registers for use during designing,
including Volatile Memory Registers $U:V, Non-volatile Memory Registers $U:NV,
Non-real-time NV Memory $U:XNV and Non-real-time NV Memory $U:XNVA. Internal
and external PLC address registers all support access using characters or bits, and also
support index register function, making it flexible and convenient when planning
register location configurations.
In addition, special system tags are planned in some sections of the volatile registers
and more may be added as functions are added. The function plans of each register
are as shown in the chapters below:

20.1 Internal Address Register Range

【$U:V】 Volatile Memory Registers
The V memory will not be saved when the system power is cut; all the data
on the V memory will be reset to 0 once power is reconnected.

【$U:NV】 Non-volatile Memory Registers

All of the data on the NV memory will be saved in time and will not be
cleared when the system power is cut. The total size of the NV memory
varies between series. For the P5 series, the total size is 120KB, in which the
size that can be used as the internal register $U:NV can be configured
according to the requirement plan of the user; the default is set to 2K. The
rest of the memory capacity is used as the section for the data backup
function.

【$U:XNV】 Non-real-time NV Memory Registers

The total capacity of XNV varies between series. For the P5 series, the
capacity is 12MB; in which the size used as the internal registers $U:XNV is
1MB; the remaining 11MB memory capacity is used as the section for the
data backup function. The data in the XNV memory are automatically backed
up into a file every minute in order to prolong the lifespan of the flash
memory; the data saved in the file will be read into the XNV memory every
time the system boots up. Users can set the special system tag
【SS_FORCE_BACKUP_XNV】to back up the XNV memory into the file in
real-time in addition to the scheduled backup mechanism.

【$U:XNVA】 Non-real-time NV Memory Registers

The XNVA memory data is automatically backed up in the file every minute.
When the system is turned on, the last stored data is read from the file in the
XNVA memory. In addition to the regular backup mechanism, the user can
also back up the XNVA memory in the file by setting a special system register
695
 【SS_FORCE_BACKUP_XNV】. It can be used as the size of the internal
register $U:XNVA, which can be planned and configured according to user
requirements. The default is 2K. The remaining capacity is used as backup
data area.

Table 265 Internal Registers Address Range

Register Maximum Address Range Format
Capacity (Characters)
Volatile Memory 512KB 0 ~ 262143 Character
Registers $U:Vaaaaaa
【$U:V】 Bit
$U:Vaaaaaa.bb
Non-volatile 120KB 0 ~ 61439 Character
Memory Registers (default 2KB) (default 0~2048) $U:NVaaaaa
【$U:NV】 Bit
$U:NVaaaaa.bb
Non-real-time NV 1MB 0 ~ 524287 Character
Memory Registers $U:XNVaaaaaa
【$U:XNV】 Bit
$U:XNVaaaaaa.bb
Non-real-time NV 120KB 0 ~ 61439 Character
Memory Registers (default 2KB) (default 0~2048) $U:XNVAaaaaa
【$U:XNVA】 Bit
$U:XNVAaaaaa.bb

20.2 Index Register

Index Register is used to change address register in run-time. When operating on HMI,
the address register configuration of object does not be changed, user could access
register value of object according to different address conveniently. And it makes it
easy and flexible to transfer data between different regions.

20.2.1 Usage
The following example explains how to use Index Register.

Figure 434 Input Address Dialog-Device Register

696
Click the check box Index Register and select number 0. The device will use Index
Register 0 for that address as the input address.

Figure 435 Input Address Dialog-Use Index Register 0

If user would like to setup Index Register to change its value. Index Register can be
chosen in System Tags.

Figure 436 Input Address Dialog-System Tags-Index Register

Figure 437 Index Register Example

$U:V2000
Value of internal volatile-memory register V2000, example value: 1122.
$U:V2001
Value of internal volatile-memory register V2001, example value: 3344.
$U:V2002
Value of internal volatile-memory register V2002, example value: 5566.
$U:V2000[$I0]
Value of internal volatile-memory register
V(2000+value of index register 0)
$S:I0
Value of index register 0

697
 By modifying the value of index register 0, the value of $U:V2000[$I0] also changes.
Value of index register-0 is 0
$U:V2000[$I0] = $U:V2000

Figure 438 Index Register Example $S:I0 = 0

Value of index register-0 is 1

$U:V2000[$I0] = $U:V2001

Figure 439 Index Register Example $S:I0 = 1

Value of index register-0 is 2

$U:V2000[$I0] = $U:V2002

Figure 440 Index Register Example $S:I0 = 2

20.3 Special System Tags

20.3.1 Operations
Name Address Description Read/Write
($U:V)
OP_REBOOT 250010.0 (1b)Reboot HMI device. Read/Write
OP_BUZZER 250011.0 (1b)Open (1)/ Close (0) buzzer Read/Write
output.
OP_AUDIO 250011.1 (1b)Open (1) / Close (0) audio Read/Write
output.
OP_DIMMER_EN 250030.0 (1b)Open (1) / Close (0) backlight Read/Write
energy-saving function.
OP_SCREEN_SAVER_EN 250030.1 (1b)Open (1) / Close (0) screen saver Read/Write
function.

698
OP_UPDATE_SCREEN 250030.2 (1b) Set to (1) update the status of Read/Write
_OBJECTS the object. After updating the
system, this signal will be
automatically changed to (0)
OP_FW_VER_MAJOR 250101 (16b)Firmware major version Read Only
information.
OP_FW_VER_MINOR 250102 (16b)Firmware minor version Read Only
information.
OP_FW_VER_REVISION 250103 (16b)Firmware revision information. Read Only
OP_BATTERY_LEVEL 250110 (16b) Battery Level (Low1~High5). Read Only
OP_BASE_SCREEN_ID 250500 (16b) Current Base Screen ID. Read Only
OP_BACKLIGHT_LEVEL 251002 (16b)Current brightness level of the Read/Write
backlight.
OP_BACKLIGHT_TIME 251003 (16b)Backlight power saving time. Read/Write
OP_SCREEN_SAVER_TIME 251004 (16b)Screen saver time. Read/Write

20.3.2 Save File

Name Address Description Read/Write
($U:V)
SS_HMI_WARNING 250021.0 (1b)HMI internal user storage free Read/Write
space insufficiency warning.
SS_SSD_STATUS 250020.3 (1b)HMI has detected SD Read
card(1)/HMI does not detect SD
card(0)
SS_USB_STATUS 250020.4 (1b)HMI has detected USB(1)/HMI Read
does not detect a USB(0)
SS_FORCE_BACKUP_XNV 250021.0 (1b)Force the data in the XNV Read/Write
memory to be backed up in the HMI
using a file format.
SS_RESET_XNV 250022.0 (1b)ClearXNV memory data and clear Read/Write
all XNV files.
SS_HMI_FREE_SPACE 251300 (32b)Current free space on HMI. Read
SS_SD_FREE_SPACE 251302 (32b)Available storage space in SD Read
card, units in bytes.
SS_USB_FREE_SPACE 251304 (32b)Available USB storage space, Read
units in bytes.

20.3.3 Time
Name Address Description Read/Write
($U:V)
TIME_SYSTEM_TIME 251100 (32b)System time (0.1sec). Read/Write
TIME_SYSTEM_AMPM 251102 (16b)Time information AM:0, PM: 1. Read/Write
699
TIME_LOCAL_HOUR12 251103 (16b)Local time (12-hour format) Read/Write
TIME_LOCAL_SECOND 251104 (16b)Local time (Second) Read/Write
TIME_LOCAL_MINUTE 251105 (16b)Local time (Minute) Read/Write
TIME_LOCAL_HOUR 251106 (16b)Local time (Hour) Read/Write
TIME_LOCAL_DAY 251107 (16b)Local time (Day) Read/Write
TIME_LOCAL_MONTH 251108 (16b)Local time (Month) Read/Write
TIME_LOCAL_YEAR 251109 (16b)Local time (Year) Read/Write
TIME_LOCAL_WEEK 251110 (16b)Local time (Day of week) Read/Write
TIME_CALENDER_TYPE 251111 (16b)Calender type: Gregorian Read
calendar: 0, Persian calendar: 1

20.3.4 Touch Control Positions

Name Address Description Read/Write
($U:V)
TOUCH_DOWN_X 251008 (16b) Position of X for touch control Read Only
TOUCH_DOWN_Y 251009 (16b) Position of Y for touch control Read Only
TOUCH_UP_X 251010 (16b) Position of X when exiting Read Only
TOUCH_UP_Y 251011 (16b) Position of Y when exiting Read Only
CURSOR_POS_X 251012 (16b) X position of the mouse cursor Read Only
CURSOR_POS_Y 251013 (16b) Y position of the mouse cursor Read Only

20.3.5 Network Information

Name Address Description Read/Write
($U:V)
NET_IP0 251201 (16b) HMI IP0 address. Read Only
NET_IP1 251202 (16b) HMI IP1 address. Read Only
NET_IP2 251203 (16b) HMI IP2 address. Read Only
NET_IP3 251204 (16b) HMI IP3 address. Read Only
NET_GATEWAY0 251205 (16b) HMI Default gateway GATEWAY0 Read Only
address.
NET_GATEWAY1 251206 (16b) HMI Default gateway GATEWAY1 Read Only
address.
NET_GATEWAY2 251207 (16b) HMI Default gateway GATEWAY2 Read Only
address.
NET_GATEWAY3 251208 (16b) HMI Default gateway GATEWAY3 Read Only
address.
NET_MASK0 251209 (16b) HMI Subnet mask MASK0 address. Read Only
NET_MASK1 251210 (16b) HMI Subnet mask MASK1 address. Read Only
NET_MASK2 251211 (16b) HMI Subnet mask MASK2 address. Read Only
NET_MASK3 251212 (16b) HMI Subnet mask MASK3 address. Read Only
NET_MAC0 251213 (16b) HMI Physical address MAC0. Read Only

700
NET_MAC1 251214 (16b) HMI Physical address MAC1. Read Only
NET_MAC2 251215 (16b) HMI Physical address MAC2. Read Only
NET_MAC3 251216 (16b) HMI Physical address MAC3. Read Only
NET_MAC4 251217 (16b) HMI Physical address MAC4. Read Only
NET_MAC5 251218 (16b) HMI Physical address MAC5. Read Only

20.3.6 Index Registers (16Bit)

Name Address Description Read/Write
($U:V)
I0 251400 (16b) Address index register 0 Read/Write
I1 251401 (16b) Address index register 1 Read/Write
I2 251402 (16b) Address index register 2 Read/Write
I3 251403 (16b) Address index register 3 Read/Write
I4 251404 (16b) Address index register 4 Read/Write
I5 251405 (16b) Address index register 5 Read/Write
I6 251406 (16b) Address index register 6 Read/Write
I7 251407 (16b) Address index register 7 Read/Write
I8 251408 (16b) Address index register 8 Read/Write
I9 251409 (16b) Address index register 9 Read/Write
I10 251410 (16b) Address index register 10 Read/Write
I11 251411 (16b) Address index register 11 Read/Write
I12 251412 (16b) Address index register 12 Read/Write
I13 251413 (16b) Address index register 13 Read/Write
I14 251414 (16b) Address index register 14 Read/Write
I15 251415 (16b) Address index register 15 Read/Write
I16 251416 (16b) Address index register 16 Read/Write
I17 251417 (16b) Address index register 17 Read/Write
I18 251418 (16b) Address index register 18 Read/Write
I19 251419 (16b) Address index register 19 Read/Write
I20 251420 (16b) Address index register 20 Read/Write
I21 251421 (16b) Address index register 21 Read/Write
I22 251422 (16b) Address index register 22 Read/Write
I23 251423 (16b) Address index register 23 Read/Write
I24 251424 (16b) Address index register 24 Read/Write
I25 251425 (16b) Address index register 25 Read/Write
I26 251426 (16b) Address index register 26 Read/Write
I27 251427 (16b) Address index register 27 Read/Write
I28 251428 (16b) Address index register 28 Read/Write
I29 251429 (16b) Address index register 29 Read/Write
I30 251430 (16b) Address index register 30 Read/Write
I31 251431 (16b) Address index register 31 Read/Write
I32 251432 (16b) Address index register 32 Read/Write
I33 251433 (16b) Address index register 33 Read/Write
701
I34 251434 (16b) Address index register 34 Read/Write
I35 251435 (16b) Address index register 35 Read/Write
I36 251436 (16b) Address index register 36 Read/Write
I37 251437 (16b) Address index register 37 Read/Write
I38 251438 (16b) Address index register 38 Read/Write
I39 251439 (16b) Address index register 39 Read/Write
I40 251440 (16b) Address index register 40 Read/Write
I41 251441 (16b) Address index register 41 Read/Write
I42 251442 (16b) Address index register 42 Read/Write
I43 251443 (16b) Address index register 43 Read/Write
I44 251444 (16b) Address index register 44 Read/Write
I45 251445 (16b) Address index register 45 Read/Write
I46 251446 (16b) Address index register 46 Read/Write
I47 251447 (16b) Address index register 47 Read/Write
I48 251448 (16b) Address index register 48 Read/Write
I49 251449 (16b) Address index register 49 Read/Write
I50 251450 (16b) Address index register 50 Read/Write
I51 251451 (16b) Address index register 51 Read/Write
I52 251452 (16b) Address index register 52 Read/Write
I53 251453 (16b) Address index register 53 Read/Write
I54 251454 (16b) Address index register 54 Read/Write
I55 251455 (16b) Address index register 55 Read/Write
I56 251456 (16b) Address index register 56 Read/Write
I57 251457 (16b) Address index register 57 Read/Write
I58 251458 (16b) Address index register 58 Read/Write
I59 251459 (16b) Address index register 59 Read/Write
I60 251460 (16b) Address index register 60 Read/Write
I61 251461 (16b) Address index register 61 Read/Write
I62 251462 (16b) Address index register 62 Read/Write
I63 251463 (16b) Address index register 63 Read/Write

20.3.7 Index Registers (32Bit)

Name Address Description Read/Write
($U:V)
I64 251464 (32b) Address index register 64 Read/Write
I65 251466 (32b) Address index register 65 Read/Write
I66 251468 (32b) Address index register 66 Read/Write
I67 251470 (32b) Address index register 67 Read/Write
I68 251472 (32b) Address index register 68 Read/Write
I69 251474 (32b) Address index register 69 Read/Write
I70 251476 (32b) Address index register 70 Read/Write
I71 251478 (32b) Address index register 71 Read/Write
I71 251480 (32b) Address index register 72 Read/Write
702
I73 251482 (32b) Address index register 73 Read/Write
I74 251484 (32b) Address index register 74 Read/Write
I75 251486 (32b) Address index register 75 Read/Write
I76 251488 (32b) Address index register 76 Read/Write
I77 251490 (32b) Address index register 77 Read/Write
I78 251492 (32b) Address index register 78 Read/Write
I79 251494 (32b) Address index register 79 Read/Write
I80 251496 (32b) Address index register 80 Read/Write
I81 251498 (32b) Address index register 81 Read/Write
I82 251500 (32b) Address index register 82 Read/Write
I83 251502 (32b) Address index register 83 Read/Write
I84 251504 (32b) Address index register 84 Read/Write
I85 251506 (32b) Address index register 85 Read/Write
I86 251508 (32b) Address index register 86 Read/Write
I87 251510 (32b) Address index register 87 Read/Write
I88 251512 (32b) Address index register 88 Read/Write
I89 251514 (32b) Address index register 89 Read/Write
I90 251516 (32b) Address index register 90 Read/Write
I91 251518 (32b) Address index register 91 Read/Write
I92 251520 (32b) Address index register 92 Read/Write
I93 251522 (32b) Address index register 93 Read/Write
I94 251524 (32b) Address index register 94 Read/Write
I95 251526 (32b) Address index register 95 Read/Write
I96 251528 (32b) Address index register 96 Read/Write
I97 251530 (32b) Address index register 97 Read/Write
I98 251532 (32b) Address index register 98 Read/Write
I99 251534 (32b) Address index register 99 Read/Write
I100 251536 (32b) Address index register 100 Read/Write
I101 251538 (32b) Address index register 101 Read/Write
I102 251540 (32b) Address index register 102 Read/Write
I103 251542 (32b) Address index register 103 Read/Write
I104 251544 (32b) Address index register 104 Read/Write
I105 251546 (32b) Address index register 105 Read/Write
I106 251548 (32b) Address index register 106 Read/Write
I107 251550 (32b) Address index register 107 Read/Write
I108 251552 (32b) Address index register 108 Read/Write
I109 251554 (32b) Address index register 109 Read/Write
I110 251556 (32b) Address index register 110 Read/Write
I111 251558 (32b) Address index register 111 Read/Write
I112 251560 (32b) Address index register 112 Read/Write
I113 251562 (32b) Address index register 113 Read/Write
I114 251564 (32b) Address index register 114 Read/Write
I115 251566 (32b) Address index register 115 Read/Write
I116 251568 (32b) Address index register 116 Read/Write
703
I117 251570 (32b) Address index register 117 Read/Write
I118 251572 (32b) Address index register 118 Read/Write
I119 251574 (32b) Address index register 119 Read/Write
I120 251576 (32b) Address index register 120 Read/Write
I121 251578 (32b) Address index register 121 Read/Write
I122 251580 (32b) Address index register 122 Read/Write
I123 251582 (32b) Address index register 123 Read/Write
I124 251584 (32b) Address index register 124 Read/Write
I125 251586 (32b) Address index register 125 Read/Write
I126 251588 (32b) Address index register 126 Read/Write
I127 251590 (32b) Address index register 127 Read/Write

20.3.8 Communication Parameter Settings

Name Address($U:V) Narrative Read/Write
LINK_COM1_BAUDRATE 251250 COM1’s transfer rates, Read/Write
Transmission Register Value
rate
1200 0
2400 1
4800 2
9600 3
19200 4
38400 5
57600 6
115200 7
187500 8
921600 9
LINK_COM1_PARITY 251251 COM1’s check bits, Read/Write
Check Register Value
None 0
Odd 1
Even 2
LINK_COM1_DATABITS 251252 COM1’s data bits, Read/Write
Data Bits Register Value
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
LINK_COM1_STOPBITS 251253 COM1’s stop bits, Read/Write
Stop Bits Register Value
1 0
1.5 1
704
 2 2
LINK_COM1_TIMEOUT 251254 COM1’s time in milliseconds(ms). Read/Write
LINK_COM1_COMMAND 251255 COM1’s command delay time in Read/Write
_DELAY milliseconds(ms).
LINK_COM1_RETRY 251256 COM1’s retry count. Read/Write
_COUNT
LINK_COM2_BAUDRATE 251257 COM2’s transfer rates, Read/Write
Transmission Register Value
rate
1200 0
2400 1
4800 2
9600 3
19200 4
38400 5
57600 6
115200 7
187500 8
921600 9
LINK_COM2_PARITY 251258 COM2’s check bits, Read/Write
Check Bits Register Value
None 0
Odd 1
Even 2
LINK_COM2_DATABITS 251259 COM2’s databits, Read/Write
Data Bits Register Value
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
LINK_COM2_STOPBITS 251260 COM2’s stop bits, Read/Write
Stop Bits Register Value
1 0
1.5 1
2 2
LINK_COM2_TIMEOUT 251261 COM2’s time in milliseconds(ms). Read/Write
LINK_COM2_COMMAND 251262 COM2’s command delay time in Read/Write
_DELAY milliseconds(ms).
LINK_COM2_RETRY 251263 COM2’s retry count. Read/Write
_COUNT
LINK_COM3_BAUDRATE 251264 COM3’s transfer rates, Read/Write
Transmission Register Value
rate
1200 0
2400 1
705
 4800 2
9600 3
19200 4
38400 5
57600 6
115200 7
187500 8
921600 9
LINK_COM3_PARITY 251265 COM3’s check bits, Read/Write
Check Bits Register Value
None 0
Odd 1
Even 2
LINK_COM3_DATABITS 251266 COM3’s data bits, Read/Write
Data Bits Register Value
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
LINK_COM3_STOPBITS 251267 COM3’s stop bits Read/Write
Stop Bits Register Value
1 0
1.5 1
2 2
LINK_COM3_TIMEOUT 251268 COM3’s time in milliseconds(ms). Read/Write
LINK_COM3_COMMAND 251269 COM3’s command delay time in Read/Write
_DELAY milliseconds(ms).
LINK_COM3_RETRY 251270 COM3 Read/Write
_COUNT
LINK_COM4_BAUDRATE 251271 COM4’s transfer rates, Read/Write
Transmission Register Value
Rate
1200 0
2400 1
4800 2
9600 3
19200 4
38400 5
57600 6
115200 7
187500 8
921600 9
LINK_COM4_PARITY 251272 COM4’s check bits, Read/Write
Check Bits Register Value
None 0
706
 Odd 1
Even 2
LINK_COM4_DATABITS 251273 COM4’s data bits, Read/Write
Data Bits Register Value
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
LINK_COM4_STOPBITS 251274 COM4’s stop bits, Read/Write
Stop Bits Register Value
1 0
1.5 1
2 2
LINK_COM4_TIMEOUT 251275 COM4’s time in milliseconds(ms). Read/Write
LINK_COM4_COMMAND 251276 COM4’s command delay time in Read/Write
_DELAY milliseconds(ms).
LINK_COM4_RETRY 251277 COM4’s retry count. Read/Write
_COUNT
LINK_PLC_PORT 251278 PLC PORT’s transfer rates can only Read
_BAUDRATE be read,
Transmission Register Value
rate
1200 0
2400 1
4800 2
9600 3
19200 4
38400 5
57600 6
115200 7
187500 8
921600 9
LINK_ PLC_PORT _PARITY 251279 PLC PORT’s check bits can only be Read
read,
Check Bits Register Value
None 0
Odd 1
Even 2
LINK_ PLC_PORT 251280 PLC PORT’s data bits can only be Read
_DATABITS read,
Data Bits Register Value
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
707
LINK_ PLC_PORT 251281 PLC PORT’s stop bits can only be Read
_STOPBITS read,
Stop Bits Register Value
1 0
1.5 1
2 2
LINK_ PLC_PORT 251282 PLC PORT’s time in Read
_TIMEOUT milliseconds(ms) can only be read.
LINK_ PLC_PORT 251283 PLC PORT’s command delay time in Read
_COMMAND_DELAY milliseconds(ms) can only be read.
LINK_ PLC_PORT _RETRY 251284 PLC PORT’s retry count can only be Read
_COUNT read.

20.3.9 VNC Information

Name Address($U:V) Description Read/
Write
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.0 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.1 is Read
_STATUS0 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.1 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.2 is Read
_STATUS1 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.2 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.3 is Read
_STATUS2 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.3 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.4 is Read
_STATUS3 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.4 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.5 is Read
_STATUS4 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.5 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.6 is Read
_STATUS5 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.6 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.7 is Read
_STATUS6 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.7 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.8 is Read
_STATUS7 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.8 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.9 is Read
_STATUS8 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.9 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.10 is Read

708
_STATUS9 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.10 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.11 is Read
_STATUS10 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.11 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.12 is Read
_STATUS11 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.12 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.13 is Read
_STATUS12 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.13 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.14 is Read
_STATUS13 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.14 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.15 is Read
_STATUS14 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600.15 (1b) Bit ON when VNC client No.16 is Read
_STATUS15 connected to the VNC server, Bit OFF
when it’s not connected.
OP_VNC_CONNECT 250600 (16b) Status of VNC client connected Read
_STATUS to VNC sever.

709
 21. System Settings
The 【System Setting】function can be used when the user needs to change the system
settings of the HMI. There are two ways to use the【System Setting】function:【System
Setting】and【Remote System Setting】. 【System Setting】is when the user operates
the 【System Setting】function by pressing the control panel of the HMI. A【Remote
System Setting】is when the user operates the【System Setting】function from a remote
host using the Ethernet connection with the HMI.

This chapter will explain the【System Setting】related pages and their setting
methods for【System Setting】and【Remote System Setting】.

21.1 System Setting

Press and hold down the right side of the screen during the HMI start-up process to
enter the【System Setting】screen in order to change the system settings of the HMI.
If a system password is set for this HMI and is enabled, this password must first be
entered for authorization before entering the【System Setting】function. Whether to
enable or disable, as well as the system password itself can be set in【System Info】.
The default setting is a disabled system password.

Figure 441 System Setting home page for HMI

The【System Setting】home page is divided into two parts: the left part is【Run Project】,
which if pressed, will exit from the settings interface and execute the project in the
HMI. The right part is the【Settings】and is divided into nine categories:【COM Port】,
【Ethernet】,【Servers/IoT】,【Link】,【Display】,【Calibration】,【Time】,【System
Info】and【MISC】.

21.1.1 Run Project

The system will automatically detect the current firmware, integrity, and

710
compatibility of the project on the HMI when entering the【System Setting】. If the
system determines that the firmware and project versions are compatible and the
file is complete with no corruptions, it will enable the【Run Project】and the user
can execute the project on the HMI. If the system determines that the version is
incompatible or that the file is corrupted, 【Run Project】will be locked. The
download function of the FvDesigner should be used to update to the latest version
of firmware and project.

21.1.2 【COM Port】

The【COM Port】data page will appear after pressing the【COM Port】block, as
shown in the figure below. This is where the COM Port details for the DB-9
male/terminal adapter of the HMI can be found. Pressing【OK】on the top-right
corner or【Cancel】on the top-left corner will exit this page.

Figure 442 COM Port data page

21.1.3 【Ethernet】
The【Ethernet】settings will appear after pressing the【Ethernet】block, the
setting page is divided into【General】and【Access Control】paging. When the
setting is complete, press the【OK】button on the top-right corner to save the
settings and exit this page or the【Cancel】button on the top-left corner to discard
the changes and exit this page.

711
21.1.3.1 【General】

Figure 443 【Ethernet】【General】paging

Table 266【Ethernet】【General】paging options

Option Description
【Enable Select to enable【Ethernet】: Selecting【Enable】will
Ethernet】 allow users to continue setting the follow-up options;
selecting【Close】will close the follow-up options and they
cannot be set.
【DHCP】 Select to enable【Enable DHCP】: Selecting【Enable
DHCP】will close the three options【IP Address】,【Net
Mask】and【Gateway】, as they will be assigned and set
by the system. If the 【Enable DHCP】was not selected,
then the user must continue setting the three options【IP
Address】,【Net Mask】and【Gateway】.
【IP Address】 Set the IP address of the HMI here.

【Net Mask】 Set the sub-net mask of the HMI here.

【Gateway】 Set the gateway of the HMI here.

【DNS】 Set the DNS of the HMI here.

【MAC Address】 The MAC address of the HMI is displayed here.

21.1.3.2 【Access Control】

【Access Control】function can provide users to filter the connection IP or MAC
address.
Note: This function only supports P5 series. The required operating system version
is OS 2.0.13 or later.

712
 Figure 444【Ethernet】【Access Control】paging

Table 267【Ethernet】【Access Control】paging options

Option Description
【Access】 Select whether to enable the【Access Control】function.
【Filter Type】 Allow: Allow connection list
Deny: Deny connection list
【IP List】 Check to enable IP filtering list, up to 10 groups can be set.

When adding an IP list, you will enter the【Filter

Address】page. There are 3 rules to choose:
【Singal】: Enter a set of IP addresses to be filtered
【Subnet (CIDR Format)】: Enter a set of IP addresses and
subnet mask to be filtered
【Range】: Enter two sets of IP, the IP within the range will
be filtered
【MAC List】 Check to enable MAC filtering list, up to 10 groups can be
set.
Add item
Remove the selected item
Modify the selected item

21.1.4 【Servers/IoT】
The【Servers/IoT】settings will appear after pressing the【Servers/IoT】block as
shown in the figure below. The settings page are be divided into three paging:
【Enable FTP Server】,【Enable VNC Server】,【Pass Through】,and【IoT】.
When configuration is complete, press the【OK】button on the top-right corner to
save the settings and exit this page or the【Cancel】button on the top-left corner to
discard the changes and exit this page.
713
21.1.4.1 【FTP】

Figure 445【Servers/IoT Setting】【FTP】paging

Table 268 Options of【Servers/IoT Setting】【FTP】to Enable FTP Server in the

Server page
Option Description
【Enable FTP Select to【Enable FTP Server】. Selecting this option will
Server】 allow users to continue setting the follow-up options. If this
option is not selected, the follow-up options will be closed
and cannot be set.

Note: If the Enable FTP Server is selected, please remember to set

【Read-Only Account】or【Read-Write Account】, or else the
setting cannot be completed.
【Port】 Select the port used by FTP Server.

【Enable Read-Only Select to enable a read-only account. The user account and
password can be set below once this option is selected.
Account】
【Enable Read- Select to enable a read-write account. The user account
and password can be set below once this option is
Write Account】 selected.
【Mask Password】 The password will be masked once this option is selected.

21.1.4.2 【VNC】

714
 Figure 446【Servers/IoT Setting】【VNC】paging

Table 269 Options of【Servers/IoT Setting】【VNC】to Enable VNC Server in the

Server page
Option Description
【Enable VNC Select to【Enable VNC Server】. Selecting this option will
Server】 allow users to continue setting the follow-up options. If this
option is not selected, the follow-up options will be closed
and cannot be set.
【Connections】 Set how many VNC clients can be connected to this VNC
server, the maximum number of support will vary
depending on the model.
【Mask The password will be masked if this option is selected.

Password】
【Port】 Set the port of the VNC, only the first client’s port can be
set, the second one will automatically increase, for example,
the first one set 5900, then the second one will be 5901.
【Password】 Enter the password for the VNC server.

21.1.4.3 【Pass Through】

Figure 447【Servers/IoT Setting】【Pass Through】paging

715
 Table 270【Servers/IoT Setting】【Pass Through】paging
Option Description
【Pass Through Set the port used for pass through.

Port】

21.1.4.4 【IoT】

Figure 448【Servers/IoT Setting】【IoT】paging

Table 271【Servers/IoT Setting】【IoT】paging

Option Description
【Enable IoT 【Host】
Services Set the server to connect, including worldwild version and
(iMonitor/iAceess)】 China version.

【HWID】
HMI’s hardware ID, is unique and cannot be modified.

【Service Password】
When planning the IoT configuration on the IoT website, it
needs this password to connected to HMI.
【Enable iAceess】 【LID】
Key to activate the iAccess function.
【Mask Password】 Set whether to mask the password.

21.1.5 【Link】
The【Link】settings will appear after pressing the【Link】block, as shown in the
figure below. Introductions to the options are as listed in the table below. When
configuration is complete, press the【OK】button on the top-right corner to save
the settings and exit this page or the【Cancel】button on the top-left corner to
716
discard the changes and exit this page.

Figure 449【Link】setting page

Table 272【Link】setting page options

Option Description
【Link】 Selet the link to modify.

【State】 This option is only to control the link status, parameter

setting is not included.

【No Change】
The latest link state will not change.

【Enable】
The link-state will be enabled(connecting) when running the
project.

【Disable】
The link-state will be disabled(close) when running the
project.
【Apply】 The setting works when pressing the button.

21.1.6 【Display】
The【Display】settings will appear after pressing the【Display】block, as shown in
the figure below. Introductions to the options are as listed in the table below. When
configuration is complete, press the【OK】button on the top-right corner to save
the settings and exit this page or the【Cancel】button on the top-left corner to
discard the changes and exit this page.

717
 Figure 450【Display】setting page

Table 273【Display】setting page options

Option Description
【Language】 Select the language displayed in【System Setting】. The
available language selections is English, Traditional Chinese,
and Simplified Chinese.
【Rotation】 Select the rotation of the HMI display screen. Changes will
take take effect after the system is rebooted.
【Brightness】 Set the needed brightness, the selectable range is 30-100,
and the default is 100.
【Use Screen Set whether to enable the screen saver, set the time if the
function is enabled.
Saver】
【Use Backlight Set whether to enable the backlight saver, set the time if
the function is enabled.
Saver】

21.1.7 【Calibration】
The【Calibration】settings will appear after pressing the【Calibration】block. After
entering the calibrations screen, follow the instructions to complete the calibration.
Do not turn off the power before finishing the calibration.

Figure 451【Calibration】page

There are 5 cross-calibration points. After pressing them in sequence, a green square
718
will appear to confirm whether the calibration is successful. If failed for 3 times, you
will need to do the calibration again.

If the error detected for the touch panel is too great resulting in users unable to
properly click this【Calibration】block, users can then press and hold any point
under the system setting page for ten seconds to enter the calibration mode.

21.1.8 【Time】
The【Time】settings will appear after pressing the【Time】block, as shown in the
figure below. Introductions to the options are as listed in the table below. When
configuration is complete, press the【OK】button on the top-right corner to save
the settings and exit this page or the【Cancel】button on the top-left corner to
discard the changes and exit this page.

Figure 452【Time】setting page

Table 274【Time】setting page options

Option Description
【Calender】 Select the calender of the HMI, includes Gregorain calender
and Persian calender.
【Date】 The system date of the HMI can be set here.

【Time】 The system time of the HMI can be set here.

【Time Zone】 The time zone of the HMI can be set here.

【NTP】 Here you can choose whether to enable network time

synchronization (NTP time synchronization), enabling this
feature requires setting time zone and DNS in order to
effectively use.
【NTP Server】 Users can connect to their own server or any other servers or
the default server to synchronize the time.

21.1.9 【System Info】

The【System Info】settings will appear after pressing the【System Info】block, as

719
shown in the figure below. Introductions to the options are as listed in the table
below. When configuration is complete, press the【OK】button on the top-right
corner to save the settings and exit this page or the【Cancel】button on the top-left
corner to discard the changes and exit this page.

Figure 453【System Info】setting page

Table 275【System Info】setting page options

Option Description
【Device Name】 The device name of the HMI can be set here.

【Station The station number of the HMI can be set here.

Number】
【System Select to enable【System Password】here. If【System
Password】 Password】is enabled, the password must be set below. This
password must be entered in order to set the locked option
once【System Password】is enabled.

Select the locked option, select the options which need enter
【System Password】

【OS Version】 Information on the operating system version can be viewed

here.
【Firmware Information on the firmware version can be viewed here.

Version】
【Last Update Display the last update time for the Project, Firmware, and
Environment Package.
Time】

720
 21.1.10 【MISC】
The【MISC】settings will appear after pressing the【MISC】block, as shown in the
figure below. Introductions to the options are as listed in the table below. When
configuration is complete, press the【OK】button on the top-right corner to save
the settings and exit this page or the【Cancel】button on the top-left corner to
discard the changes and exit this page.

21.1.10.1 【General】

Figure 454【MISC】【General】setting page

Table 276【MISC】【General】settings page options

Option Description
【Factory Reset】 The system setting of the HMI can be re-set to the factory
settings here.
The following window will appear after this option is
pressed, asking whether to continue.

Selecting【OK】will restore the HMI to factory settings and

selecting【Cancel】will cancel this operation.
【Buzzer】 This option enables the buzzer. Close will turn the buzzer off.

【Audio】 Audio can be played back if this option is enabled, otherwise

it will be closed.
【Remote Select to enable【Remote Password】here. If【Remote
Password】 Password】is enabled, the password must be set below. This
password must be entered in order to log in 【System
Setting】
【Customer ID】 To enable【Customer ID】，select enable【Customer ID】
721
 and a window will pop up asking the user to create a
password for the【Customer ID】.
After the【Customer ID】is set, the next time the project is
booted with the ID set and enabled, it will first check the HMI
【Customer ID】to see if it matches with the project
【Customer ID】. If the two ID’s match, the project will
continue to boot. If the ID’s do not match, touch function,
serial port, USB port, Ethernet port function will shut down
and the HMI will stay on the boot screen. To use the HMI
device again, the customer will have to reboot the HMI and
enter the correct【Customer ID】to be able to use the HMI
with the given program.

21.1.10.2 【Copy Project】

Before the connection, please follow chapter 2.2.2.4-Make USB Flash Drive Update
File, put the generated .uferp file under HMI Internal folder.
Note 1: When generating the .uferp file, the 'delete other' option cannot select, otherwise the
update will fail.
Note 2: The two HMI models must be the same to copy the project.

Figure 455【MISC】【Copy Project】setting page

Table 277【MISC】【Copy Project】settings page options

Option Description
【Connection】 Select the connection way for the HMI to copy the project.

【COM Port】 Select the COM port to use.

【Keep Update Select whether to keep the .uferp file on the updated HMI.
file on target
device】

722
 【Copy Project】 Press the button to start to copy the project.

【Delete Update Delete the .uferp file under the Internal folder.

file】

21.1.10.3 【Update Project】

User can update project without using computer.

Figure 456【MISC】【Update Project】setting page

Table 278【MISC】【Copy Project】settings page options

Option Description
【Update Update the .uferp file from HMI internal space, SD card, or
USB flash disk.
Project】

21.1.10.4 【Backup】
Backup the data that stores in the $U:XNV register into a package so that it can easily
copy to another HMI.

723
 Figure 457【MISC】【Backup】setting page

Table 279【MISC】【Backup】settings page options

Option Description
【$U:XNV 【Import】
register】 Import the .xnv file from the folder HMI/internal/xnvbackup.

【Export】
Export the .xnv file to the folder HMI/internal/xnvbackup.

21.1.10.5 【Reboot】
Reboot the HMI.

724
 Figure 458【MISC】【Reboot】setting page

21.2 System Booting Sequence

The system will automatically detect the current firmware, integrity, and compatibility
of the project on the HMI when starting up. If the system detected that the version is
incompatible or that the file is corrupted resulting in the HMI being unable to start up
properly, the system will automatically enter the【System Setting】and lock the【Run
Project】switch. This is when users should use the download function of the FvDesigner
to sequentially download the firmware and project.

Figure 459 project error detection

If the firmware and project were both enabled normally, the system will skip the
【System Setting】during start-up and run the project immediately. In this case, the
user must press and hold the right side of the HMI screen during the start-up until it
enters the System Setting screen if the user wants to adjust the system settings.

725
 22. HotKeys
When designers use FvDesigner to program HMI project, they often use some
functions, such as【Compile】、【Download】and【Simulation】etc.. In order to
operate FvDesigner easily, it provides a variety of【HotKey】for each function.
This chapter will explain the combination of【HotKey】and usage.

22.1 Project and File

The following table describes the【HotKey】definition for operating Project and File.
When the mouse hovers over the icon of Ribbon menu, the tooltip of HotKey will
also display on the screen.

Table 280【HotKeys】related to Project and File

HotKey/ Description Target
Keyboard
shortcut
F5 Launch【Simulation】application. Project
F6 Launch【Download Manager】for download Project
process.
Ctrl + Shift + C Compile the project. Project
If the project does not be saved, the question
dialog window will display as the following
picture.

Ctrl + Shift + D Display【Decompile】dialog window for Project

decompiling project file.
F12 Display【Save As】dialog window for saving File
file.
Ctrl + Q Exit the FvDesigner application. File
If the project does not save, the question dialog
window will display as the following picture.

726
 22.2 Screen List
The following table describes the【HotKey】definitions for operating【Screen
List】.
These【HotKey】only work on【Screen List】.

Table 281【HotKeys】related to【Screen List】

HotKey/ Description Target
Keyboard
shortcut
Ctrl + C Copy screen to clipboard. Screen List
Ctrl + V Paste the copied screen on【Screen List】. Screen List

The【Screen Properties】dialog window will

display after pressing this hotkey for designers
to define the screen properties.

Delete Delete the selected screen. Screen List

The confirmation dialog window will display
after pressing this hotkey.

Ctrl + Shift + B Add a new【Base Screen】, the【Screen Screen List

Properties】dialog window will display after

pressing this hotkey.
Ctrl + Shift + W Add a new【Window Screen】, the【Screen Screen List

Properties】dialog window will display after

pressing this hotkey.
Ctrl + Shift + K Add a new【Keypad Screen】, the【Screen Screen List

727
 Properties】dialog window will display after
pressing this hotkey.
↑ Pressing the UP key can move the【Current Screen List
Selection Box UP.
It will not display the screen on the【Work
Space】of FvDesigner.
↓ Pressing the Down key can move the【Current Screen List

Selection Box】Down.
It will not display the screen on the【Work
Space】of FvDesigner.
Enter Press【Enter】on the【Screen List】, and the Screen List

screen selected by【Current selection box】will

be displayed in the work space.
After moving through the keyboard up/down
keys, the screen can be displayed in the work
space through this hot key.

728
 23. Modbus Gateway Server
The Modbus gateway server feature uses a HMI to serve as a gateway linked to a
computer using SCADA software, HMI, or other Modbus devices. Through a Modbus
(master) TCP protocol or a serial link to a HMI, along with the HMI link to a PLC,
inverter, servo motors, temperature controllers or other equipment, a computer can
easily read data from the equipment. To achieve data collection, the user has to fill in
the Modbus address mapping table.

Currently three Modbus drivers are supported: Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU, and
Modbus ASCII.

Figure 460 Gateway Server Application Diagram

This section describes settings and applications of Modbus gateway servers.

23.1 Modbus Gateway Server Settings

When the selected driver in the new link property settings is selected as Modbus
Slave (ASCII), or Modbus Slave (RTU), under the【Interface Settings】, a new options
tab will be present. The options tab contains【Address Mapping Table】settings, as
shown in the figure below.

729
 Figure 461【Address Mapping Table】Settings Screen

【Address Mapping Table】settings screen is in the below figure. Each setting is

detailed in the table.

Figure 462【Address Mapping Table】Settings Screen

Table 282【Address Mapping Table】Settings and Related Files and Shortcuts

Option Description
【Address 【Add】
Mapping Table】 Create a new row in the【Address Mapping Table】.

【Delete】
Remove the selected row from the【Address Mapping

730
 Table】.

【Default】
Returns the【Address Mapping Table】to the preset rows
and configurations.

【Clear】
Deletes all entries from the【Address Mapping Table】.

【Modbus Type】
Currently supports four types: 0x, 1x, 3x, and 4x. 0x has read
and write permissions for a bit. 1x is a read only bit. 3x is a
read only word. 4x has read and write permissions for a word.

【Modbus Address】
Specify the return target address for a PLC or other Modbus
devices.

【PLC Address】
Specified source address for PLC or other equipment.

【Length】
Set the length of the data.

【Update Frequency】
Set the transmission frequency speed. There are three
settings: fast, normal, and low.

23.2 Modbus Gateway Server Applications

In the following example, a HMI has a FATEK FBS PLC connected through the COM1
port and a Mistsubishi FX3U PLC connected through the COM3 port as shown in the
figure below. On demand data can be uploaded via Ethernet to a computer and
collected by SCADA (or modScan) software.

Figure 463 HMI Connection Page

The user wishes to monitor register R100 data and output point Y0 on the FATEK FBs
731
PLC and D200 and Y1 on the Mistubishi FX3U. The FATEK PLC address should be
uploaded to Modbus address 4x1 and 0x1 respectively. The Mistubishi FX3U address
should be uploaded to Modbus addresses 4x2 and 0x2 respectively. The PC will then
recieive the data via Ethernet.

Step 1: New Modbus Slave (TCP) driver.

Figure 464 New Modbus Slave (TCP) Driver

Step 2: Click the【Address Mapping Table】settings.

Step 3: Set the【Address Mapping Table】in accordance to Figure 463.
The first row is the FATEK FBS PLC Y0 output. This is transferred to Modbus address
0x1.
The second row is the Mistubishi FX3U PLC Y1 output. This is transferred to Modbus
address 0x2.
The third row is the FATEK FBS PLC R100 register. This is transferred to Modbus
address 4x1.
The fourth row is the Mistubishi FX3U PLC D200 register. This is transferred to
Modbus address 4x2.

732
 Figure 465【Address Mapping Table】Configuration

Note: If the SCADA software reads an address not defined in the Address Mapping Table, the HMI
will return a MODBUS exception error in response to the read attempt by the SCADA software.

Step 4: Download the project to the HMI and connect the FATEK PLC, Mistubishi PLC,
and SCADA (or modScan) software.
Step 5: As shown in Figure 351, the FATEK PLC R100 and Y0 addresses as well as the
Mistubishi D200 and Y1 address can be viewed. Through the SCADA (or modScan)
software, the Modbus address of 4x1, 4x2, 0x1, and 0x2 can be controlled.

Figure 466 Results of the Gateway Server

733
 24. PLC Integration
【PLC Integration】provides designers or users in pratical applications of HMI and
PLC to achieve closer integration. For example, in practical applications users can
show or view the current connection of WinProladder through HMI, no need to link
PLC to PC to view Ladder diagram program of WinProladder, let users easy to use
and debug.
Currently 【PLC Integration】includes【Show Ladder Viewer】,【Update FATEK
PLC Project From USB】,【Show Ethernet Module Configuration】

Figure 467 HMI show PLC Ladder Diagram Program illustration

24.1 Show Ladder Viewer

This section will explain how to show Ladder Diagram Program of PLC (FATEK PLC) on
HMI and show the interface of PLC Ladder Diagram Program which includes the
meaning of options and settings.

Note 1 : The 4.3-inch HMI does not support the display of the Ladder Viewer function, such
as P5043S or P5043N.

Note 2 : FATEK FBe PLC does not support

734
 24.1.1 【Show Ladder Viewer】Applications and
Settings
For example, use FATEK P5 series HMI connted with FATEK FBs series PLC, and hope
in the P5 series HMI display and view the FBs series PLC ladder diagram program, Set
the following steps:

Step 1:【Toolbox】【Lamp/Switch】drag a【Function Switch】to windows，as

shown below.

Figure 468 drag a【Function Switch】to window

Step 2: double click Function Switch to enter Function Switch Properties, and in this
dialog window by the "function" drop-down menu, select 【PLC: Show ladder
viewer】, as shown below.

Figure 469 select【PLC: Show ladder viewer】dialog

Step 3: set the connection of HMI and PLC, then compile and download to HMI,
through the connection, press the 【Function Switch】【PLC: Show ladder viewer】,
will appear link device dialog, as show below, the device name is the name of the
device in the software link setting.

Figure 470 The menu dialog of the linked device

735
Note: in off-line simulation, press【Function Switch】will not appear link device dialog,
but will appear in HMI interface, microSD or USB storage devices, choose the PLC
project(*.pdw) loading dialog window.

Step 4: choose the device, then it will load the PLC ladder diagram program, as
shown below.

Figure 471 show PLC ladder diagram program

24.1.2 HMI display the interface of PLC ladder

diagram program
The interface of the PLC ladder program is displayed on the HMI, as shown below.
The meaning of each settings, as shown in the table below.

Figure 472 The interface of the PLC ladder diagram is displayed on the HMI

Table 283 shows the attributes of the PLC ladder diagram interface on the HMI
Property Description

【Display
Press this icon , will display the settings dialog window,
Settings】 as shown below.

736
 【Comment】 【Comment】
Click on the box that says “Comment” and the following
dialog window will pop up, as show below.

【Comment Visible】
Set whether the comments in the ladder diagram are
displayed.
【Section Comment Visible】
Set whether the program area comments in the ladder
program is displayed. The current preset is disabled and
cannot be checked.
【Network Comment Visible】
Set whether the network comment in the ladder program is
displayed. The current preset is disabled and cannot be
checked.
【Element Comment Visible】
Set whether the element comment in the ladder program is
displayed.
【Language】 【Language】
In this window, you can select the language of your
comments in the ladder program. Languages include
English, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Other
Language, and so on.
Selectable languages should be added from【Font
Library】.

737
 【Block Open/ This option is mainly for the WinProLadder block close and
block open function(Need to cooperate with Fun199). Click
Close】 on the button and the following dialog window will pop up,
the HMI will activity to search the ladder diagram that
those networks are block closed then list it, operators can
choose which networks are open or close(If the original
close block has a set password, need to enter password to
open the block password), press OK to see ladder diagram.

【Reload】 【Reload】
Reload the ladder program.
【Zoom in】 Press this icon , will zoom in on the HMI ladder diagram.
【Zoom out】 Press this icon , will zoom out on the HMI ladder
diagram.
【PLC Status Press this icon , will pop up PLC status information
Information】 window, as shown below.

【Switch between Press this icon , switch between the

the MainSection
738
 and the SubSection MainSection and the SubSection program.
program】
【Search】
Press this icon , the dialog window for the address
search will pop up, as shown below.

【Find】
Search type and address.

【Goto】
Can jump to host program or subprogram network number

【Register Type/Network Number】

Enter the type and address you want to search for or jump
to the host or subprogram network number

【Filter】
Filter the type of search, including contacts, coils, functional
instructions, and all, etc.

【Start Position】
Start position, including automatic and current location.

【Searching Direction】

739
 Searching Direction, including move up and move down, etc.

【Quit the ladder

Press this icon , will quit the ladder diagram window.
diagram window】
【Move up】 Press this icon , the ladder diagram will be viewed above.

【Move down】 Press this icon , the ladder diagram will be viewed below.

【Move right】 Press this icon , the ladder diagram will be viewed right.
【Move left】 Press this icon , the ladder diagram will be viewed left.
【Network No.】 This icon is Network No. for the ladder diagram.

24.2 Update FATEK PLC Project From HMI

or USB Flash Drive
This section will explain how to update the linked FATEK PLC ladder program through
the HMI internal storage or USB storage device for easy user use.
For example, use FATEK P5 series HMI connted with FATEK FBs series PLC, update
ladder diagram program of FBs PLC through USB storage device of HMI, Set the
following steps:

Step 1:【Toolbox】【Lamp/Switch】drag a【Function Switch】to windows，as

shown below.

Figure 473 drag a【Function Switch】to window

Step 2: double click Function Switch to enter Function Switch Properties, and in this
dialog window by the "function" drop-down menu, select 【PLC: Update FATEK PLC
Project From USB】, as shown below.

740
 Figure 474 select【PLC: Update FATEK PLC Project From HMI or USB Flash Drive】
dialog

Step 3: set the connection of HMI and PLC, then compile and download to HMI.
Step 4: copy the PLC project to USB storage, then insert into HMI.

Step 5: In the HMI and PLC connection operation, press【Function Switch】【PLC:

Update FATEK PLC Project From HMI or USB Flash Drive】, a dialog window appears
to update the PLC project, as shown below.

Figure 475 Select the dialog window to update the project

Step 6: after successfully update PLC project will appear link device dialog window, as
shown below, where the link device name that is in the software link settings in the
device name.

Figure 476 The menu dialog of the linked device

Step 7: if want to download PLC program while PLC is running, will first ask whether
to stop PLC running and then continue to update the PLC program dialogue window,
figure as shown below.

Figure 477 ask whether to stop PLC running

741
Step 8: after updating PLC project, will appear

Figure 478 download success than ask whether start the PLC dialog window

The way to update form HMI internal storage is also the same, in step 5, select
'HMI' then choose the .pdw file to update.

Note: under off-line simulation, press【Function Switch】, will not have any action

24.3 【FATEK PLC Transfer Encrypt Tool】

This chapter explains how to use the USB storage device of HMI to update the
connected FATEK PLC ladder diagram program, how to protect the operation flow,
and protect the designer's planned PLC ladder diagram program and intellectual
property, etc.
Use the USB storage device of HMI to update the connected FATEK PLC ladder
diagram program divide it into 2 parts.
The first part, if you do not need to protect the PLC project, you can directly copy the
PLC project (*.pdw) planned by FATEK PLC software to the USB storage device,
microSD card, or through FTP function transfer the PLC project to the HMI internal
storage, and follow-up will be able to update the FATEK PLC project according to
chapter 24.2-Update FATEK PLC Project From HMI or USB .
In the second part, if the PLC project needs to be protected, it is necessary to follow
the follow-up instructions to generate the designer's all transfer password or single
pass password and conversion file, etc., so that the designer's planned PLC ladder
diagram program can be protected. The following describes how to set and use
transfer passwords, single passwords, and conversion files.

24.3.1 【FATEK PLC Transfer Project Generator】

This chapter will explain how to use the USB storage device HMI to update the
connected FATEK PLC ladder diagram program, and the PLC project needs to be
protected. How to set the【Transfer Password】and convert the file, etc. This can be
achieved through the【FATEK PLC Transfer Encrypt Tool】provided by FvDesigner.
If only set【Transfer Password】, it’s available for unlimited downloads, in other
words, you can update the connected FATEK PLC ladder diagram program for an
unlimited number of times.

【FATEK PLC Transfer Project Generator】can be found on the Tools tab on the
FvDesigner ribbon, after select the【FATEK PLC Transfer Encrypt Tool】drop-down

742
menu then click【FATEK PLC Transfer Project Generator】options to do the setting.

Figure 479【FATEK PLC Transfer Project Generator】option

The【FATEK PLC Transfer Project Generator】page is shown in the figure below. The
meaning of each setting option is as follows:

Figure 480【FATEK PLC Transfer Project Generator】setting

Table 284【FATEK PLC Transfer Project Generator】properties setting

Properties Description

【Generate With this tool, you can convert the original FATEK PLC
project (*.pdw) into an encrypted file *.tpdw and generate
Project】 all the transfer passwords for the designer.

【FATEK PLC Project(.pdw)】

Set the path and file location of the original FATEK PLC
project (*.pdw).

【.tpdw Output Path】

Set the path of *.tpdw to be generated. If it is not set, the
default path is same as the original FATEK PLC project
(*.pdw), and the converted files can no longer be opened
with FATEK PLC’s software WinProLadder.

【Transfer Password】
The transfer password generated by the system can
update to the connected FATEK PLC ladder diagram
program for an unlimited number of times.

【Random】
After pressing this button, the system will provide a new
set of transfer passwords again.

743
 【Generate Transfer Project(.tpdw)】
Press this button to generate *.tpdw file and save it in the
set path.

After setting the transfer password, you can update the FATEK PLC project according
to the chapter24.2-Update FATEK PLC Project From HMI or USB , but when selecting
the FATEK PLC project, select the *.tpdw file, as shown below.

Figure 481 select to update the PLC project

Select the file, press OK, it will display ‘’Please enter password’’ dialogue window, as
shown below, please enter the transfer password.

Figure 482 select the transfer password

After entering the transfer password, press OK, the ‘’Select Device’’ dialog window
will appear, as shown below.

Figure 483 select device

If the PLC wants to download the PLC program during operation, it will first ask
whether to stop the PLC operation first, and then continue to update the dialogue
window of the PLC program, as shown below.

Figure 484 ask whether to stop the running PLC

After finish updating the PLC project, there will be a dialogue window to start the
744
PLC, as shown below.

Figure 485 download success and ask whether to start PLC immediately

24.3.2 【Single Pass Password Generator】

The chapter will explain how to set【Single Pass Password】,【Single Pass
Password】can only be used once. The user will generate a set of passwords from
the HMI due to the operation and provide it to the designer. The designer then
generates new password through the【Single Pass Password Generator】to enter to
the HMI to update the connected FATEK PLC Ladder Diagram program.

【Single Pass Password Generator】function can be selected in【Tools】function

tab on the FvDesigner ribbon, select【Fatek PLC Transfer Encrypt Tool】drop-down
menu, and click【Single Pass Password Generator】option to open function setting
window.

Figure 486【Single Pass Password Generator】option

The【Single Pass Password Generator】page is shown in the following figure. The

meaning of each setting option is as follows:

Figure 487【Single Pass Password Generator】setting window

Table 285【Single Pass Password Generator】properties setting

Properties Description

【Generate Single pass password can be generated through this tool.

Password】
【Transfer Password】
745
 Enter the original transfer password.

【Single Pass Key】

Enter the single pass key generated from the HMI.

【Generate Single Pass Password】

Pressing this button will generate a single pass password,
which will be provided to the user for input to the HMI to
update the connected FATEK PLC Ladder diagram program.

After setting the transfer password, you can update the FATEK PLC project according
to the chapter 24.2-Update FATEK PLC Project From HMI or USB, but when selecting
the FATEK PLC project, select the *.tpdw file, as shown below.

Figure 488 select to update the PLC project

Select the file, press OK, the dialog box for entering the transfer password will be
displayed, and click【Single Pass Password】, as shown below.

Figure 489 select single pass password

Provide the【Single Pass Key】to the designer. After the designer enters【Transfer
Password】and【Single Pass Key】in【Single Pass Password Generator】, press
【Generator Single Pass Password】as shown in the figure below.

Figure 490【Single Pass Password Generator】window

746
The generated【Single Pass Password】provide to user to enter to the HMI, as
shown in the figure below.

Figure 491 enter single pass password window

After entering the single pass password, press OK, the ‘’Select Device’’ dialog window
will appear, as shown below.

Figure 492 select device

If the PLC wants to download the PLC program during operation, it will first ask
whether to stop the PLC operation first, and then continue to update the dialogue
window of the PLC program, as shown below.

Figure 493 ask whether to stop the running PLC

After finish updating the PLC project, there will be a dialogue window to start the
PLC, as shown below.

Figure 494 download success and ask whether to start PLC immediately

24.4 Show Ethernet Module Configuration

This section will explain how to set up the ethernet module configuration and
options and settings of FATEK PLC on the HMI display ethernet so that the user can
easily use it.
24.4.1 【Ethernet Module Configuration】
Application and Settings
For example, use FATEK P5 series HMI, Show Ethernet Module Configuration, Set the
following steps:
747
Step 1: 【Toolbox】【Lamp/Switch】drag a【Function Switch】to windows，as
shown below.

Figure 495 drag a【Function Switch】to window

Step 2: double click Function Switch to enter Function Switch Properties, and in this
dialog window by the "function" drop-down menu, select 【PLC: Show Ethernet
Module Configuration】, as shown below.

Figure 496 select【PLC: Show Ethernet Module Configuration】dialog

Step 3: set the connection of HMI and PLC, then compile and download to HMI.
Step 4: In the HMI and PLC connection operation, press【Function Switch】【PLC:
Show Ethernet Module Configuration】, a dialog window appears to update the PLC
project, as shown below.

Figure 497 dialog of FATEK PLC on ethernet

748
Note: after pressing the【Function Switch】, as a result of the search on the network FATEK PLC
network module will be delayed some time.

Table 286 properties of FATEK PLC ethernet configuration dialog

Options Description

【IP Address】 IP Address of ethernet configuration

【Ethernet Ethernet Address of ethernet configuration

Address】
【Mode】 Mode of ethernet configuration

【Comment】 Annotations can be used to specify more detailed module

information, up to 21 characters.
【Rescan】 Rescan ethernet configuration on line, the detected
module will be displayed in the middle of the window.
【Properties】 Touch to display or set the module data, press this button
to enter the module configuration window.
【Exit】 Exit the dialog of ethenet configuration.

24.4.2 General Settings of Ethernet Module

General properties of ethernet module on HMI, as shown below.

Figure 498 General properties of ethernet module

Table 287 properties of ethernet module settings

Optios Description

【IP Assign Mode】 IP Assign Mode, including static and dynamic and
acquisition by the registor of PLC
【IP Address】 IP Address of ethernet module.

【Subnet Mask】 Subnet Mask of ethernet module.

【GateWay】 GateWay of ethernet module.

749
 【Host Name】 Host Name, can be used to identify different module.

【Comment】 Annotations can be used to specify more detailed module

information, up to 21 characters.
【Remote Config Check to allow Ether_Config settings to be made
remotely via the Internet.
Enabled】
【Remote Web Access Check to allow remote through the Internet for Web
pages operation.
Enabled】
【Operation Mode】 Port1 is fixed to FATEK Server, Port2 can select the
working mode according to the demand

24.4.3 Password Setting Page of Ethernet Module

Display password setting page of ethernet module on HMI, as shown below.
The meaning of each option is as follows, as shown in the following table, please
refer to the PLC network Ethernet communication module operating instructions
manual

Figure 499 password setting page of ethernet module

Table 288 properties of password setting page of ethernet module

Options Description

【New Password】 To change the new password.

【Confirm Password】 Confirm new password.

【Change】 Press this button will complete the change setting.

【Remove】 Cancle the password.

24.4.4 Access Control Setting Page of Ethernet

Module
Display access control setting page of ethernet module on HMI, as shown below.
The meaning of each option is as follows, as shown in the following table, please
refer to the PLC network Ethernet communication module operating instructions
750
manual

Figure 500 Access Control setting page of ethernet module

Table 289 properties of Access Setting Control page of ethernet module

Options Description

【Base IP Address】 The smallest IP Address.

【Size】 Continuous quantity.

【Add】 Add an Authorization information.

【Edit】 Edit an Authorization information

【Remove】 Delete an Authorization information

24.4.5 External Severs Setting Page of Ethernet

Module
External Severs Setting Page of Ethernet Module on HMI, as shown below.
The meaning of each option is as follows, as shown in the following table, please
refer to the PLC network Ethernet communication module operating instructions
manual

Figure 501 External Severs setting page of ethernet module

751
 Table 290 properties of External Severs setting page of ethernet module
Options Description

【NTP Server】 Network automation calibration time function.

【Enable】
Enable Network automation calibration time function.

【IP(URL)】
URL of NTP Sever

【Time Zone】
Location of the Time Zone
【SMTP Server】 Function of sending Email

【IP(URL)】
URL of sending email sever.
【Service CallBack Automatic maintenance callback function.

Server】
【Port】
Maintenance Center port number.

【IP(URL)】
Maintenance Center network address or domain name.
【DNS Server】 Domain name sever

【Primary IP】
Primary DNS Server.

【Secondary IP】
Secondary DNS Server.

24.4.6 Service Port Setting Page of Ethernet

Module
Display service port setting page of ethernet module on HMI, as shown below.
The meaning of each option is as follows, as shown in the following table, please
refer to the PLC network Ethernet communication module operating instructions
manual

752
 Figure 502 service port setting page of ethernet module

Table 291 properties of service port setting page of ethernet module

Option Description

【Fatek Protocol】 FATEK communication protocol service port NO.

【Http Protocol】 Http communication protocol service port NO.

【Modbus Modbus communication protocol service port NO.

Protocol】

24.5 Control PLC run/stop from HMI

This chapter will introduce how to control the PLC run or stop operation from HMI.
This function only supports for the FATEK PLC, it cannot use without FATEK PLC in the
【Link】.

24.5.1 Setting the PLC run/stop function

Step1: drag a【Function Switch】from【Toolbox】【Lamp/Switch】to the screen.

Figure 503 drag a【Function Switch】to the screen

753
Step2: double click the object to enter the properties setting page, select the【PLC:
Run PLC】or【PLC: Stop PLC】option.

Figure 504 select run/stop PLC function

【Select a device】can use to directly control the specified PLC. If this option is not
selected, then it will show the FATEK PLC link list to let the user choose which PLC to
control.

24.5.2 PLC run/stop operation steps

If didn’t set the【Select a device】, then it will appear the following screen when
pressing the button.

Figure 505 select the PLC device

Click the list and select the PLC to control.

Figure 506 select the target PLC

Note: If using the PLC M1912 to stop the PLC, then cannot use this function switch
to reboot the PLC.

754
 25. User-defined Protocol
【User-defined Protocol】function is the consulation mainly to provide the designer
to connect the device according they need, define your own communication code,
then communicate with the device, read or write to the device, generally can be used
in simple communication connections,or in the case of a driver that is not currently
supported in the software link. In addition, this【User-defined Protocol】function
provide designers simple interface definition, no need to write a huge program,
making it easier for designers to use, to achieve the purpose of communication with
its equipment.

Figure 507 user-defined protocol illustration

25.1 【User-defined Protocol】Interface

Description
This section describes the interface of the【User-defined Protocol】function that
includes options and settings

【User-defined Protocol】function can add a link from【Project Explorer】

【Link】,
choose【User-defined Protocol】at【Manufacturer】, and choose【User-defined
Protocol】at【Product Series】, as shown below.

755
 Figure 508 choose【User-defined protocol】

Figure 509 choose【Protocol Setting】

Then choose【User-defined Protocol Setting】, you can enter the instruction list set
by User-defined Protocol Setting, as shown below, which set the meaning of the
options, as shown in the table below.

756
 Figure 510【User-defined Protocol】instruction list

Table 292 properties of【User-defined Protocol】instruction list settings

Properties Description

【Add】 Add a communication instruction

【Edit】 Edit the communication instruction

【Duplicate】 Duplicate the communication instruction

【Delete】 Delete the communication instruction

【Import】 Import all the instructions from CSV file

【Export】 Export all the instructions to CSV file

【Browse】 Display all the instructions in HEX

【Enable】 You can select the enable instruction

【ID】 ID number of ID

【Mode】 Display instructions on read and write mode.

【Instruction】 Display the contents of instructions

【Send Data】 Display the instructions are read or write information

【Return Info.】 Display information such as the return data address.

25.1.1 Main Operation Interface of Protocol Setting

Click 【Add】can add a new communication instruction, enter the main edit
interface of user-defined protocol, as shown below, each meaning of the setting, as
the table shown below.

757
 Figure 511【User-defined Protocol】main operation interface

Table 293 properties of【User-defined Protocol】main operation interface settings

Options Description

【Protocol Setting】 【Mode】

You can choose【Read】or【Write】two kinds of
modes
【Read】means to read instruction,【Write】means
to write instruction

【Format】
You can choose【Hex】or【ASCII】two kinds of
formats

【Instrution Edit】
Edit the instruction you want to send, when the format
is in HEX, can only enter 0-9/a-f/A-F, when you click on
the other location in the screen will be automatically
arranged into two numbers / letters for a group, and
lowercase are converted into capital, If the format is
ASCII, there is no such restriction.

【Send Preview】
Preview window of sending instruction

【Return Preview】
Preview window of returning instruction

【Manually Send】
Manually send the instruction, use one bit signal to
control sending instruction. When open this option,
before to send the instruction, it will check the bit
signal is on or not, if it’s on then send, after sending

758
 success, bit signal will return to off

25.1.2 Instruction Paging of Protocol Setting

Below the 【User-defined Protocol Setting】dialog, you can choose【Instruction】
paging, as shown belown, each meaning of the setting, as the table shown below.

Figure 512【User-defined Protocol Setting】instruction paging

Table 294 properties of【User-defined Protocol Setting】instruction paging setting

Options Description

【Instruction】 【Add Control Character】

You can choose some special character add into
instruction edit dialog, including SOH、STX、ETX、
EOT、ENQ、ACK、LF、CR、NAK、SYN、ETB、ESC,
etc.

【No Receiving】
Set whether or not to return the instructions, this
function will appear when the mode is write.

【Return Length】
The length of the transfer instruction request, in bytes.

【Send Length】
Set the length of the return instruction request, in bytes.
【Delay Time】
After sending the set of instruction, delay how many
times to send the next instruction, the amount of
reading and writing will affect this time.

759
 25.1.3 Send Data Paging of Protocol Setting
Below the 【User-defined Protocol Setting】dialog, you can choose【Send Data】
paging, as shown belown, each meaning of the setting, as the table shown below.

Figure 513【User-defined Protocol Setting】send data paging

Table 295 properties of【User-defined Protocol Setting】send data paging setting

Options Description

【Send Data】 【Position】

It can set the position of sending data in the sending
instruction, and set it through【Start】and【Length】,
for easy to use, you also can set start position and length
in【Send Preview】, then press【+】button that besides
the【Length】, will automactically fill in【Start】and
【Length】field.
Where the【Length】is in byte.
When【Manually Send】isn’t select, it will send
instruction if the【Address】of the send data is changed.

【Type】
Set the type of writing, including bit, word, double word.

【Address】
The memory position represented by the instruction, for
example, when【Mode】choose in【Read】and it has
sending instruction, the address represent the storage
address of sending data.

Note : Addresses can only use the address provided by the user-
defined protocol driver

760
 【Byte Order】
Bit(Assume that the starting position is Bit0)

When【Type】is【Word】or【DWord】, can choose

【Big Endian】or【Little Endian】to sort.
Difference shown as below
Word
With 2 Bytes as a unit
Big Endian Little Endian

DWord
With 4 Bytes as a unit
Big Endian Little Endian

25.1.4 Return Paging of Protocol Setting

Below the 【User-defined Protocol Setting】dialog you can choose【Return Data】
paging, as shown belown, each meaning of the setting, as the table shown below.

761
 Figure 514【User-defined Protocol Setting】returndata paging

Table 296 properties of【User-defined Protocol Setting】return data paging setting

Option Description

【Return Data】 【Position】

When【Mode】is【Read】or【Write】, and has return
instruction, you can set the location of the return data in
the return instruction through【Start】and【Length】,
for easy to use, you also can set start position and length
in【Send Preview】, then press【+】button that besides
the【Length】, will automactically fill in【Start】and
【Length】field.
Where the【Length】 is in byte.
When【Manually Send】isn’t select, as long as the
return data is displayed in the screen, the read instruction
will be sent continuously in accordance with【delay
time】.

【Type】
Set the type of store, include bit, word, double word

【Address】
The address represent the storage address of return data.

Note : Addresses can only use the address provided by the user-
defined protocol driver

【Byte Order】
Method of sorting the【Send Data】or【Return Data】

762
 When【Type】is in【Bit】can choose the sort for【1
Byte for 1 Bit】or【1 Byte for 2 Bits】
Difference shown as below
Hex
1 Byte for 1 Bit 1 Byte for 2 Bits
Turn each byte to one bit Turn each byte to 2 bits

When【Type】is【Word】or【DWord】, can choose

【Big Endian】or【Little Endian】to sort.
Difference shown as below
Word
Big Endian Little Endian

DWord
Big Endian Little Endian

25.1.5 Checksum Paging of Protocol Setting

Below the 【User-defined Protocol Setting】dialog, you can choose【Checksum】

763
paging, as shown belown, each meaning of the setting, as the table shown below.

Figure 515【User-defined Protocol Setting】checksum paging

Table 297 properties of【User-defined Protocol Setting】checksum paging setting

Option Description

【Checksum】 Provides an automatic calculation of the checksum.

【Send Checksum】 Under add method of【Send Instruction】, provides

【Local】and【Driver】two methods.

【Local】
When choose【Local】, indicates that the checksum
needs to be entered manually in the 【Send
Instruction】, the following will have a 【Setting】
option to facilitate the use of designers to calculate.

【Setting】
It will appear【Check Calculation】dialog after click
setting, as shown below

764
 【Input Instruction】
Data of the【Instruction Edit】on the main operation
interface.

【Quick Add】
Click the botton then will copy the value form【Input
Instruction】to the【Instruction】field

【Instruction】
An instruction of using to calculate checksum

【Checksum】
The way to calculate checksum, includes none, CRC,
SUM(BYTE), SUM(WORD), XOR, AND, OR, LRC, SUM
Complement, SUM Radix-Minus-One Complement, etc.

【Calculate】
Calculate checksum，the results will display on
【Calculate Result】。

【Calculate Result】
Except LRC, other instructions converted to HEX format
to be calculated.

【Composite Instruction】
Combine the calculation result and the origin
instruction, the value will show up in【Result】

765
 【OK】
Store the value of【Result】to the data of the main
operation interface【Instruction Edit】

【Cancel】
Leave this dialog, it won’t change anything.

【Driver】
When choose【Driver】, indicates that the checksum
will be automactically calculated and generated by the
driver, the system will calculate checksum from
【Start】, bytes of【Length】checksum, and insert it
into【Position】,as shown below.

【Range】
set the range of checksum calculation.

【Start】
Set the position where the checksum starts to calculate

【Length】
Set the length of the checksum calculation, in bytes

【Position】
Set the position where the checksum calculation result is
inserted

【Automatically fill in】

For easy to use, you can also select the starting position
and length in the【Send Preview】window, when you
press the【+】button next to【Length】, you can fill in
the 【Start】 and 【Length】 fields automatically.

766
 【Type】
Choose the type of checksum calculation, includes none,
CRC, SUM(BYTE), SUM(WORD), XOR, AND, OR, LRC, SUM
Complement, SUM Radix-Minus-One Complement, etc.
【Return Checksum】 When it has return instruction, you can set whether to
verify the return data in the checksum.

【Range】
set the range of checksum calculation.

【Start】
Set the position where the checksum starts to calculate.

【Length】
Set the length of the checksum calculation, in bytes.

【Position】
Set the position where the checksum calculation result is
inserted

【Automatically fill in】

For easy to use, you can also select the starting position
and length in the【Return Preview】window, when you
press the【+】button next to【Length】, you can fill in
the【Start】and【Length】fields automatically.

【Type】
Choose the type of checksum calculation, includes none,
CRC, SUM(BYTE), SUM(WORD), XOR, AND, OR, LRC, SUM
Complement, SUM Radix-Minus-One Complement, etc.

25.2 【User-defined Protocol】Application

examples
This section explains how to apply the【User-defined Protocol】 function,
communicate with the Modbus device, and read and write Modbus address data
For example, HMI connected with FATEK FBs PLC through COM1, and connected with
Modbus of station no.1 through COM4 of user-defined protocol, then read and write
767
the data of 40001 address, as shown below, setting steps as follows.

Figure 516 HMI COM1 and COM4 connection page

Step 1: Build a new project and add link 0, choose Fatek FBs/B1/B1z/HB1 driver,
Please refer to other relevant sections for this section.

Step 2: Add link 1, interface type select【direct link(serial)】, manufacturer select

【User-define Protocol】, product series select【User-define Protocol】, because
the example use COM4 to connect with Modbus, the port selection【COM4】,
【Baud Rate】,【None】,【Data Bits】,【Stop Bits】and other communication
parameters need to set the same and Modbus devices, this example is 9600, None,
8,1, as shown below.

Figure 517 set User-define protocol communication format

Step 3: Switch to【Protocol Setting】paging, click【User-defined Protocol Setting】,

will appear【Instruction List】dialog, as shown below.

768
 Figure 518【Instruction List】dialog

Step 4: Click【Add】, will appear【User-defined Protocol Setting】dialog, select

【Mode】as【Read】, select【Format】as【Hex】,as shown below.

Step 5: This example wants to read the Modbus device of station number 1, please
enter 01 03 00 00 00 01 in the instruction edit field, as shown below, for more detail
about Modbus please refer to the protocol information provided by the Modbus
Association. Enter 7 in【Return Length】field.

Figure 519【User-defined Protocol Setting】dialog

769
Step 6: Switch to【Checksum】paging, as shown below.

Figure 520【Checksum】paging dialog

Step 7: Click【Setting】button, will show up checksum calculation dialog, the data in

【Input Instruction】field will display the same as in【Instruction Edit】, click
【Quick Add】button will copy the field from【Input Instruction】to
【Instruction】,【Checksum】select【CRC】, then press【Calculate】button, the
【Calculate Result】field will display 84 0A, press【Composite Instruction】button,
as shown below, for more detail about Modbus please refer to the protocol
information provided by the Modbus Association.

Figure 521【Checksum Calculation】dialog

770
Step 8: Click【OK】button, will copy from【Composite Instruction】to【Instruction
Edit】, and fill 1 in the【Start】of【Return Checksum】, fill 5 in【Length】, select
crc in【Type】, as shown below.

Figure 522 composite result dialog

Step 9: Switch to【Return Data】paging, fill 4 in【Start Position】of【Return

Data】, fill 2 in【Length】,【Type】select【Word】, 【Address】set to
@1:Word0, 【Bite Order】set to Big Endian, as shown below.

Note: Addresses can only use the address provided by the user-defined protocol driver

771
 Figure 523 return data dialog

Step 10: Planning a new【Numeric Input/Display】object, 【Monitor Adderss】set

as @1:Word0, as shown below,you can read the station number 1 Modbus device
40001 address value.

Figure 524 planning Numeric Input/Display object

The above is an example for reading, for writing the following steps,

Step 11: in【Instruction List】dialog, click【Add】, will appear【User-defined

Protocol Setting】dialog, 【Mode】selected as【Write】, 【Format】selected as
【HEX】, as shown below.

Step 12: This example wants to write the Modbus device of station number 1, please
enter 01 06 00 00 in the instruction edit field, as shown below, for more detail about
Modbus please refer to the protocol information provided by the Modbus
772
Association. Enter 8 in【Return Length】field.

Figure 525【User-defined Protocol Setting】dialog

Step 13: Switch to【Send Data】paging, fill 5 in【Start】of【Send Data】, fill 2 in

【Length】,【Type】select【Word】,【Address】set to @1:Word2,【Bite Order】
set to Big Endian, as shown below.
Note: Addresses can only use the address provided by the user-defined protocol driver

Figure 526 switch to【Data】paging dialog

773
Step 14: Switch to【Checksum】paging,【Send Checksum】【Add Method】choose
【Driver】, fill 1 in the【Start】, fll 6in【Length】, select crc in【Type】,
fill 1 in the【Start】of【Return Checksum】, fill 6 in【Length】, select crc in
【Type】, as shown below.

Figure 527 switch to【Checksum】paging dialog

Step 15: Planning a new【Numeric Input/Display】object,【Monitor Adderss】set

as @1:Word2, as shown below,you can write the station number 1 Modbus device
40001 address value.

Figure 528 planning Numeric Input/Display object

774
 25.3 【User-defined Protocol】use Script
Application Example
This section explains how to use the【User-defined Protocol】function of the script,
communicate with the Modbus device, and read the data of Modbus address, for
example, HMI connect with FATEK FBs PLC through COM1, then connect with
Modbus device of station number 1 through COM4 by using user-defined protocol,
read the data of address 40001 through the script, as shown below.

Figure 529 HMI COM1 and COM4 connection page

25.3.1 Communication Instructions in Script

Use the function【User-defined Protocol】in script, will mainly use the【io write
and read】and【Checksum】instruction, as shown below, each meaning of the
setting as shown below, as the table below.

Figure 530 communication instruction in script

Table 298 properties of communication instruction in script settings

Options Io write and read insruction description

【P1】 The start address to send instruction.

【P2】 Send the length of the instruction.

【P3】 Device name.

【P4】 The start address to return instruction.

【P5】 Return the length of the instruction.

775
 Options Checksum instrunction description

【P1】 Calculation method.

Value is Calculation method description
1 CRC
2 SUM(BYTE)
3 SUM (WORD)
4 XOR
5 AND
6 OR
7 LRC
8 SUM Complement
9 SUM Radix-Minus-One Complement

【P2】 Calculate start address.

【P3】 Calculate words.

【P4】 Result store start address, starting with 1 or 2

consecutive words, depending on the calculation method

25.3.2 Communication Instruction in Script

Application Example
Read the data of address 40001 of Modbus device through script, setting steps as
follow.

Step 1: Build a new project and build link 0, select Fatek FBs/B1/B1z/HB1 driver, build
link 1, select【User-define Protocol】driver, about the communication parameter
settings are same as Modbus device, please refer to other relevant sections for this
section.

Step 2: Build 2 tags at Tag library, as shown below.

Figure 531 communication instruction in script

Step 3: Write script, as shown below.

- First row specifies the name of the device to be read
- Second row is to set the instruction to be send.
- Third row is to turn ASCII string into INT

776
- Fourth row is to calculate checksum
- Fifth row is to copy the checksum to send instruction
- Sixth row is to copy the checksum to send instruction
- Seventh row is to excute io_write_and_read instruction, send out the send
instruction, and read the return data stored in $ U: V240 start of the seven
consecutive addresses
- eighth to eleventh rows are convert read back data and store it in $ U: V300

Figure 532 Read the 40001 address data script for the Modbus device

Step 4: Planning a new【Numeric Input/Display】object,【Monitor Adderss】set as

$U:V300, as shown below, you can read the station number 1 Modbus device 40001
address value.

Figure 533 Planning a new【Numeric Input/Display】object

777
 26. Multi-Link
【Multi-Link】function is to build multi-link master on FATEK HMI, other multi-link
slaves on HMI can communicate with multi-link master, communicate with the
【Destination Link】device which connect to the multi-link master. That is, the multi-
link master communicate with【Destination Link】device it link with, multi-link slave
connect with multi-link master, and get the data they need to display or setting
through multi-link master. On the use of a multi-link master corresponding to a link
to the【Destination Link】device; According the way to communicate with multi-link
slave, multi-link master fall into two parts,【Multi-Link Master(Ethernet)】and
【Multi-Link Master(Serial)】;【Multi-Link Master(Ethernet)】support【IP Address
Filter】and【Operation Lock】functions
Specification and setting and other related information of the multi-link master
please refer to the following.
Table 299 multi-link support number od slaves
Options Multi-Link Master Multi-Link Master (Serial)
(Ethernet)
Support the number 32 8
of slaves
Others support【IP Address Filter】
function
support【Operation Lock】
function

Figure 534 multi-link application diagram

778
 26.1 【Multi-Link】 Setting
26.1.1 Serial
【Multi-Link】function support serial port to communicate with each other between
master and slave. The following sections describe the settings for the master and
slave serial ports.

Figure 535 Multi-Link(Serial) connection diagram

Note : The connection between master and slave must be 422/485 in order to support more than 2
slaves. If 232 only support one

26.1.1.1 Multi-Link Master(Serial) setting

The serial port setting of the multi-link master, need to select【Interface Type】
【Multi-Link Master(Serial)】in【New Link Property】dialog, as shown below, the
setting meaning are as follows.

Figure 536【Multi-Link Master(Serial)】setting page

Table 300 properties of【Multi-Link Master(Serial)】

Options Description

【Link Setting】 【Name】

Name of multi-link master

【Interface Type】
Interface Type of multi-link master

【Destination Link】
The destination link for the multi-link master, that is, the
name of the PLC device to which the multi-link master is
779
 connected

【Interface Setting】 【Port】

The port that multi-link master connect with, this port
needs to connect with slave.

【Baud Rate】
Baud rate of multi-link master port, baud rate between
multi-link master and slave needs to be the same, only
support 38400, 57600 and 115200, etc.

【Timeout(ms)】
The waiting time before the connection is terminated
when the communication between the multi-link master
and slave is abnormal.

【Total Stations】
Number of slaves supported by multi-link master.

【Rescan Time】
Multi-link master excute scanning the interval time of
online slaves.

26.1.1.2 Multi-Link Slave(Serial) Setting

The serial port setting of the multi-link slave, need to select【Interface Type】
【Multi-Link Slave(Serial)】in【New Link Property】dialog, as shown below, the
setting meaning are as follows.

Figure 537【Multi-Link Slave(Serial)】setting page

780
 Table 301 properties of【Multi-Link Slave(Serial)】
Options Description

【Link Setting】 【Name】

Name of multi-link slave

【Interface Type】
Interface Type of multi-link slave

【Destination Link Type】

The destination link type of multi-link slave
corresponding to the multi-link master

【Manufacturer】
The destination link manufacturer of multi-link slave
corresponding to the multi-link master

【Product Series】
The destination link product series of multi-link slave
corresponding to the multi-link master
【Interface Setting】 【Port】
The port that multi-link slave connect with, this port
needs to connect with master.

【Baud Rate】
Baud rate of multi-link master port, baud rate between
multi-link master and slave needs to be the same, only
support 38400, 57600 and 115200, etc.

【Timeout(ms)】
When a communication error occurs, wait time before
terminating the connection and generating an error

【Station No.】
Station No. of multi-link slave.

26.1.2 Ethernet
【Multi-Link】function support ethernet to communicate with each other between
master and slave. The following sections describe the settings for the master and
slave ethernet.

781
26.1.2.1 Multi-Link Master(Ethernet) setting
The serial port setting of the multi-link master, need to select【Interface Type】
【Multi-Link Master(Ethernet)】in【New Link Property】dialog, as shown below,
the setting meaning are as follows.

Figure 538【Multi-Link Master(Ethernet)】setting page

Table 302 properties of【Multi-Link Master(Ethernet)】setting

Options Description

【Link Setting】 【Name】

Name of multi-link master

【Interface Type】
Interface Type of multi-link master

【Destination Link】
The destination link for the multi-link master, that is, the
name of the PLC device to which the multi-link master is
connected
【Interface Setting】 【Port】
The port that multi-link master connect with, the port
setting needs to be the same with the slave; default port
is 8000

【IP filter】
When enable, the multi-link master will only allow the IP
of the slaves that on the list to connect with the master
When enable, click【Setting】will appear dialog as
shown below, set the IP Address in【IP Filter】of the
slave that you want to connect with.

782
 【Timeout(ms)】
The waiting time before the connection is terminated
when the communication between the multi-link master
and the slave is abnormal.

26.1.2.2 Multi-Link Slave(Ethernet) setting

The serial port setting of the multi-link slave, need to select【Interface Type】
【Multi-Link Slave(Ethernet)】in【New Link Property】dialog, as shown below, the
setting meaning are as follows.

Figure 539【Multi-Link Slave(Ethernet)】setting page

Table 303 properties of【Multi-Link Slave(Ethernet)】setting

Options Description

【Link Setting】 【Name】

Name of multi-link slave.

783
 【Interface Type】
Interface Type of multi-link slave.

【Destination Link Type】

The destination link type of multi-link slave
corresponding to the multi-link master

【Manufacturer】
The destination link manufacturer of multi-link slave
corresponding to the multi-link master

【Product series】
The destination link product series of multi-link slave
corresponding to the multi-link master
【Interface Setting】 【IP Address】
IP Address of the slave that want to connect with the
master.

【Port】
Multi-link slave connect to the ethernet port of the
master

【Timeout(ms)】
When communication error occur, wait time before
terminating and the connection and generating an error
【Device specific The setting of this part needs to be the same with the
device setting of the destination link of the multi-link
setting】 master.

26.2 Operation Lock

When the communication between the master and the slave of the【Multi-Link】
function is used,【Operation Lock】function can be used on FATEK HMI, lock the
other unused screen of FATEK HMI, to prevent the operation from the other FATEK
HMI,to avoid the unexpected situation occurred.

26.2.1 Operation Lock Description

【Operation Lock】function need to be enabled at【Operation Lock】of the
【Multi-Link Master(Ethernet)】link setting page, as shown Figure 538 below, there
are two conditions to trigger【Operation Lock】, touch the HMI screen and press
784
the【Function Switch】of the【Operation Lock(Unclock)】or【Operation
Lock(Lock&Unclock)】; there are also two ways to unlock, it will automactically
unlocked after the countdown is complete and press the【Function Switch】of the
【Operation Lock(Unclock)】or【Operation Lock(Lock&Unclock)】, the setting
options are as follows:

Figure 540 setting page【Operation Lock】

Table 304 properties of【Operation Lock】setting

Options Description

【Operation Lock】 【Enable Screen Touch Lock】

When enabled, touch the HMI screen to enable
【Operation Lock】, the other multi-link HMI will go into
the screen lock status.

【Timeout(sec)】
After HMI in screen lock status, if the enable【Operation
Lock】HMI doesn’t operate exceed the setting time,
then the other multi-link HMI in the screen lock status
will automactically unlock the screen.

26.3 Multi-Link Eaxmple

This section explains how to build multi-link, and multi-link master communication
with FATEK PLC, communication with slave by using serial, in this example the master
use P5070N, the salve use P5043N, setting steps as follows.

Step 1: Build the new project of the master and build link 0, select Fatek
FBs/B1/B1z/HB1 driver, please refer to other relevant sections for this section.

Step 2: Add link 1,【Interface Type】choose multi-link master(serial),【Destination

785
Link】choose link 0,【Port】choose COM4(COM4 RS485 of the P5070N) and link
with the multi-link slave,【Baud Rate】choose 115200,【Total Stations】choose 1
link with a slave, figure as shown belown.

Figure 541 setting page of multi-link master

Step 3: Planning 6【Numeric Input/Display】objects on the master screen,

【Monitor Address】set as @0:R0 ~ @0:R5.

Step 4: build a new project of the slave,【Interface Type】choose multi-link

slave(serial),【Destination Link Type】choose serial,【Port】choose COM3(COM3
RS485 of the P5043N) and link with the multi-link slave,【Baud Rate】choose
115200,【Total Stations】choose 1, figure as shown belown.

Figure 542 setting page of multi-link slave

786
Step 5: Planning 6【Numeric Input/Display】objects on the master screen,
【Monitor Address】set as @1:R0 ~ @1:R5.

Step 6: Download the project to master and slave HMI, and link with the FATEK PLC
master and master COM4(RS485) and slave COM3(RS485), input the value in master
and the slave will synchronize update, or input the value in slave and the master will
synchronize update.

787
 27. Search/Replace
The【Search/Replace】function is to provide designers with more efficient and
time-saving tools for planning projects. For example, when the designer is planning a
project, it is uncertain whether those PLC addresses or internal addresses of the HMI
are used , or on which items or functions to use, can search through the entire
project, screen or function to search for the desired address, avoid using the same
address and affect the function of the operation; Or in a project that has already
been planned, it is hoped that the address of the modified part will have multiple
consecutive addresses. At this time, you can also use this auxiliary function to modify
batches at once, instead of spending a huge amount of time and effort, opening
items one by one to make changes, etc.

27.1 The Use of Search/Replace

This section explains how to use the【Search/Replace】feature and how to set the

window.【Search/Replace】function can click on the icon in the status bar on

any screen, or press the【Ctrl+F】key on the keyboard to open【Search/Replace】
function dialog window

Figure 543 status bar

The options for opening the【Search/Replace】function dialog window are shown in

the following figure. The meaning of each option is as follows:

Figure 544【Search/Replace】function window

Table 305【Search/Replace】function properties setting

Properties Descriptions

【Target】 To search for or replace the address or text used in the

project.

788
 【Address】
Choose to search or replace the address used in the
project.

【Text】
Choose to search or replace text used in a project.
【Data Type】 The address to be searched for or replaced in the project
is【Bit】or【Word】, etc.

When the target is selected as【Address】this option

will be displayed.
【Range】 Select the range of addresses to search for or replace in
the project.

When the target is selected as【Address】this option

will be displayed.
【Case Sensitive】 Select whether to search for or replace the text in the
project is case-sensitive.

When the target is selected as【Text】this option will be

displayed.
【Whole Words Select if you want to search or replace the text in the
project if all text is the same.
Only】
When the target is selected as【Text】this option will be
displayed.
【Search for】 Fill in the address or text to be searched. When
【Range】is checked, you can set the start address and
end address.

If there is an error in the search address or text, the

following figure shows the designer.

【Replace with】 Fill in the address or text to be replaced. When

【Range】is checked, you can set the start address and
end address.
【Scope】 You can check the range you want to search for or
replace, including【Whole Project】,【Current
Screen】,【All Screens】,【Unit Setting】,【Links】,
789
 【Servers】,【Security】,【Data Log】,【Alarm】,
【Recipe】,【Operation Log】,【Schedule】,【Data
Transfer】,【Script】,【Tag Library】and【Text
Library】, etc. When the target is selected as【Text】,
the【Script】option will not provide selection.
【Close after search Close the window after search or replace.

or replace】
【Search】 Press to execute searching the address or text used in
the project.
【Replace All】 Press to execute replacement address or text used in the
project.

27.2 The Result of Search/Replace

Search results using the【Search/Replace】function will be displayed in the
Search/Replace results window, as shown in the following Figure 543.

The options for the【Search/Replace】results window are shown in Figure 543

below, where the options are as follows:

Figure 545【Search/Replace】result function window

Table 306【Search/Replace】function properties setting

Properties Description

【Search for】 This field only provides an address for execute search
function cannot be entered.

790
 【Search Again】
Search again for the address or text used in the project.
【Replace with】 This field can be entered to replace the address or text in
the project.

【Replace】
Replace the address or text in the project with the set
address or text.
【Search Result】 Display the searched address and text, you can use the
check box to select the item you want to replace.
Double-click the left mouse button on the searched
object to display the screen where the object is located
in the window area. At the same time, the object
properties will be displayed for the designer to edit. The
content will contain the following fields.

【Name】
Display the name of the searched object and the screen
where the object is located.

【Search】
The searched address.

【Replace】
The replaced address.

In addition, on the【View】tab of the FvDesigner ribbon, click【Search/Replace】to

also enable or disable the【Search/Replace】result window.

Figure 546【Search/Replace】option in【View】

791
 28. Communication Error Codes
The following table will detailed description the HMI and PLC or other devices
occurred error when communicating, each meaning of the code:

Table 307 description of the communication error code

Error Code Description
0x00000001 Com Port Not Open
0x00001001 Dcc Illegal Parameters
0x00001002 Dcc Stop
0x00001003 Dcc Failed Set Read Back
0x00001004 Dcc Failed
0x00002000 DccErr Link Init
0x00002001 Dcc Link Pending
0x00002002 Dcc Screen Change
0x00003001 Multilink Timeout
0x00003002 Multilink Master and Slave use different PLC driver
0x10010001 ComPort Error
0x10010002 ComPort Open Fail
0x10010003 ComPort Send Fail
0x10010004 ComPort Receive Fail
0x10020001 Socket Null
0x10020002 Socket Connect Fail
0x10020003 Socket Invalid IP
0x10020004 Socket Send Fail
0x10020005 Socket Receive Fail
0x1002FFFF Socket Unknown
0x20010001 Protocol Invalid Head
0x20010002 Protocol Invalid End
0x20010003 Protocol Invalid Length
0x20010004 Protocol Invalid Data
0x20010005 Protocol Invalid Error Check
0x20010006 Protocol Invalid Parameter
0x20010007 Protocol Invalid Password
0x200A0000 Protocol Exception
0x200Axxxx When the first 4 error codes are 200A, it means that the HMI get
error from PLC, and the last 4 error codes are from PLC. Please
refer to different brand PLC's manual
0x400A0000 Command Timeout
0x400A0001 Command Send Failed
0x400A0002 Command Receive Failed
0x400B0001 Command Nack

792
 0x400B0002 Command Unknown
0x400B0003 Command Not Support
0x400C0001 API Parameter Error
0x400CFFFF Internal Error

793
 29. Elimination of HMI Abnormal

Conditions
29.1 System Consistency Protection is
Enabled
If the screen shows as below while using the HMI, please use the mini-USB cable to
connect to the HMI to download the project again, and be sure to check Update
【Firmware】.

Figure 547 System Protection

794